.^v^ IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) /. 1.0 I.I 128 1^ n U 140 1^ ||l-25 |||.4 |||i|L6 < 6" — ► .^ $h ^ / Hiotographic Sciences Corporation 33 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. MSSO (716) •72-4503 r CKADLK Ol' Tlil- Kl'MAN RACK AT Till-: NOUTli !'(;Lr. ^ Study of ^hc PrfJMst< '/. If '>rA/ • ! 1 I . I A M F. W AR R ICN, S. T D., LI , I ). ■.M 'I I'll' AK J Mv ru;c \i. <.;r'< \-a. i. " . :< ; , r//7/ ORIG/NAL /LLU^"'A\-1 r/OA'.S' OLOGY AN'J •4' ' A 1^ n ^ T O N fHH f'UTON, MIFFLIN AND Cu.NtpANV New r'ork : J I tast .Sevontcei>th Vtreit 1885 y ^ ^■^. "x \. \ p. \ V \r t.-.. t \ \^\ \ •\\ 4 i / X / PKR'ilDnNT OF I TAI. .SOCIF.TI B / rJ A '.1 ( tm/ififf ]>, t7'>. ■* V' e Nfir'lu ; ■ • i;i .•sti,>l Pok' in ill.! roiiith, '' -^ '•-'■■ ■'■ !•• ;•> 'i.TiVi li • ill ; rip. ml .;iil:ri (■h-.-iiliiiii. ' . rit!; 1^'; • ;';, ('jnli ill |>. i[-ei'.lK'iii.ir rin'-itii'i. ' f ■■ ' -1. t ,',.• -.ivirvnn- (i! kiU'Wr. prirlinii (>f Africii ' '^ ' ■ .!'i;i-si.t|-><.,,-, ;ji,^ Miji: r,,n;i! OctMll-rivn ■• '5 ■^ I'r ■•'. nf .iiM-!r :. itiird ^ ^ y 7 . I 'rf'.;,- ;,( rti iiifili- uiniiiii sdnl (T. -^ 'i'lli' v; ..i Hk liilluf '^i ;/ PARADISE FOUND- Ithe cradle of the human race at the north pole A Study of the Prehistoric World BY WILLIAM F.WARREN, S.T.D.,LL.D. IrKn'-IDKNT OF BOSTON UNIVRRSITY, CORI'ORATK MI'MIIKK OF Till! AMERICAN ORinN- TAI. SOCinTV, AUTHOR OF " ANFAN74 »74 17O >79 179 181 CHAPTER VIII. THE CRADLE OF THE RACE IN ANCIENT GREEK THOUGHT. Supposed discrepancies of tradition 182 Possible agreement 182 A reminiscence of Mount Meru 183 Renan and Lenormant 183 Lost Atlantis 184 Deukalion, a man of the North 186 The Isles of Kronos 187 The Golden Age 187 Wolfgang Menzel's verdict 187 Conclusion and transition 187 PART FIFTH. FURTHER VERIFICATIONS OF THE HYPOTHESIS RASED UPON A STUDY OF THE PECULIARITIES OF A POLAR PARADISE. CHAPTER I. THE EDEN STARS. Stellar motion at the Pole 191 Has tradition any reminiscence of such ? 191 The strange doctrine of Anaxagoras 191 Chaldoean and Egyptian traditions 193 A natural explanation J94 The myth of Phaethon 195 Iranian and Aztec traditions 196 Result 196 XX TABLE OF CONTENTS. CHAPTER II. THE EDEN DAY. Length of day a*^ the Pole 197 Sunrise in the South 197 The tradition of the Northmen 197 The tradition of the ancient Persians 197 The tradition of the East Aryans 198 The year-day of Homer 200 The tradition of the Navajos 201 That of th That of th( That of th« That of th£ That of the That of the Result . CHAPTER III. THE EDEN ZENITH. The polar zenith is the Pole This the true heaven of the first men The Hebrew conception The Egyptian conception . The Akkadian conception The AssyviO" Babylonian conception . The Sabaean conception The Vedic conception The Buddhistic conception . The Phoenician conception The Greek conception .... The Etruscan and Roman conception The Japanese conception The Chinese conception . The ancient Germanic conception The ancient Finnic conception . How came the Biblical Eden to be in the Solution of the problem . Confirmations and illustrations East 202 202 203 208 209 209 210 210 211 212 212 213 2IS 2IS 217 218 219 219 222 CHAPTER IV. THE NAVEL OF THE EARTH. Prevalence of the expression 225 Its symbolical and commemorative character .... 228 The Jerusalem earth-centre 234 That of the Greeks 234 That of the Babylonians 239 That of the Hindus 240 Origin and Sacred hyd: All waters Also one pi Exposition Similar ide The Vedic .. The Puranic Traces in Chr n n hi [a< o: ideas sy The tree in the Were there tw( Its inevitable si The Yggdrasil The World-tree The Tat-pillar ( The Winged Oj The White H6r The cosmic As\ The holy Palm , The Bodhi tree ^ The Irmensul of The Arbre Sec c The Tong of the The World-reed The Apple-tree c The star-bearing TABLE OF CONTENTS. XXI That of the Persians 243 That of the Chinese 244 That of the Japanese 245 That of the Northmen 246 That of the Mexicans 246 That of the Peruvians and others 247 Result 248 CHAPTER V. 202 202 203 208 209 209 , 210 210 , 211 212 . 212 213 . 215 215 . 217 218 . 219 219 222 THE QUADRI FURCATE RIVER. Origin and nature of this river 250 Sacred hydrography of the Persians 251 All waters have one headspring 251 Also one place of discharge 251 Exposition of the system 252 Similar ideas among the Greeks 254 The Vedic system 257 The Puranic 259 Traces in Christian legend 260 CHAPTER VI. THE CENTRAL TREE. The tree in the midst of the garden Were there two .<'.... Its inevitable significance if at the North Pole The Yggdrasil of the Northmen The World-tree of the Akkadians The Tat-pillar of the Egyptians The Winged Oak of the Phoenicians . The White Hom of the Persians The cosmic Asvattha of the Hindus . The holy Palm of the Greeks . The Bodhi tree of the Buddhists . The Irmensul of the Saxons The Arbre Sec of the Middle Ages The Tong of the Chinese ... The World-reed of the Navajos . The Apple-tree of Aval on . The star-bearing World-tree of the Finns 262 262 263 264 264 265 266 267 269 270 271 272 273 274 274 276 276 XXll TABLE OF CONTENTS. CHAPTER VII. THE EXUBERANCE OF LIFE. Ethnic traditions of the Earth's deterioration Also of the deterioration of mankind Stature and longevity of primeval men All credible on our hypothesis . Language of Professor Nicholson . A citation from Figuier The gigantic Sequoia of Arctic origin . Animal life in the Tertiary period Primitive forms by no means monstrosities All this wealth of fauna from the North CHAPTER Vni. REVIEW OF THE ARGUMENT Nature of the argument Seven tests applicable to any location Seven others peculiar to a location at the A double demonstration . Bailly's approximation to the truth Another independent line of evidence Philosophy of previous failures Philosophy of medieval confusion . Patristic descriptions made plain . The world of Cosmas Indicopleustes The work of Columbus The world of Dante .... How highest heaven came to be under foot . Pole 279 281 281 284 285 285 286 289 294 297 300 300 300 301 303 503 304 304, 305 305 306 307 309 THE REARIN PART SIXTH. THE SIGNIFICANCE OF OUR RESULTS. THE BEARING CHAPTER I. THEIR BEARING UPON THE STUDY OF PHYSICS. The sciences immediately affected The services of biology to archaeology The services of archaeology to biology . Narrowness of many biologists . Evils thereof BIOLOGY AND TERRESTRIAL 313 z^\ 3'4 315 315 TABLE OF CONTENTS. The true corrective . . . The latest generalization of paleontology . Anticipated in two Persian myths Terrestrial life-gamut of the Hindus Its lesson to students of the Origin of Life Extraordinary biological conditions Most favorable of all at the Poles . Biological superiority of the North Pole Reasons to be more fully investigated Heightened fascination of polar exploration XXIU 317 317 317 319 319 320 320 321 322 325 CHAPTER II. THE BEARING OF OUR RESULTS ON THE STUDY OF ANCIEN ERATURE. Darwin's primeval man .... His discovery of the sky .... And of trees of infinite height The "short memories" of Vedic worshipers Their ocean-producing imaginations Bunbury on Homeric science . Exegetical distortions of ancient thought Homer's cosmology re-expounded First, as to the movement of the sun . Second, as to the location of Hades . Third, as to the cosmic water-system . Fourth, as to the Olympos of the gods Fifth, as to the tall pillars of Atlas The exegetical method dictated by our results Its fruitfulness in the future .... r LIT- 326 327 327 327 328 328 328 329 329 332 333 338 350 359 360 CHAPTER III. I THE HEARING OF OUR RESULTS ON THE PROBLEM OF THE ORIGIN AND EARLIEST FORM OF RELIGION. [The pan-ethnic account 363 Hume's dissent 364 iThc doctrine of Comte 369 iMiiller's refutation of primitive fetichism 370 jSir John Lubbock's scheme 372 JRefutation by Roskoff and others 375 ICaspari's theory 375 JThc theory of Jules Baissac 382 XXIV TABLE OF CONTENTS. Current approximations of teaching As to the origin of the arts As to intellectual powers of the first men As to their super-fetichistic attitude . As to their monogamous family form . As to their capacity for monotheism . Seven conclusions 38s 386 386 390 392 397 403 CHAPTER IV. THE BEARING OF OUR RESULTS ON THE PHILOSOPHY OF HISTORY] AND ON THE THEORY OF THE DEVELOPMENT OF CIVILIZATION. The apostles of primeval savagery 407 1 Their doctrine 407 Sub-savage stupidity of the first men 408 Dr. Wilhelm Mannhardt's representation 409 A most important primitive discovery 410 1 Daphne not a tree 4io| Emphatic demand for antediluvian longevity . . . .410 The new Babel 41 ij Nine memoranda 4111 Primeval human history 418 1 The ancient ethnic view Biblical and true 4191 Plato's antediluvian age 420 1 The consensus of all ancient religions 42 The " Stone Age " in the light of our results .... 4221 Origin of postdiluvian laws and states 423J An imaginary conversation 4241 A pagan testimony 4321 To those who hear not Moses and the Prophets . . . 432[ Conclusion 432J APPENDIX. I. The Earth of Columbus not a True Sphere II. How the Earth was Peopled . III. Reception of " The True Key " IV. The Earth and World of the Hindus V. The World-Pillar of the Rig Veda . VI. Homer's Abode of the Dead . VII. Latest Polar Research VIII. Trustworthiness of Early Tradition IX. Index of Authors cited X. Index to the Work ILLUSTRATIONS. Kfa' to Ancient Cosmology Frontispiece. Night Skies of Eden 68 The Antipodal Polar Mountains 123 The Earth of the Hindus. No. I. . , . . -152 The Earth of the Hindus. No. H 152 The Earth of the Persians 159 The Navel of the Earth ...... 226 The Earth of Columbus 307 The Earth of Dante 307 The World of Homer 479 I L0( CHAP. I. RESUL DAR\ 11. RESUL' III. RESUL' ISTS, PART FIRST. LOCATION OF EDEN: STATE OF THE QUESTION. CHAP. I. RESULTS OF THE EXPLORERS, HISTORIC AND LEGEN- DARY. II. RESULTS OF THE THEOLOGIANS. III. RESULTS OF NON-THEOLOGICAL SCHOLARS : NATURAL- ISTS, ETHNOLOGISTS, ARCH^OLOGISTS, etc. a.' "J o 3 i ?; u.. a I I MX Z I You shall understand that no mortal may approach to that Paradise ; for by land no man may go, for wild beasts that are in the deserts, and for the high mountains and great huge rocks that no man may pass by for the dark places that are there; and by the rivers may no man go, for the water runs so roughly and so sharply, be- cause it comes down so outrageously from the high places above, that it runs in so great waves that no ship may row or sail against it ; and the water roars so, and makes so huge a noise, and so great a tempest, that no man may hear another in the ship though he cried with all the might he could. Many great lords have assayed with great will many times to pass by those rivers towards Paradise, with fiill great companies ; but they might not speed in their voyage ; and many died for weariness of rowing against the strong waves ; and many of them became blind, and many deaf, from the noise of the water ; and some perished and were lost in the waves ; so that no mortal man may approach to that place without the special j grace of God. — Sir John de Maundeville. CHAPTER I. THE RESULTS OF EXPLORERS, HISTORIC AND LEGENDARY. Man lernt die Welt am besten durch Reisen kennen. K. H. W. VOLCKER. One of the most interesting and pathetic pas- sages to be found in all literature is that in which Christopher Columbus announces to his royal pa- trons his supposed discovery of the ascent to the gate of the long-lost Garden of Eden. With what emotions must his heart have thrilled as, steering up this ascent, he felt his " ships smoothly rising toward the sky," the weather becoming " milder " as he rose ! To be so near the Paradise of God's own planting, to be the first discoverer of the way in which the believing world could at length, after so many ages, once more approach its sacred precincts even if forbidden to enter, — what an exquisite ex- perience it must have been to the lonely spirit of that great explorer ! It is his third voyage. He is in the Gulf of Paria to the north or north-west of the mouth of the Ori- noco. In his loyal epistle to Ferdinand and Isabella thus he writes : — The Holy Scriptures record that our Lord made the earthly Paradise and planted in it the tree of life ; and thence springs a fountain from which the four princi- pal rivers of the world take their source ; namely, the o I El % i PARADISE FOUND. Ganges in India, the Tigris and Euphrates, and the Nile. I do not find, nor ever have found, any account by the Romans or Greeks which fixes in a positive manner the site of the terrestrial Paradise, neither have 1 seen it given in any ma/>pe-moiuk% laid down from authentic sources. Some placed it in Ethiopia at the sources of the Nile, but others, traversing all these countries, found neither thi' temperature nor the altitude of the sun correspond with their ideas respecting it ; nor did it appear that the over- whelming waters of the deluge had been there. Some pagans pretended to adduce arguments to establish that it was in the Fortunate Islands, now called the Canaries. St. Isidore, Bede, and Strabo ^ and the Master of scho- lastic history,'^ with St. Ambrose and Scotus, and all the learned theologians agree that the earthly Paradise is in the East. I have already described my ideas concerning this hemisphere and its form,* and I have no doubt that if I could pass below the equinoctial line after reaching the highest point of which I have spoken, I should find a much milder temperature and a variation in the stars and in the water : not tha. I suppose that elevated point to be navigable, nor even that there is water there ; indeed, j I believe it is impossible to ascend thither, because I am convinced that it is the spot of the earthly Paradise, whither no one can go but by God's permission ; but this land which your Highnesses have now sent me to explore is very extensive, and I think there are many other countries in the south, of which the world has never had | any knowledge. I do not suppose that the earthly Paradise is in the I form of a rugged mountain, as the descriptions of it have made it appear, but that it is on the summit of the spot| ^ Walafried Strabus of Reichenau, Baden. ^ Petrus Comestor, who wrote the Historia Scholastka, ' See Appendix, Sect. I. RESULTS OF EXPLORERS. md the | wliich I have described as being in the foi.n of the talk [or stem end] of a pear ; the approach to it from a dis- tance must be by a constant and gradual ascent ; but I believe that, as I have already said, no one could ever reach the top ; I think also that the water 1 have de- scribed may proceed from it, though it be far off, and that stopping at the place 1 have just left, it forms this lake. There are great indications of this being the terres- trial Paradise, for its situation coincides with the opinions of the holy and wise theologians whom I have mentioned ; and, moreover, the other evidences agree with the sup- position, for 1 have never either read or heard of fresh *\vater coming in so large a quantity, in close conjunction I with the water of the sea; the idea is also corroborated bv the blandness of the temperature; and if the water of which I speak does not proceed from the earthly Paradise, it seems to be a still greater wonder, for I do not believe that there is any river in the world so large [and deep. When I left the Dragon's Mouth, which is the north- lernmost of the two straits which I have described, and Iwhich I so named on the day of our lady of August,^ I Ifound that the sea ran so strongly to the westward that Ibctwcen the hour of mass,^ when I weighed anchor, and [the hour of complines ** I made sixty-five leagues of four liles each ; and not only was the wind not violent, but )n the contrary very gentle, which confirmed me in the :onclusion that in sailing southward there is a continu- )us ascent, while there is a corresponding descent to- hvards the north. I hold it for certain that the waters of the sea move from east to west with the sky, and that in passing this [rack they hold a more rapid course, and have thus eaten iwny large tracts of land, and hence has resulted this jreat number of islands ; indeed, these islands them- ^ The feast of the Assumption. ^ Probably six A. M. " Nine p. M. I a. ID o S: ? LL, o I I uJ 2 1i PARADISE FOUND. selves afford an additional proof of it, for on the one hand, all those which lie west and east, or a little more obliquely north-west and south-east, are broad ; while those which lie north and south or north-east and souMi- west, that is in a directly contrary direction to the said winds, are narrow; furthermore, that these islands should possess the most costly productions is to be accounted for by the mild temperature, which comes to them from heaven, since these are the most elevated parts of the world. It is true that in some parts the waters do not appear to take this course, but this only occurs in certain spots where they are obstructed by land, and hence they appear to take different directions. ... I now return to my subject of the land of Gracia, and of the river and lake found there, which latter miglit more properly be called a sea ; for a lake is but a small expanse of water, which, when it becomes great, deserves the name of a sea, just as we speak of the Sea of Galilee and the Dead Sea ; and I think that if the river men- tioned does not proceed from the terrestrial Paradise, it | comes from an immense tract of land situated in the south, of which hitherto no knowledge has been obtained. But the more I reason on the subject the more satisfied I become that the terrestrial Paradise is situated in the spot I have described; and I ground my opinion upon the arguments and authorities already quoted. May it please the Lord to grant your Highnesses a long life, and health and peace, to follow out so noble an investigation;] in which I think our Lord will receive great service, Spain considerable increase of its greatness, and all! Christians much consolation and pleasure, because by thisj means the name of our Lord will be published abroad.^ Alas for the hope of settling the problem ofl Eden's site by actual exploration ! Columbus neverl 1 Select Letters of Christopher Columbus. Translated by R. Ill Major, F. S. A. 2d ed., London, iS6o : pp. 140-147. RESULTS OF EXPrOKEKS. lived to fiiul his Paradise; and geographers have long ago ascertained that the golden summit of tiie world is not in Venezuela, nor in any of its nciglibor sLitcs. Of course Cohimbus supposed himself to be off t'v eastern coast, not of a new continent, but of Asia. His idea of the location of the terrestrial Paradise as in, or to the eastward of. Farther India was the prevailing idea of his age. The Hereford map of the world, dating from the thirteenth century, represents the favored sjjot as a circular island to the East of India, and as separated from the mainland, not only by -the sea, but also by a battlemented wall, with its one gate to the West, through which our first parents were supposed to have been expelled. Hugo de St. Victor wrote: "Paradise is a spot in the Orient productive of all kinds of woods and pomiferous trees. It contains the Tree of Life ; there is neither cold nor heat there, but perpetually an equable temperature. It contains a fountain which flows forth in four rivers." So Gautier de Mctz, in a poem written in the thirteenth century, describes the terrestrial Paradise as situated in an unapproachable region in Asia, surrounded by flames, and guarded at its only gate by an armed ani;el. In the year 1322 Sir John de Maundeville made his memorable pilgrimage to the East. In his ac- count of these travels, after describing the marvel- ous kingdom of Prester John in India, he says : "And beyond the land and isles and deserts of Prester John's lordship, in going straight towards Ithe hLast men find nothing but mountains and great [rocks ; and there is the dark region where no man o o I UJ 2 1i 8 PARADISE FOUND. may see, neither by day nor by night, as they of the country say. And that desert and that place of darkness lasts from this coast unto terrestrial Para- dise, where Adam, our first fa*"her, and Eve were put, who dwelt there but a little while ; and that is towards the East, at the beginning of the earth. . . . Of Paradise I cannot speak properly, for I was not there. It is far beyond ; and I repent not going there, but I was not worthy. But as I have heard say of wise men beyond I shall tell you with good will. Terrestrial Paradise, as wise men say, is the highest place of the earth ; and it is so high that it nearly touches the circle of the moon there, as the moon makes her turn. For it is so high that the flood of Noah might not come to it, that would have covered all the earth of the world all about and above and beneath except Paradise. And this Para- dise is inclosed all about with a wall, and men know not whereof it is ; for the wall is covered all over with moss as it seems : and it seems not that the wall is natural stone. And that wall stretches from the South to the North •; and it has but one entry, which is closed with burning fire, so that no man that. is mortal dare enter. And in the highest place of Paradise, exactly in the middle, is a well that casts out four streams, which run by diver? lands, of which the first is called Pison, or Ganges, that runs throughout India or Emlak, in which river are many precious stones, and much lignum, aloes, and much sand of gold. And the other river is called Nile, or Gyson, which goes through Ethiopia, and after through Egypt. And the other is called Tigris which runs by Assyria and by Armenia the Great. And the other is called Euphrates, which runs RESULTS OF EXPLORERS. through Media, Armenia, and Persia. And men there beyond say that all the sweet waters of the world, above and beneath, take their beginning from the well of Paradise ; and out of that well all waters come and go." ^ Various writers and map-makers of the same age seem very evidently to have identified the Paradise of Genesis with the island of Ceylon. Even to this day a mount near the centre of the island bears the iname of "Adam's Peak." According to Moham- medan tradition, this was only so called because it was the place where Adam alighted when cast out of the true celestial Paradise in heaven. Neverthe- less, Christian tradition or legend long lingered about I Ceylon as the genuine site of primitive Eden.^ In entire accord with this view is the remarkable I story of Prince Eirek, as told in an Icelandic Saga of the fourteenth century. Mr. Baring-Gould, in a stvle not very reverent, has summarized the tale as Ifollows: — 1 FAirly Travels in Palestine. Edited by Thos. Wright, London, I1S4S, p. 276. - Even Maundeville, whose Paradise, as we have seen, was still fartlicr to the East, found here a Fountain of Youth whose head- spring was in Paradise : " Toward the head of that forest is the cytee jf rolombc [Columbo], and above the cytee is a great mountayne, so clcpt Polombe. And of that mount the Cytee hathe his name. liid at the foot of that Mount is a fayr welie and a gret, that hathc Dclour and savour of all spices ; and at every hour of the day he chauiigethe his odour and his savour dyversely. And whoso drynk- Ethc 3 times fasting of that watre of that vvelle, he is hool of alio maiier sykenesse that he hathe. And thei that duellen there and livnkcn often of that welle, thei nevere have svkenesse and thei kcuieii alle weys yonge. I have dronken there of 3 or 4 sithes ; and tit, nicthinkethe, I fare the better. Some men clepen it the Welle 'A Youthe ; for thei that often drynken thereat semen alle weys I'oiingly and lyven withouten sykenesse. And men seyn, that that (vellc comethe out of Paradys ; and therefore it is so vertuous." or.' A ij.. o Hi Z I lO PARADISE FOUND. Eirek was a son of Thrand, king of Drontheim, and having taken upon iiim a vow to explore the Deathless Land he went to Denmark, where he picked up a friend of the same name as himself. They then went to Con- stantinople, and called upon the Emperor, who held a long conversation with them, which is duly reported, rela- tive to the truths of Christianity and the site of the Deathless Land, which, he assures them, is nothing more nor less than Paradise. "The world," said the monarch, who had not forgotten his geography since he left school, '* is precisely i8o,oco stages round (about 1,000,000 English miles), and it is not propped up on posts, — not a bit ! — it is supported by the power of God ; and the distance between earth] and heaven is 100,045 'Tiiles (another MS. reads 9382! miles; the difference is immaterial); and round about the earth is a big sea called Ocean." " And what 's to 1 the south of the earth ?" asked Eirek. "Oh! there is the end of the world, and that is India." "And pray where am I to find the Deathless Land? " " That lies — Paradise, I suppose you mean — \yell, it lies slightly eastj of India." Having obtained this information, the two Eireksj started, furnished with letters from the Greek Emperor. They traversed Syria, and took ship, — probably at Bal- sera ; then, reaching India, they proceeded on their jour- ney on horseback, till they came to a dense forest, the! gloom of which was so great, through the interlacing of the boughs, that even by day the stars could be observed twinkling, as though they were seen from the bottom of a| well. On emerging from the forest, the two Eireks came| upon a strait, separating them from a beautiful land, which was unmistakably Paradise; and the Danish! Eirek, intent on displaying his Scriptural knowledge, prof nounced the strait to be the river Pison. This \vas| crossed by a stone bridge, guarded by a dragon. RESULTS OF EXPLORERS. II The Danish Eirek, deterred by the prospect of an en- counter with this monster, refused to advance, and even endeavored to persuade his friend to give up the attempt to enter Paradise as hopeless, after that they had come within sight of the favored land. But the Norseman de- liberately walked, sword in hand, into the maw of the dragon, and the next moment, to his infinite surprise and delight, found himself liberated from the gloom of the monster's interior, and safely placed in Paradise. The land was most beautiful, and the grass as gor- geous as purple ; it was studded with flowers, and was traversed by honey rills. The land was extensive and level, so that there was not to be seen mountain or hill, and the sun shone cloudless, without night and darkness ; the calm of the air was great, and there was but a feeble murmur of wind, and that which there was breathed red- jolent with the odor of blossoms. After a short walk, Eirek observed what certainly must have been a remark- able object, namely, a tower or steeple self-suspended in the air, without any support whatever, though access miglit be had to it by means of a slender ladder. By this Eirek ascended into a loft of the tower, and found there an excellent cold collation prepared for him. After hav- ling partaken of this he went to sleep, and in vision beheld land conversed with his guardian angel, who promised |to conduct him back to his fatherland, but to come for lim again and fetch him away from it forever at the ex- )iration of the tenth year after his return to Drontheim. Eirek then retraced his steps to India, unmolested by ^he dragon, which did not affect any surprise at having to [[Hsgorge him, and, indeed, which seems to have been, lotwithstanding his looks, but a harmless and passive Iragon. After a tedious journey of seven years, Eirek reached lis native land, where he related his adventures, to the |:onfusion of the heathen, and to the delight and edifi- cation of the faithful. And in the tenth year, and at 3 2 O 2 I 12 PARADISE FOUND. break of day, as Eirek went to prayer, God's Spirit caught him away, and he was never seen again in tliis world : so here ends all we have to say of him. Here we get farther than with Columbus, but however beautiful and credible this story of Eden- exploration may have been five hundred years ago, we now know that the only Paradise in Ceylon is a symbolical Buddhist one,^ as far removed from the] primitive garden of Genesis as Roman Catholic " Cat- vaj'ios" in South America are from the primitive I Calvary of the crucifixion. Moreover, even the| scribes of five hundred years ago, however credulous in other things, seem well to have understood the true character of this story of travel, for "according to the majority of the MSS. the story purports to be] nothing more than a religious novel." '^ As the Keltic terrestrial Paradise, Avalon, was al sea-girt island in the waters of the North, it could| of course be reached only by ship. The first to ac- complish this feat, so far as Christian legend informsl us, was St. Brandan, son of Finlogho, a celebratedl saint of the Irish Church, who died a. d. 576 ori 577. According to the story an angel brought tol this good abbot a book from heaven, in which suclil marvelous things were narrated concerning the thcnl unknown portions of the world that the honest faj ther charged both angel and book with falsehoodj 1 " The Buddhists of Ceylon have endeavored to transform tlicirj central mountain, Deva-kuta (Peak of the Gods), into Meru, and tol find four streams descending from its sides to cnrrcspond with tliej rivers of their Paradise." — Obry, Le Berceaii de V Esfice HumaimX Amiens, 1858 : p. 118 n. Lassen, Indische Alterthumskunde. Boniij 1862 : Bd. i., 196. 2 Baring-Gould, Curious Myths of the Middle Ages, London, lS66,| p. 236. ^:Si!!||ii RESULTS OF EXPLORERS. 13 and in his righteous indignation burned the latter. As a punishment for his unbelief God sentenced him to recover the book. He must search through hell and earth and sea until he finds the heavenly oift. The token given him by the angel is that when he sees two twin fires flame up he shall know that they are the two eyes of a certain ox, and on the tongue of that ox he shall find the book. For seven long years he sails the Western and the Northern Ocean. ^ He here encounters more marvels than were recorded in the original incredible book, and is even permitted to visit the earthly Paradise. The beauty of the soil, of the fountain with four streams, of the magnificent castle and castle halls lighted with self-luminous stones and adorned with all man- ner of precious jewels, surpassed description. The stay of the party seems, however, to have been short, and unfortunately just where the island was located — the commander forgets to mention. A more elaborate and fanciful picture of the same mediaeval Paradise is furnished us in the story of Oger, or Holger, a Danish knight of the age of Charlemagne. In a plain prose rendering, this is the style in which a famous court minstrel of six hundred years ago was accustomed to chant the adventure to admiring audiences. Caraheu and Gloriande were in a boat with a fair company, and Oger had with him a thousand men-at- arms. When they were a certain way on, there arose so mi;;hty a tempest that they knew not what to do, only to [Commit their souls to God. So great was the storm that the mast of Oger's ship brake, and he was constrained to 1 Carl Schroeder, Sand Brandan. Ein lateinischer und drei \deutsche Texte. Erlangen, 1871: pp. xii., xiii. and/aw/'w. a? o 14 PARADISE FOUND. embark in a little vessel with a few of hi comrades, and the wind struck them with such fury that they lost sight of Caraheu. Caraheu was so sore troubled that he was like to die, and he began to mourn the noble Oger ; for he wist not what was become of the boat. And Oger in like manner lamented Caraheu. Thus grieved Caraheu and the Christians in his company, saying, '* Alas ! Oger, what is become of thee ? This is, I ween, the most sud- den departure that I heard of ever." " Nay, but cease, my beloved," said Gloriande j " he will not fail to come again when God wills, for he cannot be far away." " Ah, lady," said Caraheu, " you know not the dangers of the sea ; and I pray God to take him into his keeping." . . . Now I will leave speaking of Caraheu, and return to Oger, who was in peril, yet was ever grieving for his friend, and saying, " Ah, Caraheu, hope of the remaining days of my life, thou whom I loved next to God ! How has God allowed me to lose so soon you and your lady ? " At that moment the great ship, in which Oger had left his men-at-arms, struck against a rock, and he saw them all perish, at which sight he was like to die of grief. And presently a loadstone rock began to draw towards it the boat in which Oger was. Oger, seeing himself thus taken, recommended his soul to God, saying, *' My God, my Father and Creator, who hast made me in Thine imaj^e and semblance, have pity on me now, and leave me not here to die ; for that I have used my power as was best to the increase of the Catholic faith. But if it must be that Thou take me, I commit to Thy care my brother Guyou, and all my relatives and friends, especially my j nephew Gautier, who is minded to serve Thee, and bring j the paynim into Thy Holy Church. . . . Ah, my God ! I had I known the peril of this adventure, I should never | have abandoned the beauty, sense, and honor of Clarice, I Queen of England. Had I but gone back to her, I should | have seen, too, my redoubted sovereign, Charlemagne, with all the princes who surround him." RESULTS OF EXPLORERS. 15 Meanwhile the boat continued to float upon the water til! it reached the loadstone castle, which they call the Chateau d' Aval on, which is but a little way from the earthly Paradise, whither were snatched in a beam of fire Elias and Enoch, and where was Morgue la P\'e, who at liis birth had given him such great gifts. Then the mariners saw well that they were drawing near to the loadstone rock, and they said to Oger, " My lord, com- mend thyself to God, for it is certain that at this moment we are come to our voyage's end ; " and as they spake the bark with a swing attached itself to the rock, as though ii were cemented there. That night Oger thought over the case in which he was, but he scarce could tell of what sort it might be. And the sailors came and said to Oger, " My lord, we are held here without remedy ; wherefore let us look to our stores, for we are here for the remainder of our lives." To which Oger made answer, " If this be so, then will I make consideration of our case, for I would assign to each [one his share, to the least as to the greatest." For him- IselE Oger kept a double portion, for it is the law of the I sea that the master of the ship has as much as two others. iBut if that rule had not been, he would still have needed ja double quantity, for he ate as much as two common Imen. When Oger had apportioned his share to each, he [said, " Masters, be sparing, I pray you, of your food as much as you may, for so soon as ye have no more be sure that I myself will throw you into the sea." The skipper lanswered him, " My lord, thou wilt escape no better than Iwe." Their food failed them all, one after another, and lOger cast them into the sea, and he remained alone. jThen he was so troubled that he knew not what to do. ["Alas ! my God, my Creator," said he, " hast Thou at this lour forsaken me ? I have now no one to comfort me in tny misfortune." Thereupon, whether it were his fantasy )r no, it seemed to him that a voice replied, " God orders >i 2% Si S: Ll.> o I 0:: uJ > i6 PARADISE FOUND. W. that so soon as it be night thou go to a castle after thou hast come to an island which thou wilt presently fintl. And when thou art on the island thou wilt find a small path leading to the castle. And whatsoever thing thou seest there, let not that affray thee." And Oger looked, but wist not who had spoken. Oger waited the return of night, to learn the truth of that which the voice foretold, and he was so amazed that he wist not what to do, but set himself to the trial. And when night came he committed himself to God, praying Him for mercy ; and straightway he looked and beheld the Castle of Avalon, which shone wondrously. Many nights before he had seen it, but by day it was not visible. Howbeit, so soon as Oger saw the castle he set about to get there. He saw before him the ships that were fastened to the loadstone rock, and now he walked from ship to ship, and so gained the island; and when there he at once set himself to scale the hill by a path which he found. When he reached the gate of the castle, and sought to enter, there came before him two great lions, who stopped him and cast him to the ground. But Oger sprang up and drew his sword, Curtain, and straightway cleft one of them in twain ; then the other sprang and seized Oger by the neck, and Oger turned round and struck off his head. When Oger had performed this deed, he gave thanks to our Lord, and then he entered the hall of the castle, where he found many viands, and a table set as if one should dine there ; but no prince nor lord could he see. Now he was amazed to find no one, save only a horse, which sat at the table as if it had been a human being. This horse, which was called Papillon (Psyche ?), waited upon Oger, gave him to drink from a golden goblet, and | at length conducted him to his chamber, and to a bed whose fairy-made coverlet of cloth of gold and ermine] was la plus mignonne chose qui fut jamais vue. When Oger awoke he thought to see Papillon again, I RESULTS OF EXPLORERS, 17 but could see neither him, nor man, nor woman, to show him the way from the room. He saw a door, and, having mule the sign of the cross, sought to pass out that way ; buL as he tried to do this he encountered a serpent, so hideous that the like has scarce been seen. It would have thrown itself upon Oger, but that the knight drew his sword and made the creature recoil more than ten Ifeet; but it returned with a bound, for it was very mighty, jand the twain fell to fight. And now, as Oger saw that the serpent pressed hard upon him, he struck at it so [doughtily with his sword that he severed it in twain. Afltjr that Oger went along a path which led him to a Igiirden, so beauteous that it was in truth a little paradise ; land within were fair trees, bearing fruit of every kind, of Itastcs divers, and of such sweet odors that he never smelt trees like them before. Oger, seeing these fruits so fine, desired to eat some, ind presently he lighted upon a fine apple-tree, whose fruit was like gold, and of these apples he took one and ite. But no sooner had he thus eaten than he became 50 sick and weak that he had no power nor manhood left. And now again he commended his soul to God and )ropared to die. . . . But at this moment turning round, le was aware of a fair dame, clothed in white, and so hchly adorned that she was a glory to behold. Now as )ger looked upon the lady without moving from his place, he deemed that she was Mary the Virgin, and said, I' Ave Maria," and saluted her. But she said, " Oger, pink not that I am she whom you fancy ; I am she who k'as at your birth, and my name is Morgue la Fe'e, and I iUottcd you a gift which was destined to increase your une eternally through all lands. But now you have left [our deeds of war to take with ladies your solace ; for [s soon as I have taken you from here I will bring you Avalon, where you will see the fairest noblesse in the hrld." And anon she gave him a ring, which had such virtue "J I 5: O I UJ 2 I i8 PARADISE FOUND. that Oger, who was near a hundred years old, returned to the ap;e of thirty. Then said Oger, " Lady, I am morel beholden to thee than to any other in the world. Blesstd be the hour of thy birth, for, without having done au<;ht to deserve at your hands, you have given me countless | gifts, and this gift of new life above them all. Ah, lady, that I were before Charlemagne, that he might see the! condition in which I now stand ; for I feel in me greater strength than I have ever known. Dearest, how can I make return for the honor and great good you have done me.'' But I swear that I am at your service all the days of my life." Then Morgue took him by the hand, and said, " My loyal friend, the goal of all my happiness. I will now lead you to my palace in Avalon, where you will see of noblesse the greatest and of damosels the fairest."! And she took Oger by the hand and led him to the Casj tie of Avalon, where was King Artus, and Auberon, and) Malambron, who was a sea fairy. As Oger approached the castle the fairies came toj meet him, dancing and singing marvellous sweetly. Audi he saw many fairy dames, richly crowned and apparelled.j And presently came Arthur, and Morgue called to himJ and said, " Come hither, my lord and brother, and salutei the fair flower of chivalry, the honor of the French noj blesse, him in whom all generosity and honor and ever)! virtue are lodged, Oger le Danois, my loyal love, niyj only pleasure, in whom lies for me all hope of happiness.' Then Morgue gave Oger a crown to wear, which was sol rich that none here could count its value ; and it had be-j side a wondrous virtue, for every man who bore it his brow forgot all sorrow and sadness and melancholvJ and he thought no more of his country nor of his kin thatj he had left behind him in the world. We leave Oger thus " bim assis et entretenii des dam^ que c'ktait men>ei//es,^' and return to the earth, wherej things were not going so well ; for while Oger was Fairie the paynim assembled all their forces and tool RESULTS OF EXPLORERS. 19 Jerusalem and proceeded to lay siege to Babylon (that is, Cairo). Then the most valiant knights who were left on g.^, t^li — Moysant, and Florian, and Carahou, and Gautier (Of2;er's nephew) — assembled all their powers to defend this place. But they lamented greatly because Oger was no more. And a great battle took place without the walls of Babylon, in which the Saracens, assisted by a renegade, the Admiral Gandice, gained the victory. Oger had been long in the Castle of Avalon, and had be-otten a son by Morgue, when she, having heard of these doings and of the danger to Christendom, deemed it needful to awake Oger from his blissful forgetfulness of all earthly things, and tell him that his presence was needed in this world once more. Thereupon follows an i account of Oger's returning to earth, where no one knew him, and all were astonished at his strange garb and bearing. He inquired for Charlemagne, who had been long since dead; the generation below Oger had grown to be old men, yet lie still had the habit of a man of thirty. We need not wonder that his talk excited suspi- cion. But at length he made himself known to the King lof France, joined his army, and put the paynim to flight. JHe had now forgotten his life in Fairie ; he was beloved Iby the Queen of France (the King having been killed), jand was about to marry her, when Morgue again ap- peared and carried him ofif to Avalon.-^ Looking back over this long story to see just |vvhere it locates its Paradise, and how one could get there, we find the data extremely few and discourag- ing. And the older story in Plutarch respecting ^ From Kenry's Outlines of Primitive Beliefs, pp. 452-458. He re- larks, " The account which I here translate is only a sixteentli-cen- |uiy version of the tale, hut it is copied directly from the poetic vcr- pion of the well-known troubadour Adenez, chief minstrel at the bourt of Ilcnry III. of Bavaria (1248-1261), and for his excellence in [lis art called Le Roy, or king of all. There can be no doubt that in Its chief particulars the story is far older than the days of Adenez." a:' a 3 S: LL. O 20 PARADTSE FOUND. the same isle of blessedness is not less destitute of indications as to exact locality.^ G(jing some centuries farther bajk we find an- other traveler who claims to have been in the ter- restrial Paradise. He says, — As I looked towards the North, over the mountains, I saw seven mountains full of precious balsam and odorous trees and cinnamon and pepper. And from thence I went over the summils of these mountains far towards the East, and passed on still farther over the sea and caniu far beyond it. And I came into the Garden of Right- eousness, and saw a many-colored crowd of trees of every kind ; for many and great trees flourish there, very noble and lovely, and the Tree of Wisdom, which gives wisdom to any one who eats of it. It is like the Johannis bread tree ; its fruit is like a cluster of grapes, very good ; and the fragrance of the tree spreads far around. And I said, " Fair is this tree, and how beautiful and ravishing its look ! " And the holy Angel Raphael, who was with me, answered and said to me, " This is the Tree of Wisdom of which thy forefathers, thy hoary first parent and thy aged first mother, ate, and found the knowledge of wisdom, and their eyes were opened, and they knew that they were naked, and were driven out of the garden." This favored explorer, who had the special advan- tage of being guided by a holy angel, was the un-l known author of the Book of Enoch, which writing! is believed by some to be as old as the second cen- tury before Christ. No one can read many chapters! of his production, however, without arriving at tlie| firm conclusion that sacred geography has very lit- tle to hope from such a source, however ancient.^ 1 " On the Face appearing in the Orb of the Moon," Sect. 26, PltitarcJCs Morals. Goodwin's ed., /ol. v., p. 201. '■^ Das Buck Henoch. Uebersetzt von Dr. A. Dillmann. Leipsic,] RESULTS OF EXPLO/^EKS. 2\ Coming down to the travelers of our own time, we fare no better, even tliough they do not tax our crc(hility with stories of angcHc guides or of guard- ian dragons. One, writing only ten years ago, pro- fessedly from the very Garden itself, momentarily raises our expectations when he says, " Discoveries made within the last decade tend to confirm the sup- p(isition that the primeval abode of man was near the confluence of the Eujjhrates and the Tigris; aiul it is not too much to anticipate the exhuming of inscribed tablets which will fully establish this be- llief." Ikit as suddenly as our hopes are excited, so suddenly do they die away in disappointment. In- credulous critics greet the suggestion of "exhuming inscribed tablets" on the subject with a chorus of derisive laughter. The author himself does not ven- ture to give any of the "discoveries made within the last decade " which tend to confirm the notion that Eden was located at the point described. On the Icontrary, in the immediately following sentence, he Itakes leave of the subject, and in so doing gives us |over to his own admitted uncertainty in the follow- ing- terms: "And although, after the lapse of so nany centuries, exact correspondence of topography ^s not to be expected, yet guided by the general fea- tures of the scene rather than by the minuter ones, pic present traditional Garden of Eden may be ac- :epted until another has been discovered and its Identity more clearly proved." ^ In such darkness lies out the kindled hope. Meantime, in a letter to )ir Roderick Murchison, published in " The Athe- ]8s3. There is an earlier English translation by R. Lawrence (Ox- (ord, 1S21, ^2,3. '38). J. P. Newman, D. D., A Thousatui Miles on Horseback. New fork, 1875 • P- 69. II or' S: a in 22 PARADISE FOUND. naeum " not far from the same date, the indefatiga- ble Livingstone disclosed the secret of his tireless perambulations through Central Africa, — he be- lieved that at the sources of the Nile, could he once discover them, he would stand upon the site of the] primeval Paradise ! Evidently exploration, wonder- ful as have been its achievements, has not yet solved I the problem of the site of Eden. To this day the word of Pindar, uttered half a thousand years before| Christ, has remained true : — " Neither by taking ship, Neither by any travel on foot, To the Hyperborean Field Shalt thou find the wondrous way." CHAPTER II. THE RESULTS OF THEOLOGIANS. Some have flaced it in the third heaven, some in the /bttrth, in the heaven of the inooH, in the moon itself, on a viountain near the lunar heaven, in the middle region of the air, out of the earth, upon tlie earth, beneath the earth, in a place that is hidden and separated from man. It has been placed tinder the northern pde, in Tartary, or in the place no^v occupied by the Caspian Sea. Others placed it in t/te extreme south, in the land of fire ; otJtcrs in the Levant, or on the short's of the Ganges, or in the island of Ceylon. It has been placed in China, or in an inaccessible region beyond the Black Sea; by others in America, in Africa, etc, — Bishop Huet. A n ein Resultat, das auch nur einigermassen bcfriedigte, ist nicht zu denken, — Win'ZER UND VVelte, Klrchen-Lexicon. Theologians, Christian and Jewish, have in all a2,es differed, and irreconcilably differed, as to the location of the cradle of the human race. The evi- dences of this are so well known, or so easily acces- 1 sible to every intelligent reader, that they need not I be adduced in this place. ^ The fathers and theologians of the Early Church land of the Middle Ages held many curious and con- iflicting opinions upon the subject. Some, following the allegorizing method of Philo, interpreted the whole narrative in Genesis as a parable setting forth spiritual things. Eden was not a place, but a state of spiritual blessedness. The four rivers were not rivers, but the four cardinal virtues, etc. The majority, however, held to the historic character of [the na Tative, and to the strictly geographical reality ' See .vIcClintock and Strong, Cyclopccdia of Biblical, Theological^ \and Ecclesiastical Literature, Arts. " Eden " and " Paradise." 24 PARADISE FOUND. this mour tion of th sky meet.' I m pa tie own brusc primeval \ changed ti original ri^ Calvin, ( the writer stood as ] mouths of sity of Pro aggravated by orthodo: istic concej of Eden. To the question of its location, number- less were the answers. Often it was in the far East, beyond all lands inhabited by men. Sometimes it was thought of as perhaps within, or under, thcj earth, in the regions of the dead. Sometimes it wasj neither on nor below the earth, but high above it, in the third heaven, or some way associated with the lunar orbit. Again, it would be stated that there! are two paradises, a celestial and a terrestrial one, — the one in heaven, the other on the earth. Tcr- tuUian, conceiving of the torrid zone as the flaming sword, which turned every way to keep the way of the tree of life (Gen. iii. 24), placed Eden beyond it, in the southern hemisphere. Now it was at the bottom of the sea ; ^ or again it held a position mid- way between earth and heaven. Anon, it was on the summit of a miraculous mountain, which rose toPPthe Bible, u the height of the moon. Of this mountain only lhe^0 ^oorical tea base was washed, when by the waters of the Deluge^ all other mountains were covered. It was conceived of as rising in three gigantic stages to its stupen- dous height. All kinds of marvelous plants ad precious metals and gems adorned it, but its su' preme adornment was a divine river, which, startin| from the throne of God in the highest heaven, descended to the holy garden on the mountain' head, and thence parting into four, after wateriii- and beautifying the whole mountain in its desccnij gradually lost more and more of its celestial tasti and vivifying virtues, and became the water systcrj of the habitable globe. Sometimes the location c; 1 " In some legends Eden was submerged by the earliest delus that covered the Mount. The happy garden was believed to be lyirj at the bottom of Lake Van, in Armenia." — Gerald Massey, The ^ ural Genesis, vol. ii., p. 231. ' 3 Babe f" or a par [only to tur biblical, th( In McClintc dines to loc {Dictionary " insoluble. Herzog it is jof Eden a st jmythical gee jPressel mak( |in favor of t] [and Euphra JLexicon," pk |ln the chied THE RESULTS OF THEOLOGIANS. 25 umber- ir East, imes it :ler, the :s it was ve it, in vith the at there 1 one, — h. Tci- flam ill.; e way (t I beyo.K IS at the tion mill- t was on :h rose to only ihr e DelugeJ :onceive(i s stupen- ants anil t its su' , startii\s| heaven ountain' wateriii desccn! tial tasli r systc cation c: liest delusj to be lyirJ y, Thc^ this mountain was described as in some distant por- tion of the earth, " where the sea, or earth, and the sky meet." Impatient of such contradictions, Luther, in his own brusque way, rejected all attempts to locate the primeval garden, declaring that the Deluge had so changed the face of the earth and the course of its original rivers that all search was fruitless. Calvin, on the contrary, confidently affirmed that % the writer of the Genesis narrative must be under- 'l stood as locating the Garden of Eden near the 5 mouths of the Euphrates. Soon this original diver- ^ sity of Protestant teaching upon the subject became ■ aggravated by new theories, some of them suggested by orthodox ingenuity, some introduced by rational- Nistic conceptions of the semi-mythical character of the Bible, until at the present time the state of the- V'Tical teaching respecting Eden is, if possible, a r 3 Babel than in any preceding age. For a partial illustration of the confusion one has only to turn to the most recent and authoritative biblical, theological, and religious encyclopaedias. In McClintock and Strong's, the writer on Eden in- clines to locate it in Armenia. In Smith's " Bible Dictionary" the problem is abandoned as probably insoluble. In the great German encyclopaedia of Herzog it is declared necessary to deny to the story of Eden a strictly historical character ; it is " a bit of mythical geography." In the supplement, however, Pressel makes an elaborate argument of many pages in favor of the location at the junction of the Tigris jand Euphrates. Diilmann, in Schenkel's " Bibel- Lexicon," places it in the Himalayas, north of India. In the chief Roman Catholic cyclopaedia, Wetzel a;. cell 26 PARADISE FOUND. and Welte's " Kirchen - Lexicon," the writer vacil- lates between Eastern Asia, taken in a vague and undefined sense, and an equally undefined North. In Lichtenberg's just completed " Encyclopedic des Sciences Religieuses " the whole story in Genesis !•, is declared a "philosophic myth." Professor Brown, of New York, in the new work edited by Dr. Schafi, on the basis of Herzog, enumerates a variety of opinions advocated by others, but refrains from ex- pressing any opinion of his own. Such is all the light which contemporary theology seems able to throw upon our problem. But here some plain reader of the Bible opens at the second chapter of Genesis, and reads, "And the Lord God planted a garden eastward in Eden ; and there he put the man whom he had formed." And the plain reader asks how a believer in the Bible can doubt that this passage fixes the location of the garden somewhere to the East of Palestine. But, looking a little more critically, our inquirer himself quickly sees that the verse does not neces- sarily afifirm anything as to the direction of the gar- den from the writer. It may naturally mean that the garden was planted in the eastern part of the land of Eden, wherever that was ; and turning to the most careful and orthodox commentators, he finds that not a few take this view of it. Moreover, Miq- qede7n, here translated *' eastward," may be other- wise translated, as it is in King James's Version, in the passages Ps. Ixxiv. 12, Ixxvii. 6, and elsewhere. In fact, in the Vulgate it is here translated, a prin- cipio, " in or from the beginning." Among the early Greek translators, Symmachus, Theodotion, and Aquila understand the term in the same way, THE RESULTS OF THEOLOGIANS. 27 gar- at the land o the finds Miq- ther- )n, in here. prin- the )ti()n, way. Hence, nearly two hundred years ago, the learned Thomas Burnet wrote as follows : " Some have thought that the word Miqqcdeni, Gen. ii. 8, was to be rendered iii the East, or Eastiuard, as we read it, and therefore determined the site of Paradise ; but 't is only the Septuagint translate it so ; all the other Greek versions, and St. Jerome, the Vulgate, the Chaldee Paraphrase, and the Syriak, render it from the beginning, or in the beginnings or to that effect. And we that do not believe the Septuagint to have been infallible or inspired have no reason to prefer their single authority above all the rest." ^ The same writer says again, " We may safely say that none of the Christian Fathers, Latin or Greek, ever placed Paradise in Mesopotamia ; that is a con- ceit and innovation of some modern authors, which hath been much encouraged of late, because it gave more ease and rest as to further inquiries in an argument they could not well manage." ^ As to the new source of evidence opened up by the decipherment of the Cuneiform inscriptions, Le- normant says, that in none of these, so far as yet deciphered, has anything been found indicating that the Chaldceo-Babylonians believed that their coun- try was the cradle of the human race.^ " But the four rivers," says our inquirer, and he reads verses 10-14: "And a river went out of Eden to water the garden ; and from thence it was parted and became into four heads. The name of the first is Pison. . . . And the name of the second river is Gihon. . . . And the name of the third river 1 Sacred Theory of the Earth. London, 2d ed., 1691 : p. 252. 2 Il)id., p. 253. 3 Les Or twines de V Histoire. Paris, 1882 : to«i. ii. i, p. 120. 28 PARADISE FOUND. is Hiddekel, . . . and the fourth river is Euphrates." " Surely here in the fourth river we have one unde- niable landmark. However impossible it may be satisfactorily to identify all four of the primitive riv- ers of Eden, the mention of the Euphrates at least restricts the location of the garden to some part of the region drained by that river." Consulting the theologians, however, our inves- tigator finds a great variety of serious objections urged against this short and easy method of settling the controversy. First, he is told that some Biblical critics have expressed doubt as to the genuineness of the verses, and that as earnest a defender of the Bible as Mr. Granville Penn considered the whole passage an in- terpolation. Secondly, he learns that Perath or Phrath, the Hebrew name of the river, is from the older form Buratti or Purattu, a word believed to signify " the broad," or " the deep." ^ Of course such a descrip- tive term may well have been the name of more than one ancient river, just as "Broad Brook" is the name of many an American stream. Indeed, in his learned work, " Le Berceau de I'Espece Humaine," Obry shows that in ancient times Phrat, or Euphra- tes, was the name of one, or possibly two, of the rivers of Persia.^ One of these in Pliny's time still bore the name in the hardly changed form Ophradiis. Lenormant says he does not hesitate to consider the Phrath of the Khorda-Avesta identical with the Per- 1 Delitzsch, Wo lag das Paradies? p. 169. Grill, Die Erzvdter dcr Menschheit, Bd. i., p. 230. In Old Persian it is Ufratu, " the fair flowing." F. Finzi, AntichitH AssirUy Turin, 1S72: p. 112. ■■^ See pp. 95, 136, 140. THE RESULTS OF THEOLOGIANS. 29 sian river Helmend.^ Africa also had its sacred Euphrates.^ If therefore the passage in Genesis is genuine, and Moses wrote of the Phrath, it is not absolutely certain what " broad " or " abounding " river he had in mind. Moreover, in any case, the Euphrates of Mesopotamia is not one of four equal offshoots into which the one " river " proceeding " out of Eden " divided itself according to the state- ment of the text. Its source is not from another river at all, but from ordinary mountain springs. Thirdly, it musL not be forgotten, our friend is told, that all peoples coming into a new country love to name their new rivers and towns after the loved and sacred ones they have left in the elder home. The Thames of New England perpetuates the mem- ory of the Thames of Old England. " It is very seldom indeed," says a late writer, " that a river has no namesakes." ^ Very possibly, therefore, the Phrath of Mesopotamia may have been named for some elder river of the antediluvian world, wher- ever that may have been. That it was so is the firm belief of various learned writers.^ Fourthly, continue the theologians, the language of Ezekiel xxviii. 13-19, and of Proverbs iii. 18 ; xi. 30, etc., shows that poetic and symbolical applica.- tions of the name and images of Eden were common. ^ Origines de VHistoire, torn. ii. I, p. 99. 2 " Also there is a very sacred river in Hwida called the Euphrates Eufrates." — Gerald Massey, The Natural Genesis. London, 1883: Mi. ii., p. 165. ' " There is no improbability in supposing that there may have been in Britain two rivers named Trisanton. On the contrary, it is very seldom indeed that a river has no namesakes." — Henry Bradley, in The Aradeiny, Ajiril 28, 18S3, p. 296. * See Grill, Die Erzvdter der Menschheit, Bd. i., pp. 239, 242. I:; 4 CC-) a-' flC- liJ > 30 PARADISE FOUND. And if the Hebrews named one of the water-courses at Jerusalem Gihon, in commemoration of one of the four Paradise rivers,^ it is not irrational to suppose that the inhabitants of Mesopotamia may have called their chief stream in honor of another of the four. Lenormant, Grill, Obry, and others support this view. They might have rendered the probability still stronger by calling attention to the fact that the oldest name of Babylon, Tin-tir-ki, was of the same commemorative or symbolical character, and signi- fied *' the place of the Tree of Life." "^ Finally, pursuing these curious investigations fur- ther, our plain reader finds mention in Pausanias, ii. 5, of a strange belief of the ancients, according to which the Euphrates, after disappearing in a marsh and flowing a long distance underground, rises again beyond Ethiopia, and flows through Egypt as the Nile. This reminds him of the language of Josephus, according to which the Ganges, the Tigris, the Eu- phrates, and the Nile are all but parts of "one river which ran round about the whole earth," — the Oke- anos-river of the Greeks.^ And he wonders whether the old Shemitic term from which the modern Eu- phrates is derived was not originally a name of the general water system of the world, — a name of that OcCan-river which Aristotle describes as rising in the upper heavens, descending in rain upon the earth, feeding, as Homer tells us, all fountains and rivers and every sea, flowing through all these water- ^ Ewald, Geschichte des Volkes Israel, 2d ed., Bd. iii., pp. 321-328. 2 Lenormant, Orightes de I'llistoirc, vol. i., p. 76. English version, p. 85. See also Rev. O. D. Miller, " The Symbolical Geography of j the Ancients," in the American Antiqtiarian and Oriental yournaly | Chicago, July, 18S1. " Compare Rev. ix. 14. THE RESULTS OF THEOLOGIANS. %\ courses down into the great and " broad " equatorial ocean-current which girdles the world in its embrace, thence branching out from the further shore into the rivers of the Underworld, to be at last fire-purged and sublimated, and returned in purity to the upper heavens to recommence its round.^ And just as he is wondering over the question, he finds that some jof the Assyriologists, in their investigation of pre- Babylonian Akkadian mythology, have found reason [to l)elicve this surmise correct, and to say that in that mythology the term Euphrates was applied to "the rope of the world," " the encircling river of the snake god of the tree of life," "the heavenly river which surrounds the earth." ^ Furthermore, as he turns back to the pages of Hyginus, and Manilius, land Lucius AmpeUus, and reads of the fall of the l"world-egg" at the beginning "into the river Eu- Iphrates," he perceives that he is in a mythologic, land not a historic region.^ And when he lights lupon a mutilated fragment of an ancient Assyrian [inscription, in which descriptions of the visible and [invisible world are mixed up together, and in which the river "of the life of the world " is designated by the name " Euphrates," * he quickly concludes that (t will not do to take the term Phrath, or Eu-frata, IS always and everywhere referring to the historic river of Mesopotamia. 1 See below Part V., chapter 5 : " The Quadrifurcate River." 2 The Rev. A. H. Sayce in The Academy. London, Oct. 7, 1882 ; 263. " Professor Sayce, after recently observing that * in early Akkadian mythology the mouth of the Euphrates was identified with [he River of Death,' adds, * The Okeanos of Homer had, I believe, |ts origin in this Akkadian river which coiled itself around the vorlci; " — Robert Brown, Jun., F. R. S., 77/^? Myth of Kirke. London, [883 : p. 33- 2 Bryant, Analysis of Ancient Afyths, vol. iii., pp. i6o-l62. * Records of the Past, x., p. 149. sa PARADISE FOUND. Hitherto, then, the "results" of the theologians as to the location of Eden are purely negative and mutually destructive. '* It would be difficult," says one of their number, "to find any subject in the whole history of opinion which has so invited and at the same time so completely baffled conjecture as this. Theory after theory has been advanced, but none has been found which satisfies the requircdl conditions. The site of Eden will ever rank, wiilil the quadrature of the circle and the interpretation! of unfulfilled prophecy, among those unsolved and! perhaps insoluble problems which possess so strange] a fascination." ^ 1 William A. Wright, of Trinity College, Cambridge, in Smith's} Dictionary of the Bidl^, Art. " Eden." THE RE! CHAPTER III. THE RESULTS OF NON-THEOLOGICAL SCHOLARS : NAT- URALISTS, ETHNOLOGISTS, ETC. It is useless to speculate on this subject. Jharles Darwin. The location of the cradle of the human race is as much a problem for the ethnologist and anthropolo- gist as it is for the theologian. The archccologist, the zoologist, and even the biologist, if at all broad and philosophical in their inquiries, cannot ignore the high interest of the questions, Was there for the humpn race one primitive centre of distribution ? and, if so, Where was it located ? Thirty years ago the pretentious American work by Nott and Gliddon, entitled " The Types of Man- kind," ^ — a work written in opposition to the doc- trine of the unity of the human race, — attracted unusual attention to the former of these questions. The teaching therein put forth was that there are very many types or varieties of men without genea- logical connection with each other, and that there- fore a great number of primitive centres of distribu- tion must be assumed. The avowed prejudices of the projectors of the work against certain races, par- ticularly the African, wouid have rendered the in- fluence of the work upon the scientific world ex- tremely slight, had not contributions of some value from Dr. S. G. Morton, and Professor Louis Agassiz 1 Philadelphia and London, 1854. 3 34 PARADISE f'OUND. been incorporated with it. As it was, it gave Eu- ropean ethnologists occasion to form and express very uncomplimentary conceptions of American rep- resentatives of ethnolo;;ical research.^ Fortunate- ly these crude beginners of the science have had no influential successors of their own sort in this country, and but obscure or half-hearted disciples in any othcr.^ The polygeny of the race has at present no respectable support. Even the author of the latest and perhaps ablest of the works on the Preadamite Hypothesis remarks, " The plural origin of mankind is a doctrine now almost entirely super- seded. All schools admit the probable descent of all races from a common stock." ^ To the second question, therefore, the attention of the scientific and archcieological world is steadily gravitatini;. Given one primeval point of departure for the race, where shall that point of departure be sought } The answers which recent biologists, naturalists, and ethnologists have given to this problem arc hardly less numerous or less conflicting than arc the solutions proposed by theologians. Of these 1 Such references as the following arc not uncommon : " Uncr- lasslich bleibt die Eeliauptung eines einzigen Ausgangsortes samiiit- lichcr Menschenrassen, im Gegensatze zur Anthropologenschiilc iin/n- den Amerikaiicrn, die vielleicht iim ihr Gcwissen iibcr die voriiiali;: N'egersklaverei mid den Rasscnjuord dcr Indianer zu bernhigen, in iicuster Zeit id>er htuidcrt AFenschiiiarfen, nicht Menschenriissm, iiberhaiipt so viele geschaffcn hat als V'olkertypen sich aufstellen lasseit," etc. — O. Peschel, in Aiisland, 1869, p. mo. Cited in Caspari, Die Urgeschichte der AletiscfiJieit. 2d ed., Leipsic, 1877, vol. i., p. 241. 2 See Simonin, L' Ilovime At/icricain. Paris, 1870 : p. 12. A. Ke- ville, Les Religions des Penples non-civilises. Paris, 18S3 : vol. i., j). 196. 2 Alexander Winchell, Preadamitcs ; or a Demoistration of Ihc Existence of Men before Adam. Chicago, !8So : p. 297. One o^ ''.v latest and most audioritativc criticisms and refutations of Agassiz's polygenism is found in Quatrcfagcs, T/ie Human Race, N. Y., 1879: chap. xiv. OTHER RESULTS. 35 answers Professor Zocckler, in a late work, enumer- ates ten, each having the support of eminent scien- tific names. ^ In latitude they ranj^c from Green- land to Central Africa, and in longitude from Amer- ica to Central Asia. Of the whole number, the two which seem to command the widest and weight- iest support are, first, the hypothesis that " Lemu- ri;i " — a wholly imaginary, now submerged prehis- toric continent under the northern portion of the Indian Ocean — was the "mother-region" of the race ; and, secondly, that it was i ; the lii'ar, 'A Cen- tral Asia. The former of these sites \\ the one supported by llaeckel, Caspari, Pcschel, and many othcis.^ Though less positive, Darwin ar.il Lycll Jieem ."lvoi- iablcto the same location or to one ui the adjo-aing portion of Africa. Most of the recent maps of the progressivvi dispersion of tliC race o'sii tlie globe have been constructed in accordance wirh ihis Uie- pry."^ Perhaps the best popv.iar sv.mnr.i:y of the largumcnts in its favor is that found in Oscar iPeschel's " Races of Men." * But v.hile biological speculation f^speclally in the lands of Darwinists, has strongly inclined toward the chief habitat of the ape tribes in its attem])ts to find man's primitive point of departure, comjiar- itivc philologists, mytholoe,ists, and archreological 1 Till' Cross of Christ. Translated 1-y Evans. .Ir.ndon, 1S77. Ap- beiidix iii., p. 3S9. - I'.nist Maeckel, The Pedigree of Men, atid other Essays. London, 1883 : p]). 73-So. Otto Kuntzc I'hytogeogcnesis. Leipsic, 1884 : p. |2, llMtC. '■'• Sec Caspari's in D,.' \yrgcschichte der ]\Teuschhi'it, at the close of |ol. i. ; Krache; '■- Fthnographische IVellkarte in Novara Expedition, ri?ina, 1S75 ; Winchell's in his Preadamites, p. I. ^ New York, Appletons, pp. 26-34. 36 PARADISE FOUND. ethnographers have of late very strongly tended to place the cradle of mankind on the lofty plateau of Pamir in Central Asia. For these the eminent French anthropologist, Quatrefages, is well entitled to speak. We know [says this savant] that in Asia there is a vast region bounded on the south and south-west by the Himalayas, on the west by the Bolor mountains, on the north-west by the Alla-Tau, on the north by the Altai range and its off-shoots, on the east by the Kingkhan, on the south and south-east by the Felina and Kwen-lun. Judging of it by what exists at the present day, this great central region might be regarded as having included the cradle of the human race. In fact, the three fundamental types of all the races of mankind are represented in the populations grouped around this region. The negro races are the furthest re- moved from it, but have nevertheless marine stations, in which they are found pure or mixed, from the Kiussiu to the Andaman Islands. On the continent they have mingled their blood with nearly all the inferior castes and classes of the two Gangetic peninsulas ; they are still found pure in each of them ; they ascend as far as Nepal, and, according to Elphinstone, spread to the west as far as the Persian Gulf and Lake Zareh. The yellow race, pure, or mixed here and there with white elements, seems alone to occupy the area in question. The circumference of this region is peopled by it to the north, the east, the south-east, and the west. In the south it is more mixed but it none the less forms an important element of the population. The white race, by its allophylian rcj^rc' sentatives, seems to have disputed the possession of ever. the central area itself with the yellow race. In earl)| times we find the Yu-Tchi, the U-Suns, to the north oi Hoang-Ho ; and at the present day in Little Thibet, Id Eastern Thibet, small islands of white populations havfj OTHER RESULTS. 37 been pointed out. The Miao-Tse occupy the mountain- ous regions of China ; the Siaputhes are proof against all attacks in the gorges of Bolor. On the confines of this area we find to the east the Ainos and the Japanese of high caste, the Tinguians of the Philippine Islands ; to the south the Hindus. To the south-west and west, the white element, pure or mixed, is completely predomi- nant. No other region on the face of the globe presents similar reunion of the extreme types of the human race distributed around a common centre. This fact of itself might suggest to the naturalist the conjecture which I have expressed above ; but we may appeal to other con- siderations. One of the weightiest of these is drawn from philol- ogy. The three fundamental forms of human language are found in the same regions and in analogous connec- tions. In the centre and the south-east of our area the monosyllabic languages are represented by the Chinese, the Annamite, the Siamese, and the Thibetan. As agglu- tinative languages, we find, from the north-east to the north-west, the group of the Ugro-Japanese ; in the south that of the Dravidians and the Malays ; and in the west the Turkish languages. Lastly, Sanscrit with its deriva- tives, and the Iranian languages, represent, in the south and south-west, the inflectional languages. With the lin- guistic types accumulated around this central region of Asia all human languages are connected, either by their vocabulary or their grammar. Some of these Asiatic lan- guages resemble very closely languages spoken in regions far removed, or separated from the area in question by very different languages. Lastly, it is from Asia, again, that our earliest-tamed domestic animals have come. Isidore GeoiTroy-Saint- Hilaire is entirely agreed on this point with Bureau de la Malle. Thus, taking into account only the present epoch, UL.. in 38 PARADISE FOUND. everything leads us back to this central plateau, or rather this vast inclosure. Here, we are inclined to say to our- selves, the first human beings appeared, and multiplied down to the moment when the populations overflowed like a bowl which is too full, and poured themselves out in human waves in all directions.^ This view of the location of the first centre of the race is very widely accepted. It has the support of 'many great names. To its establishment contribu- tions have been made by scholars in a great variety of fields. Among them may be mentioned Lassen, Burnouf, Ewald, Renan, Obry, D' Eckstein, Hofer, Senart, Maspero, Lenormant, etc. Perhaps the most important single treatise representing the view is Obry's "Cradle of the Human Species," — a work of singular interest to every scholar.^ But the latest writers on the question are by no means confined to the two locations just mentioned. The difficulty of accounting for the first advent of human beings in America, without supposing in early times a closer land-connection between the eastern and western hemispheres in the intertrop- ical regions than now exists, has led not a few eth- nologists to postulate a lost Atlantis, including per- haps the Canary and Madeira Islands, or the Azores, 1 The Human Species, pp. 175-177. — Quutrefages' noteworthy suggestion as to the possibility oi a modification of the above con- clusion in consequence of the revelations of recent paleontological researches will be noticed in Part III., chapter 7, ^ Le Berceau de P Esphe Ilnmaiiie scion Ics Indiens, les Perses d les Hcbrcux. Amiens, 1858. See also Lenormant, Origines dc V lln- toirc. Paris, 18S2 : tom. ii. I, pp.41, 144, 145. (Translated in part in The Contemporary Review, Sept. 1S81.) Frac;ments cosinogoniqucs de Berose, pp. 300-333. Renan, IFisfoire gtnh-ale des Langties Semi- ii(/ues, pp. 475-484. Wilford, Asiatic Researches, vol. vi., pp. 455-536, and the following volumes. ( I OTHER RESULTS. 39 or located to the North or South of thorn, and to place in it the fountain head of the streams of popu- lation which colonized both the Old and the New World.i Another location lately pcH-anced with great con- fidence and supported with remarkable acuteness and learning is that advocated by Dr. Friedrich Delitzsch in his valuable work entitled " Wo lag das Paradies ? " ^ This site is on the Euphrates be- tween Bagdad and Babylon.^ In the author's con- struction the "four rivers" are the great canal west of the Euphrates, called by the Greeks the Pallaco- 1 Unger, Die verstntkene Insel Atlantis. Vienna, iS6o. An Amer- ican work in advocacy of this theory is Ignatius Donnelly's Atlan- tis : The Antediluvian World. New York, 1882. In Europe the hypothesis has been represented as largely abandoned. See Engler, Die E7itivickclimgsgeschichte der PJlanzemvdt. Leipsic, 1879 : vol. i., p. 82. But a new modification has since appeared in the work of M. Ikrlioux of Lyons : Lcs Atlantes. Histoire de P Atlantis et de r Alias frimiiif, on Introduction a V histoire de V Europe. Paris, 1S83. - Wo lag das Paradies ? Eine biblisch-assyriologische Stndie. Mit zahlrcichen assyriologischcn Boitrdgen zur biblischen Lander- nnd ViU- kcrkiiiitle nnd einer A'arte Babyloniens. Von Dr. Friedrich Delitzsch, Professor der Assyriologic an der Universitiit Leipzig. Leipsic, 18S1. The author is a son of the well-known Biblical scholar Pro- fessor Franz Delitzsch, and is himself eminent as ar. Assyriologist. ^ Compare the language of his fellow-student in Assyriology, Pro- fessor Felice Finzi : " Mentre a cercare la culla degli Ariani dobbi- amo volgerci ad Orientc, agli Uttara-Kuru degli Indiani, al mitico paradiso degli nomir.i del monte Meru, all' Airyanem Vaedjo degli Irani, al regno di Udyana presso al Caschmir ; mentre in qualche gnippo del sistema uralo-altaico dee forse indicarsi il ccntro di forma- zione della famiglia turanica, e la orografia del Caucaso potr^ for^-e sola determinare il sito piu opportune per lo sviUippo delle tribii che se nc attestano autottone ; i Semiti ci si mostrano figli di quclla terra ove si sono svolte le pagine piu belle della loro storia. E la forse in un angolo di questo pacse ricco un tempo dello splcndore di una na- tura lussurcggiantc che la tribu semita si formo." — Ricerche p-'r h \Studio deir Antichitd Assira. Torino, 1872 : p. 433. 40 PARADISE FOUND. pas, the Shat-en-Nil, and the lower Tigris and Eu- phrates. But despite the conceded abiUty of the plea, there seems at present little prospect that it will secure acceptance among scholars. The distin- guished Theodor Noeldeke, in a recent review, while cordially praising the learning and ingenuity of the work, professes himself unmoved by its arguments.' Similarly a critic in this country writes: "Unfortu- nately for the theory so powerfully advanced, almost all the linguistic evidences by which it is supported are still of doubtful value, the etymology of the Babylonian names in inost cases, and the reading in some, bein'g disputed by high authorities in this ob- scure field of inquiry. Were the linguistic points] proved, it would be hard to '■esist the power of the argument, in spite of various difficulties arising from the scanty text of Genesis itself. As it is, although all other solutions of the knotty Biblical problem may be subject to still graver objections, the follow- ing questions militate too strongly against Professor I Delitzsch's solution : Why, if the stream of Eden bej the middle Euphrates, is it left unnamed in the nar- rative, though it is certain that the Hebrews were I perfectly familiar both with the middle and the up per course of that river.? Why, if the Pison and! Gihon designate the canals Pallacopas and Shat-en- Nil, are they said to compass lands which the canals I only traverse } If the lotvcj' Tigris be meant by the Hiddekel, why is this river described as flowing in | front of Assyria, which lay above the central Meso- 1 " Seine Ansicht zu begriinden wenclet er sehr viel Geiehrsamkeit und noch mehr Scharfsinn auf, aber ich fiirchte umsonst. Nach sur(;v faltiger Priif ung muss ich festhalten an einer Lage des Paradieses in * Utopien,' wie er etwas spottisch sagt." — Zeitschrift der DeiUsckn Morgenldndischen Gesellschafi, 1882, p. 174. wins; in OTHER RESULTS. 41 potamian lowland asserted to be Eden ? How should a writer familiar with the whole course of the Tigris deem its lower part a branch of the Euphrates ? Why should Cush, a name which commonly desig- nated Ethiopia, have been used by the narrator in a sense in which it nowhere else occurs in the Scrip- tures, without the least further definition ? Why, on the other hand, is Havilah, if the Arabian border- land so well known to the Hebrews be meant, so fully described by its products ? Who tells us that the gold, the bdellium, and the shoham of Babylonia were also characteristic of the adjoining Havilah? But whether these objections, in the present stage of Assyriological studies, be fatal to the theory of Professor Delitzsch or not, we have no hesitation in saying that his dissertation, amplified as it is by supplementary treatises on the ancient geography and ethnology of the Mesopotamian and neighbor- ing countries, of Canaan, Egypt, and Elam, is a per- fect treasury of knowledge, — made most accessible by excellent indexes, — and probably the most bril- liant production in all Biblico-Assyriological litera- ture." 1 At the present writing, the latest monograph upon the subject is the one just published in the "Revue de I'Histoire des Religions," from the pen of M. Beauvois.2 This locates the Eden of ethnic tra- ditions in America, and ascribes to the Keltic race 1 The Nation. New York, Mar. 15, 1883. See Lenormanl's criti- cisms in Les Origines de V Histoirc, torn. ii. ; and Ilalevy's in the Revue Critique, Paris, 188 1, pp. 457-463, 477-485- - "L'Elysee Transatlantique ct I'Eden Occidental," par E. Reau- [vois. Revue, Paris, 18S3, pp. 273 ss. See also " L'Elysee des Mexi- cains compare a celui des Celtes," by the same author, in same Re- view, 1S84. I I.i; 42 PARADISE FOUND. no small influence upon the Greco-Roman mythol- ogy in the development of such ideas as those per- taining to the Gardens of the Hespcrides, the Isles of the Blessed, etc. The site advocated is not new, though the line of argument is fresh and scholarly. The hypothesis that the cradle of the race is to be sought in America has before found advocacy at the hands of J. Klaproth, Gobineau, and others. That this, however, is not to be the last and only word on the subject is evident from the fact that, in a huge work just from the press, an English writer says : " If there be an earthly original for the heav- enly Eden, it will be found in equatorial Africa, the land of seething, swarming, multitudinous, and co- lossal life, where the mother nature grew great with her latest race ; the lair in which the lusty breeder brought forth her black, barbarian brood, and put forth for them such a warm, welling bosom as can- not be paralleled elsewhere on earth. This was the world of wet and heaven of heat ; the land of equal day and dark ; that supplied the Two Truths of Uarti (Egyptian) ; the top of the world ; the very nipple {Kepa) of the breast of earth, which is there one vast streaming fount of moisture quick with life. So surely as a topographical Meru is found in Habesh, so surely is the Earthly Paradise, the original of the mythical which was carried forth over the world by the migrations from Kam, to he found there, if at all." ^ ^ The Natural Genesis, containing an attempt to recover and recon- stitute the lost Origins of the Myths and Mysteries, Types and Sym- bols, Religion and Language, with Egypt for the mouthpiece, and Af- rica as the birthplace. By Gerald Massey. London, 1S83 : vol. ii., p. 162. It is impossible to understand how Mr. Massey reconciles the foregoing language with that used on p. 28 of the same volume, where OTHER RESULTS. 43 In fine, so resultlcss seem all discussions and in- vestigations in this field that in his work on *' The Patriarchs of Humanity" Dr. Julius Grill, like Noel- dcke, prefers to locate lost Paradise " in Utopia," and to deny to it all historic reality.^ Evidently the naturalists and the ethnologists, the comparative mythologists, and Kuiturgcschichischiribn', have not yet solved the problem. Their '• mother-region " of the human race is as elusive and Protean as are any of the terrestrial Edens of theology, or of legend, or of poetry. Thus far, then, all search has been fruitless. Par- adise is indeed lost. The explorer cannot find it ; the theologian, the naturalist, and the archaeologist have all sought it in vain. Representative voices out of every camp are heard confessing utter igno- rance as to the region where human history began. "The problem," says Professor Ebers, "remains un- answered." he speaks of the crooked sword Khepsh, " that turned every way, and by its revolution formed the circle of Eden, or, as it was represented, kept the way of the Tree of Life, the Pole, where the happy garden was ])1 anted as the primary creation, which was the home of the pri- meval pair." But in the language of The N^ation (June 26, 1884) the work is *' an enormous conglomeration of facts set down with en- tire indifference to scientific principles of comparison, . . . and, as far as the author's aim is concerned, absolutely worthless." 1 " Der Ort, wohin die althebraische Ueberiieferung die Wiege des Menschengeschlechtcs verlegt . . . ist also nicht auf der Erde gele- gen, und gehort dem I'creich der Wirklichkeit nicht an." — Grill, Die Enviiter der MenschheU. Leipzig, 1875 : Abth. L, p. 242. a;" Chap. I. THE HYPO II. ITS EFFEC PART SECOND. A NEW HYPOTHESIS. Chap. I. THE HYPOTHESIS AND ITS ADMISSIBILITY. II. ITS EFFECT UPON THE PROBLEM AND ITS SOLUTION. When Newton said " Hypotheses non finso " he did not mean that he deprived liimsolf of the facilities of investigaiiou afforded by assuming in the first insiancc wiiat he hoped uhiinately to be able to prove. Without siicU assumptions science could never have attained its present state. —John Stuakt Mill. In scientific investigations it is permitted to invent any hypothesis, and if it ex. plains various large and independent classes of facts it rises to the rank of a well. grounded theory. — Charles Dakwin. CHAPTER I. THE HYPOTHESIS. The golden guess Is morning star to the full round of truth, Tennyson. From the foregoing chapters it would seem as if nearly every imaginable site for the Gan-Eden of I Genesis had been proposed, examined, and found un- avaihible. One, however, remains, — a region of rar- est interest in astronomical, physical, and historical geography, — the natural centre of the only historic hemisphere. Considering the fascination of the sub- Iject and the inexhaustible ingenuity that has been lexpcnded upon it, it seems remarkable that it should [be left to the closing years of the nineteenth cen- Itury to bring forward and seriously to test the prop- losition THAT THE CRADLE OF THE HUMAN RACE, ItIU: 1U)EN of PRIMITIVE TRADITION, WAS SITUATED L\T THE North Pole, in a country submerged [at the time of the Deluge.^ 1 As to the alleged " newness " of the above hypothesis, it is proper to say that something like a year elapsed after its full accept- ance and public announcement by the writer before he could find any evidence that it had ever been entertained or advocated by any other person, lie then met with the allusion in the passage quoted from fcishop Iluet as a motto to chapter second of the preceding part, and witli a similar allusion in an anonymous article in Dickens' All \lie Year Round. Whether these were more than rhetorical flourishes pe was long in doubt. Not until after the manuscript of the present vork had been completed, packed, and addressed to the publishers, 48 PARADISE FOUND. This is the hypothesis which it is proposed in the following pages to examine and according to the evidences to adjudge. We propose to make the test both strict and comprehensive. Hypotheses, how- ever promising, must be brought face to face with reality. Ours, like its numberless predecessors, must be rejected if the solid facts of any of the ful- lowing sciences show that it is inadmissible : — 1. General Gcogony, or the science of the origin of the earth ; 2. Mathematical or Astronomical Geography y par- ticularly its teachings as to the inhabitableness or uninhal3itableness of the circumpolar region with respect to light ; 3. Physiographical Geology, particularly its teach- ings as to the probability or improbability of the former existence and subsequent submersion of a circumpolar country ; 4. Prehistoric Climatology, particularly with ref- erence to the temperature at the Pole at the time of the beginning of human history ; 5. Paleofztological Botany ; 6. Paleontological Zoology ; 7. Paleontological Anthropology and Ethnology, and 8. Comparative Mythology, viewed as the science I was the doubt resolved by finding in an anonymous English magazine article of more than thirty years ago this brief statement : " Pasteilus [ will have it that Paradise was under the North Pole." Who Pastes lus was and what he wrote ujjon the subject remain to be investigated! Suffice to say that up to the date of this writing the author has foupjl no book or tractate in which the above hypothesis has ever beral advocated. This fact renders some of the mottoes prefixed tu tlit I chapters farther on remarkably significant and impressive. In mainl cases their authors express truths which they themselves did noti perceive. PROPOSED HYPOTHESIS. 49 of the oldest traditionary beliefs and memories of mankind. On the contrary, if the hypothesis is ca- pable of meeting this eightfold test, and especially if we can show, not only that it is admissible, but also that in greater or less degree it is supported by the positive evidence of the facts in nearly all of these fields of knowledge, we shall afford a much more complete and convincing verification than is at all usual in matters of prehistoric research. CHAPTER 11. IMPORTANT NEW FEATURES AT ONCE INTRODUCED INTO THE PROBLEM OF THE SITE OF EDEN. SIG- NIFICANCE OF THESE FOR A VALID SOLUTION. It appears, then, to be a condition of a geuuincly icientific hypothesis that it be not destined always to remain an hypotiiesis, but be certain to be either proved or disproved by that comparison with observed /acts which is termed verificatio7t. . . . Verification is proof I if the supposition accords with the phenomena there ncedi no other evidence of it. — John Stuart Mill. It is evident, on a moment's thought, that our hypothesis immediately and materially modifies the whole problem of the location of Paradise. Given a prehistoric circumpolar continent at the North Pole as the cradle of the race, what must have been marked and memorable features of that primitive abode .'' 1. To the first men there would have been but one day and one nignt in a year. 2. The stars, instead of seeming to rise and set, would have had an apparently horizontal motion round and round the observer from left to right. 3. The Pole, the unmoving centre-point of the heavens directly overhead, would naturally have seemed to be the top of the world, the true heaven, the changeless ocat of the supreme, all-ruling God, And if, accordingly, through all the long lifetime of the ante-diluvian world, the circumpolar sky was to human thought the true abode of God, the oldest post-diluvian peoples, though scattered down the EFFECT ON PROBLEM AND ITS SOLUTION. 5 I ODUCin NT, SIG- lON. is that it !■■ Ication. ■ there «<,,.. hat our fies the at the it must of that sen but .nd set, motiuii :ht. of the t y have leavLMi, g G(h1. ime ot was to oldest ^vn the sides of the globe half or two thirds the distance to the equator, could not easily have forgotten that at the centre and true top of the rotating sky was the throne of its great Creator, and that there, in the far North, was " the sacred quarter " of the world. 4. Standing at the Pole of the earth, an observer would be not only directly under the centre of the celestial hemisphere, but also directly on the centre of the surface of the terrestrial hemisphere. There, and there alone, the heavenly bodies would move, in horizontal planes, round and round him every- where at an apparently equal distance, and he would seem to himself to stand on the one precise centre- point of the entire earth. Every departure of a few miles in any direction from this polar position would at once confirm this first impression. If, therefore, primeval Eden was at the Pole, the descendants of the first man, going away from such an orip;inal country, could hardly have failed to remember it as the centre of all lands, the omphalos of the whole earth. 5. Supposing the first man to have been located in the central and most elevated portion of the hy- pothetical Eden-land, the streams there originating and flowing seaward would have flowed, not in one but in various opposite directions toward all the car- dinal points of the horizon. Moreover, all of these streams being obviously fed, not by each other but by the rain from heaven, it would not have required a very powerful imagination to conceive of them as parts of a finer and more celestial stream whose head-springs were in the sky.^ If, finally, the streams ' Ciinipare the poetic representatit)n of "the river ot God," in Ps. Ixv. 9, 10. Also the following : " Aristotle, I remember, in his Me- 52 PARADISE FOUND. flowing in the opposite directions grew at length into four opposite-flowing rivers, — Jlmnina principalia, as many old theologians have called them, — dividing the circumpolar land into four nearly equal quarters, it would have constitutetl a never-to-hc-furgottcii feature of that first home of men. 6. In another chapter we shall expose the base- lessness of the popular impression that at the Pole six months of every twelve are spent in darkness, and shall show that, on the contrary, less than one fifth of the year is so spent, while more than four fifths are spent in light. This being true, a primi- tive abode in that part of the world would have been remembered by the descendants of the first man as preeminently a land of beauty, — preeminently the home of the sun. Moreover, Arctic explorers find it impossible to describe the nocturnal splendors of the Aurora Borealis in those regions, — the whole top of the globe ofttimes seeming veiled in and over-canopied with quivering curtains and banners and streamers of living, leaping flame ; — it is there- fore easy to believe that, once exiled from such a home, mankind would ever have looked back to it as to an abode of unearthly and preternatural efful- gence, — a home fit for the occupancy of gods and holy immortals. 7. Finally, assuming the prevalence of an equahic tropical temperature, we find the biological conditions of the region — such as the extraordinary preva- lence of daylight, the intenser terrestrial magnetism, teor , speaking of the course of the Vapours, saith, there is a River in the Air, constantly flowing betwixt tl'.e Heavens and the Laitli, made by the ascending and descending Vapours." — hxirnet, Sacfid Theoy of the Earth, p. 226. and the Norther probabil posed e: \ surpass and faun of devel< selves m longevit} (lestroye diately 01 the seed cold antl ern Temj the statu how certa the memc earlier anc| Glancin instantly , man existi as we kno^ are called ill the prof site of Ede exposed its e\-er before mcnt of bo required, ir wide a con( has it ever courses to i dition shac which have I ! >uch a i o it as ^^ elTul- 1 Is and Wk. q 11 able ditions prcva- F let ism, a Uiver 2 E;irili, w'^ :, Suc/cd EFFECT ON PROBLEM AiYD ITS SOLUTION. 53 and the unparalleled electric forces which feed the Northern Lights — all combining to raise a high probability t!iat if ever such a land as we have sup- posed existed, it must have presented forms of life surpassing those with which we are familiar ; a flora and fauna of almost unimagined vigor and luxuriance of development. Under such conditions men them- selves may' well have had a stature and strength and longevity never attained since the Deluge, which destroyed " the world that then was," and imme- diately or ultimately occasioned the translocation of the seed of our new post-diluvian humanity into the cold and barren and desolate regions of the North- ern Temperate zone. And if the first men were of the stature and strength and longevity supposed, how certainly would traditions of the fact linger in the memory of mankind long after its exile from its earlier and happier homo ! Glancing back now over these various points, one instantly sees that they present conditions of hu- man existence totally unlike the conditions of life as we know it, or as it has ever been known in what are called historic ages. They necessarily modify in the profoundest manner the whole problem of the site of Eden. No solution ever heretofore presented exposed itself to refutation at so many points. None ever before postulated so extraordinary an adjust- ment of both heavens and earth. None ever before required, in order to its establishment, so incredibly wide a concurrency of testimony. Against no other has it ever been possible for the very stars in their courses to fight. If false, it demands of human tra- dition shadowy recollections of world -conditions which have never existed in human experience. An Li :! uJkk I 54 PARADISE FOUND. hypothesis so peculiarly difficult must surely break down, if it be not true. Promising the reader, there- fore, not a new ignis-fatuus chase, but at least the satisfaction of a definite result as respects one hy- pothesis, we cordially invite his critical and patient attention to the facts to be presented in the follow- ing chapters. PART THIRD. THE HYPOTHESIS SCIENTIFICALLY TESTED AND CONP^IRMED. CHAT. I. THE TESTIMONY OF SCIENTIFIC GEOGONY. II. THE TESTIMONY OF ASTRONOMICAL GEOGRAPHY. III. THE TESTIMONY OF PHYSIOGRAPHICAL GEOLOGY. IV. THE TESTIMONY OF PREHISTORIC CLIMATOLOGY. V. THE TESTIMONY OF PALEONTOLOGICAL BOTANY. VI. THE TESTIMONY OF PALEONTOLOGICAL ZOOLOGY. VII. THE TESTIMONY OF PALEONTOLOGICAL ANTHROPOL- OGY AND ETHNOLOGY. VIII. CONCLUSION OF THIS PART. "Zsli a. J ol^ f:j7 UJ THE TES 1 It follows . . . that man, issuing from a "mother-region " still undetermined, but which a number of considerations indicate to have been in the North, has radiated in several directions ; that his migrations have been constantly from North to South. — M. LE Marquis G. dh ^hvowvhy'iw Popular Science Vl/ow/A/y, October, 1883, p. 753- Eine jede Reise, welche nach der eisumgiirteten Inselwelt im Norden Amerikas unternommen wurde, weiss von Anzeichen der ehomaligen Anwesenheit eines V\>lkus zu erzahlen, welches Lander bewohnte, die heute kein menschliclier Fuss nichr zii betreten scheint. — Dr. F. Boas, in Zeitschri/t der Gesellschaft fiir Erdkundi' in Berlin, Bd. xviii. (1883), p. u8. CHAPTER I. THE TESTIMONY OF GEOGONY, OR THE SCIENCE OF THE ORIGIN OF THE EARTH. Les lots ghierales de la gioghiie favor isent cPune /ai;oH reniarquable I'hypothise doiU nous venons d'cbaticher Ics traits. — Count Sai-okta. Could it once be proven that the Arctic termi- nus of the earth has always been the ice-bound re- gion which it now is, and which for thousands of years it has been, it would of course be useless to entertain for a moment the hypothesis that the cra- dle of the human race was there located. Prob- ably the popular impression that from the beginning of the world the far North has been the region of unendurable cold has been one of the chief reasons why our hypothesis is so late in claiming attention. At the present time, however, so far as this difficulty is concerned, scientific studies have abundantly pre- pared the way for the new theory. That the earth is a slowly cooling body is a doc- trine now all but universally accepted. In saying this we say nothing for or against the so-called neb- ular hypothesis of the origin of the world, for both friends and foes of this un proven hypothesis believe in what is termed the secular cooling or refrigera- tion of the earth. Ai^ authorities in this field hold and teach that the time was when the slowly solid- ifying planet was too hot to support any form of life, and that only at some particular time in the cooling all ■:j2 III 58 PARADISE FOUXD. process was there a temperature reached which was adapted to the necessities of living things. On what portion of the earth's surface, now, would tills temperature first be reached ? Or would it everywhere be reached at the same time ? These are most interesting questions, and the writer has often marveled that in scientific treatises on the cooling globe he could nowhere find them formally discussed. Granting, however, a uniform interior heat and a uniform loss of it in the mode of superficial radiation in all directions into space, it is certain that if these were the only factors in the problem the cooling process would affect every part of the surface in a uniform manner, and we might confidently infer that the temperature com- patible with organic life was reached at the same time at all points of the earth's surface. But tlie factors named are not the only ones of the problem. In those far-off geologic ages the heat received from the great central furnace of our system, tlie sun, cannot have been less than at the present time. Some astronomers and geologists claim that it was greater.^ In any case, therefore, as early as the time when the earth's atmosphere became penetrable by the rays of the sun, local differences of temperature must have been produced at the base of the atmos- phere, whether the body of the globe was as yet crusted over or not. Then as now, viewed apart from air and water currents, every particular spot on the surface of the globe must have had a tempera- ture determined, first by the fixed and uniform in- herent heat of the earth-mass, and secondly by the varying quantity of heat received from the sun. But 1 See Wincliell, World-Life, pp. 484-490. the diffe point un at the po at the pi y of the eqi '"' ot the sui to which which fir: lite. The been cool( the teachi the conclii polar regie The bea is at once question : Eden adm carLh alone ably at one upon the s been anywl niciit, ho we ha\-e been ^ surface suf of Eden life ^ The simila; were unknown ■ I'lwing : Die h sell aft. I\[it ,iet /■.'///;'■ (kr Welt t »/'■, I •'^7 2. Die auf allot A\itm latest work, Phy kriisft' Hinl dcr j iiition of the trui THE TESTIMONY OF GEOGONY. 59 the difference between the solar heat received at a point under the equator and that received at a point at the pole cannot have been less in those ages than at the present time ; and this incessant increment of the equatorial heat of the earth by the direct rays of the sun suggests at once the portions of the globe tn which we must look if we would find the regions which first became cool enough to sustain organic life. Then as now the polar regions must have been cooler than the equatorial, and hence, as far as the teachings of theoretical geogony can be trusted, the conclusion is inevitable that there, to wit, in the polar regions, life first became possible.^ The bearing of this result upon our central thesis is at once obvious. We asked the geologist this question : " Is the hypothesis of a primeval polar Eden admissible .-* " Looking at the slowly cooling cailh alone, he replies, '* Eden conditions have prob- ably at one time or another been found everywhere upon the surface of the earth. Paradise may have p been anywhere." Looking at the cosmic environ- II mcnt, however, he adds, " But while Paradise may have been anywhere, the first portions of the earth's surface sufficiently cool to present the conditions of Eden life were assuredly at the Poles." 1 The similar or identical reasonings of Professor Philip Spiller were unknown to me when the foregoing was written. See the fol- lowing : Die Weltschopfnng voni Standpiinkte der heutigen IVissen- schaft. Mit iieuen Uiitersitchiingen, iS68, 2d ed., 1873. Die Entste- gl, Inui'^ der Welt tind die Einhcit der NaturJa-dfte. Popiddre Kosmogo- nit\ 1S72. Die Urkraft des Welialls fiac/'i ihrem Wesen und IVirken auf alien A\iturgef>ieten. Berlin, 1879. In Professor Otto Kuntze's latest \v(irk, riiytogcogenesis : Die voriveltliche Entzvickelunq der Erd- hnisti' und der Pflanzeii, Lcipsic, 1884,! also find traces of a recog- nition uf the truth above set forth. See pp. 51, 52, 53, 60, of the work. CC-j f- CHAPTER II. THE TESTIMONY OF ASTRONOMICAL GEOGRAPHY. Tlie nights are never so dark at the Pole as in other regions, for the vioon anl star', seem to possess twice as much light atid effulgence. In addition, there /- <; continuous light in the North, the varied shades and play of which are amon^U the strangest phenomena of nature. — Rambosson's Astronomy. The fact which gives the phenomenon of the polar aurora its greatest iiitpor. tancc is that the earth becomes self-luminous ; that, besides ihe lii^ht which us a planet it receives front the central body, it shows a capability of sustaining a lih minous process proper to itself. — Humuoldt. We are apt to think of an unbroken night of six months at the Pole. Eminent scientific authorities speak as if this conception were correct. Thus Pn> fessor Geikie, in his admirable new manual of Geol- ogy, writing of the Arctic flora of the Miocene age, says, "When we remember that this vegetation grew luxuriantly within 8° 15' of the North Pole, ift a region which is in darkness for half of the year, ... we can realize the difficulty of the problem in the distribution of climate which these facts present to the geologist." ^ In like manner Sir Charles Lyell, discussing the question of the possibility of whales reaching the supposed open sea at the Pole, says, '* They could pass under considerable barriers of ice, provided there were openings here and there ; and so they may, perhaps, reach a more open sea near the Pole, 1 Text-book of Geology. By Archibald Geikie, LL. D., F. R. S. London, 18S2 : p. 869. TESTIMONY OF ASTRONOMICAL GEOGRAPHY. 6 1 and find sustenance there (lurin;^ a day of more than Jive months' duration." ^ From such representations as these the reader naturally carries away the impression that dayl.,L;ht lasts at the Pole somewhat over five months, while all the rest of the year the region is shrouded in darkness. Were this true, it would certainly be an unpromisini; region in which to search for the ter- restrial Paradise. Fortunately for our hypothesis, this conception of the duration of the polar night is ver}- far fiom true. The half yearly reign of darkness exists only in the uninstructed imagination. Astronomical geograjihy teaches that, as respects daylight, the jK)lar regions are and always have been the most favored portions of the globe. As early a popularizer of natural sci- ence as the Rev. Thomas Dick set forth the real facts as follows : " Under the Poles, where the dark- ness of night would continue six months without in- termission if there were no refraction, total dark- ness does not prevail one half of this period. When the sun sets at the Noi th Pole, about the 23d of September, the inhabitants (if any) enjoy a perpet- ual aurora till he has descended eighteen degrees below the horizon. In his course through the eclip- tic, the sun is two months before he can reach this point, during which time there is a perpetual twi- light. In two months more he arrives again at the same point, namely, eighteen degrees below the ho- rizon, when a new twilight commences, which is continually increasing in brilliancy for other two months, at the end of which the body of this lumi- nary is seen rising in all its glory. So that in this 1 Principles of Geology, New York ed., vol. i., p. 246. V.^A CC;M a:-'! III ! I i ^. IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) k A A t/j i/.. 1.0 !|i^ li£ I.I ■^ 1^ •UbU lAO I 2.0 IIJI HE u 1 1.6 $s p^ v Photographic Sciences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. US80 (716) 472-4S03 'S.^ 62 PARADISE FOUND. region the light of day is enjoyed in a greater or less degree for ten months, without interruption hy the effects of atmospheric refraction ; and durini; the two months when the influence of the solar light is entirely withdrawn, the moon is shining above the horizon for two half months without intermission ; and thus it happens that no more than two separate fortnights are passed in total darkness, and this darkness is alleviated by the light of the stars and the frequent coruscations of the Aurora Borealis. Hence it appears that there are no portions of our globe which enjoy throughout the year so large a portion of the solar light as these northern re- gions." ^ Striking as is this account of the polar day, it is noteworthy that experience has repeatedly shown that the actual duration of light in high latitudes exceeds even the calculations of the astronomers. Thus, in the spring of 1873, the officers of the Aus- trian expedition, under Lieutenants Weyprecht and Payer, were surprised to behold the sun three days before the date on which he was expected to rise. A late writer thus states the case : " In the latitude (79° 15' N.) in which the Tegethoff was lying, the sun ought to reappear above the horizon on the 19th of February ; but, owing to an effect of refraction, due to the low temperature prevailing, — 30° R., the explorers were able to salute its rays three days ear- iier. ^ Lieutenant Payer's own account is as follows : "Though the sun did not return to our latitude {'j'b' 1 Works of Thomas Dick, LL. Z>., The Practical Astronomer, cli. iL Hartford, vol. ii., second half, p, 30. 2 Recent Expeditions in Eastern Polar Seas. London, 1882 : p. S3. TESTIMONY OF ASTRONOMICAL GEOGRAPHY. 63 15' N., 71° 38' E. lonf;.) till the 19th of February, wo were able to greet his beams three days previous to that date, owing to the strong refraction of 1° 40' which accompanied a temperature of — 30" R." ^ Still more remarkable was the experience of Ba- rentz's Arctic expedition, almost three hundred years a.Gjo. Dr. Dick alludes to it as follows: "The re- fractive power of the atmosphere has been found to be much greater, in certain cases, than what has now been stated. In the year 1595 [1596-97] a company of Dutch sailors having been wrecked on the shores of Novaia Zemlia, and having been obliged to remain in that desolate region during a night of more than three months [it was a little less than three months], beheld the sun make his appearance in the horizon about sixteen days before the time in ivJiicJi he should have risen according to calculation, and when his body was actually more than four de- grees below the horizon." The only explanation of this astonishing phenomenon which the same writer offers is found in this appended clause, — " which circumstance has been attributed to the great refrac- tive power of the atmosphere in those intensely cold regions." This is so unsatisfactory that not a few prefer to believe, what seems entirely incredible, namely, that Barentz and his men in the short space of less than three months made a blunder of sixteen days in their time record. Professor Nordenskjold has recently referred to the case as follows : " On the V' November the sun disappeared and was again visible on the i^^.. These dates have caused scientific men much per- plexity, because, in latitude ^6° North, the upper ^ N^ew Lands within the Arctic Circle. Lond. 1S76 : vol. i., p. 237. *.!- CZ;'i — ^ * 1 h-: UJ 64 PARADISE FOUND. edge of the sun ouj;ht to have ceased to be visible when the sun's south declination in autumn became greater than 13°,^ and to have become visible again when the declination again became less than tliat figure ; that is to say, the sun ought to have been seen for the last time at Barentz's Ice Haven on the fj^ October, and it ought to have appeared again there on the "ij; Feb. It has been supposed that tho deviation arose from a considerable error in count- ing the days, but this was unanimously denied by the crew who wintered." - In a foot-note he gives proofs which seem convincing that no such error can have been committed. But while these experiences of Barentz and tlie Austrians point to a duration of darkness at the Pole of less than sixty days out of the three hundred and sixty-five, some apparently good authorities ex- tend the period to seventy-six or seventy-seven davs. Thus Captain Bedford Tim, of the Royal Navy u[ Great Britain, makes the following statement: "On the 1 6th of March the sun rises, preceded by a Ion;; dawn of forty-seven days, namely, from the 29th 01 January, when the first glimmer of light appears. On the 25th of September the sun sets, and after a twilight of forty-eight days, namely, on the 13th of November, darkness reigns supreme, so far as the sun is concerned, for seventy-six days, followed by one long period of light, the sun remaining above the horizon one hundred and ninety-four days. The year, therefore, is thus divided at the Pole: 194 days sun ; 'j6 darkness ; 47 days dawn ; 48 twilight." ^ 1 On the assumption of a horizontal refraction of about 45'. 2 The Voyage of the Vega. London, 18S2 : p. 192. 8 Pirn's Marine Pocket Case: quoted in Kinn's Harmony of thi Bible with Science. London, 1S82 : 2d ed., p. 474. TESTIMONY OF ASTRONOMICAL GEOGRAPHY. 65 Even according to this account we should have at the Pole only "jd days of darkness to 289 days of IJL^lit in the year. In other words, instead of being in darkness little short of half of the time, as at the equator, one would be in darkness but about one fourth of the time. As far as light is concerned, therefore, even on this calculation the polar region is twice as favorable to life as any equatorial region that can be named. Jkit whence this discrepancy among the astrono- mers } Why shoulil some of them make the polar night sixteen days longer than others .'' The simple answer is that they proceed upon dif- ferent assumptions as to atmospheric refraction in the region of the Pole. In our latitude twilight is usually reckoned to begin when the centre of the rising sun is yet 18° below the horizon. Starting with this as the limit, and counting sunrise and sun- set to be the moments when the sun's upper limb is on the horizon, we arrive at the division of the polar year given by Captain Pim. But astronomers say that in England twilight has been observed when the sun was 21° below the horizon. To be entirely safe some have therefore taken 20° as the limit of solar depression, and reckoning with this datum, in- stead of the 18° before mentioned, have found that at the Pole the morning twilight would begin Jan- uary 20th, and the evening twilight would cease No- vember 2 1st. This would make the period of dark- ness but 60 days, and the period of light 305. Thus a difference of only two degrees in the assumed limit of solar depression at the beginning and end of the twilights makes the difference of sixteen days in the supposed duration of darkness. " Which of 5 U%:. 66 PARADISE FOUND. the two calculations," writes an eminent American mathematician, "is the more correct is known, I im- agine, by no one." ^ To us in the present discussion the discrepancy is of very little moment. It is only a question as to whether at the Pole there is daylight three fourths or five sixths of the year. Both suppositions may be and probably are wrong. For if "in tropical climates i6° or 17° is said to be a sufficient allow- ♦ ance for the extreme solar depression, while, on tlie other hand, it is said in England to vary from 17° to 2i°," it certainly looks as though in yet higher lati- tudes the light of the sun might be discernible when its body is as much as 23° or 24° below the horizon ; and this would reduce the annual polar darkness to less than fifty days. This supposition is rendered the more probable by the fact that, while the ex- peditions already alluded to found much more of daylight than their astronomical calculations had led them to expect, we have no offsetting accounts where the sun was awaited in vain. The final and authoritative settlement of the question can be reached only by actual observation. Among the fascinating problems whose solution awaits the progress of Arctic exploration, we must therefore place the scientific determination of the unknown duration of the polar day. In view of the foregoing we are certainly safe in conceiving of the polar night as lasting not over four fortnights. During two of these, as Dick re- minds us, the moon would be walking in beauty 1 Professor J. M. Van Vleck, LL. I)., of Wesleyan Universitv, in a letter to the author under date of Octol^er ii, 1883. Professor Van Vleck was formany years dicollahorafcur upon the American Ephonc- ris and N'autical Almanac. He is the authority for the next quoted statement. TESTIMONY OF ASTRONOMICAL GEOGRAPHY. 6"/ / through the heavens, and exhibiting all her changing phases of loveliness in unbroihe- 1 the tiip (. C(im- ;. IL NIGHT SKIES OF EDEN, All aciiuil Auii.iu liurcilis, CX-: f-. 11 Ji <&■> i:l TEST of our b tempt a which al dawns ai tra)- it. us such I'^irst sky a scL makes a alter a li moving li ty-lour he around tl of stars t( tlie lustre its statcl) into rudtb Day after panorama conditions conditions and fades, brightly, a nearer his two lonq; n fillinj;- the revolving i his long ] more to h during whi orbed disk, zon, and fi around the no night to TESTIMONY OF ASTRONOMICAL GEOGKA/'/fV. 69 of our brief and ^vancsccnt day-dawns, who shall at- tcmi)t a description of that siirjiassin*,^ spectacle in wliich all the splendors and loveliness of sixty of our dawns arc combined in one. No words can ever por- tray it. No poet's imagination, even, has ever j^iven us such unearthly scenery. iMrst of all appears low in the horizon of the nijj^ht- sky a scarcely visible flush of light. At first it only makes a few stars' light seem a trifle fainter, but after a little it is seen to be increasing, and to be moving laterally along the yet dark horizon. Twen- ty-lour hours later it has made a complete circuit ari)und the observer, and is causing a larger number of stars to pale. Soon the widening light glows with the lustre of " Orient pearl." Onward it moves in its stately rounds, until the pearly whiteness burns into ruddy rose-light, fringed with purple and gold. Day after day, as we measure days, this splendid panorama circles on, 'and, according as atmospheric conditions and clouds present more or less favorable conditions of reflection, kindles and fades, kindles and fades, — fades only to kindle next time yet more brightly, as the still hidden sun comes nearer and nearer his point of emergence. At length, when for two long months such prophetic displays have been filling the whole heavens with these increscent and revolving splendors, the sun begins to emerge from his long retirement, and to display himself once more to human vision. After one or two circuits, during which his dazzling upper limb grows to full- orbed disk, he clears all hill-tops of the distant hori- zon, and for six full months circles around and around the world's great axis in full view, suffering no night to fall upon his favored home-land at the 70 PARADISE FOUND. Pole. lu'cn when at last he sinks again from v'kw he covers his retreat with a repetition of the deepen- ing and fading splendors which filled his long dawn. ing, as if in these pulses of more and more disl mt light he were signaling back to the forsaken wuiid the promises and prophecies of an early return. In these prosaic sentences we aim at no descrip. tion of the indescribable; we only remind ourselves of the bald facts and conditions which govern the unpicturable transformations of each year-long polar night and day. Knough, however, has been said for our purpose. Who'n'cr seeks as a probable location for Paradise the heavenliest spot on earth with respect to lii;ht and darkness, and with respect to celestial scenery, must be content to seek it at the Arctic Pole, Here is the true City of the Sun. Here is the one and only spot on earth respecting which it would seem as if the Creator had said, as of His own heav- enly residence, "There shall be no night there." \ CHAPTER III. THE TESTIMONY 01- PIIYSIOGRAPIIICAL GKOLOGY. />/(• iirctischc Gcolof^ic birgt die SihlUssel zu LJsuiij^ viekr Kathscl. — Pkokbs- soK Hhik. ,-( ;/ cxtensivt continent occupied this portion of the globe when tfwse strata v>ert deposited. — Haron NoKurcNSKji'im. Our hypothesis calls for an antediluvian conti- nent at the Arctic Pole. It is interesting to find that a writer upon the Deluge writing more than forty years ago advanced the same postulate.^ Is the supposition that there existed such a continent scientifically admissible ? Until very recently too little was known of the geology of the high latitudes to warrant or even to occasion the discussion of such a question. Even now, with all the contemporary interest in Arctic exploration, it is difficult to find any author who has distinctly propounded to himself and discussed the question as to the geologic age of the Arctic Ocean. It will not be strange, therefore, if we have here to content ourselves with showing, first, that geologists 1 " On pent supposer, et je tdcherai de developper cette idee plus tarcl, (111*11 a existe une periode geologiqiie plus recoulee, . . . et qu'^ cettc t poque I'Europe, I'Asie, et I'Amcrique septentrionale se joign- aient au pole nord de maniere h. former un continent d'une etendue prodigeuse, se prolongueant vers le pole sud en trois presqu'iles, sa- voir: I'Amcrique meridionale, I'Afrique, et I'Oceanie. C'est des debris de cet ancien continent que des revolutions violentes ont forme les tcrrcs actuelles." Frederik Klee, Z^ ZPt'/w^v, French ed. Paris, 1847 = P' 83. (Danish original, 1842.) U«. 72 PARADISE FOUND. and paleontologists do not think the present distri- bution of Arctic sea and land to be the prime\al one ; and secondly, that in their opinion, incidentally expressed, a " continent " once existed within the Arctic Circle of which at present only vestiges re- main. We will begin with the distinguished Alfred Rus- sel Wallace, who in speaking of the Miocene period presents us with a very different Northern hemi- sphere from ours of to-day. For instance, in his view Scandinavia was at that time a vast island. lie says : " The distribution of the Eocene and Miocene formations shows that during a considerable portion of the Tertiary period an inland sea, more or less oc- cupied by an archipelago of islands, extended across Central Europe between the Baltic and the Black and Caspian seas, and thence by narrower channels southeastward to the valley of the Euphrates and the Persian Gulf, thus opening a communication between the North Atlantic and the Indian Qccan, From the Caspian also a wide arm of the sea ex- tended, during some part of the Tertiary epoch, northwards to the Arctic Ocean, and there is noth- ing to show that this sea may not have been in existence during the whole Tertiary period. An- other channel probably existed over Egypt into the eastern basin of the Mediterranean and the Black Sea ; while it is probable that there was a communi- cation between the Baltic and the White Sea, leav- ing Scandinavia as an extensive island. Turning to India, we find that an arm of the sea, of great width and depth, extended from the Bay of Bengal to the mouths of the Indus ; while the enormous depression indicated by the presence of marine fossils of Eo- TESTIMONY OF PHYSIOGRAPHICAL GEOLOGY. 71 cene age at a height of 16,500 feet in Western Tibet renders it not improbable that a more direct chan- nel across Afghanistan may have opened a commu- nication between the West Asiatic and Polar seas." * Later, in the same book, Mr. Wallace incidentally shows that the facts of Arctic paleontology call for the supposition of a primitive Eocene continent in the highest latitudes, — a continent which no longer exists. His language is, " The rich and varied fauna which inhabited Europe at the dawn of the Terti- ary period — as shown by the abundant remains of mammalia wherever suitable deposits of Eocene age have been discovered — proves that an extensive Palearctic continent then existed." ^ Another most eminent authority in Arctic pale- ontology, the late Professor Heer, of Zurich, fully fifteen years ago arrived at and published the con- clusion that the facts presented in the Arctic fossils plainly point to the existence in Miocene time of a no longer existing polar continent. Fuller reference to his views will be made in our next chapter.^ On another and more lithological line of evidence Baron Nordenskjold, the eminent Arctic explorer, has arrived at the same conclusion. Speaking of certain rock strata north of the 69th degree of north latitude, he says, *' An extensive continent occupied this portion of the globe when these strata were de- posited." * Elsewhere he speaks of this ** ancient polar continent " as something already accepted and universally understood among scientific men. He ^ Island Life. London, 1880: pp. 184, 185. " Ibid., p. 362. ^ Professor Heer, deceased Sept. 27, 18S3. On the preeminence of his authority in this field, see Nature, Oct. 25, page 612. * Expedition to Greenland. Arctic Manual, London, 1875 : p. 423. CC:' CI 3 C-3" mmn* mm or UJ IM' m 74 PARADISE FOUND. Hi m mi % also alludes to the conspiring evidences of its for- mer existence found in different departments of re- search. " These basalt beds," he remarks, ** prob- ably originated from a volcanic chain, active during the Tertiary period, which perhaps limits the an- cient polar continent, in the same manner as is now the case with the eastern coast of Asia and the western of America ; this confirming the division of land and water in the Tertiary period, which upon totally different grounds has been supposed to have existed." ^ Another authority in this field, writing of the theory that continuous land once connected Europe and North America at the North, remarks, "■\\\ further support of this theory we have the fact that no trace of sea deposit of Eocene age has ever been found in the polar area, all the vestiges of strata remaining showing that these latitudes were then occupied by dry land." ^ Finally, as our assumption of the early existence of a circumpolar Arctic continent is thus supported by most competent geological authority, so is also our hypothesis that its disappearance was due to a submergence beneath the waters of the Arctic Ocean. On this point what could be more explicit and satisfactory than the following, from one of the greatest of living geologists : " We know very well that . . . within a comparatively recent geological period ... a wide stretch of Arctic land, of which Novaia Zemlia and Spitzbergen formed a part, has been submerged." ^ ^ Arctic Manual, p. 420. ^ J. Starkie Gardner in Nature, London, Dec. 12, 1878 : p. 127. 8 James Geikie, LL. D., F. R. S., Prehistoric Europe. A Geo- logical Sketch. London, i88i : p. 41. Compare Louis Falies, Efudei TESTIMONY OF PHYSIOGRAPHICAL GEOLOGY. 75 As to the natural conditions and forces which may be conceived as having brought about this continental catastrophe, geologists are not so well agreed. The French savant^ Alfonse-Joscph Adhe- mar/ has advanced a theory that this North-polar deluge was only one of an alternating series, which in age-long periods recur first at the North and then at the South Pole. Flammarion, writing of it, says : ** This theory depends on the fact of the un^ equal length of the seasons in the two hemispheres. Our autumn and winter last 179 days. In the south- ern hemisphere they last 186 days. This seven days, or 168 hours of difference, increase each year the coldness of the pole. During 10,500 years the ice accumulates at one pole and melts at the other, thereby displacing the earth's centre of gravity. Now a time will arrive when, after the maximum of elevation of temperature on one side, a catastrophe will happen which will bring back the centre of gravity to the centre of the figure, and cause an im- mense deluge. The deluge of the North Pole was 4,200 years ago ; therefore the next will be 6,300 hence." 2 Another recent theory teaches that the poles are periodically deluged, but simultaneously, not in al- ternation. The alternative movement is at the equa- tor. The crust of the earth at the equator is all the time rising or sinking in a kind of aeonian rhythm. historiques et philosophiqnes stir les Civilisations Europeenne, Romaiite, Greque, etc. Paris, 1874: vol. i,, pp. 348-352. 1 In his Rhjolutions de la Mer. 2 ed, i860. 2 Flammarion naturally adds, " It is very obvious to ask on this, Why should there be a catastrophe, and why should not the centre of gravity return gradually, as it was gradually displaced .' " Astronomi' cat Myths, p. 426. But a gradual displacement would produce a del- uge, only a gradual one. CC::! 1 , 1 1 i 76 PARADISE FOUND. Whenever it sinks beyond the equilibrium figure, due to its actual rate of rotation, lands emerge at the poles ; whenever it rises beyond the equilibrium figure, the polar lands sink and are submerged be- neath the waters of the ocean. Professor Alexander Winchell thus expounds the view : "It has been shown that one of the actions of tides upon a plan- etary body tends to diminish its rate of rotation. Correspondingly, its equatorial protuberance will tend to diminish. In the case of a planet still re- taining its liquid condition, the equatorial subsidence will keep nearly even pace with the retardation. To whatever extent viscosity exists, the subsidence will folloiv the retardation. There will exist an ex- cess of protuberance beyond the equilibrium figure due to the actual rotation, and this will act as an additional retardative cause. In the case of an in- crusted and somewhat rigid planet, the excess of ellipticity would attain its greatest value. It would continue to augment until the strain upon the mass should become sufficient to lower the excessive pro- tuberance to the equilibrium figure. The recovery of this figure might take place convulsively. The equatorial regions would then subside, and the polar would rise. In the case of an incrusted planet ex- tensively covered, like the earth, by a film of water, retarded rotation would be attended by a prompt subsidence of the equatorial waters and rise of the polar waters to about twice the same extent. In other words, the equatorial lands would emerge, and the polar lands would become submerged. The amount of emergence would diminish with increase of distance from the equator, and the amount of submergence would diminish with increase of dis- TESTIMONY OF PHYSIOGRAPHICAL GEOLOGY, jy tance from the pole. In about the latitude of 30° the two tendencies would meet and neutralize each other. Under these conditions, an incrusted and ocean-covered planet, since it must be undergoing a process of rotary retardation, must possess the deepest oceans about the poles and the shallowest about the equator. The first emergences of land, accordingly, will take place within the equatorial zone ; and the highest elevations and greatest land areas will exist within that zone. The deviation of ccjuatorial land-masses would interpose new obstruc- tions to the equatorial ocean current. This would divert it in new directions, and thus modify all cli- mates within reach of oceanic influences. Changes of currents would necessitate tlie migration of ma- rine faunas, and changes of climate would modify the faunas and floras of the land. " But the protrusion of the equatorial land-mass could not increase indefinitely. The same central force which retains the ocean continually at the equi- librium figure strains the solid mass in the same di- rection. The strain must at length become greater than the rigidity of the mass can withstand. The equatorial land protuberance will subside toward the level of the ocean. Some parts of the ocean's bottom must correspondingly rise. Naturally, the p:u-ts about the poles will rise most. Thus some ec[uatorial lands will become submerged, and some northern and southern areas may become newly emergent. " But these vertical movements would not be ar- rested precisely at the point of recovery of the equi- librium figure. As suggested by Prof. J. E. Todd, and less explicitly by Sir Wm. Thomson, the move- ■ I. \^ ■ 11: ■••• ,.' I.L J' or UJ iri:: 78 PARADISE FOUND. ment would pass the equilibrium figure to an extent proportional to the cumulation of strain. The equa- torial region would become too much depressed, and the polar regions too much elevated. The effect of this would be to accelerate the rotation sufficiently to neutralize the ceaseless tidal retardation. The day would be shortened. The ocean would rise still higher along the shores of equatorial lands, and sub- side along the shores of polar lands. An extension of polar lands would immediately modify the cli- mates of the higher latitudes. They would become subject to greater extremes. A considerable eleva- tion of polar lands would diminish the mean tem- perature, and the region of perpetual snow would be enlarged. These effects would visit the northern and southern hemispheres simultaneously. " Such effects would follow from an excessive sub- sidence of equatorial lands. But the constant re- tardative action of the tides would cause the equa- torial lands again to emerge, and protrude beyond the limits of the equilibrium figure attained in a later age. Thus the former condition would return, and the former events would be repeated. In the nature of force and matter these oscillations should be repeated many times. Professor Todd suggests that the present terrestrial age is one of equatorial land subsidence and of high latitude emergence. Immediately preceding the present, the Champlain epoch was one of northern and probably of south polar subsidence ; while further back, in the Glacial epoch, we have evidence of northern, and perhaps also south latitude elevation. 1 * World-Life ; or Comparative Geology. 280. Chicago, 1883 : pp. 278- m TESTIMONY OF PHYSIOGRAPHICAL GEOLOGY. 79 Leibnitz, Deluc, and others, have presented a still different view of the etiology of all deluges, accord- ing to which they are the result of a steady shrink- age of the earth in consequence of its secular cool- ing. According to this theory, after once a solid earth -crust had been formed, the cooling nucleus within it withdrew the support on which the crust had rested, in proportion as it shrank away from be- neath it, until, as often as the subterranean voids thus created became too great for the strength of the crust, this of necessity fell in with the force of in- computable tons, carrying the ruined surface to such a depth as to cause it immediately to be overflowed and submerged by the adjacent waters of the ocean. The geologic history of the earth is divided into its strongly marked periods by these successive •' collapsions " of the rocky strata which constituted the primitive crust. " Each succeeding cataclysm," says a recent advocate of the view, " considered as a universal catastrophe, must leave the globe a wreck, like the ruin of some immense cathedral whose dome and arches have fallen in. Cornice and frieze, pillar and entablature, broken and dislocated, lie at all an- gles of inclination and in the utmost confusion. So it is with the ancient rocks and more modern strata. Only to this mighty wreck have been added the out- gushings of molten matter into fissures, creating dikes, and the unsparing movements of oceans sweeping loose materials and perishing forms of all sorts from one place to another, partially covering up and disguising the desolation." Again, the same writer says : " The present sur- face of the earth is comparatively recent. The last great cataclysm is, geologically speaking, not very 1 i ! ! C:3' LLl' ^•« • LJm • ay m So PARADISE FOUND. ancient. Accumulating evidence compels us to be- lieve that one of those destructive events has oc- curred since the human race was created. The fads I have presented plainly indicate that another is in the course of preparation. Each of these vast peri- odical voids between the nucleus and the crust is filled by collapsion of the surface. . . . Thus, if \vc assume that the globe was one hundred or three hundred miles greater in all its diameters when its crust became hard and was bathed with the earliest seas, and when marine plants and trilobites and mol- lusca began to appear, the lithological characteris- tics of the paleozoic ages will be more acceptably deciphered. So successively with the carboniferous periods, whose vast areas have been folded up and overflowed, and whose fields for reproduction ha\c been so numerous and extensive as to convince us that Arctic America, during those remote ages, pre- sented tropical positions to the sun." ^ Although starting with no such purpose, the au- thor, in expounding this general Leibnitzian theory of all deluges, incidentally explains the submersion of the primeval Arctic continent. In accordance with his theory, he asserts that '* the diameter of the earth at the poles must have been at some more an- cient epoch very much greater than now. It must have been more than twenty-seven miles greater to permit such equatorial or tropical exposures to the 1 C. F. Winslovv, M. D., The Cooling Globe, or the Mechanics of Geology. Boston, 1865 : pp. 50, 51. For the latest presentations and criticisms of this general theory, see Winchell's World -Life, 1883, pp. 302-308, and the literature there given. Among the older trea- tises constructed upon it, none is perhaps of so great interest to the general reader as the work on Jhe Deluge, by Fr^derik Klee (Danish 1842, German 1843, French 1847). TESTIMONY OF PHYSlCGRAPIirCAL GEOLOGY. 8 1 sun as we know to be necessary for the production of those vegetable forms which abound in the coal measures of Arctic latitudes.^ If it was fifty or a hundred miles greater during any portion of the carboniferous age, it might have been two hundred during the 'Taconic' period, and perhaps three hun- dred or more when the life-force began to fashion its primordial and rudimentary organisms upon its wait- ing surface." He furthermore distinctly asserts that Sir Isaac Newton's supposed demonstration that the oblateness of the earth's figure is due to the centrif- ugal force generated by its rotation " is an error un- worthy of further consideration among geologists." The true explanation, as he regards it, is stated as follows : " The shorter axes of the globe — what at present are our poles — are not the result of flatten- ing by rotation, but by a sudden falling in of sur- face." 2 Here, of course, is just that down-sinking of wide polar regions, in " comparatively recent " geologic time, demanded by the facts of Arctic geology. It must have been greater than any of those which have occurred in other portions of the globe, for it has permanently modified the originally and natu- rally spherical figure of the earth. The author is "compelled to believe" that it, or one like it, "oc- curred since the human race was created." More- over, this belief is in no wise built upon the Biblical record of the Deluge, for he speaks almost bitterly of " the retarding influence of Jewish legends upon the free expansion of the human intellect," and ^ Dr. Winslow seems here to forget that the primeval polar conti- nent was of necessity the sunniest of all lands. '•^ Ibid., p. 49, 6 = 5'^ £5:;! crj ££ii si: Lii S2 PARADISE FOUND. makes Moses one of the two men whose "declara- tions and authority, more than the statements of all others, have retarded the advancement of general knowledge." Happily for Moses, tiie second in this portentous duumvirate is no worse a man than Sir Isaac Newton ! It is by no means necessary to commit ourselves to any one of these theories of deluges, or to seek still other explanations of the recognized subsidence of the basin now occupied by the Arctic Ocean. Enough for the present that upon the authority of eminent physiographic geologists we have shown : — 1. That the present distribution of land and water within the Arctic Circle is, geologically speaking, of very recent origin. 2. That the paleozoic data of the highest explored latitudes demand for their explanation the hypothe- sis of an extensive circumpolar continent in Mio- cene time. 3. That lithological authorities affirm that such a continent existed. 4. That physical geography has reached the con- clusion that the known islands of the Arctic Ocean, such as Novaia Zemlia and the Spitzbergen, are simply mountain tops still remaining above the sur- face of the sea which has come in and covered up the primeval continent to which they belonged. 5. And finally, that the problem of the process by which this grand catastrophe was brought about is now sporadically engaging the thoughts of terres- trial physicists and geologists.^ 1 See the very interesting paper " On Tce-Age Theories," in Trans- actions of the British Association, 1884, by E. Hill, M. A., F. G. S. Also in the same volume W. F. Stanley's criticism of the theory of Croll. CHAPTER IV. THE TESTIMONY OF PREHISTORIC CLIMATOLOGY. I'er illiiderni, ver magnus agtbat Or bis. — Vergil. One of the most startling' and important of the scientific disc" ^ As Mr. Scribner was conducted to a belief in the north polar origin of all races of living creatures by considera- tions quite independent of those mythological and historical ones which first led the present writer to the same opinion, the reader of these pages will find in the following extracts a special incentive to pro- cure and read the entire treatise from which they are taken. That two minds starting with such en- tirely different data should have reached so nearly simultaneously one and the same conclusion touch- ing so difficult and many-sided a problem is surely not without significance. 1 Published by Charles Scribner's Sons, New York. i2mo, pp.64. Ex-Chancellor Winchell (anonymously) reviews the work with much respect in Science, March 7, 1884, p. 292. For courteous permission to quote from the treatise without restriction I publicly return the author my thanks. r i I ex'' s — • *«. » » Ldma * 104 PARADISE FOUND. ill Our first extract is from pp. 21-23, where the fol- lowing summary of previous reasonings and conclu- sions is given : " We may therefore safely conclude, if the code of natural laws has been uniformly in force, — " First, — That life commenced on those parts of the earth which were first prepared to maintain it ; at any rate, that it never could have commenced elsewhere. " Second, — As the whole earth was at one time too hot to maintain life, so those parts were prob- ably first prepared to maintain it which cooled first. " Third, — That those parts which received the least heat from the sun, and which radiated heat most rapidly into space, in proportion to mass, and had the thinnest mass to cool, cooled first. " Fourth, — That those parts of the earth's sur- face, and those only, answering to these conditions are the Arctic and Antarctic zones. " Fifth, — That as these zones were at one time too hot, and certain parts thereof are now too cold, for such life as inhabits the warmer parts of the earth, these now colder parts, in passing from the extreme of heat to the extreme of cold, must have passed slowly through temperatures exactly suited to all plants and all animals in severalty which now live or ever lived on the earth. " Sixth, — If the concurrent conditions which have usually followed lowering temperature followed the climatic changes in this case, life did commence on the earth within one or both of certain zones sur- rounding the poles, and sufficiently removed there- from to receive the least amount of sunlight neces- sary for vegetal and animal life. CONCLUSION OF PART THIRD. 105 " It seems almost superfluous to say that those parts of the earth which first became cool enough to maintain life had a climate warmer at that time than that which we now call torrid. It was for an epoch, and probably a very long one, as hot as it could be and maintain life. " It is also quite obvious, in the light of the fore- going considerations, that as the- temperate zones have always received more heat from the sun, and have had more mass per square foot to cool, in pro- portion to radiating surface, than the polar zones, so, on the other hand, they have always received less heat from the sun and have had less mass to cool, in proportion to radiating surface, than the torrid zone ; and so when the arctic zones cooled from a tropical to what we now call a temperate cli- mate, the temperate zones had cooled down to that temperature which we now call a torrid climate, while the equatorial belt was still too hot for any form of life. Thus the lowering of temperature, climatic change, and that life which made its advent in these zones surrounding the poles have crept thence slowly along, pari passtt, from these polar regions to the equator." Farther on (pp. 26, 27) he claims that the progres- sive cooling of the region at the Pole is all-sufficient, as a natural cause, to account for that dispersion of life, vegetable and animal, which proceeded from the Arctic centre southward : " As might be readily sup- posed, these Arctic regions which first became cool enough to maintain life would from the same causes be the first to become too cold for the same pur- pose. And this cold would occur first as a temper- ate climate near and around the pole ; at any rate, •ti't|W;| J!l •*» » or 'La. J io6 PARADISE FOUND. in the centre of a zone just sufficic i Jy removed from the pole to combine the influence of the sun with its own cooling temperature, so as to become the first fit habitation of life. " This central cold creating a temperate climate would thus have become the first and all-sufBcient cause of a dispersion and distribution of both the tropical plants and animals over another zone next south, next further removed from the pole, and next sufficiently cool to maintain such life. Moreover, this cooler climate occurring in the centre would have driven out and dispersed such life equally, in all possible directions. So, if the first habitable zone included the northernmost land of all the great con- tinents which converge around the North Pole, this dispersion from an increasing cold to the north of each of them would have sent southward plants and animals from a common origin and ancestry, to peo- ple and to plant all the continents of the earth, with the possible exception of Australia, whose flora and fauna are certainly anomalous and possibly indige- nous." In section fourth (pp. 28-34) the author briefly touches upon some of the surface features of the globe peculiarly favorable to the southward migra- tion of plants and animals : " Let us now see how admirably the earth is adapted, by its surface forma- tion and topography, for a southern migration from a zone surrounding the North Pole. In the first place, nearly the whole of the earth's surface (and all the northern hemisphere) is corrugated north and south with alternate continents and deep sea chan- nels almost from pole to pole. Both the eastern and western continents extend with unbroken land con- CONCLUSION OF PART THIRD. 107 nections from the Arctic zone through the northern temperate, the torrid, and through the southern temperate, almost to the Antarctic zone. Between these great continents lie the deep oceans, whose channels run north and south through as many de- grees of latitude. The great air and ocean currents run north or south ; all the mountain ranges of the western continent and many of the eastern conti- nents run mainly north and south. Nearly all the great rivers of the northern hemisphere run north or south. To a southern migration — in other words, a migration from the Arctic region toward the equator — these peculiarities of topography, these great corrugations and mountain ranges, these chan- nels and currents, are roads and vehicles, guides and helps ; while to an east and west migration the same features are not only obstacles and hindrances, but in the main barriers insuperable. " The impassability of mountain ranges for most plants is shown by the fact that strongly marked varieties in great numbers and many distinct spe- cies occur upon the eastern slopes of the Rocky Mountains, the Sierra Nevadas, the Alleghanies, and even lower ranges, which are not found at all upon their western sides, and vice versa. Such a condi- tion of things, incompatible as it is with an eastern and western migration, is quite consistent, however, with a north and south movement. For all the cli- matic conditions, especially that of rainfall, are so different on the opposite sides of all long mountain ranges that the same variety, split and separated by the northern extremities of these ranges, would, in moving southward along their eastern and western sides, and encountering such diverse conditions, txu 'C::.3:; €X\\ io8 PARADISE FOUND. have become in the course of time, under the laws of adaptation, distinct varieties, and probably differ- ent species. " It may be well now to examine some of the conditions assisting this movement. Hot air being lighter than cold, the heated air of the northern equatorial belt has always risen and passed mainly toward the North Pole in an upper current, while the cooler and heavier currents from the north have swept southward, hugging the surface of the conti- nents, laded with pollen, minute germs and spores, and all the vy^inged seeds of plants, bending grass and shrubs and trees constantly to the southward, and so, by small yearly increments, moving the whole vegetal kingdom through valleys and along the sides of mountain ranges, down the great continents, al- ways moving with, and never across, these great sur- face corrugations. It is unnecessary to add that all insects and herbivorous animals would follow the plants, or that the birds and carnivorous animals would follow the herbivorous animals and the in- sects. So, too, the currents of the ocean have been established in obedience to similar laws : as hot water is lighter than cold, great surface currents have been formed in both the Atlantic and Pacific oceans, flowing from the equator to the Arctic re- gions ; while the cooler and heavier currents from the Arctic have swept the floor of both oceans from shore to shore to the southward, carrying all kinds of marine life from the pole toward the equator with them. " It may be well in this connection to allude to an- other fact seriously affecting the bottom currents from the pole toward the equator of both air and CONCLUSION OF PART THfRD. 109 ; laws cUffer- of the • being )rthern mainly lile the 1 have 5 conti- sporcs, g grass thvvard, iC whole he sides ents, al- -eat sur- t that all low the animals the in- ,ve been as hot urrents Pacific rctic re- ts from ns from II kinds or with le to an- [urrents lair and ocean. By reason of the revolution of the earth upon its axis, a given point upon its surface 1,000 miles south of the North Pole moves to the eastward at the rate of about 260 miles an hour, while another point in the same meridian at the equator would be moving to the eastward a little more than 1,000 miles an hour ; so every cubic yard of air and water which starts in a bottom current from the polar re- gions for the equator must, before reaching the equator, acquire an eastward motion of about 750 miles an hour. The tendency, therefore, of all bot- tom currents of air and ocean moving to the south is to press to the westward every obstacle met with in its course, and the result, both as to the currents and all movable things they come in contact with, would be to give them a southwestern course and movement. " Now it is a strange coincidence, if nothing more, that the eastern coasts of all the continents have a southwestern trend, are full of bays, inlets, and shoal water, as though the floor of the ocean was being constantly swept up against them ; while the west- ern coasts are more abrupt, straight, and touch deeper water, as though the sweepings from the land were being constantly rolled into the sea along their entire lines. " Notwithstanding all these indications of a southern or southwestern movement, ever since the migration of plants and animals first attracted at- tention, students of natural science, careful and con- scientious observers, able and discriminating inves- tigators, have, almost with one accord, been looking east and west across these great north and south corrugations and natural barriers for the paths of J'' «« :3»» *J »i " ■■ % no PARADISE FOUND. their journey ings ; searching along every parallel of latitude, across lofty mountain ranges, broad con- tinents, deep and wide oceans, and ocean currents, to and fro ; and if perchance they looked north or south it was only in search of some ferry or ford south of the ice-fields by which to pass the flora and fauna from one continent to another, and thus ac- count for what is very evident, namely, that many widely distributed species and varieties have come from the same locality and had a common ancestry and origin. Is it not evident that the very plants and animals (in a tribal sense) whose migrations they have been engaged in unraveling were as much older than ice and snow on the earth as it would require in time to lower the average temper- ature over a vast area from a tropical to a frigid cli- mate ? " The portion of the little treatise least satisfactory, even to its author, is the part which relates to man (pp. 52-54). By making the human race the de- scendants (or, as on Darwinist principles we ought rather to say, the ascendants) of one or more pairs of lower animals, and assuming that our animal an- cestry had already been driven from the polar region before they were blessed with this unanticipated progeny, the author suggests a possible manner in which " the absence on the earth of our immediate predecessor," the missing link, might be accounted for. He says, " If it is true that, in common with many existing plants and animals, the ancestry of man — some animal with a thumb, and so having the possibility of all things — shared this northern home, this common and immensely remote origin, earlier by long epochs than the glacial period, it iHPfff' would afford a DossiM^ .. -ity of the ori^, r Lnr "■■ ''" ^'"■'" of "- ab.sc„ce on earth of his inl "k f ° " T'^^"" ^"^ 'h- arboreal progenitor 1 "he ''' ''''^''''■- "'" great southern moven^n a^'! ° ^T "'"''' "^ "''« nary (during all of wh^ch n^f > "^"'^ ""^ Q'-^'-'r- inhabited the earth) was of, T ^'' P^^ably the eve, following. ^:^.^:^£:^ -^^ed b]: «-.th,n the southward-movint f ^''''P'"S him tl,e eastern and western .? °P"" "'""•■•'<-■. down "e. arriving i„ The lapse^o T"'^ '"'''' ""'" '^ -^ belt, and being always at the T", '' '^^ <=^"««"al the scale of being by til tj'"^ '"' •''"" ''^'"S in process, became suffictntrrr'"'' f '^'P""^' ^"d g'ces to buiid fires clothe t '"u '' ''^ ^'°* de- ments, and, possibly domestl.^^^^' '""'^ '""P'^- tl'e first and most use?,rto f'"""^'^'-at least — 'd so prepared or c nflicmi'7 """• "'^ ""S. t-ned backward to the v Je j ^ ''," ^'™=''-' subdu,ng, slaying, and evternf ? ^^erlastmg ice, ancestry, his neafkt but no ',"°' ^''' ^'" °^vn 'inhering behind and st g"4S ,7''' ^'''' "^ of "icreasing cold, would h:veLi '" ^ "'^^'^ generated and so easily d,sposec o^r"''™''^ ^^- e«erm,„ated by the clfmate i se f".^' ' , "? ^?'"='"y tlie nearest in resemblance to „.„' ■ """"^^ ="= -test in actual relationship boTlt'oT 'V"" ''■ ancestry, the later tribes of Tlu "' ^"^ to his 'leveloped, nearer to the en^ T'^ "P^^ ^'"^e lower animals which accom^'f' ^'""^ ^^e next ward ma,-ch." ^^wmpa,Hed him in his south- »' tlti JnTt'hThJL:" '^ "''''-'■ ^'^ P'-e "inate. When i ts far off= u'" 'f '"''^^'^ '"deter- tar-off arboreal ancestor left the ex.: I err 112 PARADISE FOUND. ii ^1 11 Pole his only prophetic endowment was "a thumb." But possessing this, he " had the possibility of all things." In his successors, ages afterward, the real transition from the plane of animal to that of human life seems to be represented as having taken place "at the equatorial belt." Unfortunately, however, for the theory, the claim of the new men to the virtue and name of humanity was now poorer than before the change, for their first act was to turn fiercely upon those who brought them into beinir, " subduing, slaying, and exterminating their own an- cestry " in a frenzy worse than brutal. The shock to the feelings of the near but younger relatives of the massacred victims — the mild-mannered apes — must have been violent in the extreme. In fact, among all the tens of thousands of their descendants not one, from that day to this, has ever been seen to smile. But in justice to our author it should be stated that he attaches little, if any, weight to this Darwin- istic episode. He frankly says, " This last proposi- tion, however, is but a vague and very deductive supposition, for which nothing is claimed beyond a possibility or bare probability." It is possible that he is only slyly indulging in a bit of quiet pleasantry at the expense of the new-school anthropogonists. Whether so or not, he hastens without further words to return from it to the impregnable positions of his main argument, and to reinforce them by a fresh study of the power and function of heat in the cos- mic unfoldment and distribution of life. The next two divisions of the present work will show us that the birth-memories of mankind con- duct us, not to "the equatorial belt," but to the polar the qi; well a After believe than e eludes "Thi ing dow great lil to bear the ear order of to pass and fina range, ai generati( wrapped mother o ice-boun( CONCLUSION OF PART THIRD. "3 polar world, and that in Mr. Scribncr's answer to the question, "Where did Life begin?" human as well as floral and faunal life should be included. After examining these fresh lines of evidence it is believed that the reader will find more impressive than ever the words with which our author con- cludes his charming tractate : — " Thus the Arctic zone, which was tiarliest in cool- ing down to the first and highest heat degree in the great life-gamut, was also first to become fertile, first to bear life, and first to send forth her progeny over the earth. So, too, in obedience to the universal order of things, she was first to reach maturity, first to pass all the subdivisions of life-bearing climate and finally the lowest heat degree in the great life- range, and so the first to reach sterility, old age, de- generation, and death. And now, cold and lifeless, wrapped in her snowy winding sheet, the once fair mother of us all rests in the frozen embrace of an ice-bound and everlasting sepulchre." 'L *i«^ 'IT'. CHAP. I. ancie: ir. THE C] in. IN CHI IV. IN EAS V. IN IRA VI. INAKK Vir. IN ANC VIII. IN ANC PART FOURTH. THE HYPOTHESIS CONFIRMED BY ETHNIC TRADITION. CHAP. I. ANCIENT COSMOLOGY AND MYTHICAL GEOGRAPHY. II. THE CRADLE OF THE RACE IN JAPANESE THOUGHT. III. IN CHINESE THOUGHT. IV. IN EAST ARYAN OR HINDU THOUGHT. V. IN IRANIAN OR OLD PERSIAN THOUGHT. VI. IN AKKADIAN, ASSYRIAN. AND BABYLONIAN THOUGHT. VII. IN ANCIENT EGYPTIAN THOUGHT. VIII. IN ANCIENT GREEK THOUGHT. '« ^ I: :l HJL-i *rar ^ All these things happened in the North ; and afterward, when men were created, they were created in the North ; but as the people multiplied they moved toward the South, the Earth growing larger also, and extending itself in the same direction, — H. H. Bancroft, Native Races, vol. iii., p. 162. II y a done beaucoup d'apparer.ce que les peuples du Nord, en descendant vers le Midi, y portent les emblems relatifs au physique de leur climat ; et ces emblems sont devenus des fables, puis des personnages, puis des Dieux, dans des imaginations vives et pretes k tout animer, comme celles des Orientaux. —J ban Sylvain Bailly, CHAPTER I. ANCIENT COSMOLOGY AND MYTHICAL GEOGRAPHY. Not enough credit has been given to the ancient astrofiomers. For instance, there is no time within the scope of history wJien it was not kno^vn that the earth is a sphere, and that the direction down at different points is toward the same point at the earth's centre. Current teaching in the text-books as to tlie knowl- edge of astronomy by the ancients is at /auitA—Sisioti Newcomb, LL. D. Hie vertex nobis semper sublimis, at ilium Subpedibus Styx air a videt manesque profundi. Vergil. Back of every mythological accouut of Paradise lies some conception of the world at large, and es- pecially of the world of men. Rightly to understand and interpret the myths, we must first understand le world-conception to which they were adjusted. Unfortunately, the cosmology of the ancients has been totally misconceived by modern scholars. All our maps of " The World according to Homer " rep- resent the earth as flat, and as surrounded by a level, flowing ocean stream. "There can be no doubt," says Bunbury, " that Homer, in common with all his successors down to the time of Hecataeus, believed the earth to be a plane of circular form."^ As to the sky, we are generally taught that the early Greeks believed it to be a solid metallic vault.^ Pro- 1 Lowell Lecture. Boston Daily Advertiser, Nov. 29, i88r. 2 E. H. Bunbury, History of Ancient Geography among the Greeks and Romans. London, 1879: vol. i., p. 79. Professor Bunbury was a leading contributor to Smith's Dictionary of Ancient Greek and Ro- man Geography. Compare Friedreich, Die Realien in der Ilias und Odysee. 1856, § 19. Buchholz, Die Homerische Realien. Leipsic, 187 1 : Bd. i., 48. 8 See Voss, Ukert, Bunbury, Buchholz, and the others. ex';! CI 3' ii8 PARADISE FOUND. fessor F. A. Paley aids the imagination of his readers as follows : " We might familiarly illustrate the Hesiodic notion of the flat circular earth and the convex overarching sky by a circular plate with a hemispherical dish-cover of metal placed over it and concealing it. Above the cover (which is supposed to rotate on an axis, ttoXos) live the gods. Round the inner concavity is the path of the sun, giving light to the earth below." ^ That all writers upon Greek mythology, including even the latest,^ should proceed upon the same as- sumptions as the professed Homeric interpreters and geographers building upon their foundations is only natural. And that the current conceptions of the cosmology of the ancient Greeks should pro- foundly affect current interpretations of the cosmo- logical and geographical data of other ancient peo- ples is also precisely what the history and inner relationships of modern archaeological studies would lead one to expect. It is not surprising, therefore, that the earth of the Ancient Hebrews, Egyptians, Indo-Aryans, and other ancient peoples has been assumed to correspond to the supposed flat earth of the Greeks.^ ^ The Epics of Hesiod, with an English Commentary. London, l86i : p. 172. 2 See, for example, Sir George W. Cox : An Introduction to the Science of Comparative Mythology and Folk-Lore. London and New York, 188 1 : p. 244. Decharme, Mythologie de la Grice Antique. Paris, 1879: p. II. ^ It is true that Heinrich Zimmer remarks, "Die Anschauiing die sich bei Griechen und Nordgermanen fmdet, dass die Erde cine Scheibe sei, uni die sich das Meer schlingt, begegnet in den vedischen Samhitanirgends." Altindisches Leben. Berlin, 1879 : p. 359. But even he does not advance from this negative assertion to an exposition of the true Vedic cosmology. Compare M. Fontane : " Leur cosmog- ANCIENT COSMOLOGY. 119 »f his strate id the dth a it and )posed R.ound giving luding me as- preters ions is ions of Id pro- cosmo- ;nt peo- inner would irefore, ptians, Is been :arth of London, ?« to the uid New \Anliqne. jung die rde cine jdisclien 59. But tposilion Icosmog- A protracted study of the subject has convinced the present writer that this modern assumption, as to the form of the Homeric earth is entirely base- less and misleading. He has, furthermore, satisfied himself that the Egyptians, Akkadians, Assyrians, Babylonians, Phoenicians, Hebrews, Greeks, Irani- ans, Indo-Aryans, Chinese, Japanese, — in fine, all the most ancient historic peoples, — possessed in their earliest traceable periods a cosmology essen- tially identical, and one of a far more advanced type than has been attributed to them. The purpose of this chapter is to set forth and illustrate this oldest known conception of the universe and of its parts. In ancient thought, the grand divisions of the world are four, to wit : the abode of the gods, the abode of living men, the abode of the dead, and, finally, the abode of demons. To locate these in right mutual relations, one must begin by -represent- ing to himself the earth as a sphere or spheroid, and as situated within, and concentric with, the starry sphere, each having its axis perpendicular, and its north pole at the top. The pole-star is thus in the true zenith, and the heavenly heights centring about it are the abode of the supreme god or gods. Ac- cording to the same conception, the upper or north- ern hemisphere of the earth is the proper home of living men ; the under or southern hemisphere of the earth, the abode of disembodied spirits and rulers of the dead ; and, finally, the undermost region of all, that centring around the southern pole of the raphie est embryonaire. La terre est pour I'Arya ronde et plate comme un disque. Le firmament vedique, concave, vien se souder ^ lat rre, circulairement, kl'horizon " Inde Vedique. Paris, 18S1 : p. 94. With this agrees Bergaine, La Religion Vedique. Paris, 1878 : p. I. -**: 1 ( «*: 1 '«t3^ 1 fx\ c:r: -• 1 i a..?, J" «-■«; *i* I20 PARADISE FOUND. heavens, the lowest hell.^ The two hemispheres of the earth were furthermore conceived of as separated from each other by an equatorial ocean or oceanic current. To illustrate this conception of the world, let the two circles of the diagram which constitutes the frontispiece of this work represent respectively the earth-sphere and the outermost of the revolving- starry spheres. A is the north pole of the heavens, so placed as to be in the zenith. B is the south pole of the heavens in the nadir. The line A B is the axis of the apparent revolution of the starry heavens in a perpendicular position. C is the north pole of the earth ; D its south pole ; the line C D the axis of the earth in perpendicular position, and coinci- dent with the corresponding portion of the axis of the starry heavens. The space i i i i is the abode of the supreme god or gods ; 2, Europe ; 3, Asia ; 4, Libya, or the known portion of Africa ; 5 5 5, the ocean, or " ocean stream ; " 6 6 6, the abode of dis- embodied spirits and rulers of the dead ; 7 7 7 7, the lowest hell.^ ! '1' :.jfcii ^ It is worthy of notice that the sight of portions of the south- polar heavens, especially the starless region kno'^n as " the black Coal I Sack," is to this day capable of suggesting tl '■ associations of the bottomless pit. Thus in a recent traveler's letter of the ordinary kind i we read, " Every clear evening we could see the Magellan Clouds, ' soft and fleece-like, floating airily among the far-off constellations. These mysterious bodies look like star-spray, or borrowed bits of the I Milky Way. Then, too, our eyes would seek out, as by some strange fascination, those still more mysterious * chambers of the South,' the ', black Coal Sack, with its retreating depths of darkness, wherein no star shines. These irregular spaces, emptinesses, as it were, in the heavens, impress one with a sense of something uncanny, as though '. these were, indeed, the ' blackness of darkness forever? " — The Siindiiy i School Times. Philadelphia, 18S3 : p. 581. 2 The reception accorded to the foregoing " True Key " is illus- trated in the Appendix, Sect. III. ANCIENT COSMOLOGY. 121 let the es the jly the 'olvuig javens, th pole is the eavens pole of he axis coinci- axis of 2 abode nn> he south- ilack Coal )ns of the inary kind w Clouds, Itellations. bits of the ,e strange louth,' the herein no Ire, in the <$ tliPtigk \e Sundoy Now, to make this key a graphic illustration of Homeric cosmology, it is only necessary to write in place of I I I I " Lofty Olympos ; " in place of 5 5 5, "The Ocean Stream;" in place of 6 6 6, " House of Aides " (Hades) ; and in place of 7 7 7 7, "Gloomy Tartaros." Imagine, then, the light as falling from the upper heavens, — the lower terres- trial hemisphere, therefore, as forever in the shade ; imagine the Ti. ,arean abyss as filled with Stygian gloom and blackness, — fit dungeon-house for de- throned gods and powers of evil ; imagine the " men- illuminating " sun, the "well-tressed" moon, the " splendid " stars, silently wheeling round the central upright axis of the lighted hemispheres, — and sud- denly the confusions and supposed contradictions of classic cosmology disappear. We are in the very world in which immortal Homer lived and sang.^ It is no longer an obscure crag in Thessaly, from which heaven-shaking Zeus proposes to suspend the whole earth and ocean. The eye measures for itself the nine days' fall of Hesiod's brazen anvil from heaven to earth, from earth to Tartarus. The Hyperboreans are now a possibility. Now a descensus ad inferos can be made by voyagers in the black ship. Un- numbered commentators upon Homer have pro- fessed their despair of ever being able to harmonize the passages in which Hades is represented as " be- vond the ocean " with those in which it is repre- sented as " subterranean." Conceive of man's dwell- ing-place, of Hades, and the ocean, as in this key, and the notable difficulty instantaneously vanishes. Interpreters of the Odyssey have found it impos- sible to understand how the westward and north- ' See cut in Appendix, Sect. VI. : "Homer's Abode of the Dead." I »ii iti I i 122 PARADISE FOUND. ward sailing voyager could suddenly be found in waters and amid islands unequivocally associated with the East. The present key explains it per- fectly, showing what no one seems heretofore to have suspected, that the voyage of Odysseus is a poetical account of an imaginary circumnavigatioti of the mythical earth hi the upper or northern hemi- sphere, inc hiding a trip to the southern or under hemi- sphere and a visit to the ofitftakoq daXda-a-rj^, or North Pole. In this cosmological conception the upright axis of the world is often poetically conceived of as a majestic pillar, supporting the heavens and furnish- ing the pivot on which they revolve. Euripides ^ and Aristotle'"^ unmistakably identify the Pillar of Atlas with this world-axis. How interesting a feature this pillar became in ancient mythologies will be seen below in chapter third of this part, in chapter sec- ond of part six, and elsewhere in this volume. Again, according to this view the highest part of the earth, its true summit, would of course be at the North Pole. And since the whole of the upper or northern hemisphere would in this case be con- ceived of as rising on all sides from the equatorial ocean toward that summit, nothing would be more natural than to view the entire upper half of the earth as itself a vast mountain, the mother and support of all lesser mountains.^ Moreover, as the abode of the supreme God or gods was thought to be directly over this summit of the earth, it would be extremely easy for the imagination to carry the summit of so * Peirithotis, 597, 3-5, ed. Nauck. 2 De Anim. Motione, c. 3. ^ See Btmdahish^ chaps, viii., xii., etc. ANCIENT COSMOLOGY. 123 stupendous a mountain into and far above the clouds, and even to extend it to such a height that the gods of heaven might be conceived of as having their abode upon its top. This is precisely what came to pass, and hence in the cosmology of the ancient Egyp- tians, Akkadians, Assyrians, Babylonians, Persians, Indians, Chinese, and others we find, under various names, but always easily recognizable, this Wcltberg, Mountain of the World," situated at the North or Pole of the earth, supporting or otherwise connect- ing with the city of the gods, and serving as the axis around which sun, moon, and stars revolve. Often we also find evidence that the under hemisphere was in like manner conceived of as an inverted mountain, antipodal to the mountain of the gods, and connecting at its apex with the abode of demons.^ The adjoin- ing figure may illustrate this conception of the earth, the upper protuberance be- ing the " Mount of the Gods," the lower the in- verted " Mount of Demons." A clear view of the first of these remarkable 1 " Dans les conceptions de la cosmogonie mythique des Indians on oppose au Sou-Merou ' le bon Merou,' du Nord, un Kou-Merou mau- vais et funeste, qui y fait exactcnient pendant et en est I'antithese, De memo les Chaldeens opposaient a la divine et bienheureuse montagne de rOrient accadien ' garsag-babbarra — assyrien sad (it samsi, une montagne funeste et tenebreuse . . . accadien, ^garsag-giqga = assy- rien jrt-^m;^ samh', situee dans les parties basses de la terre." — Le- iiormant, Origines de rUistoire, torn. ii. i, p. 134. The Antipodal Polar Mountains. ■•^3:1 Mm* 'La J '-^^ 124 PARADISE FOUND. World-Mountains is so essential to any right under- standing of mythical geography and of the mythical terrestrial Paradise that a more extended examina- tion of the subject seems a necessity. Beginning with the Egyptians we may note this remarkable fact ; that notwithstanding his sharing the common and mistaken modern assumption that the Egyptians conceived of the earth as flat, Brugsch, confessedly the foremost authority in ancient Egyp- tian geography, places the highest and most sacred part of the Egyptians' earth at the North, making the lattd there to rise until in actual contact with heaven. He also places at the farthest southern extremity of the earth another lofty mountain, Ap- en-to or Tap-en-to, literally "the horn of the world." ^ Now, while several professed Egyptologists have re- cently come to the conviction that the earth of the Egyptians was a sphere, no one has brought out the fact that these two heights are two antipodal polar projections of the spherical earth, the upper or celes- tial one being the mount of the gods, and the lower or infernal one the mount of demons. Of the for- mer the following passage in the " Book of Hades " may naturally be understood to speak : — " Draw me [the nocturnal sun], infernal ones ! . . . "Retreat towards the eastern heavens, toward the dwellings which support Sar, that mysterious moun- tain that spreads light among the gods [or, that I may spread light among the gods .''], who receive me when I go forth from amongst you, from the re- treat." 2 1 Geographische Inschriften altcegyptischer Denkmdler. Leipsic, 1858 : vol. ii., p. 37. 2 Records of the Past, vol. x., p. 103. I understand this to refer to the (nortliward and southward) anmial, and not to the diurnal, move- ment of the sun. this ANCIENT COSMOLOGY. 125 To the inverted infernal mountain seem to apply the expressions in chapter one hundred and fifty of the " Book of the Dead : " — '• Oh, the very tall Hill in Hades ! The heaven rests upon it. There is a snake or dragon upon it : Sati is his name," etc.^ In another chapter of the same book a place is spoken of as " the inverted precinct," which place is llades.'-^ Moreover, the translator of another text, called the "Book of Hades," describes a "pendant mountain" as a cuiious feature in the vignette illus- trations of the original. This can hardly be any- thing other than Ap-en-to, the inverted mountain of Hades.^ ! . . . 'd the loun- that I ^e me le re- xipsic, bfer to move- 1 The rr intion of the starry serpent or dragon completes the paral- lelism between the North Polar and South Polar mountains. " Mr. Procter has remarked that when the North Pole Star was Alpha Draconis, the vSouthern was most probably the star lita I/ydri, and certain to have been in the constellation Hydra. . . . The encircling Serpent, the symbol of eternal going round, was figured at both Poles, the two centres of the total starry revolution." Massey, The Natural Genesis, vol. i., p. 345. In our discussion of the Pillar of Atlas we have spoken of the identity of Draco with the dragon which assisted the nymphs in watching the golden apples in the North Polar Gar- dens of the Hesperides. See Depuis, Origines dcs Constellations, p. 147. The same parallelism is alluded to in the following : "The hypoceph- alus in question is divided into four compartments, two of which are opposed to the two others as if to indicate the two celestial hemi- sphrres ; the upper one above the terrestrial world and the lower one below it." Proceedings of the Society of Biblical Archccology, March 4, 1884, London, 1884: p. 126. F i 2\%o Revue Archeologiqiie. Paris, 1S62 : vi., p. 129. - liunsen, Egypt's Place in Universal History, vol. v., p. 208. ^ Records of the Past, vol. x., p. 88. Two years after the above was written I met with the following : " The god advancing in a re- versed position" (in a certain New Zealand legend) "is the sun in the Underworld. The image exactly accords with an Egyptian scene of the sun passing through Hades, where we see the twelve gods of the earth, or the lower domain of night, marching towards a mountain ^•M -♦ J (I CC-j ^-'^ or- ::3> .' i 126 PARADISE FOUND. The Akkadians, who antedated even the most an- cient empires of the Tigro-Euphrates valley, had in like manner a " Mountain of the World," which was unlike all other mountains in that it was a support on which the heavens rested and around which they revolved. It was called Kharsak Kurra. It was so rich with gold and silver and precious stones as to be dazzling to the sight. An ancient Akkadian hymn respecting it uses this language : — *' O mighty mountain of Bel, Im-Kharsak, whoso head rivals heaven, whose root is in the holy deep! " Among the mountains like a strong wild bull it lieth down. " Its horn like the brilliance of the sun is bright. " Like the star of heaven it is filled with sheen." ' In another hymn, apparently of great antiquity, we find the goddess Istar addressed as " Queen of this Mountain of the World," which is further located and identified by its connection with "the axis of heaven," and with "the four rivers" of the Akkadian Paradise.^ turned upside down, and two typical personages are also turned upside do7vn. This is an illustration of the passage of the sun through the Underworld. The reversed on the same monument are the diacl. Thus the Osirified deceased, who has attained the second life, in tliL- Ritual says exultingly, ' / do not zvalk upon my head.' The dead, as the Akhu, are the spirits, and the Atua [of the New Zealand legend | is a spirit who comes walking upside down." Massey, The Nalur-d Genesis. London, 1S83 : vol. i., p. 529. (The italics are Massey 's.) llic passage is the more remarkable from the fact that Massey elsewlicre states that the earth *' was considered flat by the first myth-makcis,'' who in his scheme appear to have been the Egyptians. Ibid., vol i,, p. 465. ^ Records of the Past. London, vol. xi., pp. 131, 132. Lenormant, ChaldcEan Magic, p. 168. Lenormant's latest revised translation may be seen in Les Orig-ines dc V Histoirc, torn. ii. i, pp. 127, 128. - George Smith, As.^yrian Discoveries, pp. 392, 393. Mr. G. Mas- ANCIENT COSMOLOGY. 127 Lenormant places this mountain in the North (but sometimes incorrectly in the East or Northeast), and makes it the ''lieu de l\issc7nbldc des dieux ;'* but when he locates the corresponding antipodal moun- tain of Hades in the West, instead of in the South, he seems to have gone entirely beyond the evidence. At least, Dr. Friedrich Delitzsch affirms that in the cuneiform literature thus far known he has discov- ered no trace of such a location.^ But on this ques- tion of the site of these mountains move v \I1 be said in chapter sixth of the present fitvisio.i. The Assyrians and Bivb /lonians inherited the Akkadian conception. One of the titles of the su- preme divinity of the Assyrians rela':ed to the f.a- crcd mount. An invocation to him open:^: thus : " Assur, the mighty god, who dwells in the tem-,jle of Kharsak Kurra.'"'^ An Assyria; liyran .vp»-^aks of the •'feasts of the silver wounlain, The heavenly courts,^* — and the translator makes the expre-^jsiors refer to this " Assyrian Olympos." ^ Saycc .inds in the fol- lowing a plain reference to the same : — " I am lord of the steep mountains, which tremblr. whilst their summits reach to the firmament. sey remarks, " In an Akkadian hymn to Ishtar, the j^oddess is ad- dressed as the 'Qupcii of the Mountain of 'Fe World ' and 'Queen of the land of the four rivers of Erech ; ' (hat 13, as vho goddess of the mvthical Mount of the Pole and <^'-c four river'; of the four quarters, which arose in Paradise. Ti.r Moutitain of the World was the Mount of the North." The v itnral Genesis, vol. ii., p. 21. 1 Wolag das Pan-ile^ ? Leipsic, 1S81 : p. 121. 2 Cuneiform Tnscriptions of Western Asia. London : vol. i., pp. 44, 45. Ti;'..islated by Mr. Sayce in Records of the Fast, vol. xi., P-S- '^ Records of the Past, vol. iii., p. 133. CX .; 128 PARADISE FOUND. ! 'I \.\m M I M N "The mountain of alabaster, lapis, and onyx, in my hand I possess it." ^ How current the idea must have been among the Babylonians is shown by the rhetorical use made of it by the prophet Isaiah. Rebuking the arrogance of the king of Babylon and pre-announcing to him his doom, the prophet beholds his fall as already ac- complished, and in a passage of wonderful pictorial power and beauty exclaims, ** How art thou fallen from heaven, O Lucifer, son of the morning ! how art thou cut down to the ground, which didst weaken the nations ! For thou hast said in thine heart, I will ascend into heaven, I will exalt my throne above the stars of God : I will sit also upon the mount of the congregation in the sides of the North (or more correctly in the uttermost parts of the North, in the extreme northern regions), I will as- cend above the heights of the clouds ; I will be like (or equal to) the Most High. Yet thou shalt be brought down to Sheol, to the sides (or regions) of the pit." 2 Since the publication of Gesenius's commentary on this passage and his excursus upon the " Gottcr- berg im Norden " appended to it, no question has re- mained in the minds of scholars as to the character of the Har Moed, the " mount of the congregation," in the far-off North. Among the Chinese we find a similar celestial mount, the mythical Kwen-lun. It is often called simply " The Pearl Mountain." On its top is Para- dise, with a living fountain from which flow in oppo- site directions the four great rivers of the world.^ ^ Records of the Past, vol. iii., p. 126. ^ Isaiah xiv. 12-15. ^ Stollberg, Mcinoires concernant les Chiitois, t. i., p. lor, cited in Keerl, Lehre vom Paradies. Basle, 1861 : p. 796. m ANCIENT COSMOLOGY. 129 Around it revolve the visible heavens ; and the stars nearest to it, that is nearest to the Pole, are sup- posed to be the abodes of the inferior gods and genii. To this day, the Tviuists speak of the first person of their trinity as residing in " the metropo- lis of Pearl Mountain," and in addressing him turn their faces to the northern sk}^^ A striking parallel to the Egyptian and Akkadian idea of two opposed polar mountains, an arctic and an antarctic, — the one celestial and the other infer- nal, — is found among the ancient inhabitants of India. The celestial mountain they called Su-Meru, the infernal one Ku-Meru.'^ In the Hindu Puranas the size and splendors of the former are presented in the wildest exaggerations of Oriental fancy. Its height, according to some accounts, is not less than eight hundred and forty thousan 1 miles, its diameter at the summit three hundred and twenty thousand. Four enormous buttress mountains, situated at mu- tually opposite points of the horizon, surround it. One account makes the eastern side of Meru of the color of the ruby, its southern that of the lotus, its western that of gold, its northern that of coral. On its summit is the vast city of Brahma, fourteen thou- sand leagues in extent.^ Around it, in the cardinal 1 Joseph Edkins, Religion in China. 2d ed., 1S7S : p. 151. The Ainos of Japan, although declared to be "aiisserordentlich arm an Sa^eii," have nevertheless their corresponding mythical Gold-moun- tain, Kogane-yama. Dr. B. Scheube, Die Aifios. Yokohama, 1S82 : p. 24. "^ " Meru, in Sanskrit, signifies an axis or pivot.'''' Wilford in Asi- atic Researches. London, 180S : vol. viii., p. 285. The prefix " Su " signifies " beautiful." ^ In Brugsch's Astronomische Inschriften, p. 177, we read, "Es gab ein himmliches Ann or On, Heliopolis, dessen bstliche Lichtseite und westlic/ie Lichtseite oftcrs erwahnt werden." Was this perhaps the 9 8—-: • '•««« mmn i;.-i. ,i M Mi I ' ■ ! i! i 130 PARADISE FOUND. v'l points and the intermediate quarters, are situated the magnificent cities of Indra and the other regents of the spheres. The city of Brahma in the centre of the eight is surrounded by a moat of sweet flowing celestial waters, a kind of river of the water of life (Ganga), which after encircling the city divides into four mighty rivers flowing towards four opposite points of the horizon, and descending into the equa- torial ocean which engirdles the earth. ^ Sometimes Mount Meru is represented as planted so firmly and deeply in the globe that the antarctic or infernal mountain is only a projection of its lower end. Thus the Surya Siddhanta says : ^* A collec- tion of manifold jewels, a mountain of gold, is Meru, passing through the middle of the earth-globe (phu- gold), and protruding on either side. At its upper end are stationed along with Indra the gods and the Great Sages {inaJiarishis) ; at its lower end, in like manner, the demons have their abode, — each [class] the enemy of the other. Surrounding it on every side is fixed, next, this great ocean, like a girdle about the earth, separating the two hemi- spheres of the gods and of the demons." Conceiving of Meru in this way, as a kind of core extending through the earth and projecting at each pole, one can easily understand the following pas- sage, in which two pole-stars are spoken of instead of one : " In both \i. e., the two opposite] directions from Meru are two pole-stars fixed in the midst of the sky." As these mark the two opposite poles of Vorhild and Egyptian counterpart of the city of Brahma, the city of Sakra, and all the other Asiatic Gotterstddte in the celestial pole? It would be very interesting to know. 1 See Appendix, Sect. IV. : " The Earth of the Hindus." ^11 I ii 1 ANCIENT COSMOLOGY. 131 idthe iits of trc of 3wing A Hie :s into •posite ; equa- il anted tarctic J lower coUcc- . Meru, le {bhu- s upper »ds and end, in eacli cf it on like a hemi- lof core it each |ig pas- in stead actions lidst of ioles of Ic c ily of the heavens, it is correctly added that " to those who are situated in places of no latitude \i. e,, on the equator] both these pole-stars have their place in the horizon." Farther on in the same treatise the common designation used for the northern hem- isphere is the hemisphere of the gods, and for the southern the hemisphere of the asuras, or demons.^ A picture of " the Earth of the Hindus," showing the exact position of Meru and its buttress-mounts, will be given below in chapter fourth of the present Part (p. 152). That the cosmology of ancient India should have been retained and propagated in its main features by all the followers of Buddha was only natural. Accordingly, in their teachings our earth, and every other, has its Sumeru, around which everything cen- tres.2 Ics top, according to the Nyayanousara Shas- ter. is four-square, and on it are situated the three and thirty (Trayastrinshas) heavens. Each face of the summit measures 80,000 yojanas. Each of the four corners of the mountain-top has a peak seven hundred y6janas high. These, of course, are simply the four buttress -mountains of the Hindu Meru lifted to the summit and made the culminating 1 Chapter xii., sections 45-74. On the origin and age of this trea- tise see the notes of the translator, Rev. Ebenezer Burgess, in the Journal of the American Oriental Society, vol. vi. New Haven, i860 : pp. 140-480. 2 Its name, in Japanese, is written Sxi-meru ; in Chinese, Si-mi- liu, or Siu-mi ; in Tibetan, A'm//, or Ri-rap-hlumpo ; in Mongolian (Kahiitick), summer Sola, or Sjumer Sula : in Burmese, Miem-mo. C. F. Koeppen, Die Keligion des Buddhas. Berlin, 1857 : vol. i., p. 2'i2. See, also, A. Bastian, Die Volker des ostlichen Asiens, Bd. iii., i^> 3S2. 353 ; vi., 567. 568, 57S, 580, 5S7, 589, 590. Spence Hardy, Manual of Buddhism, i^p. 1-35. The same. Legends of the Buddhists. London, 1866: pp. xxix., 42, 81, loi, 176, etc. •«Mn«iMJ "^ 132 PARADISE FOUND, ff i! peaks. They are ornamented, we are told, with the seven precious substances, — gold, silver, lapis-lazuli, crystal, cornelian, coral, and ruby. One of the cities on the summit is called Sudarsana, or Belle-vue. It is 10,000 yojanas in circuit. The storied gates are U yojanas high, and there are 1,000 of these gates, fully adorned. Each gate has 500 blue-clad celestial guards, fully armed. In its centre is a kind of inner city called the Golden City of King Sakra, whose pavilion is 1,000 yojrnas in circuit, and its floor is of pure gold, inlaid with every kind of gem. This royal residence has 500 gates, and on each of the four sides are 100 towers, within each of which there are 1,700 chambers, each of whi^h chambers has within it seven Devis, and each Devi is attended by seven handmaidens. All these Devis are consorts of King Sakra, with whom he has intercourse in different forms and personations, according to his pleasure. The length and breadth of the thirty-three heav- ens is 60,000 yojanas. They are surrounded by a sevenfold city wall, a sevenfold ornamental railing, a sevenfold row of tinkling curtains, and beyond these a sevenfold row of Talas-trees. All these encircle one another, and are of every color of the rainbow, intermingled and composed of every precious sub- stance. Within, every sort of enjoyment and every enchanting pleasure is provided for the occupants. Outside this wonderful city of the gods, there is on each of its four sides a park of ravishing beauty. In each park there is a sacred tower erected over personal relics of Buddha. Each park has also a magic lake, filled with water possessing eight pecu- liar excellences. Thus beauties are heaped upon beauties, splendors upon splendors, marvels upon I MYTHICAL GEOGRAPHY. 133 marvels, until in sheer despair the wearied and ex- hausted imagination abandons all further effort at definite mental representation.^ It is worthy of note that, while most scholars have supposed the Sumeru of Buddhism to be simply a development of the Indian idea, Mr. Beal, a high authority, has, in one of his latest publications, claimed for it an independent and coordinate, if not primitive, character.^ Other peculiarities in Buddhist cosmography, especially the detachment of Uttara- kuru and of Jambu-dvvipa from Mount Meru, — in both of which particulars the Buddhist cosmos dif- fers from the Puranic, — lend some apparent confir- mation to this claim. In ancient Iranian thought this same celestial mountain presents itself to the student. Its name is Hara-berezaiti, the mythical Albordj,^ — " the seat of the genii : around it revolve sun, moon, and stars ; over it leads the path of the blessed to heaven." * 1 See Beal, Catena of Buddhist Scriptures^ pp. 75-8 1. Comp. Beal, Lectures on Buddhist Literature in China, pp. 146-159. - " I cannot doubt that the Buddhist myth about Sume or Sumeru is distinct from the later Brahmanical account of it, and allied with the universal belief in and adoration of the highest." — Buddhist Litera- ture in Chifia. London, 1882: p. xv. ■' " Das erste Vorkommen des Namens im Zend ist im Gebet an Mithra (invoco, celebro supremum umbilicum aquarum, nach Duper- roiis Uebersetzung) welches E. Burnouf wortgetreuer iibersetzt : * Ich picise den hohen gottlichen Berggipfel, die Quelle der Wasser, und das Wasser des Oru.uzd,' wo die Bezeichnung eine ganz allgemeine ist. Vom Adjectiv berezat, d. i. ' erhaben ' in der Parsen Uebersetz- ung, stammt erst der * Bordj^ d. i. der Erhabene, Als Berg aus dem die Wasser hervortreten, wird er im Zend ' Nafedro ' {Nabhi im Sanskrit.) d. i. ' der Nabel ' genannt, als Erhohung welche Wasser giebt ; und als Berg der das befruchtende Princip enthalt zuni Genius der Frauen erhoben." — Ritter, Erdkttnde, viii. 47. * Spiegel, Erdnische Alterthicmskunde. Leipsic, 1871 ; Bd. i , S. 463. The Ventd&d. Fargard xxi, et passim. See references in lndi.x ■ex ■ ! *— Jll 134 PARADISE FOUND. 4 m The following description of it in one of the invo- cations of Rashnu in the Rashn Yasht forcibly re- minds one of the Odyssean description of the heav- enly Olympos : " Whether thou, O holy Rashnu, art on the Hara-berezaiti, the bright mountain around which the many stars revolve, where come neither night nor darkness, no cold wind and no hot wind, no deathful sickness, no uncleanness made by the Daevas, and the clouds cannot reach up to the Ha- raiti Bareza ; we invoke, we bless Rashnu." ^ The following description is from Lenormant : '* Like the Meru of the Indians, Hara-berezaiti is the Pole, the centre of the world, the fixed point around which the sun and the planets perform their revolu- tions. Analogously to the Ganga of the Brahmans, it possesses the celestial fountain Ardvi-SOra, the mother of all terrestrial waters and the source of all good things. In the midst of the lake formed by the waters of the sacred source grows a single mi- raculous tree, similar to the Jambu of the Indian myth, or else two trees, corresponding exactly to those of the Biblical Gan-P2den. . . . There is the garden of Ahuramazda, like that of Brahma on Meru. Thence the waters descend toward the four cardinal points in four large streams, which symbolize the four horses attached to the car of the goddess of the sacred source. ArdvJ - Sura - Anahita. These four horses recall the four animals placed at the source of the paradisaic rivers in the Indian conception." ^ to Pahlevi Texts, translated by E. W. West. Vol. v. of Sacred Books of the East. Also Haug, Religion of the Parsees. 2d ed., Boston, 1878 : pp. 5, 190, 197, 203-205, 216, 25s, 286, 316, 337, 361,381, 387, 390. ^ Darmesteter, The Zend-Avesta, ii. 174. 2 " Ararat and Eden." The Contemporary Review, September, 1881, MYTHICAL GEOGRAPHY. 135 The Hellenic and Roman myths concerning the " World -mountain " were numerous, but in later times not a little confused, as Ideler has learnedly shown. ^ By some, as for example Aristotle, it was identified with the Caucasus, and it was asserted that its height was so prodigious that after sunset its head was illuminated a third part of the night, and again a third part before the rising of the sun in the morning. This identification explains the later legend, according to which, in order to prove his rightful lordship of the world, Alexander the Great plucked " the shadowless lance " (the earth's axis) out of the topmost peak of the Taurus Mountains.^ More commonly the mount is called Atlas, or the Atlantic mountain. Proclus, quoting Heraclitus, says of it, "Its magnitude is such that it touches the ether and casts a shadow of five thousand stadia in length. From the ninth hour of the day the sun is concealed by it, even to his perfect demersion under Am. ed., p. 41. Compare the following : " L'Albordj des Perses cor- respond parfaitement au Merou des Ilindous ; de meme que la tra- dition de ceux-ce divise la terre en sept Dwipas on isles, de memeles livres zends et pehlvis reconnaissent sept Keschvars ou contrees gioiipees egalement autour de la montagne sainte," etc. — Religions de rAnti(jtiiti, Creuzer, trad. Guigniaut. Tom. I., pt. ii., p. 702, note. ^ On the Homeric and Hesiodic Olympos, see below, part sixth, chapter second. - " Auch in den Alexandersagen des Mittelalters ist die Erinnerung an das Naturcentrum im Nordpolerhalten, und zwar in merkwUrdiger Uebereinstimmung der morgen- und abendlandischer Dichter. In dem altenglischen Gedicht von Alisaunder (bei Jacobs und Uckert, S. 461) findet Alexander der Grosse auf dem hochsten Gipfel des Tau- rus cine schattenlose Lanze, von welcher geweissagt war, wer sie aus dem Boden reissen konne, werde Herr der Welt werden. Alexander aber riss sie heraus. Die Lanze ist ein Sinnbild der Weltachse. Sie weist vom hochsten Bergc auf den Nordpol hin, und ist schattenlos weil von dort urspriinglich alles Licht ausging." — Menzel, Z?/> z'f'r- christUche Unsterblichkeitslehre, Bd. i., S. 86. ^^^::: ^x.u ■'«^u:| txl\ c:/.:-:! - ~~"ii ■.-.^-'" ■c.r3' C"~3' ZZ^l fit :."«a: - M^. «"z:.:3 > |n^«« 13^ PARADISE FOUND. the earth." ^ Strabo's account of it is full of the legendary features characteristic of an earthly Par- adise. The olive - trees were of extraordinary ex- cellence, and there were there seven varieties of refreshing wine. He informs us that the grape clusters were a cubit in length, and the vine-trunks sometimes so thick that two men could scarcely clasp round one of them. Herodotus describes the mountain as " very tapering and round ; so lofty, moreover, that the top (they say) cannot be sclmi, the clouds never quitting it either summer or win- ter. The natives call this mountain * Tlic Pillar of Heaven^' and they themselves take their name from it, being called Atlantes. They are reported not to eat any living thing and never to have any dreams."^ Equally strange is the story told by Maximus Tyrius, according to which the waves of the ocean at high water stopped short before the sacred mount, "standing up like a wall around its base, though unrestrained by any earthly barrier." " Nothing but the air and the sacred thicket prevent the water from reaching the mountain!" According to other ancient legends, a river of milk descended from this marvelous height. Noticing such curious stories, Pliny well describes the mountain dLsfabnlo- sissimum? 1 See Taylor's Notes on Pausanias, vol. iii., p. 264. 2 Herodotus, Bk. iv. 184. 8 " When Cleanthes asserted that the earth was in the shape of a cone, this, in my opinionj is to be understood only of this mountain, called Meru in India. Anaximenes said that this column was ])lain and of stone : exactly like the Meru-parg7vette of the inhabitants of Cey- lon, according to Mr. Joinville in the seventh volume of the Asiatic Researches. This mountain, says he, is entirely of stone, 6S,ooo y6janas high, and 10,000 in circumference from top to bottom. The divines of Tibet say it is square, and like an inverted pyramid. Some MYTHICAL GEOGRAPHY. 137 if the ■ Piir- -y cx- ies of grape runks arc el y ics the lofty, seen, )r \vhi- Pillar name ;ported ve any old by aves of re the ind its rrier." revcnt ording ended urious 'ahulo- ipe of a kountain, |as plain 1 of Cey- A sialic , 68.000 11. The Some Everywhere, therefore, in the most ancient ethnic thought, — in the Egyptian, Akkadian, Assyrian, Babylonian, Indian, Persian, Chinese, and Greek, — everywhere is encountered this conception of what, looked at with respect to its base and magnitude, is called the " Mountain of the World," but looked at with respect to its glorious summit and its celestial inhabitants is styled the " Mountain of the Gods." We need not pursue the investigation further. Enough has been said to warrant the assertion of Dr. Samuel Beal : " It is plain that this idea of a lofty central primeval mountain belonged to the un- divided human race." ^ Elsewhere the same learned sinologue has said, "I have no doubt — I can have none — that the idea of a central mountain, and of the rivers flowing from it, and the abode of the gods upon its summit, is a primitive myth derived from the earliest traditions of our race." ^ The ideas of the ancients respecting the Under- world, that is the southern hemisphere of the earth beyond the equatorial ocean, are sufficiently set forth in the writer's essay on " Homer's Abode of the Dead," printed in the Appendix of the present work.^ In all these studies one important caution has too often been overlooked. In interpreting the cosmo- logical and geographical references of ancient relig- ious writings it should never be forgotten that the ideas expressed are often poetical and symbolical,— of the followers of Buddha in India insist that it is like a drum, with a swell in the middle, like drums in India ; and formerly in the West, Leucippus said the same thing." — F. Wilford, in Asiatic Researches, vol. viii., p. 273. ^ Buddhist Literature in China, p. 147. - Ibid., p. xiv. ^ See Appendix, Sect. VI. KX'' ■) ex:,; ^"-jll Ik-: i <•« 138 PARADISE FOUND. religious ideas, hallowed in sacred song and story. If, some thousands of years hence, one of Macaulay's archaeologists of New Zealand were to try to ascer- tain and set forth the geographical knowledge of the Christian England of to-day by a study of a few fragments of English hymns of our period, critically examining every expression about a certain wonder- ful mountain, located sometimes on earth and some- times in heaven, and bearing the varying name of " Sion " or •* Zion ; " then making a microscopical study of all the references to the strange river, which according to the same texts would seem to be va- riously represented as "dark," and as possessed of "stormy banks," and as "rolling between" the singer living in England and the abode of the dead located in Western Asia, and called "Canaan," — a river sometimes addressed and represented as so miraculously discriminating as to know for whom to divide itself, letting them cross over " dry shod," — surely, under such a process of interpretation, even the England of the nineteenth century would make in geographical science a very sorry showino;. Or again, if some Schliemann of a far-off future were to excavate the site of one of the dozen American vil- lages known by the name of " Eden," and, finding unequivocal monumental evidence that it was thus called, were thereupon to conclude and teach that the Americans of the date of that village believed its site to be the true site of the Eden of Sacred His- tory, and that here the race of man originated, this would be a grave mistake, but it would be a mistake precisely similar to many an one which has been committed by urnouf, " La pique celeste de jade rouge." — La Mytho- logic des Japonais (Vapris le Kokii-si-Ryakii. Paris, 1875 : p. 6. '^ " He examined the pear]-adorned turning sphere, with its trans- verse tube of jade, and reduced to a harmonious system the move- ments of the Seven Directors." Legge's Translation in The Sacred Books of tJie East, vol. iii., p. 38. Protessor Legge once examined this passage in my presence, and found unexpected corroboration of the interpretation which identifies " the transverse tube of jade " with the axis of heaven. <•« THE CR. The rationa 'Mi_y in 'cvhich II I. my others, i. than belong to It is throng) we ascend to t William Heni Approa Sciii Tu7iP o ^^'^^\ Genii, lowing obs tion of a I state of in: by no mean '"g" hliss, wi called Kwei In anothe it is stated, gods, is Para it is ' the mc Like the ( ' " Hie Secte : ties altci China's i" ^'^Inischengesc of sonic ancient 1 I Samuc! Johnson, I '^yif Chinese Compare Isaiah j CHAPTER III. THE CRADLE OF THE RACE IN CHINESE THOUGHT. The rationalistic genius of the matter-of-fact Chinese is apparent even in the vjay in which they conceived their primitive history ; and in this respect, as in vhiiiy others, it brings them into nearer relations with the best modern science than belong to the other Oriental races. — Samuel Johnson (of Salem). It is through this wonderfully pure seer [Lao-tse], as it appears to me, that vie ascend to the primitive revelation of truth given to this ancient people. — William Henry Channing. Approaching this theme, a reviewer of the Shi?i Seen Tujig Keen — a " General Account of the Gods and Genii," in twenty-two volumes — offers the fol- lowing observations : " All nations have some tradi- tion of a Paradise, a place of primeval happiness, a state of innocence and delight. The Tauists ^ are by no means behind in referring to an abode of last- ing bliss, which, however, still exists on earth. It is called Kwen-lun." ^ In another article, by a student of Chinese sources, it is stated, " This locality, being the abode of the gods, is Paradise ; it is round in form, and like Eden it is ' the mount of assembly.' " ^ Like the Gan-Eden of Genesis it is described as a ^ " Die Secte der Tao-sse hat die Sagen iind religiosen Gebrauche des altcn Cliina's noch am Meisten aufbewahrt." Luken, Traditiojicn du Menschengeschlechtes, p. 77. " Lao-tse abounds in sentences out of some ancient lore, of which we have no knowledge but from him." Samuel Johnson, Oriental Religions — China. Boston, 1877: p. 861. ^ Tlic Chinese Repository, vol. vii., p. 519. ' The Chinese Recorder and Missionary Journal, vol. iv., p. 94- Compare Isaiah xiv. 13, 14. 'C:r::'< ■■•«<: :qi uil •••»». .1 ■.«.™- "Cr 2,1 :.r ~ 3 *- — ill -*■— ■ z- !K— : '-:*^X. ' ''«.;2l » «• j.*^ i^ ■.,J„^ • "-~-^ > < xiw, ^ ,;>-. • " ••%-<«is« .;:;ir. ij .'.r^ftb . '•<» ■„, ;1| 144 PARADISE FOUND, m I garden, with a marvelous tree in the midst ; also with a fountain of immortality, from which proceed four rivers, which flow in opposite directions toward the four quarters of the earth. ^ In the language of the writer first quoted in this chapter, "Sparkling fountains and purling streams contain the far-famed ambrosia. One may there rest on flowery carpeted swards, listening to the melodious warbling of birds, or feasting upon the delicious fruits, at once fragrant and luscious, which hang from the branches of the luxuriant groves. Whatever there is beautiful in landscape or grand in nature may also be found there in the highest state of perfection. All is charming, all enchanting, and whilst Nature smiles the company of genii de- lights the ravished visitor." ^ Where, now, is this Paradise mountain located .-' At the North Pole. The sentence before those last quoted reads as follows : " Here is the great pillar that sustains the world, no less than 300,000 miles high." This world-pillar, or axis of the earth, is some- times conceived of as slender enough for the use of a climber. Thus we read, " One of the Chinese kings, anxious to become acquainted with the de- lightful spot, set out in search of it. After much wandering he perceived the immense column spoken of, but, trying to ascend it, he found it so slippery that he had to abandon all hopes of gaining his end, and to endeavor by some mountain road which was rugged in the extreme to find his way to Paradise. When almost fainting with fatigue, some friendly 1 lAiken, Traditiouen des Mcnschcngeschlechtes, p. 72. '^ The Chinese Repository, vol. vii., p. 519. PARADISE IN CHINESE THOUGHT. 145 proves. nymphs, who had all the time from an eminence compassionated the weary wanderer, lent him an assisting hand. He arrived there, and immediately began to examine the famous spot."^ Such a pillar connecting the earth with an upper Paradise, and affording a means of access thereto, necessarily recalls to mind the analogous conception set forth in the Talmud : "There is an upper and a lower Paradise. And between them, upright, is fixed a i)illar ; and by this they are joined together ; and 'tis called 'The Strength of the Hill of Sion.' And by this Pillar on every Sabbath and Festival the riL;hteous climb up and feed themselves with a glance of the Divine majesty till the end of the Sabbath or Festival, when they slide down and return into the lower Paradise." ^ In this conception we have a twofold Paradise, one celestial and one terrestrial. Among the Chinese ^ The Chinese Repository, vol. vii., p. 520. - Eisenmenger, E»tdecktes Jiidcnthiim, Bd. ii., p. 318. (English translation, vol. ii., p. 25.) Compare Schulthess, Das Paradies, p. 354. Also the story of Er, the Pamphylian, in which we have the sar.\e " column, brighter than the rniii/itno, extending right through the wIiJ- heaven and through the earth;'''' here also tie spirits visiting the earth are allowed seven days before ascending. Plato, Republic, 616. Also the Chaldaeo-Assyrian conception of " the celestial and ter- restrial Paradises, supposed to be united by means of the Paradisaic Mount itself." The Oriental and Biblical yoiirnal. Chicago, 1880 : p. 173. Also the Greek idea: " Sehr merkwlirdig ist, was Pindar iOl3mp,, ii., 56 f.) von den Seli^en sagt. Wenn sie namlich auf der Insel der Seligen sich befinden, steigen sie zum Thiirme des Chronos empor. Dieser Ilohentendenz entspricht nun die alte Vorstellung vom Naturcentrum am Nordpol und so fUhren uns denn auch die grie- chiscben Dichter auf einem langen Umwege doch zuletzt nach Nysa, wo uns die griechischcn Kiinstler alle Wonnen desdionysischen Him- mels aufthun." Menzel, Die vorchristliche Unsterblichkeitslehre, ii., p. 10. Finally, the Japanese idea in Griffis, The Mikado's Empire, p,44. ro "!2?:'5u ■:Z5' 146 PARADISE FOUND. ■:' I (I » 1 Grifiiths, Ramayana, ii. 20. - Zimmer, Allindisches Leben. Berlin, 1879 : p. 359. ^ Yama : " one of the eight guardians of the world as regent of the South quarter, in which direction in some region of the lower world is his abode called Yam.i-pura ; thither a soul, when it leaves the bodv, is said to rep;>M-, ..nd there, after the recorder, Citra-gupta, has read an account of it;s actions, kept in a book called Agra-SandanI, receives a just sentence, either ascending to heaven, or to the world of the Pitris, or being driven down to one of the twenty-one hells." — Williams, Sanskri' Dirfionayy, sub. "Yama." ^ "The soul is believec'. to reach Yama's abode in four hours and fnrfv minutes ; consequcitly a dead body cannot be burned until that time has passed after death." — W. J. Wilkins, Hindu Mythology^ Ve- die and Ptiranic. London, 18S2 : Art. "Yama." See, also, Muir, Sanskrit Texts, v. 284-327, and our references in " Homer's Abode of the Dead." ■'«<;-:3i'«:i I-..— ,3,1 '!::.! J'' 150 PARADISE FOUND. W0m. it il. If f f MO" First, of course, we come to the Himalaya range, the Himavat of Indian geography. All that por- tion of the earth lying between this mountain range and the great ocean to the South constitutes one of the seven, or nine, " varshas," or divisions of the habitable (upper) hemisphere. Its name is Bharata. If now our ancient Hindu could proceed due North and cross the Himavat, — which he does not think possible to mortals, — he would find himself in Kim- purusha, an equally extensive but more elevated and beautiful varsha, extending northward till bounded by a second range of incredibly lofty mountains, the Himakuta. Still "ascending," or going North, until he had crossed this division and passed the Himakuta, he would enter Harivarsha, a still loftier and diviner country. This extends, in turn, to an- other boundary range, the Nishadha, crossing which one would come to Ilavrita, the central varsha of all, which occupies the top as well as the centre of the world. To the adequate description of the beauty and glory and preciousness of this country no tongue is equal. In its centre is situated the mount of the gods, " Beautiful Meru," described in chapter first of the present Part. It is at the Pole, and around it revolve all constellations of heaven. It is the centre of the habitable world. Continuing our imaginary journey across this di- vine country of Ilavrita, crossing of course this co- lossal central mountain, we should now begin to de- scend on the meridian opposite to that on which we ascended on the India side of the globe. The boun- dary of the central region on that side is the Nila range, then comes the varsha of Rumyaka ; its farther boundary is the Sweta range, beyond which is the ^ cross th ther sid( last of t one con rata, or ( equatori: this ocea The u ber "nin section o a perfect descendiii rasva, an being call To assi this sacre one of wh the Puran projection Having showed in lived, we p ception of The que; in the Hii ceeded fron was therefo How stra the followin primeval Ec at the terre ^ Sec also A the Hindus." PARADISE IN HINDU THOUGHT. ISI is the varsha of Hiranmaya. Still descending, we cross this and the range which bounds it on the far- ther side, the Sringin, and we are in Uttarakuru, the last of the seven grand divisions of the earth, the one corresponding, in distance from Meru, to Bha- rata, or our starting-point. It, of course, is on the equatorial ocean, and here too we have only to cross this ocean in order to reach the underworld. The way in which the varshas are made to num- ber " nine " is by subdividing the great central cross- section of the hemispherical surface, leaving Ilfivrita a perfect square on the top of the globe, the land descending eastward to the sea being called Bhad- r;\sva, and the corresponding country to the West being called Ketumala. To assist the reader to a clearer conception of this sacred geography we give herewith two cuts, one of which presents in outline the side-aspect of the Puranic earth, and the other a flat polocentric projection of its upper hemisphere.^ Having now answered our first question, and showed in what kind of a world the ancient Hindu lived, we pass to the second : " What was his con- ception of the location of the cradle of the race "i " The question is answered the moment we say that in the Hindu conception and tradition man pro- ceeded from Meru. His Eden-land was Ilavrita. It was therefore at the Pole. How strange that Lenormant could have written the following, and still have imagined that the true primeval Eden of the Hindu was anywhere else than at the terrestrial Pole ! He says, " In all the leg- 1 See also Appendix, Sect. IV., " The Earth and the World of the Hindus." e:::c - '■'"•«'■"• hit '■•>#■ MM*, T I I ""'•""— III '» W.; ;, "rxiy 'am 152 PARADISE FOUND. It \\ c;., if.: • ■»■ K. ends of India the origin ol mankind is placed on Mount Meru, the residence of the gods, a column which unites the sky to the earth. ... At first sight, on reading the description of Mount Meru furnished by the Puranas, it appears overcharged with so many purely mythological features that one hesi- Tho Earth of the Hindus, viewed from above. 5. Harivarsha. 6. Kimpurusha. 7. Bhilrata (India). 9. Bhadrasva. 1. Uttarakuru. a. Hiranmaya. 3. Ramyaka. 8. Ketumaift. 4. Su-MERU in Ilavrita. tates to believe that it has any basis in reality. To realize these descriptions one must represent one's self in the centre of a vast level and very elevated surface, surrounded by various mountain-ranges, a gigantic block, the axis of the worlds raising its head to the highest point of the heavens, whence there THE EARTH OF THE HINDUS Sick View of Upper Hemispliere. ■» Ii»„ «*».* -1 1. fi> t •■rwib 2' 3" J'' 1. ii ■■•ate* ;."»!* IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) 1.0 ^K* I I.I 2.5 2.2 so ^ 1^ 12.0 •- .. 1.25 i 1.4 i nwi m 1.6 ? I Hiotographic Sdences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. MSSO (716) 872-4903 u. 7^ e t lil falls Gang; charg< vara. the hi^ tral pc been constit the sai habitah nent oi the big tcrs ba\ seven ti abode c empty it summits as buttr waters c their tur through These fo gions, . , ^ _ site seas, central JV \ I and the i "ids, con I. ■ Matter, wit the hum a the four s] ^ Lenormai Asiatic Resem ft:: I '^ '^fie coHi Les Origines c nenlain- ties . «w PARADISE IN HINDU THOUGHT. 153 falls upon its summit, on the North Pole, the divine Ganga, the source of all rivers, which there dis- charges itself into an ideal lake, the Manasa-Saro- vara. . . . Meru, then, is at one and the same time the highest part of the terrestrial world and the cen- tral point of the visible heaven, — the two having been confounded through ignorance ^ of the real constitution of the universe : it is also, at one and the same time, the north pole and the centre of the habitable earth, Jambu-dwtpa, — literally of the conti- nent of the tree Jambu, the tree of life. Leaving the higher basin of the mountain in which its wa- ters have at first collected the source, Ganga travels seven times round the Meru in descending from the abode of the seven Rishis of the Great Bear, to empty itself afterward into four lakes placed on four summits adjacent to this vast pyramid, and serving as buttresses on its four sides. . . . Fed by the waters of the celestial Ganga the four lakes in their turn feed four terrestrial rivers which flow out through the mouths of four symbolical animals. These four great rivers water as many distinct re- gions, . . . and discharge themselves into four oppo- site seas, to the east, south, west, and north of the central Meru. . . . The four lakes, the four rivers, and the four oceans are composed of different liq- uids, corresponding to the four castes, and these latter, with which are connected all the nations of the human race, are reputed to have set out from the four sides of Meru to people the whole earth." '-^ 1 Lenormant here follows the misleading arguments of Wilford in Asiatic Researches, vol. viii., pp. 312, 313. '^ The Contemporary Review, Sept., 1S81 : Am. ed., p. 39. Also Les Origines de I'Histoire, torn. ii. I, ch. i. Compare Essai de Com- neutaire des Fragments Cosmogotiiqiies de Berose. Paris, 1871 : pp. ■■*■ ^ ^ J «■■•,.»_ ** 1. "•* -i. "SI' aWf. *• ■' ,, ^^ ifc '■••C -ji •■ ■ ~~ - 154 PARADISE FOUND. I. t t ■m. I. <: r tf..: :;2: A similar illustration of the power of a wrong pre- possession is given us in the illustrious Carl Ritter, who after ex[)ressly declaring that " the numberless Puranas and their most diverse interpretations by the Pundits teach that Mcru is the middle of the earthy and itself literally designates its centre and axiSf' ^ thereupon in the coolest manner imaginable proceeds to identify the same sacred height with the mountains of Central Asia. Still worse is the procedure of Mr. Massey, who after locating the Garden of Eden on Mount Meru, and saying explic- itly, " The Polc\ or polar region, is Meru,'' and again, ''Mcru is the garden of the Tree of Life^' neverthe- less tells us that in equatorial Africa beasts first grew into men.^ Happier is the inconsistency (jf Mr. Lillie, who, despite his adhesion to the flat-earth theory of Hindu cosmology, still incidentally speaks of " the blissful Garden " as " at the Pole." ^ 300-328. Also Muir, Sanskrit Texts, vol. ii., p. 139. " In his /;/• dische Studien, vol. i., p. 165, Weber speaks of the Aryan Indians be ing driven hy a deluge from their home, and coming from the North, not from the West (as Lassen, i., 515 will have it), into India." 1 " Die zahllosen Puranas und ihre verschiedenartigsten Ausle- gungen durch die Pundits lehren, dass Meru die Mitte der Erde sci, und selbst wortlich auch das Centrum, die Axe, bezeichne." — iiVv/- kunde, Bd. ii., p. 7. 2 The Natural Genesis, vol. ii., pp. 28, 162. 2 Buddha and Early Buddhism. London, 18S2 : p. 8. THE C A us den niuk, wo 1 dCK.— I'-R. Acc( Persian people seen dec J^fashyo pair was tlie faire term in e As a world le the "Ch Northme on which the g-ood, invcstigai interest, f ' l^nndahi. - "This," ■"^^'Jhammed'; 's sharper th^ pass.'" Ana J'reiim. Discoi fr'-ni the old 1 'fie rainbow." :prc- itter, ^rless IS by of the e and in able : with is the ig the expUc- again, verthe- ,ts first sncy of at-earih speaks CHAPTER V. THE CRADLE OF THE RACE IN IRANIAN, OR OLD-PER- SIAN, THOUGHT. Ausden Angaben nber die Paradiesstrdme und den Lauf derselben erhellt nun iiuih, wo wir das Paradies seibst zu sttchen haben, ndmlich im aussersten Nor- di-K. — Vr. Spiegel. According to the sacred books of the ancient Persians all the five-and-tvventy races of men which people the seven " keshvares " of the earth de- scended from one primitive pair, whose names were Mashyoi and Mashya. The abode of this primitive pair was in the keshvare Kvaniras, the central and the fairest of the seven. ^ Let us see if we can de- termine its location. As a key to the old Iranian conception of the world let Us investigate the nature and location of the "Chinvat bridge." This, like the Bifrost of the Northmen and the Al Sirat of Islam, is the bridge on which the souls of the dead, the evil as well as the good, leave this world to enter the unseen.^ The investigation is in itself and for its own sake full of interest, for no writer on the ideas and faith of the ^ Bimdahish, ch. xv., 1-30. - " This," says Professor Rawlinson, *' is evidently the original of Mohammed's famous ' way extended over the middle of hell, which is sharper than a sword and finer than a hair, over which all must pass.' " Ancient Monarchies, vol. ii., p. 339 n. Compare Sale's Koran, I'reiim. Discourse, Sect. iv. Professor Tiele thinks " it was borrowed from the old Aryan mythology," and that it "was probably originally the rainbow." History of Religion, London and Boston, 1877 : p. 177. '"•■■IC ".; ' "*-:3i I — I ...:t I' w^ * ■i\ • i5 C: it h I- «:: rir: it-'. •Ml2i 156 PARADISE FOUND. Mazdaeans has ever professed to be able to tell either the origin or true meaning of the myth. Most interpreters have either carefully abstained from all attempts at explanation, or have suggested that it probably refers to the rainbow or to the Milky Way, or to both.i Xo dispose of these suggestions, let us raise a few questions : — 1. Do we find in any part of the Avestan liter- ature any evidence that the Chinvat Bridge pos- sessed a curvilinear form ? None. 2. Straight, or curved as a whole, were its two ends conceived of as on a common level } No, for motion upon it in one direction is described as upward, and in the opposite direction as down- ward. 3. Where was the upper end } In the heaven of Ahura Mazda, the Supreme God, to whose abode the bridge conducts good souls. 4. But where is this abode } At the Northern Pole of the sky, as elsewhere shown. 5. Where is the earthward end } It rests upon "the Daitik peak." 6. Is this peak in Persia } No ; it is part of a sacred mountain in Airan-vej, the Eden of Iranian tradition. 7. And where is Airan-vej } " In the middle of the world." * " The Bridge of Souls cannot be always the Milky Way. . . . Supposing the myths which once belonged to the Milky Way to have been passed on to the Rainbow, the name of the former might also have been inherited by the latter." C. F. Keary, Primitive Belief. Lend., 1882 : p. 292. Comp. pp. 286-294, 347" Also Justi, Handbuch der Zendsprache, Leipsic, 1864 : p. ill, sub voce " Cinvant." 8. In the ea religio 9. ^ vej suj Far 10. atcd in The II. ) peak is Thei "the p( which t aHow, a Hindus. 12. T North P earth : v It is " "That b ed^^^es th( some wh so large 1 sharp sid just like t of the rig that side ' "Like tl centre of the planets perfoi in tlie Conten, '^ Dddistdft' It is a curiouj PARADISE IN OLD-PERSIAN THOUGHT. 157 tell Most im all hat it Way, let us 1 liter- e pos- ts two scribed } dovvn- ne God, .lis. lewhere ran-ve], ray. . . • IV to have light also ^vc Belief. Handbuch 8. In what keshvarc ? In Kvaniras, the central of the seven divisions of the earth, and tiie one in which men and the good religion were first created. 9. And in what direction from Persia was Airan- vej supposed to lie ? Far to the North. 10. What natural " centre of the earth " is situ- ated in that direction } The North Pole. 11. What other evidence is there that the Daitik peak is at the North Pole "i The fact that the mountain of which this is simply "the peak of judgment" is Hara-berezaiti, around which the heavenly bodies revolve, and which, as all allow, answers to the north polar Su-Meru of the Hindus.^ 12. Then the Chinvat bridge extends from the North Pole of the heavens to the North Pole of the earth : what is its shape } It is '^beam-shaped.''' fu quote the sacred book : "That bridge is like abeam, of many sides, of whose edges there are some which are broad, and there are some which are thin and sharp ; its broad sides are so large that its width is twenty-seven reeds, and its sharp sides are so contracted that in thinness it is just like the edge of a razor. And when the souls of the righteous and wicked arrive, it turns to thom that side which is suitable to their necessities." ^ ^ " Like the Meru of the Indians, Hara-berezaiti is the pole and centre of the world, the fixed point around which the sun and the planets perform their revolutions." — Lenormant, " Ararat and Eden," in the Contemporary Review, September, 1881, Am. ed., p. 41. •^ Dddistdn-i-Dinik, ch. xxi., 2-9. West, Pahlavi Texts, ii., pp. 47-49. It is a curious coincidence that in Polynesian mythology Buataranga, — - K"-,,^,^ •ail "'*''«■» S " '""••3l •• li'uji ■'■ '■'■ax 158 PAKADTSE FOUND. *• ^ it a IK ««•« •». ■am l' ••«•* 4, •23 The Chinvat bridge, then, is simply the axis of the northern heavens, the Pillar of Atlas, the Talmudic " Strength of the Hill of Sion," the column which in the Chinese legend the emperor vainly sought to climb ! In solving this long-standing problem wc have at the same time unlocked the mystery which has hitherto attached to Bifrost and Al Sirat.^ But in locating our bridge we have located the Persian Eden. And the location is unquestionably at the North Pole. More than this, we have made clear the fact that in the mythical or sacred geog- raphy of this ancient people the world of living men was originally the northern circumpolar hemisphere. The arrangement of the keshvares now becomes entirely clear.^ Like the divinely beautiful Ilavrita varsha of the Hindus, " illustrious Kvaniras " holds the central position. In its centre, as m the centre ** guardian of the road to the invisible world," is wife to Ru, " the supporter of the heavens." Gill, Myths and Songs of the South Pa- cific. London, 1876: p. 51. So if Heimdallr's true station were at the top of the rainbow, his title "son of nine mothers" (Vigfusson and Powell, Corpus Poeticum Boreale, London, 1883, ii. 465) 'voiild have no such obvious significance as our interpretation gives. 1 One of the etymologies of Chinvat makes it the " Bridge of the Judge." (Haug, Essays, 2d ed., p. 165 n.) As among the ancient Assyrians, and some other peoples, the pole star has been styled " the judge of heaven," it is possible that we have here at once the origin of the name and a new identification of the position of the mythical "beam-shaped" bridge. It is interesting to note in lliis connection that Heimdallr, the Norse god who stands at the top of Bifrost, is also, etymologically considered, the "World-judge" or "World-divider." Menzel, Unsterblichkeitslehre, \. 134. In I'lato (Ref'tib., 614 ff.) the judge stands at the bottom of the column. — For grotesque survivals of the Bridge of Souls in folklore, see Tylor, Primitive Culture, Index. 2 The diagram attempted by Windischmann, Zoroastrische Stndien, p. 67, is inconsistent with the Bundahish, ch. v., 9. So must be every attempt to arrange the keshvares on a flat earth. PARADISE IN OLD-PERSIAN THOUGHT. 159 :)f the mudic ich in ;ht to jm wc which id the Dnal)ly : made 12 men sphere, peonies [Idvrita " holds : centre Ru, " the wuth Fa- |n were at igfusson 15) 'voiild llge of the le anciciit |en styled once the )n of the ^e in this [he to]-) of [dge" or In Plato in. — For je Tylor, Stndim, I be every of Ilavrita, is the holiest mount in the world. Di- rectly ov^er it is the true heaven. In this central polar country North and South and ICast and West would have no application ; but speaking from their own geographical standpoint as south of Airan-vej, the Persians located to the east of this holy central Kvaniras the keshvare Savah, to the west Arzah, to the south the keshvares Fradadafsh and Vidadafsh, and to the north Vorilbarst and Vorugarst.^ This gives a map of the northern hemisphere which in a The Earth of the Persians. ' Darmesteter transliterates the names as follows : " The earth is divided into seven Karshvares, separated from one another by seas and mountains impassable to men. Arezahi and Savahi are the west- erii and eastern Karshvare ; Fradadhafshu and Vidadhafshu are in the south ; Vouru<^arejti and Vouru^arjti are in the north ; ZTz'ani- ratha (Kvaniras) is the central Karshvare. A'z/aniratha is the only Karshvare inhabited by man {Bundahish, xi. 3)." — Darmesteter, The Zend-Avesta, vol. ii., p. 123 n. '''•■'Cl'-;i :;:— 3;' :::■-" J" "■•■■am * :::,:3 ^ iifiS* i6o rAKADISE FOUND. c IK I., He:::: plane polocentric projection may be represented as on the fore<;()in^ I^^K^i the polar centre of course being occupied by llara-berezaiti. It would be a fascinating; task to reinterpret tho whole Avestan literature and mythology in the new light of this recovered geography and cosmology, but this would require a book of itself. It is worthy of remark that the Venidad expressly calls the earth " round," and apparently recognizes the existence of its two far-separated poles. ^ As we have seen, its Chinvat bridge or beam, which is also an idea so an- cient as to be found in the Avesta itself (Farg., xix., 30, et passim), is the axis of the world, conducting good souls by an upward " flight " into the north polar heaven of Ahura Mazda, but the evil by a fall "headforemost" into the south polar hell. •^ Airan- vej, or " Old Iran," was the most natural name in the world for the Iranians to give to the traditional birth-place of their race.^ But all attempts to find it " on the banks of the Aras " or " in the far-off lands ^ The Avesta (Darmestetcr), i., p. 205 ; ii., pp. 143, 144. Compare Windischmann's version of the Farvardin Yasht, i. 3 : " die beidcii Enden des Ilimmels." Studieii, p. 313. 2 Apparently through the passage forced through the earth by Aharman (Ahriman). See Zdd Sparam, ch. ii., 3, 4, 5. West, /'//;■ lavi Texts, vol. i., p. 161. Also Bnndahish, iii. 13. Rhode, Die lui- lige Sage dcs Zeudvolks, p. 235. Windischmann's translation of I'lin- dahisli, ch. xxxi. (in Darmestetcr numbered xxx.), seems especially to support this idea : " Ahriman und die Schlange wcrden durch die Kraft der I.obgesange geschlagen und luilflos und schvvach gemacht. Auf jener Briicke des Himmels, auf welcher er herbeilief, wird er in die tiefste Finsterniss zuriicklaufen. , . . Auch dies ist gesagt : Dicse Erde wird rein und eben sein : ausser dcm Berg Cakat-Cinvar wird ein Aufsteigen und ein Hinabtragen nicht sein." Zoroastrischc Stu- dien, p. 117. Compare Plato's " chasms," with ways leading hell- ward and heavenward. Republic, 614. ^ F. C. Cook, Origins of Religion and Language. London, 1884 : p. 187. !l;,ll \ PARADISE LV OLD-PRRSIA.\' THOrCHT. l6l d as lursc t the I new yT, but :hy of earth ice of :n, its so au- ., xix., Lictin^^ north ^ a lull Airan- ime in itional find it lands of the rising sun " ' are entirely useless. ICciually mistaken is the gloss which merely makes it '* prim- itively " the mythic land where the disembodied "souls of the righteous" are assembled by Ahura Mazda.2 The same must be said of the assertion that "the real site of the Airan-vcj in its ancient and original conception is to the east of the Caspian Sea and of Lake Aral." "^ By every particular of its de- scription it is identified with the Daitik peak, with Ilara-berezaiti, with the polar " river," the polar "tree," the polar "centre " of the ui)per hemisphere. It is simply the Arctic Kden of humanity remem- bered as it was before the \W\\ One entered, and " by his witchcraft counter-created winter and the worst of plagues.""* This being the case we need not won- der that in a paper on " The Aryan Birth-jilace," read in January, 1884, before the Royal Society of Literature, Mr. C. J. Stone expressed his strong doubt of the current doctrine that the cradle of the Aryans was the upper valleys of the Oxus.^ The 1 Darmesteter, 77/*? Avesta, i., p. 3. " Ibid., i., p. 15. 8 Lenormant, 77ie Contemporary Review, Sept., iSSr (Am. ed.), p. 41. — Pictrement, Zt'j //rnf J, locates it just east of Lake Balkach, in lat. 45°-47°. Grill is so bewildered by the number of attempted iden- tificitions that he pronounces the land a purely mythical one, and denies to the name all historic or geographic reality. Erirdtcr, i. 218, 219. •* Fargard, i. 3. The jjassage continues, " There are (now) ten winter months there, two summer months ; and those are cold for the waters, cold for the earth, and cold for the trees." This reminiscence of the on-coming of The Glacial Age at the Pole also ajipcars in the Flood legend of the American aborigines, particularly the Lenni- Lenapi, or Delaware Indians. Rafinesque, The American Nations. Philn., 1S36: Song III. " See also Dr. O. Schrader, SprachverglcicJmng und Urgeschichte. Liii^iiistisch - historische Beitrdge zur Erforschting des indogervian- tschen Alterthums. Jena, 1883. Dr. S. formerly adhered to the II :.; X - .■•■-i„ '■* «' ■ '-tst r"39 1 62 PARADISE FOUND. cradle of the whole Aryan family will at last be found to be in " Airan, the Ancient," — and this in the Arctic birth-place of man. theory of a Mid-Asian Aryan l)irth-lan(l, but has been led to abandnii it. Still more positive and emphatic is Karl Penka, who boldly Vs. cates the original home of the Aryans in Scandinavia. See liis Ori^i;iiics Ariacic. Lini^uististh-cthnolo^^ische UntcrsHcliutii^cn ziir al- tesU'n Geschichte tier Arischcn Volkcr utui S^racheii. Vienna, iSSj. Mr. John Cilbb argues in the same direction, " The Original Home of the Aryans," in The British Quart. Review^ Oct., 1884. THE CR ll'f have > A>y.i)/ come ai:'Jr 0/ t/ic'. ;ii: :iiit w/tic/t 0. D. MiLu < c mm 0.. fh I- :^ CHAPTER VI. THE CRADLE OF THE RACE IN ANCIENT AKKADIAN, ASSYRIAN, AND UAHYLONIAN THOUGHT. H'e have here, evvn to the most minute details, an exact re (traduction of the AO'"' conception of Mount Merit, or A/i'ord/, with its accessories. Here is the abode of the heavenly hierar, liy, located on the summit of the Kharsak, or sacred inouiit which penetrates the Iwavens exactly in the region of tlie i'ole star, — Kbv. 0. I>. Miller. We have already seen that the prehistoric inhab- itants of the Tigro-Iuiphrates basin, called by some Akkadians, by others Sumerians, by yet others Ak- kado-Sumerians, had like other Asiatic peoples their Mountain of the World, on whose top was the celes- tial Paradise, and around which sun, moon, and stars revolved. Our present task is to locate this moun- tain more exactly, and to consider its significance for our hypothesis respecting the site of Eden. That the earth, as conceived of by this ancient people, was spherical is not at the present day ques- tioned. With their ideas probably no arrheeologist was more familiar than the late Francois Lenor- mant, and he expresses himself as follows : " ' The Chaldees,' says Diodorus Siculus (lib. ii., 31), 'have quite an opinion of their own about the shape of the earth ; they imagine it to have the form of a boat turned upside down, and to be hollow underneath.' This opinion remained to the last in the Chaldacan sacerdotal schools ; their astronomers believed in it, and tried, according to Diodorus, to support it by ■■-■ . (1 3' 31 '•'C -I i«* 164 PARADISE FOUND. V*. I)"- • 1M scientific arguments. // is of very ancient origin, a remnant of the ideas of the purely Akkadian period. . . . Let us imagine, then, a boat, turned over ; not such an one as we are in the habit of seeing, but a round skiff, like those which are still used under the name of Kufa on the shores of the lower Tigris and Euphrates, and of which there are many represen- tations in the historical sculptures of the Assyrian palaces ; the sides of this round skiff bend upwards from the point of the greatest width, so that they are shaped like a hollow sphere deprived of two thirds of its height [?], and showing a circular open- ing at the point of division. Such was the form of the earth according to the authors of the Akkadian magical formulae and the Chaldaean astrologers of after years. We should express the same idea in the present day by comparing it to an orange of which the top had been cut off, leaving the orange uprii^ht upon the flat surface thus produced. The upper and convex surface constituted the earth properly so called, the inhabitable earth {ki) or terraqueous sur- face {ki-a), to which the collective name kalama, or the countries, is also given." ^ It is well known that in minor details Diodorus is often found not altogether trustworthy. He was not a critical reporter. While, therefore, in the above quotation he has undoubtedly preserved to us one of the ancient Chaldaean similes,^ by the use of which the true figure of the earth was taught, I can but think that the statement as to the hollowness of the ^ Chaldcean Maj^ic, p. 1 50. 2 The figure was also used by the Egyptians, and other ancient na- tions. See Wilford, in Asiatic Researches, vol. viii., p. 274. Also articles and works on " The Ark " and " Arkite Symbols." earth \ gested atively sponsil which 1 ors to of a he opening ge, whe avail i). it was I whole s nessed iiiL^ can PARADISE IN AKKADIAN THOUGHT. 165 ngin, a period. er ; not g, but a ider the jris and iprescn- ^.ssyrian upwards lat they of two iar open- form of *Lkkaclian ogers of ea in the of which upriL;ht pper and iperly so leous sur- lama, or lodorus is was not le above lus one oi |of which can but iss of tlie earth underneath is an unauthorized inference, sug- gested by the hollow boat, and made by the compar- atively uninstructed Greek solely upon his own re- sponsibility. It is true that, in the same work from which the above extract is taken, Lenormant endeav- ors to adjust Akkadian cosmology to such a notion of a hollow sphere, saying, " The interior concavity opening from underneath was the terrestrial abyss, gCy where the dead found a home {kur-nii-dcy ki-gal, aralli). The central point in it was the nadir, or, as it was called, * the root,' urn, the foundation of the whole structure of the world ; this gloomy region wit- nessed the nocturnal journey of the sun."^ But noth- inir can. be more evident on examination than that this attempt involves the writer in at least three in- consistencies : First, if the sun visits the interior of the eaith at night, its proper orbit cannot be round and round the Mountain of the World to the north- east of Babylonia, as our author elsewhere repre- sents. Second, if aralli, the abode of the dead, is in the interior of the hollow earth, it cannot be to the northeast of Babylonia, as it is represented to be in the context. Third, if the earth was conceived of as hollow, of course its whole central portion was empty space; but according to this presentation its central point " was called ' the root,' tint, the foun- dation of the whole structure of the world." Surely the foundation of the world can scarcely have been supposed to be mere emptiness. To a layman in these studies this uru would much rather suggest y\ ''•"■SZ. <5 il -C - i ^ J' « ■■■iii jf i ' Ibid., p. 150. — It is worthy of note that the expression "root" ancient na- ■ of the world, or " root-land," is applied to the same subterranean Also I region of darkness in Japanese mythology. See " Shintoism," by Grifiis in McClintock and Strong's Cyclopcedia, vol. ix., p. 688. 274- ■J 5 1 66 PARADISE FOUND. the antarctic Tap-en-to mountain of ancient Egyp- tian thought, the Kji-Meru of ancient India. But it is time to return to the Akkadian, or Ak- kado-Sumerian, mountain of the gods. Again we quote Lenormant : " Above the earth extended the sky {ana), spangled with its fixed stars i^nul), and revolving round the Mountain of the East {Kharsak Kurra), the column which joins the heavens and the earth, and serves as an axis to the celestial vault. The culminating point in the heavens, the zenith {7tti!2kti)y^ was not this axis or pole ; on the contrary, it was situated immediately above the country of Akkadia, which was regarded as the centre of the inhabited lands, whilst the mountain which acted as a pivot to the starry heavens was to the northeast of this country. Beyond the mountain, and also to the northeast, extended the land of aralli, which was very rich in gold, and was inhabited by the gods and blessed spirits." ^ Here we have the " Mountain of the East " lo- cated, not in the east, but in the northeast. Else- where our author recognizes most fully the identity of this mount with the Har-Moed of Isaiah xiv. 14, and the difficulty of placing it anywhere but at the North Pole.^ He adduces from the cuneiform texts no evidence whatever for a location to the " north- east," and seems to fix upon that direction only as a compromise of his own. " Nous devons conclurc " is his language. His only reason for thinking of any other position than one due north appears to be a cuneiform expression which seems to make Khar- sak Kurra at the same time " the mountain of the 1 Pahi in the French edition. 2 Chaldaan Magic, p. 150. 3 Fragments de Berose, pp. 392, 393. sunrij son fc of As: precis north. One tice. reader J as "th earth, ; under cimeifc rectly c inhabit( tion, he ing poir on the the cou] centre c which a( the norti rARADISE INAKKADIAN^ TIIOCGIIT. 167 Egyp- or Ak- lin wc ed the /), and "Jiarsak ind the I vault, zenith ^ntrary, mtry of ; of the acted as heast of JO to the lich was rods and ,ast" lo- . Else- identity xiv. 14, t at the |rm texts north- inly as a iurc'' is of any to be a ,e Khar- m of the sunrise." * This, in reality, instead of being a rea- son for searching among the mountains to the east of Assyria or Babylonia, is, when rightly understood, precisely an additional reason for looking to the north.2 One other statement in the extract calls for no- tice. The writer seems to have anticipated that his readers would inevitably locate a mountain, described as "the column which joins the heavens and the earth, and serves as an axis to the celestial vault," under the celestial pole ; and believing that the cuneiform texts which locate the celestial pole di- rectly over Akkad (or Akkadia), " the centre of the inhabited lands," to be inconsistent with such a loca- tion, he introduces the remark that " the culminat- ing point in the heavens " was " not the axis or pole ; on the contrary, it was situated immediately over the country of Akkadia, which was regarded as the centre of the inhabited lands, whilst the mountain which acted as a pivot to the starry heavens was to the northeast of this country." 1 The following from liis latest account of the mountain will be val- ued : " La 'montagne des pays ' est le lieu oil resident les dieux. . . . Elle est situee au nord, vient de nous dire Yescha' yahou ; i Test disent les documents cuneiformes, ou I'expression accadienne ''garsag babbiv - = assyriene sad (it samsi, ' la montagne du levant,' apparait comir . synonyme de I'accadien 'garsaq knrkurra = assyrien sad ma- tati ; d'ou nous devons conclure que c'est au nord-est du bassin de I'Eiiphrate et du Tigre qu'on la supposait placee. C'est elle qui vaut a Tor lent, son nom accadien de mer kurra et son nom assyrien de hdii signifiant tous les deux ' le point cardinal de la montagne.' Et le sens de ce terme est bien precise par la variante accadienne mer ''garsag, oil ce mot, dont le sens ' la montagne ' est incontestable, se substitue a son synonyme kii)\ dont la signification eut pu etre dou- teuse." — Les Origines de VHistoire, vol. ii., I, p. 126. 2 See Menzel, Die vorchrisflichc Uiistcrhlichkeitslehrc, Bd. i., chap- ter entitled *' Der Sonnengarten am Nordpol," pp. 87-93, 1 Iihftu. '•" .1 '. "'X: - . ' • '--* Nil IS.., J' ••*r ' "!3 ► '.me* 1 68 PARADISE FOUND. ■|iif ■fir , » •c c it::' From so eminent an authority one naturally hesi- tates to differ ; but inasmuch as M. Joachim Menard, in a vvork as recent as the one from which we have quoted, while agreeing with M. Lenormant in mak- ing Akkad the traditional "centre of the earth," dif- fers from him in locating precisely in this central coimtry " the mountain on whose apex the heaven of the fixed stars is pivoted," ^ we cannot avoid the conclusion that Lenormant's distinction between the zenith of Akkad and the celestial pole is based upon a misapprehension, and is productive only of con- fusion. The solution of all difficulties is found the moment the mythological Akkad is made a cir- cumpolar mother-country, after which the Akkad of the Tigro-Euphrates valley was commemoratively named.'-^ This supposition is made all the easier by three noteworthy facts: (i) that both the names Akkad and Sumir are not Assyrio-Babylonian, but loan - words from an older prehistoric tongue ; '^ (2) that the etymological signification and appella- tives of Akkad thoroughly identify it with the lofty country at the north polar summit of the earth ;^ 1 " Le pays d' Akkad est regarde, d'apres les plus antiques tradi- tions, conime le centre dc la terre ; c'est W que s'eleve la montagne sur la cime de laquelie pivote le del des etoiles fixes." — Babylone et la Chaldee, Paris, 1875 • P- 46' 2 Compare the primitive name of Babylon, Tin-tir-ki, " Place of the Tree of Life." Lenormant, Beginniitgs of History^ p. 85. ^ " II est certain que les mots Sumir et Akkad n'appartiennent pas ^ la langue assyro-chaldeenne. lis sont propres 4 une langue anteri- cure ; et nous savons, par les explications memes des Assyriens, que Akkad veut dire * montagne.' " — Menant, Bahylone et la Chaldee. Paris, 1875 : p. 47. * " Akkad is bovendien zeker een hoog land, geen lage vlakte bij de zee, zooals ook een glosse bet door tilla, hoogte, verklaart." C, R Tiele, Is Sumer en Akkad hcizclfde als Makan en Mehicha ? Am- sterdam, 1883 r p. 6. Compare last preceding note : Akkad = " mon- PARADISE IN AKKADIAN THOUGHT. 169 hesi- mard, ; have mak- ," dif- :entral ven of id the ;en the d upon )£ con- ind the a cir- kkad of ratively isier by names [ian, but gue ; -^ appella- he lofty earth ; ^ ues tradi- montagne 'abyloitd ei ■ Place of nnent pas ^ue anteri- Iriens, que |{ Cluildee. Iikte bi] de :." C.P. irt ? Anv 1= " mon- and (3) that recently discovered tablets are compel- Hng the Assyriologists to recognize two Akkads, one in the Tigro-Euphrates valley and one much farther to the North, though as yet none of these scholars have looked as far in that direction as to the Pole.^ If further proof were needed that the Kharsak Kurra of the earliest inhabitants of Mesopotamia was identical with the north polar World-mountain of Egypt and the surrounding Asiatic nations, it would be found on investigating their conceptions of the region of the disembodied dead and their notion of a mountain of the rulers of the dead antipodal to the mount of the gods. The Akkadians, like the ancients generally, conceived of the realm of the dead as located to the South. Their underworld be- ing simply the under or southern hemisphere of the earth, they could not place it in any other direction. In naming the cardinal points the Akkadians there- fore called the South ** \\\Q funereal \iomX." ^ In this quarter was located the mount of the rulers of the tagne." Also Smith, The Phonetic Values of the Cuneiform Charac ters. London, 1S71 : p. 17. ^ See Proceedings of the Society of Biblical Archceology. London, Nov.-Dec, 1881. "Mr. Pinches, in a further communication on the Palis Tablet [in cuneiform characters, but supposed to be Cappado- cian in origin], observes : ' The question of the original home of the Akkadians is affected thereby. ... As it seems that the country north of Assyria was also called Akkad, as well as the northern part of Babylonia, the neighborhood of Cappadocia as the home of the Ak- kadian race may be regarded as a very possible explanation, etc' " Brown, Myth of KirkS. London, 1883 : p. 87. Finzi, in his Carta del Mondo conosciuto dagli Assiri tracciata secondo le inscrizioni cunei- fonni, does not venture to locate either Akkad or Kharsak Kurra. * Chaldcean Afagic, Eng. ed., p. 168, 169. Compare F. Finzi, Ri- cerche per lo Studio deW Antichith Assira. Turin, 1872 : p. 109 note 18. -J I' ■"■-* .*, "5 lint!) "ntsi 170 PARADISE FOUND. \ #t .2^ ft c c c dead. It was the under or south polar projection of the earth. It corresponded with the south polar mount of demons in Hindu and in Egyptian thought. Even Lenormant, whose mistake in locating the mount of the gods in the East, logically leads to the mistake of locating this mount of the rulers of the dead in the West, still unconsciously gives evi- dence as to the true location by stating that it is "situated in the low-down portions of the earth." ^ And elsewhere he has told us that in the Akkadian language to descend and to go southward were sy- nonymous expressions.^ With Professor Friedrich Delitzsch, then, we lo- cate the Akkadian Kharsak Kurra at the North.^ Once make the primeval Akkad the equivalent of Ilavrita in Hindu, or of Kvaniras in Iranian, mythol- ogy, and all is perfectly plain and self-consistent. The primitive Akkad is now "the centre of all lands " in the same sense in which Ilavrita and Kvaniras are in their respective systems. As in both these systems the mount of the gods is in the centre of this central country, so is Kharsak Kurra. Su-Meru and Hara-berezaiti and Kwen-lun are each exactly under the Pole-star, having it in their zenith ; the same is true of Kharsak Kurra. As every splendor of a divine abode crowns the top of all the former, so is the summit of Kharsak resplen- dent beyond description. As the sun, moon, and stars revolve around the Hindu and Iranian and Chinese mounts, so is Kharsak the point " on which 1 " Situee dans les parties basses de la terre." — Origines, torn. ii. I, p. 134. 2 The Beginnings of History, p. 313 n. 4. ' Wo lag das Paradies ? p. 12 1. PARADISE IN AKKADIAN THOUGHT. 171 ection 1 polar ought, ig the ;ads to ilers of es evi- it it is arth." 1 Lkadian ere sy- , we lo- North;'^ ilent of mythol- isistent. of all ita and As ill Is in the Kurra. Ilun are n their a. As top of esplen- n, and lan and which the heaven of the fixed stars is pivoted." Moreover from its top flows that Eden river, which, like Gunga and Ardvi-SCira, waters the whole earth. ^ Under these circumstances the candid reader will probably be prepared to agree with the statement of Mr. Miller which we have made the motto to this chapter, and to say with Gerald Massey, only with better understanding than his, "The cradle of the Akkadian race was the * Mountain of the World,* that 'Mount of the Congregation in the thighs of the North.' . . . The first mount of mythology was the Mount of the Seven Stars, Seven Steps, Seven Stages, Seven Caves, which represented the celestial North as the birth-place of the initial motion and the beginning of time. This starting-point in heaven above is the one original for the many copies found on the earth below. . . . The Akkadians date from Urdhu, the district of the northern Mountain of the World." 2 1 Of this celestial source Lenormant speaks as follows : " . . . et la fontaine divine Glietim-kour-liou de la montagne des pays des Chal- dccns. Cette deriiiere fontaine, dont le nom est accadien et veut dir 'las ource qui enveloppe la montagne sainte,' est dite ' fille de TOcean,' viarat apsi, et invoquee comme une deesse douee d'une personality vivante, pareille \ celle que revet chez les Iraniens Ardvi90ura-Ana- hita. L'existence chez les Chaldeans de la croyance a un cours d'eau mythique d'ou precedent tous les fleuves de la terre semble attestee par la mention d'une riviere (dont le nom est malheureusement en partie detruit sur la tablette qui contient ce reseignement) laquelle est qualifiee d^'utnme na'r'i ' la mere des fleuves.' " Origines, tom. ii, i, p. 133. Compare Siouffi, La Religion des Sotihbhas ou Sabiens, Paris, 18S0, p. 7 n., where the Euphrates is represented as rising in a celes- tial Paradise (Olmi Danhouro) under the throne of Avatha, whose throne is under the Pole star. 2 A Book of Beginnings. London, 188 1 : vol. ii., p. 520. 'X' -■; ■■— J !1 ''1 CHAPTER VII. •c: mnt m t m\t THE CRADLE OF THE RACE IN ANCIENT EGYPTIAN THOUGHT. A ccording to the Kamite legend related by Diodorus, Osiris and /sis lived to- gether in Aysa, or Paradise. Here there was a garden wherein tlte deathless divelt. Here they lived in perfect happiness until Osiris was seized with the de- sire to drink the water of immortality. Then he went forth in search of it, ami fell. . . ■ But an earlier coiip/e than Osiris and Isis was Sevekhand Ta-urt^whii as the two constellations of the seven stars revolving round the Tree, or Pole, were tfu primeval pair in Paradise. — The Natural Genesis. The mythical geography of the ancient Egyptians is as yet too little known to allow us to hope for much light from this quarter on the question of the site of Eden. Even their cosmology is little understood, and their scientific attainments are by many inexcus- ably underestimated. So good a scholar as Mr. Vil- liers Stuart could recently write, " The Egyptians had not attained to a sufficiently advanced point in science to solve the problem of how the sun in his daily course, having sunk behind the western hori- zon, returned to rise at the opposite quarter of the heavens." ^ Nevertheless, as we desire to test our hypothesis as far as possible by all most ancient tra- ditions and myths, whether favorable or unfavorable, we must inquire whether anything can be ascer- tained as to the ideas of the ancient Egyptians touch- ^ Nile Gleanings. London, 1879 : p. 262. This is as bad as the declaration of Lauer : " Und so glaube ich dass auch Homer nie daran gedacht hat, wie die Sonne wieder aus dem Westen in den Osten gelange." Nachlass. Berlin, 1851 : vol. i., p. 317. PARADISE IN EGYPTIAN THOUGHT. 173 ^PTIAN 'i lived to- e deathless ith the dc- : of it, and '"a-urt, rv/uj Pole, "Were yptians )r much z site of erstood, nexciis- Mr. Vil- ;yptians Doint in n in his n hori- of the lest our ent tra- orable, asccr- touch- id as the [omer iiie len Osten ing the form of the earth and the theatre of man's first history. The leading features of Egyptian cosmology, as interpreted by the present writer, are in perfect ac- cord with the cosmological ideas of other ancient nations as described in chapter first of the present division. They may be briefly expressed in the six following theses : — 1. That in ancient Egyptian thought the earth was conceived of as a sphere, with its axis perpen- dicular and its North Pole at the top. 2. That in the earliest time Anienti was conceived of neither as a cavern in the bowels of the earth, nor as a region of the earth to the West, on the same general plane as the land of Egypt, but was simply the under or southern hemis2:)here of the earth, conceived of as just described. 3. That the Tat pillar symbolized the axis of the world (heaven and earth) upright in space. 4. That Ta nnter, whatever its later applications, originally signified the extreme northern or topmost point of the globe, where earth and heaven were fa- bled to meet. 5. That Cher-nut er was the inferior celestial hemi- sphere underarching Amenti. 6. That Hcs and Nebt-ha (Isis and Nephthys) were respectively goddesses of the North and South poles, or of the northern and southern heavens.^ Assuming now, with Chabas, Lieblein, Lefevre, and Ebers, that the earth of the ancient Egyptians, ^ In a brief communication published in The Indepetident, New York, Feb. 8, 1883, the critical attention of Egyptologists was respect- fully invited to these theses. Since that time much new evidence of their correctness has come to light. See, for example, the new The- saurus Inscriptionum of Brugsch, pp. 176, 177, et passim. 3 :=■• iC ^i .i J' ■x; :3! ':3i •■IHtt 3» c: •cr: •c: IK,. 174 PARADISE FOUND. like that of the ancient Asiatic nations, was spherical, what was their conception of its northern terminus ? In chapter first of this Part, some indication has been already given. But our present investigation demands a fuller answer to this question. Turnin-- to the great work of Brugsch on the " Geograi)hical Inscriptions of the Old-Egyptian Monuments," wc find that the Egyptians considered the farthest limit in the North to be " the four pillars or supports of heaven." ^ The fact that these four supports of heaven, instead of being situated in four opposite directions from Egypt, are all in the farthest NortJi, is very significant. It shows that though the people might speak of heaven as supported on four pillars, it is not to ])e inferred therefrom that they conceived of the earth as flat, and of the sky as a flat Oriental roof one story above it.'^ Brugsch himself, though writing upon the supposition that the Egyptians' earth was flat, avoids this mistake. His inference, coming from one who had a traditional wrong theory to support, is most interesting and valuable. He says, •' Inasmuch as these * four supports of heaven,' the northern limit of the earth as known to the Egyptians, nowhere else occur as name of people, land, or river, it seems to me most probable that we have herein the designation of a high mountain which was perhaps characterized by four peaks, or ^ " Die Ansicht von den Enden dcr Welt ist eine uralte und vicleii Volkcrn gemeinsame. . . . Als die ausscrste Grenze im Siideii gait den Egyptern das Meer \^Say) und dcr l:)erg ap-en-to oder iap-m-to, wortlich 'das Horn derWelt; ' als die ausserste Grenze im Nordon dagegen 'die vier Stiitzen des Hinimels.'" Geographische Jnsc/irificii, Bd. ii., p. 35. Compare Taylor's Pausanias, vol. iii., 255, hot. 2 Maspero, Les Contes Populaires de PEgypte Ancienne. Paris, 1882 : pp. Ixi.-lxiii. PARADISE IN EGYPTIAN TirOUGIIT. 175 irical, linus ? has n gatiou I mini; .phical s," we t limit :)rts oi 3rts of ppositc North, people pillars, iceivcd )rientcil though irptians' erencc, theory ;. He leavcn,' to the people, that we mntain ;aks, or Ind viclcn llideii gait 1 tap-cii-to, [1 Ndi'den \schrifL:n, Talis, which consisted of four ranges, from which pecu- liarity it received its name. Like all peoples of an- tiquity, — at least all those whose literature has come down to us, — the Egyptians conceived of the earth as rising toward the North, so that at last at its northernmost point it joined the sky and sup- ported it." 1 In the Buddhist conception of Meru, as given in chapter first of this Part, we have precisely the four- peaked, heaven-supporting mountain which Brugsch here describes : " Each of the four corners of the mountain-top has a peak seven hundred yojanas high." It is not impossible that in the four dwarfs which support the dome of the modern Buddhist temple we have a far-off survival of ancient Egypt's " four supports of heaven." Certainly the Buddhist temple-roofs symbolize the circumpolar heaven, ^ and a recent author, touching upon the latter's mytholog- ical support, writes as follows : " This prop passing through the earth and the heavens at the pole, indi- cated as we have seen by the Alpha of Draco, be- came the * nail ' of the old astronomers, the point round which all nature revolved. Between earth and the celestial pole the prop idea was again brought forward as the central column of a huge conical mountain. Mount Meru, guarded at each cardinal point by a mighty king. The four dwarfs propping up some of the columns in the old Bud- dhist temples are evidently these four kings. . . . When the prop pierced the highest heaven it was a spire called the * tcel and in Nepal it is confessedly 1 Gcographische Inschriften, Bd. ii., p. 37. 2 Koeppen, Die Religion des Budd/ias, ii. 262. ".Z -'' "-" jJ!! :i ns!> '* 1/6 PARADISE FOUND. t!i. ^ f W^ IT" c: ^:, ■c: •c: ' •^-i c:i! tt.w$ JK«' '««: •w. . "•n I «.^.». >. i ! 5^ ! F- \ i i « «»>«MMMf ' i r*-^: ! r.::i:; ljk„. • ;.:rj» in all the temples the symbol of Atli Buddha, the supreme, in his heavenly garden, Nandana grove." ^ But returning from this merely curious question, we remind ourselves that we have seen reason to believe that the ancient Egyptians conceived of the earth as a sphere, with a heaven-supporting moun- tain in the extreme North. In the extreme South was another mountain, ''The Horn of the World," represented as of incredible height (eight atur or stadia).'*^ This corresponds so perfectly with the earth of the Puranas, with its Su-Meru and Ku-Meru, that we are irresistibly impelled to inquire whether the parallelism extends any farther. We take the question of the direction of the abode of the dead. All agree that in Indian thought the abode of the dead is in the South. So was it in the thought of the ancient Egyptian. The recently dis- covered epitaph of Queen Isis-em-Kheb, mother-in- law of Shishak, king of Assyria {circa looo n. c), thus reads : " She is seated all beautiful in her place enthroned, among the g-ods of the South she is crowned with flowers. She is seated in her beauty in the arms of Khonsou, her father, fulfilling his desires. He is in Amenti, the place of departed spirits." ^ Again, in the mythological earth of India, the abode of the dead, being the southern or under hemi- sphere, is looked upon as inverted. Viewed from the standpoint of gods and men, it is bottom up- ward, and its inhabitants move about head down- 1 Lillie, Buddha and Early Buddhism, p. 50. 2 See first quotation from Brugsch above, ' Villiers Stuart, The Funeral Tent of an Egyptian Queen. Lon- don, 1882 : p. 34. See also " Homer's Abode of the Dead " in the Appendix, Sect. VI. ?:< war und A cee( cent same curi( "Ch all West the J " curi quartc The "proci all ere of the of the PARADISE IN EGYPT/MJV THOUGHT. 177 la, the ove. ' [jstion, son to of the mouu- South Vorld," atur or ith the a-Meru, A^hethcr le abode ight the it in the ntly dis- othcr-in- )0 H. c), er place she is beauty lUng his epartcd lia, the ir hcmi- ;d fi'om Item up- down- Xccn. Lon- Id "in the ward.' The same is true of Amcnti, the l-^gyptian underworld, and of its inhal)itants.''^ Again, in 1 lindu thought all deadly influences pro- ceed from the South, the abode of death ; all benefi- cent and life-giving intlucnccs from the North. The same is tu ' in ancient Egyptian thought. *' It is curious," says the ?Inglish editor of Lenormant's " Chaldx'an Magic," ^ — "it is curious that in Kgypt all good and healing and life proceeded from the West, the land of the setting sun, and all evil from the East the land of its rising." The statement is " curiously " incorrect. The North is the sacred quarter, and from the North come life and blessing. The North wind is the very breath of God. It "proceeds from the nostrils of Knum and enlivens all creatures." ^ It is one of the high prerogatives of the blessed dead to " breathe the delicious air of the North wind." '^ That they may breathe it is 1 " The gods in heaven arc beheld by the inhabitants of hell as they move with their heads inverted." — Garrett, Classical Dictionary of India : Art. " Naraka." 2 See Brugsch, Hieroi^lyphisches Demotischcs Wbrtcrbuch^ S. 1 331, stih V. " Set," " Set-mati." Also chapter first of the present division. ^ Page 51. — Undoubtedly there are Egyptian texts in which the sun-god Ra is represented as going into *' the land of life " at his set- ting (see Brugsch, llusannis Inscriptionum ^gyptiacarum, iste Abth., Lcipsic, 1883 : p. 29), but this is made quite intelligible by Menzel's " Sunnengarten am Nordpol " in his Vo7-christliche UnstcrblichkcitS' Ichre. ■* Records of the Past, vol. iv., p. 67. '•' Ibid., p. 3. Com])are the expression, "Give the sweet breath of the North wind to the Osiris," Book of the Dead (Birch), p. 170 ; also 311, 312. Gerald Massey remarks, "In Egyptian the Meh is the North, the quarter of the waters, and the name of the cool wind that breathed new life." The A^attiral Genesis, vol. ii., p. 168. The following very curious ])assage from the apocryphal Book of Adam, translated from the Ethiopic by Dillmann, shows that this ancient Egyptian idea survived to a very late period : " Als der Herr den 12 1*4, y» tKT •-'' "■*• I*. ::3! * ;3i 178 PARADISE FOUND. C*: the prayer of bereaved affection.^ The " Fields of Peace " are at the North of the fields of Sanehem-u.- There is the proper home of the great god of whom the Nile poet sang: — " There is no building that can contain him ! "There is no counselor in thy heart ! *' Thy youth delight in thee, thy children ; " Thou directest them as King. " Thy law is established in the whole land, " In the presence of thy servants in the North." Of the same god it is said : — " He crcateth all works therein, " All writings, all sacred words, " All his implements, in the North," ^ As yet no texts have been discovered which rep- resent the earliest Egyptian ideas of the origin of man and the location of his birth-place. One proof, however, that man was conceived of as having pro- ceeded from the " Land of the Gods " in the North appears in connection with the myth of the reign of Ra. In Egyptian mythology, the reign of Ra was like the primeval reign of Kronos ; the myth of it was a reminiscence of the sinless Golden Age."* But Adam austrieb, wollte er ihn auf der Siidgrenze des Gartens nicht wohnen lassen, weil der Nonhaind, waini er darin bldset, den siissrn Gerttch der Bdiime des Gartens nach der Stidgegend hinfUkrt ; unci Adam sollte nicht die siissen Geriiche der Baume riechen, und die Uebertretung vergessen, und sich iiber das was er gcthan trostcii, und durch den Geruch der Baume befriedigt die Busse fiir die Ueber- tretung unterlassen. Vielmehr Hess der barmherzige Gott den Adam in der Gegend westlich vom Garten wohnen." Dillmann, S. 13, 1 "Dans le papyre Boulak No. 3,4, 16, on souhait a un defunt ; •les agreables vents du Nord dans la AM III.' " — Brugsch, Diction- naire Giographiqiie. Leipsic, 1S79 : p. 37. 2 Records of the Past, vol. iv., p. 122. 8 Ibid., p. lOl. * Maspero, Histoire Ancienne des Peuples de VOrient, p. 38. in W in th have they the n blesse tain,' Thd ]angiK ticular that tl (leterm lands, Eden the Ed kins, re togethe world, t whether the trad toi-s, — 1 find it e what bei ' " Wahr thums walt( vercint." I '%'•« Mensc stniction of " Sometirr nifyiiig"Goc "Iieilige Wo ichriftfiir dg Remote Ages \ Circle, the O? "'g (heir rela ship. By Job PARADISE IN EGYPTIAN THOUGHT. 179 dsof /horn ch rep- rigin of e proof, pg pro- North •eign of Ra \vas h of it 4 But lens nicht \en siisscn \hrt ; \-m(.\ v\nd (lie Ia trostcii, lie Ucbci-- ]en Adam defunt ; I, Diction- in those primeval and perfect days men still dwelt in the country of the gods, which country, as we have seen, was in the highest North. And because they still occupied the heaven -touching mountain, the rebellion by which they forfeited their estate of blessedness is expressly described as "on the moun- tain,"^ — an object not easily found in Egypt. The same teaching is further supported by the language of certain scholars, who, without any par- ticular theory as to the location of Eden, have held that the hieroglyph used in Egyptian texts as the determinative prefix to names designating civilized lands, C3, is simply a pictorial symbol of primitive Eden divided by its fourfold river.^ A writer in the Edinburgh Review, said to be Mr. Walter Wil- kin s, remarks : " The Buddhists and Brahmans, who together constitute nearly half the population of the world, tell us that the decussated figure of the cross, whether in a simple or complex form, symbolizes the traditional happy abode of their primeval ances- tors, — the Paradise of Eden toward the East, as we find it expressed in the Hebrew. And, let U3 ask, what better picture or more significant characters, 1 " Wahrend er, der Gott der das Sein sclbcr ist, seines Konig- thums waltete, da waren die Mensehen und die Gbtter zusammcn vcrcint." Brugsch, D/e itetw Wcltord>nciig nach Vcrtilgting des siin- dvy;cn Meiischciii^eschlt'chts, Berlin, 188 1 : p. 20. Naville, The De- struction of Mankind by Ra. Records of the Past, vol. vi., pp. 103 scq. - Sometimes this hieroglyph is accompanied by the character sig- nifying "God" or "divine." In snch connection Brugsch renders it "heilige Wohnstatte." On other renderings, however, see the Zeit- ichrift fiir dgyptische Sprache. 1880: p. 25. Sec also Ceramic A r^tn Remote Ages ; with Essays on the Symbols of the Circle ^ the Cross and Circle, the Circle and Ray Ornament, the Fylfot, and the Serpent, shoio- ing their relation to the primitive forms of Solar and Nature Wor- ship. By John B. Warmg. London, 1874 : Plates 33-37. iC - if-. - , 1 1 "" J I iC :;:s ^ i8o PARADISE FOUND. 3i tCSt:: "*l in the complicated alphabet of symbolism, could have been selected for the purpose than a circle and a cross ? — the one to denote a region of absolute purity and perpetual felicity, the other those four perennial streams that divided and watered the sev- eral quarters of it." ^ Mr. Wilkins claims that in the Egyptian hieroglyph above given we have the same symbol as in the Indian Swastika. It was therefore primeval Paradise which was commemo- rated by "the sacred circular cakes of the Egyp- tians, composed of the richest materials, — of flour, of honey, of milk, — and with which the serpent and bull, as well as the other reptiles and beasts conse- crated to the service of Isis and their higher divin- ities, were daily fed, and which upon certain festi- vals were eaten with extraordinary ceremony by the people and their priests." He continues, " * The cross-cake,' says Sir Gardiner Wilkinson, 'was their hieroglyph for civilized land,' — obviously a land superior to their own, as it was, indeed, to all mun- dane territories ; for it was that distant, traditional country of sempiternal contentment and repose, of exquisite delight and serenity, where Nature, unas- sisted by man, produces all that is necessary for his sustentation." " This," says Donnelly, though arguing in favor of a mid-Atlantic island-Eden, — " this was the Garden of Eden of our race. ... In the midst of it was a sacred and glorious eminence, — the tinibilicus orbis terrarumy — ' toward which the heathen in all parts 1 " The Pre-Christian Cross." Edinburgh Review, January, 1S70, p. 254. Zockler did not think the primitive character of this sym- bolism well established ( The Cross of Christ, p. 35) ; but the moment Eden is identified with the " middle country" of the Pole the natu- ralness and prirnitiveness of the symbol become most easy of belief. PARADISE IN EGYPTIAN THOUGHT. I8l could le and solute i four le sev- hat in ve the It was ,memo- Egyp- f flour, 2nt and , conse- ;r divin- n festi- j by the " * The as their a land lU mun- .ditional ;pose, of ■e, unas- for his of the world, and in all ages, turned a wistful gaze in every act of devotion, and to which they hoped to be admitted, or rather to be restored, at the close of this transitory scene.' " ^ In Part fifth, chapter fourth, it will be shown that the umbilicus orbis terraruin is indisputably the ter- restrial pole. Finally, if, as Plato represents, the story of lost Atlantis was received from Egypt, and constituted a part of the priestly teaching of the dwellers upon the Nile, our next chapter will present us further evidence that the Eden and the antediluvian world of ancient Egyptian tradition were precisely where the tradition of other ancient peoples placed them, to wit, in the land of sacred memories in the far-off, faerie North. 1 Donnelly, Atlantis, p. 322. ! - , •" ' « .... - ,| ■-3 Ifavor of J Garden lit was a \iis orhis 111 parts tiary, i^jo* this sym- le moment the natu- of belief. 3 CHAPTER VIII. THE CRADLE OF THE RACE IN ANCIENT GREEK THOUGHT. i I c:ii ' •< ;:■ c:- 5ip; /« ike Centre of the Sea is tlie White Isle of great Zeus, There is Mount Ida, and our racers Cradle. iENEAS. All that is beautiful and rare seems to come front the North. — Herodotus. WJten transactions arc of such antiquity it is not woftdcrfnl if the history should prove obscure. — Plutakch. The luritings that narrate these fables, not being delivered as imientions of the writers, but as things before believed and received, appear like a soft whisfierfrom the traditions of more ancient }uit ions, conveyed through tlie flutes of the Grecians. — Bacon. Respecting the origin of men there were among Greek writers, as Preller states, "very different opin- ions." Part of this diversity he ascribes to a dif- ference in the natural environment of the first in- habitants : some, residing in the woody hills, would naturally think the first men came from these ; others, inhabiting a valley, would more naturally think of their ancestors as having come out of tlie water. The Asiatic-Greek belief that the first of the human race were made out of trees he calls " quite peculiar." ^ What if it should be found that all these notions were merely fragments of an old, old faith, according to which man originated on the mountain of all mountains, by the source of all wa- ters, and under the tree of all trees ! However this may be, it is certainly very interest- 1 Griechische Mythologic, i., pp. 56, 57. PARADISE IN GREEK THOUGHT. 183 REEK IDOTUS. tory should thus of till' hisperfrom le Grecians. ing to note that in the Greek myth of Meropia, or Meropis, Renan, Lenormant, and others recognize the old Asiatic Meru. They hold that " the sacred expression /xc^ottcs avOp ""il mJ" ■ "m* .tr^, ;3'^ ■«.. '3" • (tit i!! t'uNi i« if** jr itm > m\ rw ■*m,y m tl am ■"em of the elevated rc- le rivers of I conformity ipeius, and Int of man- is hi.iihcr |ng-point of iiimUhi iU I18S1 (Am. diluvian Deukalion with the primitive country at the Arctic summit of the globe. Finally, in Greek tradition, the first men lived under the beneficent rule of Kronos, father of Zeus, enjoying the blessedness of the Golden Age. But it is clear from Strabo and others that the seat of Kronos' kingdom was in the farthest North. ^ Men- zel begins his chapter on " The Isles of Kronos " with these words : " The oldest of the Greek gods, Kro- nos, we must conceive of as enthroned at the North Pole." 2 We have now interrogated not only natural and ethnological science, but also the history, the tradi- tions and myths of the eldest nations of the world. Nowhere have we found our hypothesis inadmissible; everywhere has it found remarkable confirmatory evidence. The aggregate of this evidence coming from such unexpected and entirely different sources is very great. It is so convincing that an advocate miiiht well be content to leave the arc-ument at this point, — at least until some advocate of a different location shall have made out a better case than any one has yet done. Before leaving the subject, how- ever, we deem it wise to glance back to chapter sec- 1 Pherecydes describes Kronos as dwelling in that part of heaven which is "nearest the earth," /'. i-., the northern. Strabo, vii., 143, places him in ^^ the home of Boreas?'' It agrees herewith that Sancho- niathon, as preserved in the Greek version by Philo of Byblos, places the seat of his power " in the middle of the lands," ... in " a place mar spriiis^s and rivers^ where henceforth the worship of heaven was established." Lenormant, Bcs^innitigs of History, p. 531. Compare infra, Part fifth, chapters fourth and fifth : " The Navel of the Earth," and " The Quadrifurcate River." 2 Unstcrblichkeitslehre, i., p. 93. Ml «* ,^ i«l I" ,4 ■Jl i';i "■• ■" • '<*• '.«'•. '" -^ (I ..■. >..< ,, "^-il II"' 11.^ .•.. IB fl I. iJ •«•• "m 1 1 1 II '«r • >••« l»S ^ ■1., .,JB mi i» ;u it » »i > tea v\ 13 It If l88 PARADISE FOUND. oncl of Part second, and inquire whether the various points there hypothctically set forth as of necessity " marked and memorable features " of a north polar Paradise, if such an one ever existed, are capable of any not yet alleged confirmation from the fields of history and science. The results of this inquiry will appear in the Part next following. 1 1>< 5^ ti Or 1^ ranous cessily 1 pohir :apablc 2 fields inquiiy PART FIFTH. FURTHER VERIFICATIONS BASED UPON THE PECULIARITIES OF A POLAR PARADISE. CHAP. I. THE EDEN STARS. II. THE EDEN DAY. HI. THE EDEN ZENITH. IV THE NAVEL OF THE EARTH. V. THE QUADRIFURCATE RIVER. VI. THE CENTRAL TREE. VII. THE EXUBERANCE OF LIFE. VIII. REVIEW OF THE ARGUMENT. - ..0 , » I -J • H a . •> H cat ex 1 '1 <-- !i 1 . ' When the Sun the East forgets, When the Star no lonj;er sets, Whun the sacred Risliis seven Wheel all night in highest heaven, When the sky-descending Sea Waters but a single Tree, When each Year is but a Day, — What shall all these portents say ? CHAPTER I. THE EDEN STARS. E vidi steUe NoH viste mai, for cite alia prima gente. Dante. We have already reminded the reader that in an Eden situated at the North Pole the stars, instead of seeming to rise and set as with us, would have had a liorizontal motion from left to riL;ht round and round the observer. This appearance of the heav- enly bodies could of course be found nowhere but at the Pole. If, therefore, we could anywhere in the world of ancient tradition find any statement of a belief that at the beginning of the world the move- ments of the heavenly bodies were different from their present movements, and particularly if we should be able to find trace of a belief that the pri- meval motion of the stars was in orbits apparently horizontal, this would certainly be a most striking and cogent and unexpected evidence that human observation of the starry heavens began at the Pole. Now it so happens that we have traces of just such a belief. In the tantalizing fragments of an- cient lore, preserved to us in the pages of Diogenes Laertius, we find ascribed to the illustrious Greek astronomer Anaxagoras this remarkable teaching : " In the begijinhig the stars revolved in a tholiform manner y ! "■" i » c, » ji Ji \> ). 192 PARADISE FOUND. ** i Ott' ex. ex ■»; Now to revolve in a tholiform manner is to re- volve in a horizontal plane, like the ^o'Aos, or " dome," of an astronomical observatory. Anaxagoras him- self defined the motion more fully when he said that it was a motion, not vtto, underneath, but Trcpi, around the earth. 1 Anaximenes would seem to have had the same idea, for he is reported to have likened the primitive revolution of the sky to the rotating of a man's hat upon his head. Another explanatory expression (whether originating with Anaxagoras or with his re- porter we do not know) is this: "At first ^/ic Pole star, which is continually visible, always appeared in the zenith, but afterward it acquired a certain decli- nation." 2 Here, then, we have as a doctrine of the ancient astronomers the singular notion that, in the begin- ning of the world, the celestial Pole was in the ze- 1 See " Des ficrits et de la Doctrine d'Anaxagore " in Histoirc de r Academie dcs Sciences et Belles Lettres de Berlin. Berlin, 1755 • ^*^'* ix., pp. 378 ff. 2 Diogenes Laertius, ii., 9 : T& S'^o-rpa kot apx^s fiev OoXneiSm iviX^V''0'^> &o'Te Kara Kopvcp^v rrfs 7^5 rhv oel ;>■ « i 31 1 i\ \ 198 PARADISE FOUND. : I •c:::: ■•« ■••■ twJL. c::a si Vara, or inclosure, which as a safe b .bitation — a kind of Garden of Eden — he was divinely com- manded to make. Then comes this singular ques- tion and answer : " O Maker of the material world, thou Holy One ! What lights are there in the Vara which Yima made ? " "Ahura Mazda answered: There are uncreated lights and created lights. There the stars, the moon, and the sun are only once a year seen to rise and set, and a year seems only as a day.'' • Haug's version of tlie last clause is, " And they think that a day which is a year."^ Spiegel's is the same,-" al- though in his Commentary he confesses himself per- plexed as to the meaning of so remarkable a decla- ration. "The really genuine words," he observes, " are very difficult." They are not so when once the key is found. That the East Aryans had the same idea is also evident from the Laws of Manu. Among this peo- ple Yama — the same as the Iranian Yima — was the first man. His first abode, as we have seen, was at the North Pole, and at death he became a god, the guardian of the South Pole, at which was the region of the dead. But though the Hindus no longer associated him with the North at the time of the writing of this ancient book, they well under- stood that Yama's primitive Eden in Ilavrita, arouiHl the north polar Meru, where the gods reside, has only one day and one night in the year. This is tlie language of the Code : " A year of mortals is a day 1 Darmesteter's Translation, vol. i., p. 20. 2 Hang's Essays on the Religion of the Parsis, 2cl ed., p. 235. ^ " Diese (die Bewohner) halten fiir einen Tag was ein Jalir ist." Spiegel, Avesta. Leipsic, 1852 : vol. i., p. 77. See also his Comincn- tar iiber das Avesta. Wien, 1864 : vol. i., pp. 78, 79. THE EDEN DA K 199 >n — a J com- r qucs- w oriel, e Vara :reated rs, the to rise Hang's c tliat a me/' al- ;elf pcr- a decla- bserves, ;n once is also his peo- L — was en, was a god, .vas the dns no time of undcr- aronnd do, has s is the s a day |35- Ijahr ist." I Covimcn- and a night of the gods, or regents of the universe seated around tlie North Pole ; and again their divis- ion is this : their day is the northern and their night the southern course of the sun." ^ In like manner, in the Surya Siddhanta we read, " The gods behold the sun, after it is once arisen, for half a year." '^ Equally unmistakable is the language of the prob- ably more ancient work, lately translated under the title of " The Institutes of Vishnu : " — '* The northern progress of the sun is a day with the gods. " The southern progress of the sun is (with them) a night. ** A year is (with them) a day and a night." ^ 1 Code of Mamt,'\. 67. - Chapter xii., 74. " The Institutes of Vishnu^ translated by Julius Jolly. Ch. xx., I, 2, 3. Sacred Books of the East, vol. vii., p. 77. I cannot help think- ing that in these alternate ai)proaches and recessions of the sun we have the true explanation of the origin of the old Rabbinical idea of half-yearly cold and heat in hell, this latter being located, as we have shown, at the South Pole : " The great Jalkut Rubeni gives us the following account of hell : Sheol is half f re and half hail, and therein arc many rivers of fire. The seven abodes (or divisions) of hell are very spacious ; and in each there are seven rivers of fire and seven rivers of hail. The uppermost abode is sixty times less than the second, and thus the second is sixty times larger than the first, and every abode is sixty times larger than that which precedes it. In each abode are seven thousand caverns, and in each cavern seven thousand clefts, and in each cleft seven thousand scorpions ; and each scorpion hath seven limbs, and on each limb are one thou- sand barrels of gall. There are likewise seven rivers of rankest poison, which when a man toucheth he bursteth ; and the destroying angels judge him and scourge him every moment, half a year in the flic and half a year in the hail and snow. And the cold is more in- tolerable than the fire." Eisenmenger, Eiitdecktes yudentlmm, vol. ii., p. 345 (English translation, vol. ii., p. 52). According to the Stir- ya Sidddnta, the demons as well as the gods behold the sun for six months at a time. 31 2CX) PARADISE FOUXD. cac: C3C ML.. ^1 S6 This strange notion is perfectly clear and compre- hensible the moment we assume that the long-lived fathers and first regents of the human race originally dwelt at the North Pole, and that these, apotheosized and glorified in the imagination of later generations, in time became the gods which ancient nations wor- shiped. Both in the Iliad and Odyssey the learned Anton Krichenbauer finds two kinds of days continually re- ferred to. In what he considers the more ancient portions of the poems, the day is a period of one year's duration, especially when used in describing the life and exploits of the gods ; in what he con- siders the more modern portions, the term has its modern meaning as a period of twenty-four hours. He quotes Lepsius as recognizing a similar " one- day year" in the Egyptian and other ancient chro- nologies ; also the mention made of it by Palaifatos and Suidas.i In all such hitherto unnoticed testimonies — and we have not exhausted the list of them ^ — we have new and singularly unimpeachable evidences that in the thought of these ancient peoples the land in which the generated gods and men alike originated was a land in which, as in our Polar Eden, a day and a night filled out the year. And if such was their 1 Bcitrdi^c zur homerischeti Uranographie. Wien, 1874 : pp. 1-34. Comp. p. 68. 2 Even the Bushmen of South Africa have the strange idea that the sun did not shine on their country in the beginning. Only after the children of the first Bushmen had been sent up to the [Nui th- em .''] top of the world and had launched the sun was light procured for this [subterranean] South African region. Bushman Folk-lore. By W. H. J. Bleek, Ph. D., Parliament Report. Capetown and Lon- don, 1875 : p. 9. A similar myth was found among the Australian aborigines. THE EDEN DAY. 201 Diiiprc- g-livc(l ginally sosized •ations, IS wor- Anton lally rc- ancient of one scribing he con- has its r hours. ,r " one- nt cbio- lalaifatos — and we have that in land in Lginatcd [day and IS their idea, whence, save from actual tradition, could they have derived it ? As cautious a scientific authority as Sir Charles Lyell, speaking of these cosmological and chronological traditions of the Hindus, says: " We can by no means look upon them as a pure effort of the unassisted imagination, or believe them to have been composed without regard to opinions and thQor'iQS, fottndcd on the observation of Nature'''^ Even where the tradition has become distorted or inverted among barbarians, the parallelism of the year and the day is not always lost. A curious in- stance of this has come under the notice of the writer since the present chapter was begun : " In those days (in the world before the present) the sea- sons were much shorter than they are now. A year then was but as a day of our time." ^ 1 Elements of Geology, llth ed., vol. i., p. 8. 2 W. Matthews, " The Navajo Mythology," in T/ie American An- tiguai'ian and Oriental yotirnal. Chicago, July, 1883 : p. 209. Com- pare the expression given by Garcia as from the Mixteque cosmog- ony, in P. Dabry de Thiersant, Origine des Indiens du Nouvcaw Monde. Paris, 1883 : p. 140 n. 2. II I pp. 1-34. idea that lOnly after |c [North- procured Eolk-lof'!' and Ldu- Lustralian CHAPTER III. THE EDEN ZENITH. ex. cuz: . . . T/te shrhic where motion first hegan^ And light and life in mingling torrent ran, From ivhetue each bright rotundity was hurled. The Throne of God, — the Centre oft/ie World. Campbell's Pleasures of Hope. El walkcth in t/ie Cnuo of heaven. — Book of Job. To the first men, on the hypothesis of an Arctic Eden, the zenith and the north pole of the heavens were identical. Such an aspect of the starry vault the humanity of our late historic ages has never seen. Under such an adjustment of the rotating firmament, how regular and orderly would nature appear! What profound significance would of ne- cessity attach to that mysterious unmoving centre- point of cosmic revolution directly overhead! As intimated on page 50, that polar centre must nat- urally have seemed to be the top of the world, tlie true heaven, the changeless seat of the supreme God or gods. " And if, through all the long life-time of the antediluvian world, this circumpolar sky was thus to human thought the true abode of God, the 1 The poet is speaking of the North Pole. The first three lines are illustrated by the closing chapters of Part third, above ; the last sums up the facts to be set forth in the present chapter. A word from Menzcl is here in place : " Nysa wird in vielcn gricchischen Mythcn als im Centralpunkt bezeichnet von wo das Weltleben ausging unci wohin es zuriickkehrt. . .^ Das ideale Nysa konnen wir nirgend anders als im Ausgangspunkte des Welt, im Nordpol suchen." Dii: vorchristliche Unsterblichkeitslehre, i. 65 ; also f>. 42. i THE EDEN ZENITH. 203 of Hope. 1 Arctic heavens •ry vault IS never rotating nature of ne- centrc- lad ! As lUst nat- lorld, the ;me God ;-time of [sky was rod, the khree lines [e ; the last wordfpim len Mythen sging ""'^ ir niigend en.' " Dii oldest postdiluvian peoples, though scattered down the sides of the globe half or two thirds the distance to the equator, could not easily forget that at the centre and true top of the firmament was the throne and the palace of its great Creator." The religions of all ancient nations signally con- firm and satisfy this antecedent expectation. With a marvelous \xxi2iX\\vi\\\.y they associate the abode of tJie supreme God ivith the North Pole, " the centre of heaven" or zvitJi the celestial space immediately sttr- roiinding it. No writer on Comparative Theology has ever brought out the facts which establish this assertion, but the following outline of them will suffice for our present purpose : — First. TJie Hebrew Conception. — In so pure and lofty a monotheism as that of the ancient Hebrews, we must not expect to find any such strict localiza- tion of the supreme God in the circumpolar sky as we shall find among polytheistic peoples. '* Do I not fill heaven and earth ? " is the language of Jeho- vah. Nevertheless, as the Hebrews must be sup- posed to have shared, in some measure, the geo- graphical and cosmological ideas of their age, it would not be strange if in their sacred writings traces of these ideas were here and there discernible. Some of these traces are quite curious, and they have attracted the attention of not a few Biblical scholars, to whom their origin and rationale are en- tirely unsuspected. Thus a learned writer on He- brew geography, after blindly repeating the common assumption that "the Hebrews conceived the sur- face of the earth to be an immense disk, supported, like the flat roof of an Eastern house, by pillars," yet uses such language as this : " The North ap- ^i \ 204 PARADISE FOUND. ex. pears to have been regarded as the highest part of the earth's surface, in consequence, perhaps, of the mountain ranges which existed there." ^ Another, touching upon the same subject, says, " The Hebrews regarded what lay to the North as higher^ and what lay to the South as lower: hence they who traveled from South to North were said to 'go up,' while they who went from North to South were said to * go down.' " '^ In Psalm seventy-fifth, verse sixth, we read, "Pro- motion cometh not from the East, nor from the West, nor from the South." Why this singular enumera- tion of three of the points of the compass, and this omission of the fourth .-* Simply because heaven, the proper abode of the supreme God, being con- ceived of by all the surrounding nations, if not by the Hebrews themselves, as in the North, in the cir- cumpolar sky, that was the sacred quarter, and it could not reverently be said that promotion cometh not from the North.^ It would have been as offen- sive as among us to say that promotion cometh not from above. Therefore, having completed his nep;- ative statements, the Psalmist immediately adds, "But God is the judge; He putteth down one, and setteth up another." A curious trace of the same conception appears in the book of Job, in the eighth and ninth verses ^ Rev. William Latham Bevan, A. M., in Smitli's Dictionary of the Bible, Art. " Earth," vol. i., p. 633, 634 (Hackett's ed.). McClintock and Strong's Cychpcedia, Art. " Geography," vol. iii., p. 792. 2 McClintock and Strong, Cyclopadia, Art. " North," vol. vii., p. 185. The Akkadians had the same idiom. Lenormant, Beginnings 0/ History, p. 313. 8 " A peculiar sanctity is attached to the North in the Old Testa- ment records " T. K. Cheyne, The Book of Isaiah. London, tSjo: pp. 140, 141. [See our cut : " The Earth of the Hindus," p. 152.] THE EDEN ZENITH. 205 of the twenty -third chapter. In Old Testament times, the Hel)revvs and the Arabians designated the cardinal points by the personal terms, " before " for East, "behind" for West, "left hand " for North, and *• right hand " for South. Thus Job, in the pas- sage indicated, is complaining that he can nowhere, i*2ast or West, North or South, find his divine judgc.^ lUit, in speaking of one of these points, he adds this singular qualification, '' ivhere God dotJi loorky This is said of the left hand, or North. It seems to be inserted to render peculiarly emphatic the declara- tion, "I go . . . [even] to the left hand where He doth work, but I cannot behold Him." If at first blush such an apparent localizing of the divine agency seems inconsistent with Job's splendid descriptions of God's omnipresence in other passages, it should be remembered that we, too, speak of the omni- present deity as dwelling " on high," and address Him as " Our Father which art in Heaven^ A natural counterpart to this idea of a northern heaven would be a belief or impression that spiritual perils and evils were in a peculiar degree or manner to be apprehended from the right hand, or South, as the proper abode of demons, — the quarter to which Asmodeus fled when exorcised by the angel.^ We cannot positively affirm that such a belief con- ^ Adam Clarke, Commentary, in loc. The best explanation the oldest commentators know how to give is this : There were more hu- man beings and more intelligent ones North of Job's country than in either of the three other cardinal directions ; especially was the North the seat of the great Assyrian empire ; but God desires to reside and to work preeminently among men, hence the language of the text ! Matthew Poole, in Dictdmair and Bamngartcn' s Bibdwerk, vol. v., p. 634. 2 Tobit, viii. 3. Compare The Book of Enoch, xviii. 6-16 j xxi. 3-10. 206 PARADISE FOUND. OK cac: cr: sciously prevailed among the ancient Hebrews, but, holding the possibility in mind, we find passages of Scripture which seem to stand out in a new and striking light. Thus, in case there was such a be- lief, how great the force and beauty of the expres- sion, " Because [the Lord] is at my right hand [the side exposed to danger] I shall not be moved." ^ With this may be compared the confident expres- sions of the one hundred and twenty-first Psalm : ** The Lord is thy keeper : the Lord is thy shade upon thy right hand." So also in the ninety-first it is on the right hand that destruction is anticipated: "A thousand shall fall at thy side, and [or even] ten thousand at thy right hand ; but it shall not come nigh thee." Again, in the one hundred and forty- second it is said, " I looked on my right hand, but there was no man that would know me : refuge failed me; no man cared for my soul." Notice also the imprecation, " Let Satan stand at his right hand " (Ps. cix. 6), and the vision of Zechariah, where the great adversary makes his appearance on the right of the one whom he came to resist (Zech. iii. i). But as Satan here reveals himself from beneath and from the South, so to Ezekiel the true God re- veals himself from above and from the North (Eze. i. 4). In that quarter was God's holy mountain (is. xiv. 13), the city of the Great King (Ps. xlviii. 2), the land of gold (Job xxxvii. 22, marg.), the place where divine power had hung the earth upon noth- ing (Job xxvi. 7).2 Hence the priest officiating at ^ Ps. xvi. 8. The reference seems all the more unmistakable since the next two verses speak of Sheol, or Hades. '■^ " Im Norden sind die hochsten Berge, vor alien der heilige Got- terberg Is. 14, 13. . . . Vom Norden her kommt in der Regel Jeho- THE EDEN ZENITH. 207 the altar, both in the tabernacle and later in the temple, faced the North. According to the Talmud, King David had an yEolian harp in the North win- dow of his royal bed-chamber, by means of which the North wind woke him every night at midnight for prayer and pious meditations.^ Probably it is not without significance that in Ezekiel's vision of the ideal temple of the future the chamber prepared for the priests in charge of the altar was one " whose prospect was toward the North." ^ (Eze. xl. 46.) vah." Herzog's Real-Encyklopddie, Art. " Welt," Bd. xvii,, S. 678. *' JJke the Hindus, Persians, Greeks, and Teutons, . . . the .She- mitic tribes spoke of a mountain of their gods in the far North (Is. xiv. 13 ; Eze. xxviii. 14) ; and even with the Jews, notwithstanding the counteracting influence of the Mosaic creed, traces of such a pop- ular belief continued to be visible (Ps. xlviii.), the North being, e. g., regarded as the sacred quarter (Lev. i. 11; Eze. i. 4)." Dilhnann, in Schcnkcrs Bibcl Lexicon. Lcipsic, 1S79 '• ^"'-'^- •'•» P- 49- 1 " Daily from the four quarters of the w(jrld blow the four Winds, of which three are continually attended by the North wind ; otherwise ihe world would cease to be. The most pernicious of all is the South wind, which would destroy the world were it not held back by the angel Bennetz." Quoted from the Talmud l)y Bergel, Sttidien iiber die natuvwissenschaftlichen Kenntnisse dcr Tahnudistcn. Leip- sic, 1880 : p. 84. Compare Uillmann, Das Buck Henoch, Kap. Ixxvi. ; Ixxvii. ; xxv. 5; xxxiv. ; xxxvi. W. Menzcl, Die vorchrist- liche Unsterblichkcitshhre, Bd. ii., p. 35, loi, 168,345. See also p. 177 of this volume. 2 At first view it seems strange that in the Middle Ages, in Chris- tian Europe, the North should have come to be regarded as the special al:iode of Satan and his subjects, and that on the north side of sonic churches, near the baptismal font, there should have been a " Devil's Uoor," which was opened to let the evil spirit pass to his own place at the time of the renunciation of him by the ]icrson baptized. The f-;im[)le explanation of this is found in the fact that the people were tcUiglit that their old gods, whom they had worshiped when pagans, were devils. Compare Grimm, Deutsche iMythologie, p. 30,31. Con- way, in his Dcmonolos^y and Devil Lore (London, 1S79 : ^^1. ii., 115; i., 87), entirely misconceives the i^hilosophy of the fact. A similar change seems to have occurred among the Iranians after Mazdeism ,i I 208 PARADISE FOUND. I . ex: 1 j 1 «■ ■■■<■ Ul.41 ■!*!»■;■ ■3»fi Second. The Egyptian Conception. — The corre- spondence of the ancient Egyptian conception of the world and of heaven with the foregoing would be remarkable did we not know that Egypt was the cradle of the Hebrew people. The ancient in- habitants of the Nile valley had the same idea as to the direction of the true summit of the earth. To them, as to the Hebrews, it was in the North. This was the more remarkable since it was exactly con- trary to all the natural indications of their own country, which continually ascended toward the South. As stated in a previous chapter, Brugsch says, '* The Egyptians conceived of the earth as ris- ing toward the North, so that in its nortJicrnmost point it at last joined the sky!' ^ In correspondence herewith the Egyptians located their Ta-miter, or " land of the gods," in the extreme North. ^ On this account it is on the northern exterior wall of the great temple of Ammon at Karnac that the divinity promises to King Rameses H. the products of that heavenly country, ** silver, gold, lapis-lazuli, and all the varieties of precious stones of the land of the gods." Hence, also, contrary to all natural indica- tions, the northern hemisphere was considered the realm of light, the southern the realm of darkness.^ had transformed their ancient Daevas from gods to demons. Hence, while in portions of the Avestan literature (generally the older) ihc heaven of Ahura Mazda is in the North, in other portions the North is the world of death and demons. See JJleek's Avesta^ i., pp. 3, 137, 14.3 ; ii. 30, 31 ; iii. 137, 1 38, et passim. Darmesteter, Introduction, p. Ixvii., Ix.xx. Haug, Nc'lii^ion of the Parsis, pp. 267 ff. 1 Gcos:raphische Iiischriften alicvgyptischer Denknidler. Leipsic, 1858 : vol. ii., p. 37. ^ In one place Ih-ugsch translates ta-itiitar-t tnahti " das nordliclie Gottesland." Astroitortiische unci asfroloi^ische Inschriftcn^ p. 176. 3 " To the twelve great gods of heaven are immediately subjected % i THE EDEN ZENITH. 209 corre- ion of would )t was ent in- a as to ii. To This ,ly con- ir own rd the JruQsch I as ris- crnmost )ndence liter, or On this of the divinity of that and all of the indica- red the Irkness.^^ Ilcnce, lokler) the Ithe North W' 3. 137. roduction, Leipsic, nordlictie p. I7f'- Isubicclcd The passage out of the secret chambers of the Great Pyramid was pointed precisely at the North Pole of the heavens. A.ll the other pyramids had their openings only on the northern side. That this ar- rangement had some religious significance fe\/ stu- dents of the subject have ever doubted. If oui in- terpretation is correct, such passages from the burial chamber toward the polar heaven Intimated a vital faith that from the chamber of death to the hicrhest abode of life, imperishable and divine, the road is straight and ever open.^ Third. TJie Conception of the Akkadians, Assyri- ans, Babylonians, Indians, and Iranians. — After what has been said in former chapters respecting the location of Kharsak Kurra, Sad Matati, Har- Moed, Su-Meru, and Hara-berezaiti, no further proof is needed that all the peoples above named associ- ated the true heaven, the abode of the highest gods, the stars dispersed in infinite number through all the ethereal space, and divided into four principal groups according to the four quarters of the world. They were then divided into two o:itlcrs more elevated, the one filling the northern hemisphere and belonging to light, to the good principle, the other to the southern hemisphere, dark, coId,y"«- ncste, and to the sombre abodes of Amcnti." Guigniaut's Crcuzer, Rclii^ions de rAntiqtiiti',\o\. ii.,p. S36. A very curious survival of the above conception is found in the Talmudic Emck I/aimnclt'ik. See Eisenmenger, Entih'cktcs Jiidcnthtivi, Stehelin's version, vol. i., p. iSi ; comp. p. 255 {{. ^ The association of Set with the constellation of the Great I'ear, reported by Plutarch and lately confirmed by original astronomical texts (Brugsch, Astronomische Inschriften alttrQ'/'/isrr.cr Denkmd!er, Lcii)sic, 1883, pp. 82-84, 121-123), seems at lirst view inconsistent with the south polar location of demons and destructive divinities. ISiit the apparent difficulty is transformed into an all the stronger prciof of the correctness of our theory when it is remembered that in the most ancient times Set " was not a god of evil," but the supreme world-sovereign from whom the Egyptian kings derived their author- ity over the two hemispheres. " It loas not till the decline of the Em- 14 ! I : I 2IO PARADISE FOUND. \ \ Ok: Set with the northern celestial pole.^ In each case the apex of their respective mounts of the gods pierced the sky precisely at that point. To this day the Haranite Saboeans — the most direct heirs of the religious traditions of the Tigro-Euphratean world — construct their temples with careful reference to the ancient faith.^ Their priests also, in the act of sacrifice, like all ancient priesthoods, face the North.3 In the Rig Veda, ii., 40, i, we read of the amy- tasya ndbJiimy " the Navel of the Heavens." The same or similar expressions occur again and again in the Vedic literature. They refer to the northern celestial Pole, just as the expression ndbhir prtJiivyds^ *' Navel of the Earth," R. V. iii., 29, 4, and elsewhere, signifies the northern terrestrial Pole. To each is ascribed preeminent sanctity. The one is the holi- pire that this deity came to be regarded as an evil demon, that his name was effaced from the monuments, and other names substituted for his in the Ritual." Renouf, Keligionof Ancient Egypt, y^^^. 119, 120, The expression navel or centre of heaven, as a designation for the northern celestial Pole, so common among ancient nations, wcnild seem to have been current among the Egyptians also. Brugsch, Ibid., p. 122, 123. In the text as translated, however, there is some obscurity. Compare p. 154. 1 " There can be no doubt that ' the Heaven of Anu ' was the jiar- ticular limited celestial region, centring in the Pole star and pene- trated ])y the summit of the Paradisaical Mount." — Rev. O. D. Mil- ler, The Oriental and Biblical Journal. Chicago, 1S80 : p. 173. ^ " L'cglise n'a que deu.x fenetres et une porte qui est toui^urs ouverte du cote du sud, afin que celui qui y entre ait I'etoile polaire devant lui." — N. Sioufifi, Etudes siir la Religion dcs Soubhas on Sa- beens, les Dogmes, letir AfiEurs. Paris, 1S80 : p. 118. '^ " Cette position de la victime permet an sacrificateur, qui a le morgno appuye sur I'epaule gauche, dc se placer, pour rcmplirson role, de fagon qu'il ait la figure tournee vers I'etoile polaire qu' cmivre Avather, tout en ayant en meme temps la tOte de I'animal a sa droitc." — Ibid., p. 112. THE EDEN ZENITH. 211 se the ierced ly the of the world jnce to ;he act ,ce the le amr- " The d again orthcrn •thivylU^ ievvhcre, each is the hoU- n, that his substituted ip. 119,120, on for the |ons, would Brvigsch, re is some j'as the par- and penc- O. D. Mil- 173- 1st toui'urs )ile polaii'c \hhas on Sa- h,r, qui a le |i-cmplif son qu' cniivve , sa droitc." est shrine in heaven, the other the holiest shrine on earth. That no translator has hitherto caught the tru€ meaning of the terms seems unaccountable.^ In Buddhism, the heir and conservator of so many of the ancient ideas of India, the same notion of a world ruler with his throne at the celestial Pole lived o\\? Very curiously, if we follow the author- ity of the Lalitavistara, the first actions and words ascribed to the infant Buddha on his arrival in our world unmistakably identify the North with the abode of the gods, and its nadir with the abode of the demons.^ Even the modern relics of the non- Aryan aboriginal tribes of India, as for example the Gonds, have retained this ancient ecumenical ethnic belief.* 1 In his heading to Hymn I., 185, 5, Grassman parenthetically con- jectures that the Navel of the World therein spoken of may be " tin Ostcn*'' but suggests no reason for its location in that or any other quarter. Not by accident, however, did the ancient bard elsewhere (X., 82,2) place the abode of God "beyond the Seven Rishis," in the hi.^hest North. - "The omnipotence of Amitabha is dwelt on in some ^\\& g&thdi. In the centre of heaven he sits on the lotus throne and guides the des- tinies of mortals.'' Arthur Lillic, Buddha and Early Buddhism. London, 1882 : p. 128. Compare also p. 7 : "This Pole-star {Alt-ha Draconis) was believed to be the pivot round which the cosmos re- volved. . . . The symbol of God and the situation of Paradise got to be associated with this star." ■' " Le Lalitavistara, 97, rapporte ces paroles d'une maniere un pen diffcrcnte : 'Je suis le plus glorieux dans ce monde, etc' Ensuitc, apres avoir fait sept pas dans la direction du septentrion : ' Je serai le plus grand de tons les etres,' puis apres sept pas dans la direction du nadir : 'Jedetrnirai le Malin ct les mauvais esprits, je publierai la loi supreme qui doit etcindre le feu de I'Enfer au profit de tons les habitants du monde souterrain.' " Note to Professor Kern's Histoire dit Bouddhisine dans I'/nde. RiVue dc V Histoire des Reh^dms. Paris : toin. v., nro. i, p. 54. Compare the less explicit account in Beal's lui/utn^ie flistoiv of Buddha, p. 44. ^ " In burying they lay the head to the South and the feet to the 2X2 PARADISE FOUND. :l ^ cac: ex: cr: — i M..I Li Fourth. 77^^ Phosnician, Greek, Etruscan, and Roman Conception. — That the Phoenicians shared the general Asiatic view of a mountain of the gods in the extreme North appears from Movers' learned work upon that people.^ The evidence that in ancient Hellenic thought, also, the heaven of the gods was in the northern sky is incidental, but cumulative and satisfactory. For example, heaven is upheld by Atlas, but the ter- restrial station of Atlas, as we have elsewhere shown, is at the North Pole. Again, Olympos was the abode of the gods ; but if the now generally current etymology of this term is correct, Olympos was sim- ply the Atlantean pillar, pictured as a lofty moun- tain, and supporting the sky at its northern Pole.- In fact, many writers now affirm that the Olympos of Greek mythology was originally simply the north polar " World-mountain " of the Asiatic nations.^ North, rt'j the home of their gods is supposed to be in the latter direction. They call the North Deoguhr sometimes, and the South, Miiraho, is looked upon as a region of terror ; so the feet are laid towards TXd- guhr in order that they may carry the dead man in the right direc- tion." — Report of Ethnological Committee, quoted in Spencer's Dc- scriptive Sociology, Div. I., Pt. 3, A., p. 36. 1 Die Phonizier. Bonn, 1841-56, vol. i., pp. 261, 414. 2 " Here the idea is that the gods reside above this mountain |Su- Meru], which is, as it were, the support of ihoir dwellings. This brings to our mind the fable of Atlas supporting the heavens ; tlie same idea may prob.iljly be traced in the Greek Olympos (Sansluit, dlat?tba, a ' support ')." Samuel Beal, Pour Lectures on Buddhist Lit- erature in China. London, 1S82 : p. 147. Compare Grill. ^ Compare A. II. vSayce, Transactions of S'h-iety Bib. Archeolo^^y, vol. iii., 152. — Even in the mathematical cosmos of Philolaos, thdugh i\\e scdes deoruin sceins to be placed in Ilestia, at the centre of the system, there is yet a steep way leading perpendicularly to the polar summit of the heavens, by means of which the gods and holy souls attain the diviner realm of all perfection : " Dii vero, quando ad con- vivium pergunt, turn quidem acclivi via proficiscuntur sub sunumiiu THE EDEN ZENITH. 213 n, and shared le gods learned bought, orthern factory, the ter- i shown, was the ' current was sim- y moun- rn Pole.- Olympos the north tions.'^ Vr direction. Muraho, is wards Dld- right dircc- lencer's Dc- In prayer the Greeks turned towards the North, and from Homer we know that when they addressed the " Olympian " gods they stretched out their hands "toward the starry heavens ; " Greek prayers, there- fore, must have been addressed toward the northern heavens. Entirely confirmatory of this is the ac- count Plato gives of " the holy habitation of Zeus," in which the solemn convocations of the gods were held, and which, he explains, " was placed in the Centre of the World." 1 That this Centre is the northern celestial Pole is placed beyond question by a well-known passage from Servius Maurus,^ where it is called the '* domi- cilium yovisy' and where we are informed that the Etruscan and Roman augurs considered thunder and lightning in the northern sky more significant than in any other quarter, being " higher and nearer to the abode of yove!' ^ Countries in high northern latitudes shared in this peculiar sanctity. " Toward qui sub coelo est forniccm (ai//r8o), et immortales quae dicuntur animae, quando ad summum pervenerunt, extra progrcssae in coeli dorso con- si.stuiit, circumlataeque cum iis animabus, quas comitari eas potuerunt, luca supra coelum spectant, ubi pura et absoluta Veritas, cognitio vir- tus, pulchritudo, atque omnis omnino perfectio patet." Aug. Boeckh, " Dc vera indole astronomiae Philolaicae." (jcsammclte Kleine Schrif- tilt. Leipsic, 1866: vol. iii., p. 288. Compare pp. 290-292. 1 Critias, 120. - ALncid, ii. 693. •' "£' ideo ex ipsa parte significantiora esse fnlniiiia, qiioniam altiora et viciniora domicilio yovis." Compare Regell, " Das Schaiitcmpel der Atigicni " in the At'«^ yahrbikhcr der Philologie, Bd. cxxiii., pp. 593- C37. " The Hawaiian soothsayer, or kilo-kilo, turned always to the North when observing the heavens for signs or omens, or when re- garding the flight of birds for similar purposes. The ancient Hindus turned also to the North for divining purposes, and so did the Ira- nians before the schism, after which they placed the devs in the North ; so did the Greek, and so did the Scandinavians before their conversion to Christianity." A. Fornander, T/ie Polynesian Race. London, 187S : vol. i., p. 240. 214 PARADISE FOUND. the end of the official or state paganism," says M. Beauvois, " the Romans regarded Great Britain as nearer heaven and more sacred than the Mediterra- nean countries." ^ Varro and other Latin writers confirm this general representation, so that all mod- ern expounders of the old Etruscan religion unite in locating the abode of the gods of Etruria in the Centre of Heaven, the northern circumpolar sky.- Niebuhr and other authorities of the highest rank assure us that the Romans shared the same faith.^ 1 " Sacratiora sunt profedo MedUerraneis loca vidua ccelo.'''' Beau- vois, in Revue de fHistoire dcs Rdigiotis. Paris, 1S83 : p. 2S3. The statement is based upon expressions in the official panegyric of the Emperor Conslantine Augustus. Compare the following : " Diodo- rus Siculus speaks of a nation whom he calls the Hyperboreans, who had a tradition that their country is nearest to the moon, on which they discovered mountains like those on the earth, and that Apollo comes there once every nineteen years. This period, being that of the metonic cycle of the moon, shows that if this could have been really discovered by them they must have had a long acquaintance with astronomy.'' Flammarion, Astronomical Myths. London : p. 88. 2 " Im Nordpunkte der Welt." K. O. Muller, Die Etrusker. Bres- lau, 1828 : Bd. ii., pp. 126, 129. " Suivant eux, ceux-ci devaient habi- ter dans la partie septentrionale du ciel, 4 raison de son immobilitc. C'est de la region polaire qu'ils veillaient sur toute la terre." A. Maury, in Religions de VAntiqtiitS^ Creuzer et Guigniaut, torn, ii., p. 1217. " La theologie etrusque, accueillant une doctrine que nous avons deja recontree a I'etat de reve confus dans la theologie grccque, pla9ait a I'extreme nord le sejour des ^Esars ou dieux. Mais, tandis que I'Hellene se tourne vers les dieux pour les interroger, le Toscan imite leur attitude supposee, afin de voir I'espace comnie ils le voicnt eux-memes. Ayant done le visage tourne vers le midi, il appelle antica la moitie meridionale du ciel," etc. A. Bouche-Leclcrcq, La Divination chez les fitrusques. Revue de VHistoire des Rdigioiis. Paris, 1881 : tom. iii., p. 326. ^ " Der Wohnsitz der Gotter ward im Norden der Erde gcglaubt." Niebuhr, Romische Gesrhic/ite, vol. ii., Anhang, p. 702. " It is well known that the Rotnans placed the seat of the gods in the extreme North." The Oriental Jcmrnal. Chicago, 1880 : vol. i., p. 143. Nie- buhr's remark, " Der Augur dachte sich schauend wie die Gotter auf die Erde schauen," explains the somewhat unqualified and mislead- mg q THE EDEN ZENITH. 215 lys M. Liin as literra- kvriters il mod- \ unite in the tr sky.'-^ St rank :aith.=^ ." Beau- 2S3. The ■ric of the ; "Diodo- reans, who , on which \at Apollo that of the been really tance with : p. 88. kcr. Bres- aient habi- mmobilitc. Eire." \. torn, ii., p. que nous ie grecquc, ais, tan d is le T(xsc;ui is le voicnt il appelle clcrcq, La Kiligioiis. Igeglaubt." It is well le extreme I143. '^'^'^■ Icbtter auf mislead- Fifth. The yapanese Conception. — We have al- ready seen that in the Japanese cosmogony the down-thrust spear of Izanagi becomes the upright axis of heaven and earth. Izanagi's place, there- fore, at the upper end of this axis can be nowhere else than at the North Pole of the sky.^ But we are not left to inference. So inseparably was the Creator associated with the Pole in ancient Japanese thought that one of his loftiest and divin- est titles was derived from this association. Writ- ing of the primitive ideas of this people, one of our best authorities uses the following language : " I shall do the Ko-Ji-ki, and the Shinto religion, and the Japanese philosophy, strict justice by saying that, according to them, there existed in the begin- ning one god, and nobody and nothing besides. " ' Far in the deep infinitudes of space, Upon a throne of silence,' sat the god Ame-no-mi-naka-nushi-no-kami, whose name signifies The Lord of the Cemtre of Heaven." 2 What this Centre of Heaven is cannot well be doubtful to any careful reader of the present chapter. Sixth. The Chinese Conception. — The oldest traceable worship among the Chinese is that of Shang-te, the highest of all gods. It is believed to have existed more than two thousand vears before Christ. Shang-te is usually and correctly described ing statement of Professor Kuntze touching the rotary posture of the Roman in prayer. Prolegomena zur Geschichte Koms. Oraculum, Aiispicium Templiim, Regnum. Leipsic, 1882 : p. 15. ' See above, pt. iv., ch. 2. ''- Sir Edward J. Reed, Japan, vol. i., p. 27. Compare Leon de Rosny, in Revue de VHistoire des Religions. Paris 1884 : p. 208 ; also p. 211. 2l6 PARADISE FOUND, ex:'! as the ^od of heaven. But his proper place of abode, his palace, is called Tsze-wei. And if we in- quire as to the meaning and location of Tsze-wei, the native commentators upon the sacred books in- form us that it is " a celestial space about the Nortii Pole." 1 Here, as in Japan, and in Egypt, and in India, and in Iran, and in Greece, the Pole is ** the centre " of the sky. A writer in the " Chinese Repository " quotes from authoritative religious books these dec- larations: "The Polar star is the Centre of Heaven." *• Shang-te's throne is in Tsze-wei, z. e., the Polar star." " Immediately over the central peak of Kwen-lun appears the Polar star, which is Shang- te's heavenly abode." "In the central place the Polar star of Pleaven, the one Bright One, the Great Monad, always dwells." ^ In accordance with this conception, the Emperor and his assistants, when officiating before the Altar of Heaven, always face the North. ^ The Pole-star itself is a prominent object of worship,* And how prevalent this localization of the abode of God at 1 Legge, T/ie Chinese Classics, vol. iii., Pt. i., p. 34 n. See furtlicr, Legge, .S/^r///^ Lectures on the Religions of China, London, 1S80, p. 175, and the not well understood jiraycr in Douglas, Confucianism and Tanisni, London, 1879, p. 278. From these and other references it is plain that Confucians and Tauists alike identified the northern sky with the abode of God. 2 Vol. iv., p. 194. So, likewise in West Mongolian thought the celestial pole and the " apex of the Golden Mountain " are identical : *' Allan kadasii niken nam Ta;:;yi-dschin nrkilka. Apex mentis aurei, nomine Cardo Coeli, Stella polaris." Uranographia Mongolica, Fundgniben dcs Orients, Bd. iii., p. 181. ^ See English Translation of the Chinese Ritual for the Sacrifice to Heaven. Shanghai, 1877 : pp. 25, 26, 27, 28, 31, 48. * Joseph Edkins, Religion in China, p. 115. Compare G. Schlegel, Uranographie Chinoise, pp. 506, 507. THE EDEN ZENITH. 217 ace of we in- izc-wei, oks in- j North din, and 7;r" of )sitory " ese dcc- [eaven." le Polar peak of 3 Shang- ilace the 3ne, the Emperor he Altar olc-star Vnd how God at ee further, 311, 1880, p. ufucianisin r references le northern ;hought the e identical : pex mentis Mongolica. Sacrifice to Schlegcl, the Pole remains after four thousand years may be illustrated by the following incident narrated by Rev. Dr. Edkins : " T met on one occasion a school- master from the neighborhood of Chapoo. He asked if I had any books to give away on astronomy and geography. Such books are eagerly desired by all members of the literary class. . , . The inquiry- was put to him 'Who is the Lord of heaven and earth V He replied that he knew none but the Pole- star, called in the Chinese language Teen-hivang-ta- te, — the Great Imperial Ruler of Heaven." ^ Seventh. Tlie Ancient German and the Finnic Con- ception. — Like the ancients, when praying and sac- rificing to the gods, the pagan Germans turned their faces toward the North.^ There, in the northern heaven, at the top of Yggdrasil, the world-axis, stood the fair city of Asgard, the home of the Asen. The Eddas expressly say of it that it was built " in the Centre of the World." ^ At that point, whence alone 1 Religion in China, p. 109. This title irresistibly suggests the Assyrian one, Dayan-Same, " Judge of Heaven." Transactions So- ciety Bib. Archaology^ iii. 206. - Jakob Grimm, " Betende und opferende Ileidenschautengen Nor- den." Deutsche A/ythologie, lid. i., p. 30. " Grimm, " Im Mittelpunkte der Welt." Deutsche Mytkologie, p. 778. The following is from the Prose Edda : " Then the sons of Bor built in the middle of the universe the city called Asgard, where dwell the gods and their kindred, and from that abode work out so many wondrous things both on the earth and in the heavens above it. There is in that city a place called Hlidskjalf, and when Odin is seated there upon his lofty throne he sees over the whole world, dis- cerns all the actions of men, anr' comprehends whatever he contem- plates. His wife is Frigga, the daughter of Fjorgyn, and they and their offspring form the race that we call the ^sir, — a race that dwells in Asgard the old, and in the regions around it, and that we know to be entirely divine." Mallet, Northern Antiquities, p. 406. The ex- pression, " from that abode work out so many wondrous things," re- calls to mind Job's description of the North as the place "where God doth work." ^ 2l8 PARADISE FOUND. 1 1 ■ 1 i cac: ! era ■ cc: U-l ' fc:^ Si2 i the whole world of men is ever visible by ni^^ht and by day, stood Hlidskjalf, the watcli-tower of Odin. From this ^^ partie septoitrionale dii civT' he and Frigga, like the great gods of the Etruscans, " veil- laic nt stir toiitc la ttrre.^' * Among the ancient Finns the name of the su- preme god was Ukko. In their mythology he is sometimes represented as upbearing the firmament, like Atlas, and sometimes he is called Taivahan Na- paneuy "the Navel of Heaven." As Castren shows, this curious title is given him simply because he re- sides in the centre or Pole of heaven.'"^ In the great epic of this people, the Kalevala, the abode of the supreme God is called Tiihlela,^ which word simply means " Place of TdJiti : Esthonian, Tdht, the Polar star." We have not exhausted our materials in hand for the illustration of this point,* but surely we have presented enough. Reviewing this singular una- nimity of the ancient nations, no thoughtful reader can fail to be impressed with its significance. No other explanation of it can be so simple and obvious as the supposition that the heaven which over- arched the cradle of humanity was a heaven whose zenith was the northern Pole. Before concluding the present chapter, another point of considerable interest should be noticed. In reading the Edenic traditions of the ancient nations ^ Vide supra, p. 214 n. 2. 2 Castren, Finnische Mythologie (Tr. Schiefner), pp. 32, 33. 8 Rune II, 32, 36,40. * Set, ioT ex3.m^\QfGi\\, Myths and Songs of the South Pacific. Lon- don, 1876 : p. 17. THE EDEN ZENITH. 219 iit and Odin, le and " veil- :be su- r he is lament, MVl Nil- shows, ; he re- le great ; of the simply le Polar hand for we have lar u na- il reader e. No obvious ih over- 1 whose [another :ed. In 1 nations as given in Part fourth, the question may well have suj;',i;estcd itself to the reader, *' How is it that, with such perfect unanimity on the part of contemporary nations in respect to the nortii-polar position of the cradle of mankind, the traditions of the Hebrews alone should have placed it in the East ? " In the facts just now reviewed we have a key to this puz- zle. The only word in Genesis which connects ICden with the h2ast is Kedem {Qaian). Tliis term "prop- erly means that which is before or in front of a per- son, and was applied to the East from (he custom of turning in that direction when doscriliag thi"? points of the compass." ^ From Grni, xii!. 14, i<: would seem to have acquired this association ^vith the East as early as the days of Abraham, but accord inf.;- to "the custom" of a particular time or people il f:oi:id mean one point of the com pa s,^ us well as another. It was simply the "front-eonntry ," In liace hic^toric times among the Hebrews it was tl e Lost, and .?-c- cordingly the West was the country *' behind,' the North the "left hand," the South the "rif^ht," as before noticed. In Egypt, however, the usage was dilferent, — the "front -country" being either the North or the South, — which we cannot certainly tell, as Egyptologists are divided on the qvcition. Pierret thinks that it was South, and that ac':o'd- ini;ly the right hand was West and the U-;ft East.'^ Chabas and others, however, exactlv reverse the meaning of the hieroglyphics tiT.nsKued '■ right " and "left," and hold that in de.ugnating the points of the compass the ancient Egyptian faced the North. Lon- 1 Smith's Bib:e Du.Wna^y, Art. "East." " Dictionnarte if Archeologie Egyptienne. Paris, 1875 Cnmp. pp. 116, 118, 187, 344, 351, 364, 371, 392, 399- p. 191. •1 220 PARADISE FOUND. UL.I CO Among the Akkadians and Assyrians, if we may rely upon a questionable statement of Lenormant, still another adjustment prevailed : the right hand was the North, the left the South, and the "front" direc- tion, of course, the West.^ In view of these facts it is plain that, anterior to the fixation of Hebrew usage, that is in pre-Abra- hamic times, Qedcni^ or the " front-country," may as well have meant the North as any other quarter. And there is much reason to suppose that it did have this meaning. We have seen that this was pe- culiarly the sacred quarter of the whole Asiatic and Egyptian world. Toward it faced all earliest priest- hoods and worshipers of whom we have any knowl- edge.^ What so natural as that they should con- template and designate the different quarters of the world from the standpoint of their normal posture in worship ? And if once we assume that such was the usage of all the Noachidae anterior to their dis- persion, and that accordingly "the front -country" meant the North, all at once becomes plain. Gen- esis then unites with universal ethnic tradition in locating the cradle of mankind in the North. The record then reads, "And the Lord God planted a garden in the North country, in Eden." And, in precise agreement herewith, it is down from the mountainous heights of this North country — "from ^ Fragments de B erase ^ p. 367 ; also, 380, 419. But compare dial- d(ta7t Magic, pp. 16S, 169, where, by identifying the West with (lie point " behind the observer," he directly contradicts the account given in his Commentary on Berosus. The paragraph does not appear in the original French edition of the work. 2 Even among the aborigines of America and Africa we are told that " the West is the left hand and the East the right." Massey, The Natural Genesis, vol. ii., p. 231. THE EDEN ZENITH. 221 Oedem " — that the descendants of Noah in after time come into " the plain in the land of Shinar " (Gen. xi. 2). So is cleared up simultaneously an- other mystery, for how to bring the first colonizers of Shinar into the Tigro-Euphrates valley, from any probable Ararat by any probable " journeying from the East,'' or, as the margin gives it, '^ eastwards,^ has always perplexed the commentator.^ This interpretation harmonizes for the first time Gen. ii. 8 with Eze. xxviii. 13, both now referring to one and the same point of the compass, the sacred North. Again, the well-known difficulty of harmo- nizing the references to " the children of Qcdem," found in the oldest of the Hebrew Scriptures, such as Gen. xxix. i, and Job i. 3, is solved at once by this interpretation. At the same time it gives us a location for " the land of Uz " exactly correspond- ing with the explicit declaration of Josephus : " Uz founded Trachonitis and Damascus ; this country lies between Palestine and Coelosyria." ^ To most readers, this solution of the problem of the exceptional character of the Hebrew tradition will probably at once commend itself as eminently satisfactory. To some, however, it may seem a little difficult of belief that one and the same term could in successive ages have found application to differ- ent points of the compass."'^ To such the following, 1 Of course, this iiiterprctatioa proceeds upon the common assump- tion that Miqqedan is translocative in signification, and that the land of Shinar was in the Tigro-Eujjhrates basin. In another note I have indicated the possibility that the land of Shinar was in primeval Qe- deni, in which case Aliqqcdefu in Gen. xi. 2 should be translated pre- cisely as in Gen. ii. 8, " /// the North country." - Antiquities of the yews, Bk. i., 6, 4. "'' See diagram illustrative of the discrepancy between Euphratean and Egyptian orientations in Brown, Myth of Kirke, London, 18S3 '• 222 PARADISE FOUND. .\, I I t-y J!i written, of course, with no reference to our problem, will be of special interest : " The names of the four cardinal points, and, what is very remarkable, the hieroglyphic signs by which they are expressed, are in a certain measure the same in the Akkadian and Chinese cultures. This I intend to show in a spe- cial monograph upon the subject ; but that which is here of importance to note is the displacement of the geographical horizon produced in the establish- ing of the * hundred families.' The South, which was so termed on the cuneiform tablets, corresponds in Chinese to the East, the North to the West, the East to the South, making thus a displacement of quarter of a circle. It would be interesting if, on examination of the Akkadian and Assyrian names, we could find that they in their turn denoted an early displacement of which only these traces re- main to us." 1 p. 99. Cotnp. p. loi, bot. Mr. G. Massey, in his vast astrotypolog- ical medley, refers to the horizon-displacement, but afifords no intelli- gible explanation. He says, " In n iking the change to a circle of twelve signs, the point of commencement in the North was ' slewed ' round eastward. Hence the Akkadian Mountain of the World be- came the Mountain of the East. Mount Meru, the primordial birtli- place in the North, likewise became the Mountain eastward. This may be followed in the Adamah '.f the Genesis ; and in the Book ^^{ Enoch it says, ' The fourth wind, which is named the North, is divided into three parts, and the third part contains Paradise.' Thus Eden, which began at the summit of the Mount, and descended into the Circle of Four Quarters prepared by Yima, in the Avesta, against the coming Deluge, was finally planted in the twelfth division of the zodiac of twelve signs, as the garden eastward." The Natural Gen- esis. London, 1883 : vol. ii., p. 263. 1 Terrien de Lacouperie, Early History of the Chinese Civilisation, London, 1880 : p. 29. On this curious matter Mr. T. G. Pinches threw some new light at a meeting of the Society of Biblical Arche- ology, Feb. 6, 1883. In May Mr. Terrien de Lacouperie read a paper before the Royal Asiatic Society, entitled " The Shifting of the Car- THE EDEN ZENITH. 223 Possibly the usage of ancient Egypt may enable us to put our solution in yet simpler form. If we may accept the teachings of the learned Maspero, the Egyptians often reduced the four quarters or di- rections to two, using the term East in a sense suffi- ciently broad to include both East and North, and the term West in a sense sufficiently broad to in- clude both West and South. ^ If, then, Moses, who in his education was an Egyptian, wrote in accord- dinal Points in Chaldaea and China," which will appear in his forth- coming work on The Origbi of Chinese Civilization. Similar inter- changes and identifications of the North and West are referred to by Menzel, Die vorchristliche Unsterblichkeitslehre, i., p. loi. See also Asiatic Researches, vol. viii., pp. 275-284. 1 " J'ai expose depuis longtemps dans mes cours au College de Fiance une theorie d'apres laquelle les Egyptiens auraient divise les quatre points en doux series groupees : Nord-Est, Sud-Ouest. . , . Ce n'est que par suite de la classification dont je viens de parler qu'on met souvent a I'Ouest les regions proprement situees au Sud, ou re- ciinoquement au Sud les regions situees a I'Ouest. L'application de cettc i'''ee a I'Est nous menc aussi a croire que Ton a pu dire du Ta- noutri qu'il etait au Nord." (M. Maspero, in a letter to the author, under date of December 20, 1S82.) This usage could hardly have arisen among any people not acquainted with the spherical figure of the earth. How easily it could arise among us is illustrated by Sir John de Maundeville, who, writing in A. D. 1356, located Paradise so far to the East of England that he could no longer correctly describe the ■place by this term. Thus, after speaking of the Terrestrial Paradise as situate far " to the East, at the beginning of the earth," he says, " But this is not that East which we call our East, on this half, where the sun rises to us ; for when the sun is East in those parts towards Ter- restrial Paradise, it is then midnight in our parts on this half, on ac- count of the roundness of the earth, of which I have told you before ; for our Lord God made the earth all round in the middle of the firma- ment." Wright, Early Travels in Palestine. London, 1848 : p. 276. The nearest way to an Eden thus located would, of course, be north- ward. Its location could therefore be described with equal correct- ness either by the term " eastward " or " northward." Still another interesting theory of its origin will suggest itself to the thoughtful student of such facts as those alluded to by Mr. Scribner in Where did Life Begin ? pp. 32, 33. it 1 , 224 PARADISE FOUND. ance with such a usage, it would be quite possible to use Qedem for a "front-country" in the North, and again, without embarrassment, to use the same term in speaking of the East.^ 1 Compare the arrangement of the winds on the ceiling of the Pro- naos of the temple at Dendera. Brugsch, Astronomische Inschriften altdgyptischer Denkmaler. Leipsic, 1883 : pp. 26 bot., and 27 top. cacf ! eg ; i» ::5»^ possible North, le same 3f the Pro- Inschriften I 27 top. CHAPTER IV. THE NAVEL OF THE EARTH.^ He is tite god who sits in the centre, on the Navel of tJie Earth ; and he is the interpreter 0/ religion to all mankind. — Plato. But at tJte Navel of tJte Earth stands Agni, clothed in richest apparel. — Rig Veda. To whom then will ye liken God? It is He that sitteth upon ttie Chug of the Earth, and tlie inluibitants thereof are as grasshoppers. — Isaiah. After proceeding some distance ive paused to take breath where the crowd was viore dense and obstinate than usual : and I was seriously it formed that thiz was the exact Navel of the Earthy and that these obstitiate pilgrims were bowing and kissing it. — The Land and the Book. Jedes Volk hat einen Nabelder Erde. — Kleuker. Students of antiquity must often have marveled that in nearly every ancient literature they should encounter the strange expression " the Navel of the Earth." Still mere unaccountable would it have seemed to them had they noticed how many ancient mythologies connect the cradle of the human race with this earth-navel. The advocates of the different sites which have been assigned to Eden have seldom, if ever, recognized the fact that no hypothesis on this subject can be considered accept- able which cannot account for this peculiar associa- tion of man's first home with some sort of natural centre of the earth. Assuming, however, that the human race began its history at the Pole, and that ^ Printed in advance in the Boston University Year Book, vol. xi., 18S4. 226 PARADISE FOUND. \-\ ::»: P'l: I 1 t t cac: ! eg » rf i all traditional recollections of man's unfallen state were connected with a polar Eden, the mystery which otherwise envelops the subject immediately vanishes. We have already seen that the term " navel " was anciently used in many languages for " centre," and that the Pole, or central point of the revolving con- stellations, was the " Navel of Heaven." But as to the celestial Pole there corresponds a terrestrial one, so it is only natural that to the term the " Navel of Heaven " there should be the corresponding expres- sion the " Navel of the Earth." Beginning with Christian traditions, let us make a pilgrimage to the Church of the Holy Sepulchre at Jerusalem. There, in the portion belonging to the Greek Christians, we shall discover a round pil- lar, some two feet high, projecting from the marble pavement, but supporting nothing. If we inquire as to its purpose, we shall be informed that it is de- signed to mark the exact centre or " Navel " of the Earth,^ Early pilgrims and chroniclers refer to this ' As my own inspection of this monument was nearly thirty years ago, I have thought it well to make inquiry as to its present state. The following, written under date of Oct. 28, 1884, by my obliging friend, Dr. Selah Merrill, the United States Consul at Jerusalem, and well known as an Oriental archaeologist, will be read with much inter- est : " The stone to which you refer still stands in the middle of tlie Church (Greek) of the Holy Sepulchre, and is called the Centre or Navel of the Earth. It is called a 'pillar,' although it is not a pil- lar, but a vase, conforming in its general shape to a large, tall fruit dish. The top is in the form of a basin, with a raised portion in its centre ; that is, in the bottom of the basin. I was told that at every feast bread was laid on this pillar. I am assured that it is called the Centre of the Earth only by the Arab or native Christians of Syria, and not by the Greeks proper ; also, that every Greek church in Syria that is built after the form of this one has such a ' pillar ' in the centre. Within two or three years past, an old church has been alien state e mystery nmediately lavel " was intre," and )lving con- But as to sstrial one, " Navel of ing expres- t us make Sepulchre longing to round pil- he marble inquire as Lt it is de- el " of the ifer to this ly thirty years present state, y my obliging erusalem, and h much intcr- niddle of the the Centre or t is not a pil- irge, tall fruit portion in its that at every is called the ans of Syria, ek church in a ' pillar ' in rch has been THE NAVEL OF THE EARTH. Kiti C A of St tn ex( CS/i tO! of chu of , chu cxz I — C2^ Off b; lii cac: * cr: ■; c:3 a 'I trad fron pilhi It by 1 that ingt eene; een t het r werp ' i relics of thi day ai the c( As lal isting the II vary, i self si world old, \v( 1322, 1 midst Ages, 1 1! i; HI I THE NAVEL OF THE EARTH. 227 curious monument, but its antiquity no one knows.* As usually described, it is a monument of the geo- graphical ignorance of those who placed it there, a proof that they supposed the edge of the "flat disk" of the earth to be everywhere equidistant from this stone. In reality, it is a monument of primeval as- tronomic and geographic science. excavated a little distance north of the Damascus gate. Tn the Pal- cstiiie Ftind Report fur October, 1883, I wrote some account of this to supplement what had been written before by others. In the centre of that church there is a similar stone, but that is a real pillar. This church is no doubt very old, and is popularly spoken of as the ' Church of St. Stephen.' In my judgment it stands on the site of an older church. " It seemed to me a little singular that this object should be called a ' pillar ' {AmM), when it is only a vase, or vase-shaped ; but as the tradition connected with it is very old, the name may have come down from the time when the object used for this purpose was actually a pillar or column." It is interesting to compare with the foregoing the description given by Bernard Surius, of Brussels, in the year 1646, particularly as at that time the " Oriental Greeks " seem to have had no scruple in call- ing the pillar the Centre of the Earth : " Omtrent het midden steckt eenen witten marmer-steen uyt, van twee voeten in syn vierkant, daer een rondt putteken in is, 't vvelck soo de Oostsche Griecken scggen, het midden van den aerdt-bodem is." Reyse van Jerusalem. Ant- werp, 1649 '' P- 6^4- 1 Bishop Argulf, in his pilgrimage, A. D. 700, "saw some other relics, and he observed a lofty column in the holy places to the north of the Church of Golgotha, in the middle of the city, which at mid- day at the summer solstice casts no shadow ; which shows that this is the centre of the earth." Wright, Early Travels in Palestine, p. 4. As late as a. d. 1102, it still seems to have been outside the then ex- isting Church. Bishop Saswulf says, "At the head of the Church of the Moly Sepulchre, in the wall outside, not far from the place of Cal- vary, is the place called Compas, which our Lord Jesus Christ him- self signified and measured with his own hand as the middle of the world according to the words of the Psalmist, ' God is my king of old, working salvation in the midst of the earth.' " Ibid., p. 38. In 1322, however, it is described by Sir John de Maundeville as " in the midst of the Church." Ibid., p. 167. At one time in the Middle Ages, the spot seems to have been marked by a letter or inscription. ! i 228 PARADISE FOUND. ex: •car" Ul.. To find the true symbolical and commemorative character of this pillar, we need to remind ourselves of a tendency ever present and active among men. We have already alluded to the scores of " Calva- ries " which have been set apart in Roman Catholic lands, and hallowed as memorial mounts. Up the side of each leads a F/Vz dolorosa, with its different "stations," '^ach recalling to the mind, by sculptured reliefs or otherwise, one of the immortal incidents of the Passion. On the summit is the full cruci- fixion tableau, — the Saviour hanging aloft upon the cross, between two crucified malefactors. The spear, the reed with the sponge, the hammer, — all are there, sometimes the ladder also ; and near by, the tomb wherein never man was laid. In the minds of the worshipers it is a holy place. Even in our Protestant republic, on the shore of Lake Chautauqua, we have seen successfully carried out, in our own day, a complete reproduction of Pal- estine. Thousands have visited it to take object- lessons in Sacred Geography. From it these thou- sands have gained clearer ideas of the relative positions and bearings of Hermon and Tabor and Olivet, of Kedron and Cherith and the Jordan, of Nazareth and Hebron and the Holy City, than else they ever would have had. What here has been done for purposes of instruction has elsewhere and often upon a greater or smaller scale, been done for purposes of direct religious edification, and for the gratification of religious sentiment. Now, just as Christians love to localize in their Barclay, City of the Great King. Philadelphia, 1858 : p. 370. See Michelant et Reynaud, Itiniraires h Jerusalem. Geneve, 1882 : pp. 36, 104*, 182, 230, etc. • THE NAVEL OF THE EARTIf. 229 own midst their " Holy Places," so the early nations of the world loved to create miniature reproductions of Eden, the fair and sacred country in which man dwelt in the holy morning hours of his existence.^ The traditional temple architecture of many early religions was determined by this symbolical and commemorative motive. This was eminently true of the sacred architecture of the Babylonians, Egyp- tians, Hebrews, and Chinese.^ Kocppen assures us that "every orthodoxly constructed Buddhist temple either is, or contains, a symbolical representation of the divine regions of Meru, and of the heaven of the gods, saints, and Buddhas, rising above it." ^ Lillie says, "The thirteen pyramidal layers at the top of every temple in Nepal represent the thirteen unchangeable heavens of Amitabha." ^ With what 1 "The Hindus generally represent Mount Meru of a conical fis^uire, and kings were formerly fond of raising mounds of earth in that shape, which they venerated like the divine Meru, and the gods were called down by spells to come and dally upon them. They are called Meni-sringas, or the peaks of Meru. There are four of them either in or near Benares ; the more modern, and of course the more per- fect, is at a place called Sar-nath. It was raised in the year of Christ 1027. . . . This conical hill is about sixty feet high, with a small but handsome octagonal temple on the summit. It is said in the inscrip- tion that this artificial hill was intended as a representation of the worldly Meru, the hill of God, and the tower of I!.ihel, with its seven steps or zones, was probably raised with a similar view and for the same purpose." — Wilford in Asiatic Researches, vol. viii., p. 291. - Miller, "The Pyramidal Temple," in the Oriental and Bib. Jour- ml. Chicago, 1880: vol. i., pp. 169-178. Also, Boscawen, in the same, 1S84, p. 118. Perrot and Chipiez, History of Art in Chaldcca and Assyria. London and New York, 18S4 : vol. i., pp. 364-398. " Die Religion des Budd/ia, vol. ii., 262. * Buddha and Early Buddhism, p. 51. We find the same symbol- ism even among the civilized aborigines of America. Thus " the temple at Tezcuco was of nine stories, symbolizing the nine heavens.'''' Bancroft, Native Races, vol. iii., p. 184. Compare pp. 186, 195, 197; aiso 53^-537- 230 rAKADISE FOUND. I i CKT, ' cr: » — ' \ I : I [" ■II—. CO astonishinj]f elaboration this idea has sometimes been carried out may be seen in the Senbyoo temple in Mengoon, near the capital of lUirmah.^ That the natural features of the landscape were often utilized in producing these symbolic shrines and holy places is only what we should expect, " The Buddhists of Ceylon," as Obry states, *' have endeavored to trans- form their central mountain, Dcva-Kuta (Peak of the Gods), into Meru, and to find four streams descend- ing from its sides to correspond with the rivers of their Paradise." ^ Again, in the " rock-cut " temples of Ellora, we have, in like manner, a complete representation of the Paradise of Siva. P'aber develops the evidence of this practice among the ancients with great full- ness, and with respect to the Hindus and Buddhists says, '* Each pagoda, each pyramid, each montiform ' high-place,' is invariably esteemed to be a copy of the holy hill Meru," the Hindu's Paradise.^ From " Records of the Past," vol. x., p. 50, we sec that the Egyptians had the same custom of building temples in such a manner that they should be sym- bolical of the abode of the gods. So in Greece and 1 ?)tQ yonrnal 0/ t/ie Royal Asiatic Society. London, 1S70 : pp. 406- 429. - Le Berceau de VEspke Httmaine, p. 118. 2 Origin of Pagan Idolatry. London, 1816 : vol. i., p. 345. So an American writer says, " Akkad, Aram, and all the other ' highlands ' of antiquity w^re but reproductions, traditionary inheritances from this primitive highland, this Olympus of all Asia. . . . Similar notions were associated at a later period with Mount Zion in Jerusalem, and with the Mohammedan Mecca and other sacred localities. Such ideas [as that they were respectively in the centre of the world] are no indication of the ignorance of the ancients : they were symbolical and traditionary conceptions inherited from the sacred mount of Paradise." llie American Antiquarian and Oriental yournal. Chi- cago, 1881 : p. 312. Compare 1884, p. 118. TirE NAVEL OF THE EARTfL 231 llitics. Siuh Rome the citailcl mounts in their cities had quite as great relij^ious as military significance. Lenormant, speaking of Rome and Olympia, remarks, " It is im- possible not to note that the Capitoline was first of all the Mount of Saturn, and that the Roman archae- ologists established a complete affinity between the Cai)it()line and Mount Cronios in Olympia, from the standpoint of their traditions and religious origin (Uionysius Halicarn., i., 34). This Mount Cronios is, as it were, the Ompha/os of the sacred city of Klis, the primitive centre of its worship. It some- times receives the name Olympos." ' Here is not only symbolism in general, but also a symbolism pointing to the Arctic Eden, already shown to be the primeval mount of Kronos, the Omphalos of the whole earth.'* Now, as Jerusalem is one of the most ancient of the sacred cities of the world, and, at the same time, the one where the tradition of the primeval Paradise was preserved in its clearest and most historic form, it would be strange if, in all its long history, no king or priesthood had ever tried to enhance its attrac- tiveness and sanctity by making it, or some part of it, symbolize Earth's earliest Holy Land, and com- memorate man's earliest Theocracy. That the at- 1 Beginnings of History^ pp. 151, 153, " Among the Romans no city, or even camp, was rite established and founded without a sacred Umbilicus. It " fiel in den Schnitt- puiikt des Deciimamis und Cardo Maximus, d. h., wohin die Via decti- viana,'i\c\\ mit der Via principalisVx^wzX. ; dieser Schnittpunkt befand &\c\\\ox dtm iiitroittts Praetorii ; da stand auch die Ara castrornvi, d.i war der Umbilicus des Systems. Diesen Umbilicus nun finden v.ir in Rom noch in Mauerresten vorhanden am nordostlichcn Anfang des Forum wiedcr, welche Stelle als Umbilicus bezeichnet wurde." J, H. Kuntze, Prolegomena zur Geschichte Rotns. Leipsic, 1882 : p. 1 54, See notes below, on the cities of Cuzco and Mexico. -1 j t J i per 2s: fc: €•5 ■I It, cr: ,; — ^ i{ ^*Mj»»' ft;; 'J i,i 232 PARADISE FOUND. tempt was made is beyond a doubt. To this day the visitor is shown the spot where, according to one tradition, Adam was created.^ Not many feet away, under the cus^^ody of another religion, he finds the sacred rock-hewn grave in which at least the head of the first of men was buried.^ In the little Gihon, the name of one of the Paradise rivers still lives. The miraculous virtue of the Pool of Pethsaida was ascribed in early Christian legend to its being in subterranean contact with the Tree of Life, which grew in the midst of Paradise.^ Christ's cross was said to have been made of the wood of the same tree. The very name, Mount Sion, is a memo- rial one. The Talmudic account of " The Strength of the Hill of Sion " shows that the Palestinian mount was named after the heavenly one, and not vice versa, as commonly supposed. The true sacred name of the Holy City is, therefore, not Sion (though it is often called by the heavenly appella- tion also), but " Daughter of Sion." She is simply 1 Murray's Handbook for Syria and Palestine. T^ondon, 1858 : Pt. i., p. 164. Another account reads, " E de Iherusalem a Seint Habrr'iam sunt. viii. liwes, e la fi'^t Adam fourme." Itineraires h yernsalnn, et Descriptions de la Terre Sainte. Rediges en frangais aiix XP, XIP, XIIP siecles. Publics par Michelant et Reynaud. Geneve, 1882 : p. 233. - See F, Piper, Adams Grab auf Golq-ot/ia. E7)angelischer Kalcn- de^', 1861 : p. 17 ff. (illustrated). Philippe Mousket (A. D. 1241), in his descriptive poem on the Holy Places, makes it the tomb of both Adam and Eve : — " Et \k tout droit u ]i ludeu Crucifiierent le til Deu, Fit Adam, li premiers om, mis Et entierds ^t soupoulis, Et Eve, sa feme, avocc lui,'' etc. (Michelant et Reynaud, ?/^ w/rrt, p. 115) ' W. Henderson, Identity of the Scene of Man's Creation, Fall, and Redemption. London, 1864 : p. 10. !: i THE NAVEL OF THE EARTH. 233 s day the cr to one -et away, finds the the head ,le Gihon, .till lives. Bethsaida its bein>j; of Life, Christ's ood of the s a mcnio- e Strength Palestinian e, and not true sacred not Sion ily appella- e is simply |n, 1858: Pt.i., :intHabrr'iaui h Jenisalcn, 9ais aux XP, laud. Geneve, IV/Vc/ic'r KaJcn- \\. D. 1241), iii tomb of both supra, V- "5'^ \tion, Fall, and a copy, a miniature likeness, of the true mount and city of God "in the sides of the North." ^ So confident is Lenormant that Solomon and Hezekiah intentionally conformed their capital to the Paradisaic mount, and intentionally introduced in their public works features which should sym- bolize and commemorate peculiarities of Eden, that he uses the fact as an unanswerable argument against those imaginative critics who would place the composition of the second chapter of Genesis subsequent to the Babylonian exile. He says, — " Another proof, and a very decisive one in my opinion, of the high antiquity of the narrative of Genesis concerning Eden, and of the knowledge of it possessed by the Hebrews long before the Captiv- ity, is the intention — so clearly proved by Ewald — r- to imitate ' the four rivers ' which predominated in the works of Solomon and Hezekiah for the distri- bution of the waters of Jerusalem, which, in its turn, was considered as the Uinbiliais of the Earth (Ezek. V. 5), in the double sense of centre of the inhabited regions and source of the rivers. The four streams wliich watered the town and the foot of its ram- parts — one of which was named Gihon (i Kings i- 33. 3^ '■> 2 Chron. xxxii. 30, xxxiii. 14), like one of the Paradisaic rivers — were, as Ewald has shown, reputed to issue through subterranean communica- tions from the spring of fresh water situated be- neath the Temple, the sacred source of life and purity to which the prophets (Joel iii. 18 ; Ezek. .xh'ii. 1-12; Zech. xiii. i, xiv. 8 ; cf. Apoc. xxii. l) at- tach a high symbolic value." '^ ^ See chapter iii. of the present Part. ^ " Ararat and Eden." The Contemporary Keviau, vol. iii., No. 27 (.\m. ed., p. 46). MiaaHiailBii^HM 234 PARADISE FOUND. k\ V r.i 1 1-, I 1» ' In this citation, in addition to a strong assertior of the symboHcal character of the topography and waterworks of Jerusalem, we have the location it- self included in this symbolism. The city is said to have been the Umbilicus or Navel of the Earth, for two reasons : first, because of its relation to sur- rounding countries ; ^ and, second, becauss of its containing the source of the rivers. In our next chapter, this last reason will become more significant than even the writer intended. At present we will only add that the true philosophy of this symbolical centrality of Jerusalem is found in two facts : first, the Hebrews had a tradition that primeval Eden was the Centre of the Earth : '^ and, second, by styling Jerusalem the Navel of the Earth, as they did, it was symbolically all the more assimilated to the prim- itive Paradise which in so many other ways it sa- credly commemorated. Passing to the field of Hellenic tradition, we are told by all modern interpreters that the Greeks shared the "narrow conceit and ignorance of all ancient nations," and supposed their own land to occupy the middle of the "flat earth-disk." And because of certain expressions in Pindar and a pas- sage in Pausauias, it is affirmed as a first principle in the geography of the ancient Greeks that Delphi was believed to be the exact topographical centre- point of the whole earth. 1 That this traditionally-given first reason for the appellation is not well founded is evident from the fact that the Hebrews had a " Nave! of the Earth," farther to the North, before ever they had possessed themselves of the site of Jerusalem (Judg. ix. 37). '^ In Origen. ^,7(r//j (7^/ Gcnesin, we read, *' Tradunt Hebrai lo- cum, in quo Paradisum plantavit Deus, Eden vocari, et ajnnt ipsiim muudi medium esse, ut pupillam oculi?'' Compare Hershon, Tal- imidic Miscellany, p. 300. THE NAVEL OF THE EARTH. 235 issertior Lphy and :ation it- is said to iarth, for n to sur- S2 of its our next iignificant it we will ;ymbolical Lcts : first, roal Eden by styling did, it was the prim- .vays it sa- on, we are [be Greeks nee of all n land to bk." And and a pas- ,t principle |hat Delphi cal centre- ipellation is not had a "Nave! Ihacl possessed Int Hebra'i lo- let ajnnt //-"W Llersbon, Tal- Such a representation is far from satisfactory. For while the term *' Omphalos of the Earth " was un- doubtedly applied in a sense to Delphi, it belonged to it only as the name Athens belongs to many a town thus designated in America. It had other and older topographical connections and associations. We find traces of the same title in connection v/ith Olympos, with Ida, with Parnassos, with Ogygia, with Nyssa, with Mount Meros, with Delos, with Athens, with Crete, and even with Meroe. In the multiplicity of these localizations, the people seem to have lost the clue to the original significance of the conception, and to have contrived crude etymologi- cal myths of their own lor the explanation of what seemed to them a remarkable designation.^ The moment wc make the true original Omphalos of the Earth the North Pole, and invest it with sa- cred traditionary recollections of Eden life, all this confusion becomes clear. The "centre-stone" of Delphi, like the Omphalium of the Cretans, becomes merely a memorial shrine, an attempted copy of the great original. And if all the Olymps and Idas and Parnassos mounts were alike convenient repro- ductions and localizations of the one celestial moun- ."in of the gods at the North Pole, what wonder if we find each of them in some way designated as the Centre of the Earth. Homer's " Omphalos of the sea," Calypso's isle, 1 "A peine I'enfant [Zeus'] vcnoit dc naitre, que les Cuietcs le por- terent sur I'lda. Dans le trajet, le cordon ondjilical se detacha et tomba au milieu d'une plaine qui prit de la le nom dc 6ix(pa\hs, nom- bril (nom qu'elle devoit avoir auparavant)." — T. B. Enieric- David, Jupiky ; Rc-Jierches sur ce Dieu. sur son Cidlc, etc., Paris, 1S33, t. i., p. ^48, referriiig to Callimachus, Hymnus in jfovem, v. 44 ; Diodorus Sic, V. 70. fflSf 236 PARADISE FOUND. \, -\ «ac :« cr: !t cr: -•MMWt* c:; z-D k — i oc: JULI 1^™. 2?«: '"' i' 55: C3» ! ' v^ 1' ' ''',' \ 1 i? UJ has in like manner all the marks of a mythico-tradi- tional north polar Eden. Its name, Ogygia, connects it with a far-off antediluvian antiquity.^ It is situ- ated in the far North, and Odysseus needs the blast of Boreas to brin^ him away from its shores on the homeward journey. Its que^n, Calypso, is the daughter of Atlas ; and Atlas' proper station in Greek mythology, as elsewhere shown, is at the ter- restrial Pole. Its beauty is Paradisaic, it beini,^ adorned with groves and " soft meadows of violets," — so beautiful, in fact, that " on beholding it even an Immortal would be seized with wonder and delight."-' Finally, identifying the place beyond all question, we have the Eden " fountain," whose waters part into " four streams, flowing each in opposite direc- tions." ^ In Mount Meros we have only the G^eek form of Meru, as long ago shown by Creuzer.* The one is the Navel of the Earth for the same reason that the other is. Egyptian Meroe (in some Egyptian texts Mcr, in Assyrian Mirukh, or MiritkJid), the seat of the famous oracle of Jupiter Ammon, was possibly named from the same "World-mountain." This would explain the passage in Quintus Cur- tius, which has so troubled commentators, wherein the object which represented the divine being is described as resembling a ''navel set in gems."° 1 See Welcker, GriecLische Gotterlehre, i., 775 ct scq. 2 Odyssey, v. 63-75- 3 Il)id. * SymboUk, vol. i., p. 537. ^ " Id quod pro deo colitur, non eandem effigiam habet, <]uam vulgo diis accommodaverunt : umbilico maxime similis est haliiais, si.iaragdo et gemmis coagmentatus." Quintus Curtius, De lu-b. Ca., iv. 7, 23. See notes in Lemaire's ed., Paris, 1S22; also Dio(!onis Siculus, iii. 3. Capt. WiU'ord notices anotlier coincidence : "Tk THE NAVEL OF THE EARTH. 237 When the two cloves of Zeus, flying from the two opposite ends of the world, determ ne the cosmi. centralness of " Parnassos," it is of an antediluvian Parnassos that the myth is speaking.^ It is that mount on whose polar top we have already found the " domiciliinn " of Zeus. Nonnos, in describing the symbolical peplos which Harmonia wove on the loom of Athene, says, " First she represented the earth with its omphalos in the centre ; around the earth she spread out the sphere of heaven varied with the figures of the stars. . . . Lastly, along the exterior edge of the well-woven vestment she represented the Ocean in a circle."^ That Dclohi or the Phocian Parnassos is the ojupha- los here mentioned is far enough from credible. It is the Pole, and the manner in which the term is in- troduced shows that it was perfectly understood by every reader, and needed no explanation. The true shrine of Apollo was not at Delphi, but in that older earth-centre of which Plato speaks ni the motto pre- fixed to this section. His real home is among "the Hyperboreans," in a land of almost perpetual light ; and it is only upon annual visits that he comes to Delphi.^ The remembrance of this fact would have Pnuranics say that . . . the first climate is that of Meru ; among the Greeks and Romans the first cUmate was that of Meroe." — Wilford ir -Isidtic Researches, vol. viii., p. 2S9. ■ "Before Ihis time" — the time of the deluge of Deucalion — ''Zeus had once v/anted to know w'lcr;; the middle of the earth was, and had let fly tV:0 doves at the same moment from the two ends of the world, to see where they wo.ild meet ; they met on Mount Par- nassos, and thus it was proved beyond a doubt that this mountain must be the centre of the earth." — C. Witt, Myths of Hellas. Lon- don, I J- S3 : p. 140. - Lenc.rmant, Beginnings of History, p. 549. ^ "Au debjt de I'hiver Apollon quitte Uelphes pour le pays mys- terieux des Hyperborcens, ou regne une lumiere constante, ct qui I ■ 238 PARADISE FOUND. I ' '■ 11 ^^ i',; ' CXI. < oc: ^ cc: ,: \ if" """I. CD , cc: r UJI li!-' helped the interpreters of Pindar out of more than one perplexity.^ According to Hecataeus, Leto, tie mother of Apollo and his sister Artemis, was born on an island in the Arctic Ocean, " beyond the North wind." Moreover, on this island inhabited by the Hyperboreans, Apollo is unceasingly worshiped in a huge round temple, in a city who'^e inhabitants are perpetually playing upon lyres and chanting to his praise.^ So reports Diodorus (ii., 47) ; and here- with agrees the imaginary journey of Apollonius of Tyana, — a namesake of Apollo, — who tells of his journey far to the North of the Caucasus into the regions of the pious Hyperboreans, among whom he found a lofty sacred mountain, the OmpJialos of the Earth. 3 In the Phcedo we have a charming description of Plato's terrestrial Paradise. " In this fair region," echappe aux rigueurs de I'hiver." Maxime CoUignon, Mythologie Figurec de la Grke. Paris, 1883 : p. 96. See Alcasus' Hymn, re- ferred to by Menzel, Unsterblichkcitslehre, i., p. 87. The present writer is not the first to be reminded here of polar Meru : "Bei ihncii (den Ilyperboreern), wohnen bestandig der Sonnengott Apollo iind seine Schwester Artemis, wie auf dem indischen Meru ebenfalls In- dra, der Lichtgeist und Sonnengott, wohnt," Dr. Ileinrich Lukcii, Die TraditioHcn dcs Meiischengi'schlechts, odcr die Uroffoibaning nntcr den Hcidoi. Miinster, 2d ed., 1869 : p. 73. 1 See Olympian Odes, iv., 74 ; vi., 3 ; viii., 62 ; xi., 10. JVetncan, vii., 33. FVag., i., 3, M\d passim ; comp. Olymp.^ ii., iii. ; Fyt/i., iv., etc. 2 " The Dorian worship of Apollo wdiS primiiively Boreal." Hum- boldt, Cosmos (Bohn's ed.), ii., 511. Compare Pindar's expression in second Olympian Ode: "the Hyperborean folk who serve Apollo." 8 " Cette montagne est sacree; c'est rombilic du monde." Mo- reau de Jonnes, L' Ocean des Anciens, p. 162. As to the yEgcaii Delos, the best explanation Keary can rive is this : " Delo.s was after- ward deemed to be the navel of the ej.th, because, being iii special favor with Apollo, // might be thought to stand under the eye of tlic viidday sun.'^ (l) Primitive Belief, ^t. l?>2,. Compare, on the other hand, Pindar's Fragment in honor of Delos, the Homeric Hymn to Apollo, and the Japanese myth of Onogorojima before described. THE NAVEL OF THE EARTH. Socrates is made to say, *' all things that grow — trees and flowers and fruit — are fairer than any here ; and there are hills and stones in them smoother and more transparent and fairer in color than our highly-valued emeralds and sardonyxes and jaspers and other gems, which are but minute frag- ments of them : for there all the stones are like our precious stones, and fairer still. The temperament of their seasons is such that the inhabitants have no disease, and Hve much longer dian we do, and have sight and hearing and smell and all the other senses in much greater perfection. And they have temples and sacred places in which the gods really dwell, and they hear their voices, and receive their answers, and are conscious of them, and hold con- verse with them, and they see the sun, the moon, and the stars as they really are." ^ If we ask as to the location of this divinely beau- tiful abode, every indication of the text agrees with our hypothesis. It is right under the eye when the world is looked at from its summit, the North- ern celestial pole.^ Viewed from the standpoint of Greece and its neighbor lands it is ''above,'' — it is •' the ttpper Earthy' the dazzling top of the " round" world. In it, moreover, is the Navel of the Earth, fiifToyaui, inhabited by happy men. If anything is needed to disprove the common no- tion that geographical ignorance and national self- esteem first governed the ancient peoples in locating in their own countries " navels " of the earth, it is furnished by what is, in all probability, the oldest epic in the world, that of Izdhubar, fragments of 1 Phiedo, no, III. ■^ EifTlS i.VU)%iV d€(fTO. '■ 1 i I I'll III J 240 PARADISE FOUND. OK cr c:: CD fc: which have survived in the oldest literature of Baby- lonia. These fraii^ments show that the earliest in- habitants of the Tigro-Kuphrates basin located " the Centre of the Earth," not in their oivn midst, but in a far-off land, of sacred associations, where " the holy house of the gods" is situated, — a land "into the heart whereof man hath not penetrated ; " a place underneath the " overshadowing world-tree," and beside the " full waters." ^ No description could more perfectly identify the spot with the Arctic Pole of ancient Asiatic mythology. Yet this testimony stands not alone ; for in the fragment of another ancient text, translated by Sayce in " Records of the Past," we are told of a "dwelling" which "the gods created for" the first human beings, — a dwelling in w^hich they " became great " and "increased in num- bers," and the location of which is described in words exactly corresponding to those of Iranian, In- dian, Chinese, Eddaic, and Aztec literature ; namelv, "in the Centre of the Earth." ^ In the Hindu Puranas we are told over and over that the earth is a sphere, and that Mount Meru is its Navel or Pole.^ But the expression ndb/ii, or ** Navel " of the earth, is older than the Puranas, though the very meaning of Purana is "ancient." Like the term " Navel of Heaven," it occurs in the 1 A. H. Sayce, Babylonian Literature. London, 1878 : p. 39. The Sunis of Northwestern Africa, in our own day, fix the centre of tlie world outside their own territory, "between themselves and the Sim- dan." R. G. Haliburton, Notes on Mount Atlas and its Traditions. Salem, Mass., 1S83 : p. 8. 2 Records of the Past, xi., pp. 109 seq. George Smith, Chaldaan Account of Genesis, 2d ed., p. 92. Lenormant, Begittnings of History, app., pp. 508-510. ^ " The convexity in the centre is the navel of Vishnu." — Asiatic Researches, vol. viii., p. 273. THE NAVEL OF THE EARTH. 241 of Baby- rliest in- Lted •' the \st, but in ere " the ind "into rated;" a orld-tree," ition could Lrctic Pole testimony 3f another ords of the "the gods dwelling in ;ed in nuni- escribed in [ranian, In- e ; namely, r and over mt Meru is nnbhi, or le Puranas, " ancient." :curs in the ^8 : p. 39- 'i'-^*^ centre of the PS and the Smi- its Traditions. lith, Chaldccan \ings of History, \ inu. " — Asia'a: hymns of the earliest Veda. But where was the sacred shrine to which it was applied } It was no holy place in Bactria, or in the Punjilb. Nothing tends to locate it in India. On the other hand, the fifth verse of the one hundred and eighty-fifth hymn, niandala first, of the Rig Veda, seems most plainly to fix it at the North Pole. In this verse Night and Day are represented as twin sisters in the bosom of their parents Heaven and Earth ; each bounding or limiting the other, but both kissing simultane- ously the Ndbhi of the ICarth. Now, everywhere upon earth, except in the polar regions, Night and Day seem ever to be j^ursuing and supplanting each other. They have no common ground. At the Pole — and only there — they may be said, with locked arms, to spin round and round a common point, and unitedly to kiss it from the opposite sides.^ This plainly is the meaning of the poet ; and re- membering all the legendary splendors of the polar mountain around which sun and moon are ever mov- ing, we must pronounce the figure as beautiful as it is instructive.^ 1 The following versions may be compared ; " Zusammenkommend, die beiden Jungen, deren Enden zusammenstossen, die verbiindeteten Scliwestern in der beiden Aeltern Schosse, kiissend den Nabel der Welt, schiitzt uns, Himmel und Erde, vor Gewalt." — Ludwig, i. \'^2. " Going always together, equally young and of like termination, sisters and kindred, and scenting \sic\ the navel of the world, placed on their lap as its parents ; defend us, Heaven and Earth, from great clanger." — Wilson, ii., 188. " Die Beiden Jungfraun an einander grenzend, " Die Zwillingsschwestern in dem Schoss der Eltern, " Die im Verein der Welten Nabel kiissen, — " Beschirmt vor grauser Noth uns Erd' und Himmel." (Grassmann, ii., 177.) Compare R. V., i., 144, 3 ; ii., 3, 6, and 7 ; et passim. " A later poet has borrowed the same idea : — 16 -I 1 t 1 i ,1 I ! i ■ ! 242 PARADISE FOUND. ll ac: » % CD . : 1:1 lis In perfect accord herewith, we find the bard ask- ing, ill another hymn, where the Navel oi the Earth is ; and in doing it he associates it as closely as pos- sible, not with some central home-shriiie in his own lanu, but with the extreme '' End of the Earth'' — an expression used again and again, in ancient lan- guages, for the Pole and its vicinity.^ Again, in another Vedic passage, the Navel of the Earth is located upon "the mountains," and this as- sociation points us to the North. ^ Still stronger evi- dence of its polar location is found in other hymns, where the supporting column of heaven — the Atlas pillar of Vedic cosmology — is described as stand- ing in or upon the Navel of the Earth. ^ Finally, so unmistakable is the Vedic teaching on this subject that a recent writer, after asserting with all his teachers that the cosmography of the Vedic bards was "embryonic," and their earth a "fiat disk" overarched by a solid firmament, which was " soldered on to the edge of the disk at the horizon," nevertheless, later, in studying one of the cosmo- gonical hymns of DTrghatamas, the son of Mamata, reaches the conclusion that the singer had knowl- edge both of the celestial and of the terrestrial Pole, and that, in seeking to answer the question as to the " Around the fire in solemn rite they trod, The lovely lady and the glorious god ; Like Day and sfarry Midnight when they meet In the broad plains at lofty Merit's feet.''' (Griffiths' Translation of Knvtara Sambhava, or T/te Birth of the War-God, London, 1879.) 1 The following is Grassmann's translation : " Ich frage nach dem aussersten Ende der Erde, ich frage wo der Welt Nabel ist," etc. Rig Veda, i., 164, 34 ; comp. 35. 2 Rig Veda, ix., 82, 3. 8 Ibid., ix., 86, 8 ; ix., 79, 4; ix., 73, 7, etc. THE NAVEL OF THE EARTH 243 lard ask- le Earth y^ as pos- his own '/^•— an lent lan- ;el of the :l this as- )nger cvi- ;r hymns, the Atlas as stand- achinf:^ on rting with the Vedic 1 a "flat vhich was ; horizon," le cosmo- Mamata, ad knowl- trial Pole, as to the the War-God. Ige nach dem Ibel ist," etc. birth-place of hiunanity, he locates it preciselv at the [;oint of contact between the polar niomiLain and the Pole of the northern sky,^ We have seen that, accortling to Old-Iranian tra- dition also, man was created in the "rr/z/w/" divis- ion of the earth. The primordial tree, which "kept the strength of all kinds of trees," was '* in the vi- cinity of the Middle of the Earth." '-^ The primeval ox, which stood by the Paradise river when the de- stroyer came, was "in t\\Q Middle of the Earth." ^ Mount Tacra (Pahl. : Tcrak), the celestial Pole, and Kakad-i-Daitik, the mountain of the terrestrial Pole, are each described in similar terms: the one as "Centre of the World," the other as "Centre of the Earth." * The expression Apdin Nepdt, the " Navel of the Waters," occurs in the Avcstan writings again and again, and is always apjilied either to the world- fountain from which all waters proceed, or to the spirit presiding over it.^ Put as this world-foun- ^ The reader will no doubt be glad to sec the exact language : " Le contact de la terre et du ciel, serait-il I'hymen mysterieux d'uu I'hu- manite naquit ? Le ciel, ce serait le pere qui engcndre ; la mere, ce ser;ut la grande tcrre, ayant sa ni itrice dans la partie la plus haute de sa surface, sur les hauls monts ; et ce serait la que le pcre 'feconde- rait le sein de celL^ qui est en nieme temps, son epouse et sa fille.' On a cru voir ce point de contact dont parle Dlrghatamas, — Oiittd- nayah tchamwdh, ' endroit septentrional oil les deux surfaces se touchent,' — au pole nord, connu de I'auteur ; I'etoile polaire se nom- mant otittanapada. II est certain que la somme des connaissances positives collectionees par ce philosophe etait relativement impor- tant.'' — Marius Fontane, Iiide Vcdiqtie. Paris, i88l : pp. 94, 200. '^ West, Pahlavi Texts, pt. i., p. 161. ^ West, Pahlavi Txts, pt. i., p. 162. * Ibid., pp. 22, 36. So, in consequence of the duality and opposite polarity alluded to in the context, " Hell is in the middle of the earth," at tlie South Pole, p. 19. "* Sec Index to Darmesteter's Zend-Avesta. Compare the Vedic hymn (ii., 35), ** An den Sohn der IVasser" Ap&m napdt, whose loca- IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) 1.0 !^l^ 1^ I.I us 2.2 L2 12.0 I 1.25 III 1.4 1.6 < 6" ► Photographic Sciences Corporation 23 west MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. MSM (716)S72-4S03 ^^^ ^ •^^ I'l. I 244 PARADISE FOUND. CD* .1) I lif ^ fc S tain, Ardvi SCira, is located in the north polar sky (see next chapter), we have here also a recognition of a \\or\d-oifiphalos, inseparable from the ancient and sacred Paradise-mountain at the Pole.^ The Chinese terrestrial Paradise is described not only as "at the Centre of the Earth," but also as directly under Shang-te's heavenly palace, which is declared to be in the North star, and which is some- times styled " Palace of the Centre." ^ Very prob ably the historic designation, " The Middle King- dom," was originally a sacred name,*^ commemora- tive of that primeval middle country which the Akkadian called Akkad, the Indian Ilavrita, the Ira- nian Kvaniras, and the Northman Idavollr. In the funeral rites of China, this supposition finds a co- gent confirmation * tion is "an dem hochsten Orte " (v., 13, Grassmann). Compare quota- tion from Ritter, in part iv., chapter first, supra. 1 " Dieser Albordj, der Lichtberg, der Nabel der Erde, wird von Sonne Mond und Sternen umgeben." — Carl Ritter, Enikundc, lid. viii., p. 46. '^ " In Kwen-lun is Shang-te's lower recreation-palace. . . . Shane:- te's wife dwells in this region, immediately over which is Shang-te's heavenly palace, which is situated in the centre of the heavens, as his earthly one is in the centre of the earth. . . . The Queen mother dwells alone in its midst, in the place where the genii sport. At the summit there is a resplendent azure hall, with lakes inclosed by pre- cious gems, and many temples. Above rules the clear ether of tne ever-fi.xed, the polar, star." — Condensed from the Chinese Recorder, vol. iv., p. 95. 8 Frederik Klee, Le DSIu<^e. Paris, 1847 : p. 188, note. * " Quand je vous ai parle des libations en usage ^ la Chine, je vous ai dit. Monsieur, qu'on se tournait vers le pole septentrional pour faire les libations en I'honneur des morts. En considerant Li veneration de ce peuple pour ses ancetres, on n'aper9oit qu'une expli- cation naturelle de cet usage ; c'est de dire que les Chinois se tour- nent vers le pays du monde, ou ils ont pris naissance, et ou leur an- cetres reposent." — Hailly, Lettres sur POrigine d^s Sciences et sur celle des Peuples de PAsie. Paris, 1777 : p. 236. THE NAVEL OE THE EARTH. 245 Lrde, wird von Erdkutuie, 15(1. Passing to Japan, it is curiously interesting to note that the Ainos, who are supposed to have been the first inhabitants, are believed to have come into the archipelago " from the North ; " ^ that their heaven is on inaccessible mountain-tops in the same quarter ; '^ and that their name, according to some authorities, etymologically signifies " Offspring of the Centred ''^ In burial, their dead are always so placed that when resurrected their faces will be set toward the lofty northern country from which their ancestors are believed to have come, and to which their spirits are believed to have returned.* 1 Griffis, T/ie Mikado's Empire, p. 27. '- "Tliese [a mythological i)aii J were the ancestors of the Aiiios. Their offspring, in turn, married ; some among each other, others with the bears of the mountains [the Bear Tribe?]. The fruits of this latter union were men of extraordinary valor and nimble hunters, who, after a long life spent in the vicinity of their birth, departed to tlic far North, where they still live on the higii and inaccessible table- lands above the mountains ; and, being innnortal, tliey direct, by their magical influences, the actions and the destiny of men ; that is, the Ainos." — Ibid., p. 28. ^ Ai-no-ko. Ibid., p. 29. * " It may not be devoid of interest to mention here that the Ainos bury their dead with the head to the South. . . . The Aino, to-day, as he did in ancient times, buries his dead by covering the body with matting, and placing it with the head to the Soutii in a grave which is about three feet deep." Notes on Japaucse ArchiTology wil/i cs- fecial reference to the S/ojte Ai^e,hy Henry von Siebolti, Yokohama, 1S79, p. 6. Let no reader imagine this a meaningless rite of un- developed savages. " From all these observations, as well as from the traditions of the Ainos, in which are ever-recurring laments for a better past ; and from many peculiarities in their customs, we must conclude that the Ainos are to be classed with those peoples that have earlier been more richly supplied with the implements of civili- zation, but have become degraded through isolation. Prehistoric discoveries . . . favor this view. The pits found there for dwellings indicate that the Ainos came from the North to Yezo." Professor Brauns, of Ilalle. Translated from Memoirs of the Berlin Anthropo- logical Society, in Science. Cambridge, 1884; p. 72. Qc: » CD . 246 PARADISE FOUND. Taking these facts in connection with those pre- sented in chapter second of tiie preceding part, one can hardly evade the conckision that, when Griffis informs us that the Japanese considered their country as lying at " the top of the world," and when others say that the Japanese once regarded their country as the "Centre of the World," ^ it is most probable that these writers have applied to the Japan of to-day ideas which originally belonged to a far-distant prehistoric polar Japan, the primitive scat of the race, as it has lived on in these most ancient traditions of the Ainos. In Scandinavian mythology we meet with a sim- ilar idea. In the Eddas, both Asgard and Idavollr are represented as in "the Centre of the World;" and at least one author, in explaining the reason of it, has come within a hair's-breadth of the truth, though missing it.'*^ The ancient Mexicans conceived of the cradle of the human race as situated in the farthest North, upon the highest of mountains, cloud-surrounded, 1 " The Japanese in their earlier separation regarded their country as the centre and most important part of the world." — J.J. Rein, Japan^ Travels and Researches, English translation. London, iSS ]. : p. 6. ^ *' Nos ancetres scandinaves pla9aient la demeure de leurs dicnx, Asgard, au milieu du monde, c'est-adire au centre de la surface de la terre d'alors. II est assez remarcpiable qu'une telle idee n'est i^:..s sans fondemcnt, puisqu'il faut adnicttrc, comme je crois I'avoir (ii-- montre, que I'Europe, I'Asie, et TAmcrique, unis vers le pole nonl, formaient avant le deluge un scul continent." Frederik KIcc, Lc DJluoe, Fr. ed. Paris, 1847 : p. 1S8 n. lUit, by clinging to '* the liiuh- est mountains of Asia," as the centre originally meant, M. Klce loses the chief advantage of his supposed union of the continents at the Pole. — The Teutonic omphalos of the world is preserved at Finzinpt n, near Altstadt, in Saxe-Weiniar. See Kuhn and Schwartz, A'ord- deutsche Sagen. Leipsic, 1848 : p. 215. THE NAVEL OF THE EARTH. 247 hose pre- ing part, lat, when ered their and when dcd their [t is most id to the ilonged to primitive hese most vith a sim- id IdavoUr 3 World ; " 2 reason of the truth, e cradle of est North, urrounded, d their country [' __ J. J. Rein, ,onclon, 1884 : the residence of the god Tlaloc. Thence come the rains and all streams, for Tlaloc is the god of waters. The first man, Quetzalcoalt, after having ruled as king of the Golden Age in Mexico, returned by divine direction to the primeval Paradise in the North (Tlapalia?i), and partook of the draught of immortality. The stupendous terraced pyramid- temple in Cholula was a copy and symbol of the sacred Paradise-mountain of Aztec tradition, which was described as standing " in the Centre of the Midd/e- country.'' ^ Some of the Mexican myths represent the mountain as now "crooked," or turned partly over. For the true explanation of this see above, pp. 192-196. Among the ancient Inca-subjects of Peru^ was 1 //;/ Centrum des MittcUauds. Liiken, Trnditiotien, p. 75; citing Clavigero, Storia del ATessico, torn, ii., 13, 14. " Die Mexicaner op- fcrten auf den hochsten Ikrgen weil sie glaubten, class auf ihnen Tlaloc, der Herr des Paradieses wohne. Sit; warden einerseits als dor Mittclpiinkt dcr Erdc betrachtct, andererseits aber als die Statte, wclche dcm Himmcl am ndchstcn ist, und ibm in nalierer Beriihrung als (lie Erde selbst slelit." Keerl, Die Se/iopfnrtgs_<^ese/iiehte, p. 799. In like manner the national temple of Tlaloc and Vizilputzli, his brother, stood in the centre of the city of Mexico, whence four cause- way roads conducted East, West, North, and South. In the centre of the temple was a richly ornamented Pillar of peculiar sanctity. Bancroft, Amative Races, vol. iii., p. 292. The Quiche prayer to the " Heart of Heaven, Heart of Earth," would seem to rest upon similar conceptions of the true abode of God. Popol Vuh. Max Miillcr, Chips from a German Workshop. New York, 1S72 : vol. i., p. - "The centre and capital of this great territory was Cuzco (i e., 'navel'), whence to the borders of the kingdom branched off four great highways. North and South and East and West, each traversing one of the four provinces or vice-royalties into which Peru was di- vided." TheLandoftheIucas,h^\^.\\.\yxKQ\-\\>o\\. Adams. Lon- don, 18S3 : p. 20. In the central temple here, too, there was a Pillar, placcc dans le centre cTtm cercle dans Vaxe du strand temple et tra- versee tar tin diamltre de Vest a Pouest. P. Dabry de Thiersant, 248 PARADISE FOUND. fc ^ ^ found the same idea of a Navel of the Earth, and even among the Chickasaws of Mississippi. ^ Thus is all ancient thought full of this legendary idea of a mysterious, primeval, holy. Paradisaic Earth-centre, — a spot connected as is no other with the "Centre of Heaven," the Paradise of God. Why it should be so no one has ever told us ; but the hypothesis which places the Biblical Eden at the Pole, and makes all later earth navels commemora- tive of that primal one, affords a perfect explana- tion. In the light of it, there is no difficulty in understanding that Earth-centre in Jerusalem with which we began. The inconspicuous pillar in the Church of the Holy Sepulchre symbolizes and com- memorates far more than the geographical ignorance of mediceval ages. It stands for the Japanese pillar by which the first soul born upon earth mounted to the sky. It stands for the World -column of the East-Aryans and the Chinvat Bridge of Iran. It stands for the law-proclaiming pillar of orichalcum in Atlantis, placed in the centre of the most central land. It stands for that Talmudic pillar by means of which the tenants of the terrestrial Paradise mount to the celestial, and, having spent the Sab- De rOnqine des Indiens da Nouveau-Mondc et dc Icur Civilisation, Paris, 1883 : p. 125. Still more interesting is it to note that the jne- decessors of the Peruvians are reported to have had an idea of the work of the creation of the world as proceeding from the North to ilie South. Dorman, Origin of Primitive Superstitions. Philadelphia, 188 1, p. 334. ' "Some of the large mounds left in Mississippi were called 'navels'' by the Chickasaws, although the Indians are said not to have had any idea whether these were natural mounds or artiiicial structures. They thought Mississippi was at the centre of the Larth, and the mounds were as the navel in the middle of the human body." — Gerald Massey, referring to Schoolcraft, i. 311. THE NAVEL OF THE EARTH. 249 bath, return to pass the week below. It symbol- izes Cardo, Atlas, Mcru, Harii-bcrezaiti, Kharsak- Kurra, — every fabulous mountain on whose top the sky pivots itself, and around which all the heav- enly bodies ceaselessly revolve. It perpetuates a religious symbolism which existed in its region be- fore ever Jerusalem had been made the Hebrew capital, — recalling to our modern world the tabhur ha-arets of a period anterior to the days of Samuel.^ In tradition it is said to mark the precise spot " whence the clay was taken, out of which the body of Adam was modeled." It does so, but it docs it in a language and method which were common to all the most ancient nations of the earth. It points not to the soil in which it stands, but to the holier soil of a far-away primitive Eden.^ 1 Judg. ix. 37 (margin). ^ The genuinely scientific basis of this ancient symbolism is vividly shown in our above given sketch-map of the actual relations of all the continents to the North Pole. » CHAPTER V. THE QUADRIFURCATE RIVER. SEil CD » I uu. 55 ^ A is ich erf linden /uiit, Us (fern paradise ran Zufiihten baum uiid gras, Und alles das darynne was, Zu filter moss ein luasser fi;ross, Das in vicr teil darnaclujloss. LUTWIN. Wir haben hier ein merkwttrdiges Stromsystem. — Grill. "And a river went out of Eden to water the garden, and from thence it was parted and became into four heads," In chapter second of Part Second we presented the simple and natural interpretation suggested by the hypothesis of a primitive circumpolar continent. If the reader will kindly turn back to the statement there made (p. 51), he will see in how natural a man- ner the water system of that lost " land of delights " might have become, in after tradition, the one dis- parted river which waters the whole earth. The insuperable difficulties of all hitherto at- tempted identifications of the four rivers are too nu- merous to present here in detail.^ In our interpreta- 1 " We entirely agree with Delitzsch [the elder] that ' Paradise is lost,' and the four streams are on this account a riddle which cries, 'Where is Paradise?' the question remaining without an answer." 'E\>zx%, yEgypten und die Biichcr Mose, p. 30. See McClintock and Strong's CyclopcEdia, Arts. " Gihon," " Pison," " Eden," etc. " Wherever there is a river-head that can be made to run on all-fours, even by assuming the existence of water-channels no longer extant, THE QUAD R I FURCATE RIVER. 251 (ILL. water the .nd became presented ggested by continent. statement iral a man- If delights " lie one dis- litherto at- lare too nu- interpreta- It ' Paradise is Ble which cries, It an answer." IcClintock and Eden," etc. p on all-fours, longer extant, tion the original river is from the sky ; the division takes place on the heights at the Pole, and the four resulting rivers are the chief streams of the circum- polar continent as they descend in different direc- tions to the surrounding sea. Does such a view find any support in the traditions of the ancient world ? That it does will be clear to any one who has carefully read thus far. Let us take the rivers of the Persian cradle of the race. Where do they rise? If the investigator of this question have made no previous studies in Comparative Sacred Hydrog- raphy, he will be surprised to find that in Persian thought, not only the Paradise rivers, but also all the rivers of the whole earth, have but one head- spring and bnt ojie place of discharge. This head-spring is the Ardvi-SGra, situated in heaven, — the heaven of the Pole. *' This heavenly fountain," says Haug, summarizing the contents of the Aban Yasht, — " this heavenly fountain has a thousand springs and a thousand canals, each of them forty days' journey long. Thence a channel goes through all the seven keshvares, or regions of the earth, conveying everywhere pure celestial waters." ^ the Biblical Eden has been discovered, — whether iu Asia, Africa, Europe, or America." Gerald Massey, The Natural Genesis, vol. ii,, p. 162. We may add that Mr. Samuel Johnson's suggestion {^Oriental Religions ; Persia. Boston, 1885 : p 253), to the effect that the " four rivers " of the Hebrew story consisted of two real rivers, the Tigris and the Euphrates, ////J- two imaginary *' words, that simply mean 'flowing waters,' and that were used as generic terms for the purpose of mak- ing up the wmwh^r four, the conventional sign of completeness in all Eastern mythologies," is a characteristic specimen of the unschol- arly and dogmatic caprice of pantheistic exegesis in the field of an- cient religious ideas and their history. ^ Essays, 2d ed., p. 198. See Darmesteter's translation : " From this river of mine alone flow all the waters that spread all over the *, ' 252 PARADISE FOUND. cac: * CD •aallili* 1 I & The following is an ancient invocation to AnA- hita, the spirit of these heavenly waters : " Come before me, Ardvi-Silra Anahita ! — come clown from yonder stars on to the earth created by Ahura- Mazda ! Thee shall worship the handy lords, the rulers of countries, sons of the rulers of countries." ^ From its elevation the heavenly height is called HOgar, i. e., " the lofty : " " Hugar, the lofty, is the mount from which the water of Ardvi-Sura leaps down the height of a thousand men." ^ Again it is written, "HOgar, the lofty, on which the water of ArdvJ-Sfira flows and leaps, is the chief of summits, since it is that above which is the revolution of Satavcs, the chief of reservoirs." ^ As all the rivers of the earth's seven regions, so all lakes and seas and the ocean itself, are from this one celestial fountain. "Through the warmth and clearness of the water, purifying more than other seven keshvares ; this river of mine alone goes on bringing waters both in summer and in winter." The Zend-Avesta, Pt. ii., pp. 52-84. 1 Haug, Ibid., p. 198. Darmestetcr, Ibid., p. 73. 2 Bundahish (West), xii. 5. The Zend-Avesta (Darmesteter), ii. p. 54. * Bundahish, xxiv. 17. When West {Pahlavi Texts, Pt. i., p. 35, note 6) uses the last clause of this quotation to show that the loca- tion of Hilgar is " probably " in the western quarter, his argument rests upon two mistakes, both of which seem to be shared by all modern Avestan students. The first mistake is to suppose Satavcs a different star from Tishtar (Tijtrya) ; and the second is the notion that Tishtar was the star now called Sirius. The fact is that orig- inally Satavaesa and Tijtrya were simply two designations for one and the same object, and that object was not our Sirius, but the Pole star. I say our Sirius, because there is evidence that this name also once belonged to a very different heavenly body, and to one situated in " die Mittedes Hitnmels,^' i. e., at the Pole. (Ideler, Sternenmiuen, p. 216.) Hflgar (Hukairya) is the heavenly height of the polar sky, high above Hara-berezaiti, whenever this term is applied, as originally, to the terrestrial polar mount. Abdn Yasht, 88. See Windischmann, Zoroastrische Hiudien,'^. 171. THE QUADRIFURCATE KIVER. 253 n to AnA- s : •' Come down from by Ahura- lords, the ountries." ^ \t is called lofty, is the ■Sura leaps Again it is le water of of summits, evolution of regions, so re from this warmth and than other bringing waters ii., PP- 52-!:>4- )armesteter), ii. f/j, Pt. i., p. 35. »w that the loca- [r, his argument je shared by all Ippose Satavcs a lid is the nut ion let is that orig- inations for one jus, but the Pole It this name also to one situated I, Stertienmmeu, \{ the polar sky, led, as originally, Iwindischmann, waters, everything continually flows from the source Ardvi-Siira." ^ However named, all waters are sim- ply portions of the same heaven-descending stream "The other innumerable waters and rivers, springs and channels, are one in origin with those, so in va- rious districts and various places they call them by various names." '^ Even plant-sap, and blood, and milk, and all the seventeen kinds of liquid enumer- ated in the Yashts, are parts of the one cosmic cur- rent. "All these, through growth, or the body which is formed, mingle again with the rivers, for the body which is formed and the growth are both one." ^ Everything of a liquid nature, therefore, in the whole world is conceived of as proceeding from one source high in the north-polar sky. Whither is it tending ? What becomes of it all in the end } Where do its myriad rills and rivers at last dis- charge .'* As according to the cosmological concep- tion so often illustrated in these pages, all start from the zenith, we should naturally expect all to reunite at last in the nadir. This is found to be the fact. But in this nether gathering place the waters, now polluted from their contact with all the filth and vileness of the world, are not allowed to rest and ac- ^ Bundahish, ch. xiii., 3. The chapter on Seas. '•^ Ibid., XX. 33. Ranhiiy the original Avestan name of the world- river, became corrupted \\\\.o AraiihAtn — Arang — Arini^ — and finally into Arg. Windischmann, Zoroastrische Stmlien, pp. 1S7, 189. ^ Ibid., xxi. 2. Henry Bowman, in his Eighteen Hundred and Eighty-one ; or the End of the yEon (St. Louis, Mo., 1884, p. 36), gives the following remarkable interpretation to the heaven-descend- ing river : " The throne of God is the apex, culmination, directly over the pole's axis, and so in the centre of the city, — corresponding to the tree of life, which in the old creation was situated in the centre of the garden, — from which proceeds the electrical current, the ' pure river of the water of life, clear as crystal.' " ' .f 254 PARADTSE FOUND. I 1 Qc: ciinuilate.^ This cesspool of the universe has a /^r- vious bottom. J^y tlic various processes of strain- inj^, va[)orizing, aeration, etc., the |)ollute(l waters are l)y Tishtar brought back distilled and purified, and are re-discharj^ed into the zenith-reservoir which perpetually supplies the gushing streams of Ardvi- SCira.'^ Into such a marvelously complete cosmical circulatory water system did the Iranic imagination develop the primitive head -stream of Eden. But never, even in the most extravagant mythological adornments of the idea, was it for a moment forgot- ten that the original undivided stream originates in the north polar sky ; and that its division into earthly streams and rivers is on the holy mount which stands in the centre of Kvaniras, the central and circumpolar kcshvair of the whole habitable earth. '^ The various fragmentary allusions of the oldest Greek poets to Okeanos and the rivers would seem to imply the early existence, and perhaps early loss, of a similar Hellenic conception of the water cir- culation of the entire earth. Thus, according to Homer's familiar couplet, it is from Okeanos, in * This underworld is the long-misunderstood " cave," in which, in the Vcdic myth, the demons try to imprison the stolen rain-cows, so that the earth may be cursed with drought. '^ Ibid., XX. 4. VendUdd, v. 16-19. More fully and graphically described in DMistan-i Diiiik, ch. xciii. The ancient idea seems yet to survive in modern folk-lore : "In der Geschichtc von Ikirma uiid Chuseima (in den Erzahlungen der rooi Niichte) sitzen zwei Engel dcr eine in Gestalt eines Lowen, der andere in der eines Sticres vor eincr Pforte, Wache haltend und Gott prcisend. Die Pforte, welche nur der Engel Gabriel offnen kann, fiihrt zu cinem von Rubingebirgen lun- flosscnen Meere, der Quelle aller Wasserauf Erden; aus ihm schop- fen Engel die Gewasser der Welt bis zum Auferstehungstage." Justi, Geschichte des alien Persiens, 1879, p. 80. ' Compare Spiegel, Erdnische AUerthumskunde. Leipsic, 1871: vol. i., pp. 198-202. THE QUADK/Z-VKCATE A'/ TEA'. 255 some application of the term, that " all rivers and every sea and all fountains flow." ' ICuripides pre- sents the same idea.- There is, therefore, o/ic foun- tain of all the world's waters. The same conception is expressed by llesiod in his Theo^i^ony, where all rivers, as sons, and all fountains and brooks, as daUi^hters, are traced back to Okeanos. Then we have a constant descendinj,^ movement of all waters until they reach the \vorld-surroundin<; Ocean-river at the equator, beyond which ^'s the Underworld. From this equatorial ocean, parting off from the southern or under shore, new branches diverj^e and form the river system of the Hadcan kingdom. Other Underworld rivers were pcrhajjs conceived of as percolating through the earth and emerging to the surface in the lower hemis[)here. There is at least some evidence that the Greeks, like the Per- sia!is, had this idea of interterranean water-courses, and even rivers, resembling the circulation of the blood in the human body.'^ Sometimes these Under- world rivers are represented as four in number, thus making the circumpolar water system of the Under- world a perfect counterpart of the Eden rivers at the summit of the upper hemisphere.'* All, more- over, like those of the Persian Underworld, seem to be plunging forward and ever downward, until in the last glimpse which the imagination can catch they are seen streaming from the roof of the grot of the goddess Styx, and, as Preller expresses it, ^ Iliad, xxi. 195. 2 Ilippolytus, 119. 8 Ihindahish, viii. 4. * " In der Unterwelt gab es ausser dem Styx noch drei Fliisse. Die Vierzahl entspricht derjenigen der vier Paradiesflusse." — Wolf- gang Menzel, Die vorchriitliche i/nsierblichkeitslehre, vol. ii., p. 6. i- 2S6 PARADISE FOUND. •' falling thence, beneath the Earth, downward into the deep, deep Night." ^ Here, then, we have a unitary water system, em- bracing the whole earth, and the remarkable Ho- meric and Hesiodic term di/^o/j/joos, " refluent," may well imply that the Underworld -rrpoxor], or "outflow,"^ returns in nature's perfect order to feed its original fountain, thus conforming the whole, in every part, to the sacred hydrography of the Persians.^ Granting this, one should locate the Okeanos- fountain, not where Preller and Welcker and Volckcr and the other mythographers have hitherto placed it, but in the farthest North, and in the sky. That this location was the original one is plain from all the local implications of the mythological accounts of the proper home of Okeanos and Tethys, and is further confirmed by many incidental evidences con- nected with such myths as those of the Eridanus,* the Acheloos, the birth of Zeus, and particularly those of Atlas and his children.^ 1 Preller, Griechische Mythologie, i. 29. Plato, in his cosmical sketch in Phaedo, makes the Hadean rivers pour into Tartaros. 2 Odyssey, xx. 65. 8 " Fountful Ida" corresponds almost perfectly to the Iranian Hiigar, down whose sides leap and flow the waters of Ardvi-Suia. Moreover, in its very riame Lenormant and others see a root connect- hig it with Ilavrita, the circunipolar paradisaic varsha of Piininic geography. It should be added that to Ilavrita corresponds signifi- cantly the Norse Idavollr, or " plain of Ida," which is " in the middle of the divine abode." Mallet, Northern Antiquities, p. 409. * " Der Eridanus ist nrspriin^lich ein mythischer Fluss." Idcler, Ursprung der Stfrnennainen, p. 229. See especially Robert Brown, Jr., Eridanus. London, 1SS3. ^ Compare the like conclusion of Grill, Die Erzvdter der Mciisch- heit. Leipsic, 1875 : i., pp. 222, 223. Grill also claims that the an- cient Germans had a similar world-river, p. 223. I cannot help think- ing that in the descending Ukko's stream and in the ascending Am- ma's stream of Finnish mythology we have traces of a like cosmic iliii THE QUADRIFURCATE RIVER. 257 iward into In the most ancient Akkadian, Assyrian, and Bab- ylonian literature there are expressions which seem clearly to indicate the presence among these peo- ples of a precisely similar conception with respect to the waters of the world. ^ The same is true of Egyptian literature, but in both these cases the data are as yet too meagre to make them entirely conclu- sive in argument.'-^ We therefore pass them by, and close with a glance at the Eden river of the ancient Aryans of India. This, as already seen, is the heaven-born Ganga. The Vedas call it "the river of the three worlds," for the reason that it flows through Heaven and Earth and the Underworld. In Vcdic times "the original source and home of the waters was thought to be the highest heaven {paramam vyonian), the re- gion peculiarly sacred to Varuna." ^ This is clearly water circulation. See Castreii, J\fyt/iolo<:^ie,\). 45. After reading the long note in Biixtorfii, Lexicon C/ialiiaicimiy Talmudicum et Rahbini- cum, Lipsiae, 1865, pp. 341, 342, one could also readily believe that wo have here the true origin of the two movements or paths set forth in the omnifluent philosophy of Heraclitus : r^v ohhv Kdrw, and tV 6Bhi/ &va. Again, " In the Edda all rivers derive their origin from that called liver gelmej-.'''' Asiatic Researches, vol. viii., p. 321. 1 Attention is only called to the ancient Akkadian hymn given by George Smith, Assyrian Discoveries, pp. 392, 393 ; to the exceedingly interesting article by Professor Sayce on " The Encircling River of the Snake-God of the Tree of Life," in The Acadeviy, London, Oct. 7, 1882, p. 263 ; and finally to the instructive account of the Akkadian "mother of rivers" given in Lenormant's Orii;ines, ii. i, p. 133, a citation from which has already been made on p. 171. See also Rob- ert I'rown, The Myth of Kirhi, p. no. - " Die .^gypter wussten schon friihe von eincm die Erde umflics- senden Strom." — Grill, Die F.rzvdter der Mcnschheit, i., p. 277. ^ E. D. Perry, Journal of the American Oriental Society, 18S2, p. 134. He adds in a foot-note, " In the Veda, 'water' and all corre- sponding terms, such as stream, river, torrent, ocean, etc., are used indiscriminately of the w'ater upon the earth and of the aqueous vapor in the sky or of the rain in the air." Compare M. Bergaigne : " L'eau 17 ^ 258 PARADISE FOUND. illustrated in scores of passages : for example, in the beautiful prayer for immortality, where the fourfold ^ head-spring of all waters is located in the sacred Centre of Heaven. ^ Sometimes the heaven-sprung stream is called the Sindhu,^ sometimes the Saras- vati.'* In the later Mahabharata its head-spring is placed in the heaven of Vishnu, high above the lofty Pole-star (Druva). On their descent the ethe- real waters wash the Pole-star, and the Seven Rishis (the Great Bear), and the polar pivot of " the lu- nar orb," ^ thence falling upon the top of beautiful des rivieres terrestres est reconnue identique par sa nature et son origine a celle dcs rivieres celestes," etc., etc. La Religion Vediqitc^ torn, i., p. 256. See pp. 251-261. 1 Rig Veda, ix. 74, 6. 2 Rig Veda, ix. 113, 8. Grassmann translates it : — " Wo Konig ist Vivasvats Sohn, Und wo des Himmels Heiligthum Wo ewig stromt des Wassers Born, Da machc du unsterblich mich." See the " Hymns to the Waters " generally, and particularly that ad- dressed to Apdin N'apdt, the "Navel of the Waters," A'. F., ii. 3;, comparing therewith the invocations to the " Navel of the Waters " in the Yashts. Darmesteter, Zend-Avesta, ii. 6 n., 12, 14, 20, 36, 3S, 39, 71, 94, 102, 202. Windischmann, Zoroastrische Studien, pp. 177- 186. ** " Der vedische Indcr redet von dem Sindhu /car' i^ox^v, dcm Einen himmlischen Strom odcr Weltstrom, in dem er die Gcsanmit- heit der atmospharischen DUnste und Wasser als in Bewegung be- griffcner und die Krde rings umfliessender sich zur Anschauung briiigt." — Grill, Die Erzvdter der Menschheit, Th. i., p. 197. * See the Vedic passages in Bergaigne, La Religion Vedique, torn. i-. PP- 325-328. ^ Wilkins, Hindu MytJiology. London, 1882 : p. 102, In Indian cosmology the lunar sphere is concentric with and mcludcs the cailh- sphere ; hence water falling perpendicularly from the celestial to the terrestrial pole can yet on its way " wash the lunar sphere." So too a mountain at the North Pole, if only high enough, will reach to ihc " lunar sphere." Such, in fact, was the case with the Paradise nioua- tain of Indian cosmology, and traces of the idea live on in the Tal- THE QUADRIFURCATE RIVER. 259 iple, in the e fourfold ^ the sacred ven-sprung the Saras- .d-spring is above the It the ethe- 3ven Rishis of '* the hi- of beautiful I nature et son 'eligion Vediquc, iicularly that ad- ," A'. F., ii. 35. lof the Waters " [2, 14. 20, 36, 3S, Uiidicn, pp. 177- IX die Gesamnit- \\ Bewegung bc- fur Anschaiuing p. 197- \n Veditjiic, torn. 1102, In Indian Lludcs the eailh- celestial to the phere." So too t-ill reach to the Paradise moun- on in the Tal- Meru. '* On the summit of Meru," says the Vishnu Parana, "is the vast city of Brahma, . .'. inclosed by the river Ganga, which, issuing from the foot of Vishnu and washing the lunar orb, falls here [on the top of Meru] from the skies, and, after encir- cling the city,^ divides into four mighty rivers, flow- ing in opposite directions. These rivers are Si'ta, tlie Alakananda, tbe Chakshu, and the Bhadra. The first, falling on the tops of the inferior mountains on the east side of Meru, flows over their crests, and passes through the country of Bhadraswa to the ocean. The Alakananda flows south to the country of Bharata, and, dividing into seven rivers on the way, falls into the sea. The Chakshu falls into the sea after traversing all the western moun- tains and passing through Ketumala. And the lihadra washes the country of the Uttarakurus and empties itself into the northern ocean." ^ mud and in Patristic theology too plain for even Massey to render valueless : " IMeru is shown to be the mount which reached to the monii and became a figure of the four lunar quarters. . . . Hence the tradition that Paradise was preserved during, or was exempt from, the Dehige because it was on the summit of a mountain that reached to the moon (Bereshith Rabba, xxxiii.) ; which shows the continuation of the typical mount of the seven stars into the lunar phase of time- keeping, where the mount of the four quarters carried Eden with it." The Xaturi I Genesis, vol. ii., p. 244. 1 Here i probably the origin of the curious notion of the Saba^ans touching the Euphrates. Or was the borrowing on the other side } " Lcs Soubbas ont la certitude que I'Euphrate, qui, d'apres eux, prend sa source sous le trone d'Avather (personnage qui preside au juucnient des ames et dont le trone est place sous retoile folaire), passait autrefois i Jerusalem." M. N. Sioufti, La Religion des Soiib' bas OH Sa/^eens. Paris, 18S0 : p. 7, note. Jehovah's city here takes the place of Brahma's. - 7//c' VisJniu /•«;•(/;//ell>aum und die Quelle, ah audi der Dractie des Hesperidengar- tens, ivcrden indcii Mytlieii u)id Mdrchot der ineisteii Volker in das Centrtivi der Natur, an den GipJ'el des IVellberges, an den i\'ordpol vcriegt. — Woli-gang Menzel. In the centre of the Garden of Eden, according to Genesis iii. 3, there was a tree exceptional in position, in character, and in its relations to men. Its fruit was "good for food," it was "pleasant to the eyes," "a tree to be desired." ^ At first sight it would not perhaps appear how a study of this tree in the different mythologies of the ancient world could assist us in locating primitive Paradise. In the discussions of such sites as have usually been 1 Was this "tree of knowledge " identical with the "tree of life"? Possibly. " The tradition of Genesis," says Lenormant, Beginfiiiigs, p. 84, " at times appears to admit two trees, one of Life and one of Knowledge, and again seems to speak of one only, uniting in itself both attributes (Gen. ii. 17 ; iii. 1-7)." Compare Ernst von Bunscn, Das Symbol des Kreuzcs hci alien Nationen. Berlin, 1876 : p. 5. To make the whole account relate to one tree it would only be necessary first to translate the last clause of ch. ii. 9 " the tree of life also in the midst of the garden, even the tree of knowledge of good and evil ; " and then the last clause of ch. iii. 22 " and now lest he continue to put forth his hand and to take of the tree of life," etc., — for both of which constructions there are abundant precedents, if only the gam be rendered with the freedom used in some other passages. As to the first, see i Sam. xvii. 40 ; xxviii. 3 ; Dan. iv. 10 ; as to the second, the Hebrew grammars on the use of the future. Compare also Prov. iii. 13, 18, where wisdom is a tree of life. V\i THE CENTRAL TREE. 263 proposed it could not ; but if the Garden of Eden was precisely at the North Pole, it is plain that a goodly tree standing in the centre of that Garden would have had a visible and obvious cosmical signif- icance which could by no possibility belong to any other. Its fair stem shooting up as arrow-straight as the body of one of the " giant trees of California," far overtopping, it may be, even such gigantic growths as these, would to any one beneath have seemed the living pillar of the very heavens. Around it would have turned the " stars of God," as if in hom- age ; through its topmost branches the human wor- shiper would have looked up to that unmoving centre-point where stood the changeless throne of the Creator. How conceivable that that Creator should have reserved for sacred uses this one natural altar-height of the Earth, and that by special com- mand He should have guarded its one particular adornment from desecration ! (Gen. ii. 16, 17.) If anywhere in the temple of nature there was to be an altar, it could only be here. That it was here finds a fresh and unexpected confirmation in the sin- gular agreement of many ancient religions and my- thologies in associating their Paradise-Tree with the axis of the world, or otherwise, with equal tcnmistak- ablcness, locating it at the Arctic Pole of the Earth)- That the Northmen conceived of the universe as 1 " The Mythical Tree, like the Pillar and the Mount, is a type of the celestial Pole." Massey, The Ahituml Genesis, vol. i., p. 354. The arguments of Professor Karl Buddc in favor of eliminating the Par- adise-tree from the original Genesis account of the Garden of Eden betray a strange lack of insight. Die biblische Urgeschichte. Giessen, 18S3 : pp. 45-88. Even Kuenen refuses to entertain so arbitrary a notion, and M. Reville well exclaims, What would a Paradise be with- out /'^r^rf History, pp. 83- ee of Life in Ali- ined " to ascribe nents to " Aryan, ?r lo Studio delP in a holy place. ^s the deep vault iu, a canal full of Its shrine was the luse like a forest rJ/£ CENTRAL TREE. 26$ tree which in ancient Egyptian mythology inclosed the sarcophagus of Osiris, and out of which the king of Byblos caused the roof-pillar of his palace to be taken. But this was only another form of the Tat-pillar, which is the axis of the world.^ In the light of comparative cosmology it is quite im- possible to agree with ivlr. Renouf in his treatment of the Tree in Egyptian mythology. It is neither " the rain cloud," nor " the light morning cloud," nor " the transparent mist on the horizon." His own citations of texts clearly show that under all its names the Egyptian Tree of Life is a true World- tree, whose trunk is coincident in position and direc- spread its shade. There were none who entered not within it. It was the seat of the mighty Mother." — Records of the Past, vol. ix., p. 146. ^ " It was most likely at Memphis, too, that he [Ptah] was imaged as a pillar beginning in the loivest and ending in the highest heaven^ a conception which is undoubtedly referred to in that feature of the myth, as related by Plutarch, where the king of Byblos causes a pil- lar to be made in his palace out of the tree which had grown around the sarcophagus of Osiris. In fact, we possess delineations of Osiris as well as of Ptah answering to this description. On a post, on which is gr.aven a human countenance, and which is covered with gay clothing, stands the so-called Tat-pillar, entirely made up of a kind of superimposed capitals, one of which has a rude face scratched upon it, intended, no doubt, to represent the shining sun. On the top of the pillar is placed the complete head-dress of Osiris, the ram's horns, the sun, the ureus-adders, the double feather, all emblems of light and of sovereignty, and which, in my judgment, must have been in- tended to represent the highest heaven. [See the plate in Wilkinson, M. and C, 2d series, suppt. plate 25 and 33, No. 5. Mariette, Abydos, I., pi. 16.] The Tat-pillar is the symbol of durability, immutability. This representation of Osiris, which its rude and simple character, without trace of art, proves to have been one of the most ancient, must apparently be held to be symbolical of him as ' Lord of the length of time and of eternity.'" Tiele, History of the Egyptian Re- ligio)!, pp. 46, 47. See also G. Massey, The Natural Genesis, vol. i., pp. 417, 418, 422 ; and Brugsch, Astronomische und Astrologische huchriften, p. 72. 266 PARADISE FOUND. CC :> o tion with the axis of the world ; a tree in whose sky-filling branches Bennu, the sun-bird, is seated ; a tree from whose north polar top the " NortJi- wind'' proceeds; a tree which, like the Yggdrasil, yields a celestial rain that is as life-giving as Ardvi- SOra's, and that descends, not merely upon the fields of Lower Egypt, but, like Ardvi-Sura's, to the Under- world itself, refreshing ** those who are in Amentia "^ The super-terrestrial portion of the Egyptian's Ygg- drasil, therefore, — like that of the Northman's, — stands at the Arctic Pole. The Phoenicians, Syrians, and Assyrians had each their sacred tree in which the universe was symbul- ized.2 In the lost work of Pherecydes the former is represented as a " winged oak." ^ Over it was thrown the magnificent veil, or pcplos, of Harmo- nia, on which were represented the all-surrounding Ocean with his rivers, the Earth with its omphalos in the centre, the sphere of Heaven varied by the figures of the stars."* But as this self-interpreting 1 See Renouf, " Egyptian Mytliology, particularly with Reference to Mist and Cloud." Transactions of the Society for Biblical Arclueohv^^y, London, 1884: pp. 217-220. A beautiful confirmation of our view is found in the important te.xt in which " the abyss under the earth " {die Tiefe unter der Erde) is poetically expressed by the term " the cavity of the Persea [die H'dhle der Per sea). Brugsch's version, from which the above German expressions are taken, may be seen ii\ the Zeitschrift fUr Aegyptischc Sprache und Alterthiimskunde. Leipsic, 1881 : pp. ^-j ff. Surely no opening in an ordinary cloud could be called the subterranean deep. 2 " W. Baudissin is wrong in supposing it unknown to the V\\m\v dans." — Lenormant, Bcginuings of History, vol. i., p. 104 n. 8 But l^vs was originally a generic term for tree. See Curlius, Etymologic y s. v. * " Tliis veil is identical with the starry peplos of Harnionia," Robert Brown, Jr., The Unicorn. London, 1881 : p. 89. The Myth o/Kirki. London, 1883: p. 71. THE CENTRAL TREE. 267 symbol was furnished with wings to facilitate its con- stant rotation, it is plain that we have in it, not only ;i World-tree, but also one the central line of whose trunk is one with the axis of heaven and earth.* In the language of Maury, " It is a conception identi- cal with the Yggdrasilof Scandinavian mythology." ^ That section of the tree, therefore, which reaches from the abode of men into the holy heavens rises pillar-like from the Pole of the earth to the Pole of the sky. Among the Persians the legendary tree of Para- dise took on two forms, according as it was viewed with predominant reference to the universe as an organic whole, or to the vegetable world as proceed- ing from it. In the first aspect it was the Gaoke- rena (Gokard) tree, or " the white Horn " (Haoma=: Soma); in the second, the "tree of all seeds," the "tree opposed to harm." Of the former it is writ- ten, "Every one who eats of it becomes immortal ; . . . also in the renovation of the universe they pre- pare its immortality therefrom ; it is the chief of plants." ^ Of the second we read, " In like manner 1 " Thus the universe definitively organized by Zeus, with the assist- ance of Ilarmonia, was depicted by Pherecydes as an immense tree, furnished with wings to promote its rotary motion, — a tree whose roots were plunged into the abyss, and whose extended branches sustained the unfolded veil of the firmament decorated with the types of all ter- restrial and celestial forms." Lenormant, Beginnhtgs of History, p. 549. Compare Louis de Ronchaud, " Le Peplos d'Athene Parthe- wos,'' RlV lie Archeologique. Annee, xxiii. (1S72) pp. 245 seq., ■}p<^scq., 1^)0 SCO. ; xxiv. 80 seq. Also W. Swartz, "Das Ilalsband der Ilar- monia und die Krone der Ariadne." At'«^ Jahrbikher der Philologie, 1S83 : pp. 1 1 5-127. This writer's view of the connection of the Hals- hand with the foot of the Yggdrasil is very curious and not wholly clear. 2 Religions de la Grhe Antique, iii. 253. 2 Bundahish, xxvii. 4. Compare the Vendiddd, Farg. xx. 268 PARADISE FOUND. tXL\ \ CD ^ as the animals, with grain of fifty ana five species and twelve species of medicinal plants, have arisen from the i)rimeval ox, so ten thousand species amon;; the species of principal plants, and a hundred thou- sand species among ordinary plants, have grown from all these seeds of the tree opposed to harm, the many-seeded. . . . When the seeds of all these plants, with those from the primeval ox, have arisen upon it, every year the bird (Kamros) strips that tree and mingles all the seeds in the water; Tishtar seizes them with the rain-water and rains them on to all regions." ^ Where stood this tree which, in its dual form, was at once the source of all other trees and the giver of immortality ? Every indication points us to the northern Pole. It was in Airan-Vej,^ the Persian Eden, and this we have already found. It was at the source of all waters, the north polar fountain of Ardvi-Sura.^ It was begirt with the starry girdle of the zodiacal constellations, which identifies it with the axis of the world.^ It grew on "the highest height of Har^-berezaiti," ^ and this is the celestial mountain at the Pole. Finally, although Grill mis- 1 Ibid., xxvii. 2, 3. 2 Buiidahish, xxix. 5. 8 Ibid., xxvii. 4. Compare Windischmann : "Also der Baum des Lebens wiiciist in dem Wasser des Lebens, in dcr Quelle Ardvicura Anahita." Zoroastrische Sttuiien. Berlin, 1863 : p. 171. * Homa Yusht, 26. Haug, Essays, 2d ed., p. 182. ^ Yashty IX. {Gosh.), 17. Compare Bum/(i/iis/i,x\'m.,;\.s translated by Justi and Windischmann. See Grill, Die Erzvdter, i., pp. 1S6- 191. Windischmann, Zoroastrische Sttidien, p. 165 seq. Spic.ucl, Erdjtische Alterthiimskundc, i, 463 scq. It is by no means inconsis- tent herewith that, according to the Minokhircd, the tree grows in the sea Var-Kash " am verborgensten Orte," since this statement has ref- erence to the subterranean rooting of the tree in the lowest part of the Underworld. Kuhn, Herabkunft^ p. 124. TrrE CENTRAL TREE. 269 takenly makes the Chinval bridge "corrcspoiul with the Milky Way and the rainbow," he nevertheless correctly discerns some relationship between Chin- vat and the Persian Tree of Life.^ By this identi- fication we are again brought to the one unmistak- able location toivard which all lines of evidence perpetually converge. The Aryans of India, as early as in the far-off Vcdic age, had also their World-tree, which yielded the gods their soma, the drink which maintains im- mortality. As we should anticipate, its roots are in the Underworld of Yama at the hidden pole, its top in the north polar heaven of the gods, its body is the sustaining axis of the universe.'-^ Weber long ago expressly identified it with the World-ash of the lukla ;^ and Kuhn,^ Senart,^^ and all the more recent writers accept without question the identification. Grill's interesting sketch of the historic develop- ments of the myth may be seen in the Appendix to this volume.*^ Some of the late traces of it in Hindu * Grill, Ibid., p. 191. Comp.ire the oiif^inal Zend invocation in the Ilema Yasht : ^^ Amerczn i:;ayehe stihtii" "O imperishable Pillar of LifeP Haug, Essays, p. 177 n. - A'/j Veda, X. 135, i ; Atharvan Veda, vi. 95, 1. See Kuhn, Herab- kuiift des Feuers tind des Gottertranks. Berlin, 1859: p. izd seq. J. (Jrill, Erzvdler, i., pp. 169-175. Obry, Le Berceau de P Espice Hu' maine, pp. 146-160. Windischmann, Zoroastrische Stndien, pp. 176, 177. It is true that the roots of this divine AkhxttJia are sometimes represented as in the heaven of the gods, its growth being downwards ; but this is only to symbolize the emanation of Nature and of Nature's life from the divine source, as clearly expressed in the opening verses of the fifteenth reading of the Bhafravad Gltd. See John Davies' translation, London, 1882, p. 150 ; and for a parallel, M. Wolff, Mu- hammedanische Eschatoloi^ie, Leipsic, 1872, p. 197. •' Indische Stndien, Bd. i., p. 397. * Herabhinft, etc., p. 1 28. '' La Legende du Botiddha, p. 240. ^ See Appendix, Sect. V. 27 o PARADISE FOUND. I ' 1 ! El VJH u« fc ^ art betray the ancient conception of the Pole as a means of ascent to heaven, a bridge of souls and of the gods, a stair substituted for the slippery pil- lar up which the Tauist emperor vainly sought to climb. 1 Among the Greeks ^ it is more than probable that the " holy palm " in Delos, on which Leto laid hold at the birth of Apollo, represents the same mythical World-tree. If so, and if we follow Hecataeus in locating the scene, we shall be brought to the Arc- tic Pole.^ The eternally flourishing olive of Athene (Euripides, Ion 1433) seems also but another form of the holy palm, and this in some of its descrip- tions brings us again to the land of the Hyperbo- 1 "In the Naga sculptures (Fergusson, Tree and Serpent Worships pi. 27), the Tree of the Mount or I'ole is identified at the bottom l)y one tree, and at the top by another, and between the two there is a kind of ladder, with a series of steps or stairs which ascend the tree, in the place of a stem. These denote the Tree of the Ascent, Mount, or Height, now to be considered as representing the Pole." — G. ]Mas- sey. The Natural Genesis, vol. i., p. 354. 2 Kuhn, Herabktuift, etc., pp. 133-137. 2 Menzel, Unsterbliehkeitslehre, i. 89. Its " central " position with respect to the world of men is recognized by old Robert Burton in his Anatomy of Melancholy, New York, 1849, p. 292. Compare Massey : " The Tree of the Pole is extant in Celebes, where the na- tives believe that the world is supported by the Hog, and that earth- quakes are caused when the Hog rubs itself against the Tree. . . . At Ephesus they showed the Olive and Cypress Grove of Leto, and in it the Tree of Life to which the Great Mother clung in bringing forth her twin progeny. There also was the Mount on which Hermes announced the birth of her twins Diana and Apollo [sun and moon]. The imagery is at root the same as the Hog rubbing against the Tree of the Pole." The Natural Genesis, vol. i., p. 354. And again, the cosmical imagery of Plesiod : " Das leitende Bild eines Baumes, dos- sen Stamm sich von den Wurzein erhebt und oben ausbreitet, tritt in den Worten der Theogonie v. 727 : vom Tartarus aufwiirts seien die Wurzein der Erde und des Meeres, deutlich hervor." W. F. Rinck, Die Religion der Hellenen, Zurich, 1853 : Bd. i., p. 60. THE CENTRAL TREE. 271 reans.^ In the Garden of the Hesperides, the tree which bore the golden apples was unquestionably the Tree of Paradise ; but following yEschylus, Pher- ecydes, and Apollodorus, we must place it in the farthest North, beyond the Rhip^ean mountains.^ Traces of the same mythical conception among the Romans are presented by Kuhn.'^ The sacred tree of the Buddhists figures largely in their sculpture. An elaborate specimen repre- sentation may be seen on the well-known Sanchi Tope. One inconspicuous feature in the representa- tion has often puzzled observers. Almost invariably, at the very top of the tree we find a little umbrella. So universal is this that its absence occasions re- mark.'^ This little piece of symbolism has a curious value. In Buddhist mythological art the umbrella symbolizes the north polar heaven of the gods,^ and by attaching it to the tip of the sacred tree the an- cient sculptors of this faith unmistakably showed the cosmical character and axial position of that to which it was attached. But this cosmic tree was the mythical Bodhi tree, the Tree of Wisdom, — " Beneath whose leaves It was ordained that Truth should come to Buddh." ^ 1 Nonnus, Dionysiac, xl. 443 seq. Liiken, Traditioncii, p. 74. - Prcller, Gr. Alythologie, i. 149. Volcker, Mythische Geographie, Lcipsic, 1832 : p. 134. 3 Herabkiin/f, etc., pp. 179, 180. * James Fergusson, Tree and Serpent Worship. London, 2d ed., 1873: PP- 134. 135- '" Lillie, Buddha and Early Buddhism. London, 188 1 : pp. 2, 19. A different study of the cosmical nature of this tree may be found in Scnart, Legende du Bouddha. Paris, 1875 : pp. 239-244. •' Arnold, Light of Asia, Book vi. 272 PARADISE FOUND. SEi ^ ^ ^ Its location is in " the Middle of the Earth." ^ Not- withstanding his doctrine of an African origin of mankind, Gerald Massey says, '* In the legendary life of Gautama, Buddha is described as having to pass over the celestial water to reach Nirvana, which is the land of the Bodhi Tree of Life and Knowl- edge. He was unable to cross from one bank to the other, but the spirit of the Bodhi tree stretched out its arms to him and helped him over in safety. By aid of this tree he attained the summit of wisdom and immortal life. It is the same Tree of the Pole and of Paradise all mythology through. The Tree of the Guarani garden, the Hebrew Eden, the Hindu Jambu-dwipa, is likewise the Tree of Nirvana. This final application of the imagery proves its origin. The realm of rest was first seen at the polar centre of the revolving stars." ^ The ancient Germans called their World-tree the Irmcnsiil^ i. e., " Heaven-pillar." Grimm speaks of its close relationship with the Norse Yggdrasil, and 1 " The Iluddhists assert that this tree marks t/w middle of the earthy — E. C. V,xc^qx, Dictionary of Miracles. Philadeli^hia, 18S4: P- 314- ■^ The Natural Genesis, vol. ii., 90. On the independence of the Buddhist cosmogony and cosmology Beal remarks, " But whilst we may regard Buddhism in the light of a reformation of the popular belief in India, we must bear in mind that the stream of traditiDU which reappears in its teaching, and may be traced in its books, is in- dependent and probably distinct from the Brahmanical traditions embodied in the Puranas and elsewhere. At any rate, this is the case so far as the primitive question of creation and of the cosmic system generally is concerned. Mr. Rhys Davids has already remarked that ' the Buddhist archangel or god Brahma is different from anything known to the Brahmans, and is part of an altogether different system of thought ' [Buddhist Suttas, p. 168 n.). I am inclined to go further than this, and say that the traditions of the Buddhists are different from those of the Brahmans in almost every respect." Samuel Bcal, Buddhist Literature in China. London, 1882 : p. 146. THE CENTRAL TREE. 273 irth."^ Not- :an origin of he legendary as having to irvana, which ; and Knowl- e bank to the stretched out n safety. By nit of wisdom ;e of the Pole The Tree of en, the Hindu Hrvana. This /es its origin. e polar centre ^Vorld-tree the mm speaks of ^ggdrasil, and the middle of the hiladelphia, 18S4: lends his high authority to the view that it was sim- ply a mythical expression of the idea of the world's axis.^ The same view was advanced still earlier by the distinguished Icelandic mythographer, Finn Magnusen.2 w^y^ profoundly the myth affected me- diceval Christian art is illustrated in many places, among the rest in the sculptures on the south portal of the Baptistery at Parma.^ It is also not without a deep significance that **in the mediaeval legend of Seth's visit to the Garden of Eden, to obtain for his dying father the Oil of Compassion, the Tree of Life which he saw lifted its top to heaven and sent its root to hell;'' ^ and that on the crucifixion cf Christ, himself the " Arbor, qncs ab initio posita est," this cosmical Tree of the Garden died, and became the '* Ardre Sec" of mediaeval story.^ 1 " Mir scheint auch die im deutschen Alterthum tief gegriindete Vorstellung von der /rmensdu/e, jener altissima, universalis columna quasi sustinens omnia, dem Weltbauni Yggdrasil nah verwandt." — J. Grimm, Deutsche Mylhologie, p. 759. Compare pp. 104-107. - Den acltre Edda. Kjobenliavn, 1822 : Bd. ii., 61. Compare the following : " Yggdrasil has never been satisfactorily explained. But at all events the sacred tree of the North is, no doubt, identical with the ' robiir Jovis^ or sacred oak of Geismar, destroyed by Boniface, and the Irminsul of the Saxons, the columna universalis, the terres- trial tree of offerings, an emblem of the whole world as far as it is under divine influence." Thorpe, Northern Mythology, vol. i., p. 155. s See F. Piper, Evangelischer Kalender fiir 1S66, pp. 35-80 (illus- trated). Also Piper's " Baum des Lebens," in the same A'alenderiox 1S6;,, pp. 17-94. * Gubernatis, Zoological Mythology, London, 1S72 : vol. ii., p. 411, note. ^ The Book of Marco Polo. Edition of Col. H. Yule. London, 187 1 : pp. 1 20-131. Notice particularly the picture on p. 127, which corrects Polo's blunder in confounding the Arbre Sol with the Arbre Sec. The bird at the top of the central and highest of the trees de- picted conclusively identifies it with the World-tree of universal Ar- yan tradition. On this bird see Kuhn. 274 PARADISE FOUND. O MJ u« CO The Paradise-tree of the Chinese Tauists is also a World-tree. It is found in the centre of the en- chanting Garden of the Gods on the summit of the polar Kwen-lun. Its name is Tong, and its location is further defined by the expression that it grows "hard by the closed Gate of Heaven." * As in many of the ancient religions, the mount on which, after the Flood, the ark rested was considered the same as that from which in the beginning the first man came forth, it is not strange to find the tree on the top of the mountain of Paradise remembered in some of the legends of the Deluge. In the Tauist legend it seems to take the place of the ark. Thus we are told that " one extraordinary antediluvian saved his life by climbing up a mountain, and there and then, in the manner of birds plaiting a nest, be passed his days on a tree, whilst all the country be- low him was one sheet of water. He afterwards lived to a very old age, and could testify to his late posterity that a whole race of human beings had been swept from the face of the earth," ^ It is at least suggestive to find this same idea of salvation from a universal deluge by means of a mi- raculous tree growing on the top of the divine Mountain of the North among the Navajo Indians of our own country. Speaking of the men of the world before our own, and of the warning they had received of the approaching flood, their legends go on : " Then they took soil from all the four corner mountains of the zvorld, and placed it on top of the mountain that stood /;/ the North ; and thither they all went, including the people of the mountains, 1 Liiken, Tradittonen, p. 72. 2 The Chinese Repository^ vol. viii., p. 517. THE CENTRAL TREE. 275 the salt-woman, and such animals as then lived in the third world. When the soil was laid on the mountain, the latter began to grow higher and higher, but the waters continued to rise, and the people climbed upwards to escape the flood. At length the mountain ceased to grow, and they planted on the summit a great reed, into the hol- low of which they all entered. The reed grew every night, but did not grow in the daytime ; and this is the reason why the reed grows in joints to this day : the hollow internodes show where it grew by night, and the solid nodes show where it rested by day. Thus the waters gained on them in the day- time. The turkey was the last to take refuge in the reed, and he was therefore at the bottom. When the waters rose high enough to wet the turkey, they all knew that danger was near. Often did the waves wash the end of his tail, and it is for this reason that the tips of the turkey's tail-feathers are to this day lighter than the rest of his plumage. At the end of the fourth night from the time it was planted the reed had grown up to the floor of the fourth world, and here they found a hole through which they passed to the surface." ^ The opening sentence of the above citation gives us a topography exactly corresponding to Mount Meru, the Hindu " mountain of the North," with its "four corner mountains of the world," in the four opposite points of the horizon. Moreover, in the Deluge myths of the Hindus, as in this of the Nava- 1 W. Matthews, " The Navajo Mythology." The Am. Antiquarian, July, 1883, p. 208. The difficulty of any interpretation of this cos- mology other than the true is illustrated by the efforts of M. Reville. Les Religions des Peuples Non-civilish. Paris, 1883 : vol. i., pp. 271- 274. 276 PARADISE FOUND. S I \ I jos, it was over this central mountain that the sur- vivors of that world-destruction found deliverance. However explained, the coincidences are remark- able. In Keltic tradition the Tree of Paradise is repre- sented by the tree which bore golden apples in Avalon. But Avalon is always represented as an island in the far North, and its " loadstone castle " self-evidently connects it with the region of the mag- netic Pole.^ In the ancient epic of the Finns, the Kalevala, we see the World-tree of another people. If any dou])t could rise as to its position in the universe, the con- stellation of the Great Bear in its top would suffice to remove it.^ OH' CtT' CC;j O :. 85 1 Menzel, Unsterblichkcitslehre, i. 87, 95 ; ii. 10. Keary, Outlines of Primitive Belief, p. 453. Especially see Humboldt's references to " Monte Calamitico" the medijEval magnetic mountain in the sea to the north of Greenland. Cosmos (Bohn's ed.), ii. 659; v. 55. Also, Le Cycle mythologiqtie irlandais et la Mythologie celtique. Par H. d'Ar- bois de Jubainville. Paris, 1884. Dr. Carl Schroedcr, Sanct Braii' dan. Erlangen, 1871 : pp. 57, iii, 167, etc. 2 The German translation by Anton Schiefner. Helsinfors, 1852 : Rune X., 31-42. Compare Schiefner, Hcldejisas;en dcr viiniissinischcn Tataren, p. 62 seq. Traces of the same myth are found among the Samoans {Samoa a Hundred Years Ago and Long Before. By George Turner, LL. D. London, 1884 : pp. 199, 201). Also, among the Ugrian tribes (Peschel, Races of Man, p. 406) ; and among many of the tribes of the American aborigines, and in Polynesia Sec M. Husson, La Chaine Traditionndlc, Contes et Legendes an point de me viythiqtie. Paris, 1874 : especially pp. 140-160. Massey, The N'atnral Genesis. "It was at the top of the Tree of Heaven — the Pole — that the Guaranis were to meet once more with their Adam, Atum, Tum, or Tamoi, who was to help them from thence in their ascent to the higher life. Here the Tree of Life becomes a tree of the dead to raise them into heaven. So in the Algonkin myth the tree of the dead was a sort of oscillating log for the deceasen i '> cross the river by, as a bridge of the abyss, beyond which the Dog, i-- ir. the Persian mythos, stands waiting for the souls of the dead, just as the Dog stands at THE CENTRAL TREE. 277 hat the sur- deliverancc. are rcmark- lise is repre- m apples in sented as an itone castle " n of the mag- Kale vala, we If any doubt ^rse, the con- would suffice Keary, Outlines Idt's references to ain in the sea to 59 ; V. 55- Also, me. Par H. d'Ar- der, Sand Bnvi' Thus the sacred trees, like the sacred waters, of every ancient people invariably conduct the inves- tigator to lands outside the historic habitats of the peoples ill question, and ever to one and the same primeval home-country, the land of light and glory at the Arctic Pole.^ the Northern Pole of the Egyptian, and is depicted in the tree of the Southern Solstice, — the Tree of the Pole which was extended to the four quarters." Vol. i., p. 404. ' Since completing the foregoing chapter I have seen the work en- titled Plant Lore, Legends, and Lyrics ; cmbiacin;^ the Myths, Tradi' tion;, Superstitions, and Eolk-lore of the Plant A'iiigdan. 15y Richard Fnlkard, Jun. London, 1884. In the first three chapters the reader will tiiul valuable supplementary reading on " The World-Trees of the Ancients," "The Trees of Paradise," "The Tree of Adam," " Sa- creel Trees of all Nations," etc. Other chapters treat of " Plant Sym- bolism," " Plant Language," and of the fabulous trees and miracle plants which play so important a i)art in the history of religious and scientific credulity, Should any reader thereof be inclined to claim that " the progress of science " has forever done away with such igno- rant mediaeval mystagogy, he will do well to turn to 77ie Weekly Inter- Occaiu Chicago, Dec. 11, 1884, in which, in an illustrated article enti- tled " The Tree of Life," we are informed that " science has now dis- covered in a most unexpected manner both the Tree and the River of Life." The former is the brain and spinal cord of man. " We do not mean that the brain merely looks like a tree or resembles one ex- ternally. We aiL not dealing with analogies. But we do mean that the brain and spinal cord are an actual tree. By the most rigid scien- tific examination it is shown to fill the ideal type and plan of a tree more completely than any tree of the vegetable kingdom. The spinal cord is the trunk of this great tree. Its roots are the nerves of feel- ing and motion branching out over the body. . . . The Tree of Life is planted in the midst of many others, for the heart is a tree, the lungs are a tree, and the pancreas, stomach, liver, and all those vital organs. The brain is its radiant and graceful foliage. The mental faculties are classified in twelve groups by the most recent scientific analysis. This Tree bears twelve kinds of fruit. . . . On each side of the Tree of Life is the great River of Life. Let us lay a man down with his head to the north, and his arms stretched to the west and to the east. The River of Life has its four heads in the four chambers of the heart, the two auricles and the two ventricles. The branches of this river pass upward to the head, ' the land of gold,' 278 PARADISE FOUND. eastward to the left and westward to the right arm and lung. But greatest of all the branches, 'The River, or Phrath,' are the aorta and vena cava, reaching southward to the trunk and lower limbs. In branching over the body this river divides into four parts at seven- teen different points. Two branches of the river form a network around the very trunk of the tree, and spread upward among its ex- panding branches. The blood is the ' Water of Life,' and it looks 'as clear as crystal ' when seen through the microscope, the eye of science. It is three fourths water, and through this are diffused the red cells and the living materials which are to construct and to main- tain the bodily organs." Had this article and its antique-looking illus> tration been found in one of the Church fathers, it would have af- forded to a certain class of " scientists " great edification. ^ ^ ^ CHAPTER VII. THE EXUBERANCE OF LIFE. And the Lord God planted a garden. And out of the ground made the Lord God to grow every tree that is pleasant to tlie sight and good /or food. — The Book of Genesis. It/areover, tlicre were a great number of elephants in the island ; and there was provision for animals of every kind. Also whatever fragrant things there are in the earth, vihcther roots, or hertutge, or woods, or distilling drops ofjlo^vers or fruits, grew and thrived in that land. — Tlie Critias of Plato. Wie vcrkehrt man ilberhaupt geht, wenn man lediglich atts dem Kreise unsrer jetzigcti Erfahrmtg die Urwclt constriiiren will, luiben nns die paliiontologischen Ei'.tdcckungen der neiiern Zeit gelehrt, die eben in der Urwelt uns die riesen' luiftesten %md wunderbarsten Thiergestalten vorfiihren. — Dr, H. Luken. According to all ancient traditions and beliefs, the cradle of the human race was in a portion of the world characterized by an altogether extraordinary exuberance of life. Of all lands the sun shone upon it was the fairest and best. Even down to the Del- uge, and later, something of the divine goodness of that primeval home-land remained. In the eyes of Plato, the steady deterioration has been going on from the beginning, the good soil washing down from the heavenly mountains of the earth's summit and disappearing in the abyss, until, " in comparison with what then was, there are remaining only the bones of the wasted body, as they may be called, — all the richer and softer parts of the soil having fallen away, and the mere skeleton of the land being left." 1 1 Critias, ill. 28o PARADISE FOUND. The deterioration of the climate of the mother- region of the race is particularly described in the first Fargard of the Avesta : *• The first of the good lands and countries which I, Ahura Mazda, created was the Airyana Vaejo [Airan Vej, " Iran the An- cient "] by the good river Daitya. Thereupon came Angra Mainyu [Ahriman], who is all death, and he counter-created by his witchcraft the serpent in the river, and winter, a work of the daevas. There arc [now] ten winter months there, two summer months, and these are cold for the waters, cold for the earth, and cold for the trees." ^ So in Fargard second we have a legendary account of the successive migra- tions of the earliest remembered men out of the original North country *' sotit/nvauis, to meet the sun," and nearly all commentators ascribe these repeated " southward " movements to the gradual refrigeration and glaciation of the primitive home in " Iran the Ancient." ^ The same idea of a perfect primeval climate is found among all ancien: peoples. Ovid represents ^ Darmesteter, i., p. S. I Tang, p. 227. It will be observed that the winter and summer here described are the exact counterpart or "counter-creation" of the original polar day (the growing season) of ten months, and the original polar night (or winter of rest from growth) of two months. This is another incidental evidence that " Iran the Ancient " was situate at the Pole. 2 " Or I'avenement de la periode glaciaire pourrait seule expliquer un tel fait, car on ne connait aucune autre cause capable de rendre in- habitable, a cause de froid, une contree qui est representee conune ayant ete a I'origine un pays d'excellente nature. On serait dune obligee d'en inferer que les Eraniens avcstiques avaient conserve, non seulement le souvenir de la periode glaciaire, mais aussi celui dci beaux jours qui I'ont precedee, et c'est ce qu'en general on n'adniittra pas facilement. L'age d'or primitif n'est pas un souvenir traditidimel des temps preglaciaires," etc. Pietrement, Les Aryas et leur Prcmun Patrie. Paris, 1879 : p. 15. How near the truth ! the mothcr- cribcd in the it of the good [azda, created Iran the An- ereiipon came Jeath, and he serpent in the s. There are iimer months, for the earth, ird second ue :essive migia- jn out of the , to meet the ascribe these the gradual aitive home in ival climate is id represents be observed that cact counterpart or growing season) of Inter of rest from fital evidence that lait seule explitiucr l:)able de rendre in- MDresentee conune On serait dniic lient conserve, non lis aussi celui dcs leral on n'admiitra jvenir traditionnel IS et leur Pramln THE EXUBERANCE OF LIFE. 4^ the spring, in Saturn's reign, to have been percii- iiial. The spring of our world-age is only an ab- breviated reminder of that great original.^ So Lac- tantius has preserved a fragment of the old ethnic creed when he tells us that only upon the loss of Paradise, darkness and winter came over the earth.^ With this supposed deterioration of soil and cli- mate the deterioration of man kept pace. Hence ancient writers, with hardly an exception, represent the men of their own day as far inferior in stature, in strength, and in longevity to the first progenitors of the race. Hesiod, Aratus, Ovid, Vergil, and Clau- dian vary somewhat in their accounts of the Golden, Silver, and later ages of human history, but all agree in representing the men of their time as weak and puny and short-lived, compared with men of the eaily ages of the world. Juvenal, in a well-known passage, alludes to Homer's judgment, and expresses his own : — " Nam genus hoc vivo jam decrescebat Homero, Terra malos homines nunc educat atque pusillos." ' Plato, speaking of the antediluvians, says, "For many generations, as long as the divine nature lasted in them, they were obedient to the laws, and well affectioned toward the gods who were their kins- men ; for they possessed true and in every way great spirits, practicing gentleness and wisdom in the various chances of life and in their intercourse with one another. ... By such reflections, and by the continuance in them of the divine nature, all that 1 Metamorphoses, i. 113. - Placidiis, 4. * Satires, xv. 69, 70. Compare Ilomer, Iliad, v. 302 et seq. ; Nq.x- g\\,/Eiicid, xii. 900 ; Lucret., ii. 1 151. 282 PARADISE FOUND. o MJ we have described waxed and increased in them ; but when this chvine portion began to fade away in them, and became diluted too often, and with too much of the mortal achiiixture, and the human na- ture got the upper hand, they, being unable to bear their fortune, became unseemly, and to him who ha 1 an eye to see they began to appear base, and had lost the fairest of their precious gifts." ^ The ancient Indian conception of the world's de- cadence from period to period is given in the " Laws of Manu."2 Of the four great ages of the life of the present universe, we are living in the last and worst. In the ^x^\. yui^a all men were holy ; in tlic present all are utterly corrupt and vile. In the first they were tall and long-lived ; in each succeeding age they have grown dwarfed and feeble. Similar to the Indian was the Iranian belief as reflected in the Bundahish. Here the duration of the universe is represented as filling four world- periods of three thousand years each. During the first of the four all is pure and sinless, but at its close the Evil One declares war against Ahura Mazda, the holy God, which war is destined to fill the three last ages. During the first of the three, the Evil One is unsuccessful; during the second, good and evil are exactly balanced ; while in the last, which is our own, evil obtains, and till the des- tined overthrow at the very end maintains su- premacy.^ The conception which we are noticing is as old as it is miiversal. Berosus, reporting the earliest tra- 1 Critias, 120. 2 Laws of Mann, I. 68-86. ^ Tke Bundahish, chapters i., xxxi., xxxiv. THE EXUBERANCE OF LIFE, 2S3 le earliest tra- ditions of Chaldnca, represents the first men as of extraordinary stature and strength, and as retaining in Ifsscning degree these eharaeteristics until some ^generations after the Mood.' "Among the Kgyp- tians," says Lenormant, •' the terrestrial reign of the god R *i, who inaugurated the existence of the world and of human life, was a Golden Age, to which they continually looked back with regret and envy : to assert the superiority of anything above all that im- ai;"ination could set forth, it was sufficient to affirm tiuit ' its like had never been seen since the days of the god Ra.' The same idea is found again in the Egyptian account of the succession of the terres- trial reigns of the gods, the demi-gods, heroes, and men, as collected from the fragments of Manelho, and corroborated by the testimony of native texts." - In China, too, the catholic ethnic faith in a primeval Golden Age was not lacking, so that everywhere the eldest traditions — be they Shemitic, Aryan, or Turanian — support, confirm, and illustrate the rep- resentations of the Bible touching the extraordinary pristine vitality of Edenic nature and of antedilu- vian man. So overwhelming is the evidence that this universal belief of antiquity is a reminiscence of prnnitive reality, that one who expressly disclaims a personal belief in the superior stature of the early men nevertheless asserts that "the universality of the popular belief attests its very ancient origin," and adds that " it may unhesitatingly be ranked among those originating at a time when the great civilized peoples of a remote antiquity, still cluster- ^ fraomt'fits Cosmogoniques de B erase. Ed. Lenormant. Frag. 17. - Bci^innings of History, pp. 67, 73, note. See the entire chapter and the authorities there quoted. Also chapters vi. and vii., particu- larly pp. 351 et seq. •i 284 PARADISE FOUND. f i , 1 \ o o PC ing about the cradle of the race, enjoyed a contact sufficiently close for some common traditions." ^ The bearing of this unanimous verdict of ancient tradition upon the problem of the location of Eden is obvious. The traditions of the whole ethnic world, not less than the record in Genesis, require that the cradle of the race be placed in the one spot on earth where the biological conditions are the most favorable possible. According to all procur- able data, that spot at the era of man's appearance upon the stage was in the now lost " Miocene conti- nent," which then surrounded the Arctic Pole. That in that true, original Eden some of the early gener- ations of men attained to a stature and longevity unequaled in any countries known to postdiluvian history is by no means scientifically incredible. On the contrary, the exceptional biological conditions of that land and the remarkable consensus of all tradition respecting the vigor of early giant races combine to form a fresh illustration of the principle that the more incredible things an hypothesis ex- plains, the more irresistibly credible the hypothesis itself becomes. 1 Lenormant, Beginnings of History, p. 354. The author con- tinues, " To-day we have scientific proof that such belief [in the ex- traordinary stature of the early men] has no real foundation, but is simply a jjroduct of the imagination." But his alleged scientific proof is purely negative, consisting of the fact that the human skele- tons which paleontologists have so far found — none of which are from the high North — are only of ordinary size. "As far back as we can trace the vestiges of mankind, up to the races who lived in the Qua- ternary period side by side with the great mammifers of extinct spe- cies, it may be j^roved that the medium height of our species has never exceeded its existent limits." If other early species of mam- mifers were gigantic in comparison with their nearest living repre- sentatives of to-day, why may not the mannnifer man have ilUisli ;ucd the same law .'' THE EXUBERANCE OF LIFE. 285 ed a contact litions." 1 ct of ancient tion of Eden whole ethnic nesis, require 1 the one spot tions are the to all procur- 's appearance Vliocene conti- ;ic Pole. That e early gener- and longevity postdiluvian icredible. On ical conditions nsensus of all rly giant races the principle Ihypothesis ex- he hypothesis The author con- |h belief [in the ex- foundation, but is alleged sciiMitilic It the human skcle- \c ofivhich are from 1 far back as we c;in lived in the Qua- |fers of extinct spe- af our species has species of mam- farest living lepre- ^an have illusu ;'.icd Back in that far-off foretime, even in the lower latitudes, life was remarkably luxuriant. The pale- ontologists almost exhaust the resources of language in the effort to describe it. Thus, on a single page, Professor Alleyne Nicholson, of St. Andrew's Uni- versity, says : " The life of the Miocene period is extremely abundant, also extremely varied in its char- acter. . . . The marine beds have yielded numejvns remains of both vertebrate and invertebrate sea-ani- mals, . . . an enormous number of plants. . . . The remains of air-breathing animals are also abundantly found. . . . The plants of the Miocene period are extraordinatily numerous. . . . The plant -remains . . . indicate an extraordinarily rank and luxuriant vegetation," etc.^ Figuier gives the following illus- tration : "The Lycopods of our age are humble plants, scarcely a yard in height and most commonly creepers ; but those of the ancient world were trees of eighty or ninety feet in height." ^ But we have before seen that the mother - region of all these abounding and varied floral and faunal types was within the Arctic Circle, and from their amazing ex- uberance in low latitudes we may form some concep- tion of the yet superior potencies of life which were at work in that more highly favored circumpolar seed-plot of the whole earth. In our last chapter it was suggested that the Tree in the midst of Paradise may have been as lofty as one of the giant Sequoias of California. The com- parison was not made at random. In the Miocene re.nains in Britain, conifers are especially numerous. And " the most abundant of these is ?^ gigantic pine, ^ Ancient Life-History of the Earth. New York ed., 1878 : p. 308. ■ The World before the Deluge, p. 134. 286 PARADISE FOUND. or* > I: ^ the Sequoia Couttsice, which is very nearly allied to the huge Sequoia gigaiitea of California. A nearly allied form, Sequoia Laiigsdorfii, has been detected in the Hebrides." ^ From the latitude of the Se- quoia grove in Mariposa County, California, to that of the Hebrides is a long stride toward the Pole ; but we are not left to mere inference when we raise the question whether the original starting-point of this gigantic tree-species may not have been still higher in the Arctic regions. The Miocene fossils of the highest attainable Arctic latitudes tell their own story. Limited as have been the explorations among these fossils, as Sir Charles Lyell remarks, "more than thirty species of Coniferae have been found, including several Sequoias allied to the gigan- tic Wellingtonia of California. . . . There are also beeches, oaks, planes, poplars, walnuts, limes, and even a magnolia, two cones of which have lately been obtained, proving that this splendid evergreen not only lived, but ripened its fruit, within the Arc- tic Circle. Many of the limes, planes, and oaks were large-leaved species, and both flowers and fruits, besides immense quantities of leaves, are in many cases preserved. . . . Even in Spitzbergen, within 12° of the Pole, no less than ninety-five si)e- cies of fossil plants have been obtained," The vigor of the vegetable life of the Miocene age in these Arctic regions impresses the veteran geologist as ** truly remarkable." We have a right, then, not only to draw a conclu- sion from the "abundant" and "extraordinarilv rank and luxuriant vegetation" of the Arctic regions in Miocene time, but also to learn a special lesson from 1 Nicholson, Life-History, p. 309. THE EXUBERANCE OF LIFE. 28/ the gigantic forms which Hnger on our Western coast. Had the book of Genesis described one of the trees of Eden as three hundred and twenty feet in height and thirty feet in diameter at the base, not only all the Voltaires of modern history, but also — until the discovery of California — all naturalists of the advanced anti-Christian variety, would have made no end of sport over the unscientific or mythical " Botany of Moses." But the Sequoia gigantca is a living, indisputable fact. Though not the oldest of the Coniferce, it illustrates some of the earlier possi- bilities of vegetable life. It tells the botanist that growths once realized in great abundance are dying out, and unless perpetuated by human care are soon to disappear from our globe forever. Its last surviv- ing representatives in the state of nature, preserved to our day by certain fortunate local conditions and by their own inherent longevity, are witnesses re- specting a far-off world, — witnesses whose testimony the most incredulous must accept. They tell of the far-away dawn of the day of man, they bear testimony to the extraordi.iary life which characterized their distant birth-land.^ And if these last individuals of an expiring race can maintain, under unfavorable biological conditions, a vigorous life through tivo mil- Unniums of time., who shall declare it impossible that 1 During the Tertiary period the Sequoias " ocairred all around the Arctic zone " (Asa Gray). Professor J. D. Whitney finds evidence tiiat one of the fallen trees in Placer County was over 2000 years of age. See his Yosemite Book ; also Engler, Entwickelungsgeschichte tier Pflanzcmvelt. I.eipsic, 1879-82 : chap. i. and ii. It is also note- worthy that the Australian Eucalyptus gigantca, the only tree which surpasses the Sequoia in height, is found precisely in that country wliosc belated living flora and fauna are more closely related to the nortliern types of the early world than are any other. 288 PARADISE FOUND. \\ \ CD MJ S ^ the men of the time and place of the orighiation of the Sequoia gigautca should have averaged more than six feet in stature, or attained to an age quite surpassing our threescore years and ten? As to the latter point, it would require more than the com- bined lives of two Methuselahs to watch the growth and death of a single tree like those of California. The thought is not the incubation of the present writer ; it is what the trees themselves said to the foremost botanist of America.^ But the exuberance of animal life in the Miocene period is not less remarkable. We quote the sanie author as before : " The Invertebrate animals of this period are very muncroiis. . . . The little shells of the Foraminifera are extremely abundant. . . . Corals are ve?y abundant, in many instances forming regular reefs. . . . Numerous crabs and lobsters represent the Crustacea. ... Of Insects more tJian thirteen hundred species have been determined by Dr, Heer from the Miocene strata of Switzerland alone. . , . The MoUusca are very numerous. . . . Polyzoans 1 " We cannot gaze high up the huge and venerable trunks, which one crosses the continent to behold, without wishing that these i):iti> archs of the grove were able, like the long-lived antediluvians of Scripture, to hand down to us through a few generations the tradi- tions of centuries, and so tell us somewhat of the history of their race. Fifteen hundred annual layers have been counted or satisfac- torily made out upon one or two fallen trunks. It is probable ihat close to the heart of some of the living trees may be found the circle that records the year of the Saviour's nativity. A few generations of such trees might carry the history a long way back. But the ground they stand on and the marks of very recent geologic change and vi- cissitude in the region around testify that not very many such gener- ations can have flourished just here, at least in unbroken series." — Professor Asa Gray, LL. D., " The Sequoia and its History." Pro- ceedhtgs of the American Association for the Advancement of Siicncc, 1S72, p. 6. THE EXUBERANCE OF LIFE. 289 origination of .vcraged more ) an age quite 211 ? As to the tlian tlie coni- tch tlie growth ; of California. Df tlie present /es said to the in the Miocene ^uote the same ite animals of :he little shells abundant. . . . stances forming 3 and lobsters sects more tJian Itermined by Dr. itzerland alone. . . Polyzoans lerable trunks, which ling that these i)atri. I'ed antediluvians of ;nerations the tradi- the history of their counted or sati^lac- It is probable that be found the circle few generations of :k. But the ground [logic change and vi- |ry many such gener- liuibroken series." - its History." Pro- \ancement of Science, are abundant. Bivalves and Univalves are extremely plentiful. . . . The Pishes of the period are very abundant. . . . The remains of Reptiles are far from uncommon. . . . The Land-tortoises make their first appearance during this period. The most re- markable form of this group is the huge Colossochelys Atlas of the Upper Miocene deposits of the Sivvalik Hills in India, described by Dr. Falconer and Sir Proby Cautley. Far exeecding any living tortoise in its dimensions, this enormous animal is estimated as having had a length of about twenty feet, measured from the tip of the snout to the extremity of the tail, and to have stood upwards of seven feet. . . . The accomplished paleontologists just quoted show fur- ther that some of the traditions of the Hindus would render it not improbable that this colossal Tortoise survived into the earlier portion of the human pe- riod. . . . The Mammals of the Miocene are very numerous. . . . The Edentates (Sloths, etc.) are rep- resented by two large European forms. One of these is the large Macrotherium giganteum. . . . The other is the still more gigantic Ancylotherium Pen- telici, which seems to have been as large as, or larger than, the rhinoceros. . . . We may also note here the first appearance of true * whalebone Whales', two spe- cies of which, resembUng the living * Right Whale* of the Arctic seas, and belonging to the same genus, have been detected in the Miocene beds of North America. . . . The great order of the Ungulates, or hoofed quadrupeds, is very largely developed in strata of the Miocene age, various new types mak- ing their appearance here for the first time. . . . We meet for the first time with representatives of the family Rhinoceridce, comprising the only existing rhi- 19 290 PAR AD IS P: found. MJ LU. O "^ fc If s pc ^ 1 noceroses. . . . The family of the Tap: . is repre- sented, . . . some of which were quite diminutive in point of size, whilst others attained the dimensions of a horse. Nearly allied to this family, also, is the singular group of quadrupeds which Marsh had de- scribed under the name of Brontotheridce. These extraordinary animals, typified by BrontotJicrinm itself, agree with . . . and differ from the existing Ta- pirs. . . . BrontotJieriiim gigas is said to be nearly as large as an elephant^ whilst Brontotherium ingcns appears to have attained dimensions still more gigan- tic. The well-known genus Tita7iotheriiim would also appear to belong to this group. . . . The family of the Horses appears under various forms in the Miocene, but the most important and best known of these is the Hipparion. . . . Remains of the Hippa- rion have been found in various regions in Europe and in India ; and from the immense quantities of their bones iownd. in certain localities, it may be safely inferred that these Middle Tertiary ancestors of the Horse lived, like their modern representatives, in great herds. . . . Amongst the even-toed Ungulates we for the first time meet with examples of the Hip- popotamus^ with its four-toed feet, its massive body, and huge tusk-like lower teeth. . . . The true Deer, with their solid bony antlers, appear for the first time here. . . . Perhaps the most remarkable of these Miocene Ruminants is the Sivatherium gigantcnm of the Siwilik Hills in India. In this extraordinary animal there were two pairs of horns. ... If all these horns had been simple, there would have been no difficulty in considering Sivatherium as simply a gigantic four-horned Antelope. ... It is to the Mio- cene period that we must refer the first appearance J THE EXUBERANCE OF LIFE. 291 ii^ is repre- iminutive in e dimensions , also, is the arsh had de- 'idce. These ' rontotherium I existing Ta- to be nearly lerium ingcns 7 more gigan- lerinm would . The family forms in the best known of of the Hippa- ns in Europe quantities of may be safely estors of the ;sentatives, in ed Ungulates |es of the Hip- assive body, he true Deer, the first time lable of these m gigantcnm extraordinary 's H all lid have been as simply a is to the Mio- ,t appearance of the important order of the Elephants and their allies {Proboscidians). . . . Only three generic groups of this order are known, namely, the extinct £fei- notJicriiim, the equally extinct Mastodons, and the Elephants ; and all these three types are known to have been in existence as early as the Miocene period, the first of them being exclusively con- fined to deposits of this age. . . . The most cel- ebrated skull of the Deinothere is the one which was exhumed from the Upper Miocene deposits of Epplesheim, in Hesse-Darmstadt, in the year 1836. This skull was four and a half feet in length, and indicated an animal larger than any existing species of tlie Elephant. . . . Whilst herbivorous quadrupeds, as we have seen, were extremely abundant during Miocene times, and often attained gigantic dimen- sions, beasts of prey (Carnivora) were by no means ivanting ; most of the existing families of the order being represented. . . . Weasels and Otters were not unknown, . . . whilst the great Cats of subse- quent periods are more than adequately represented by the Jinge * sabre-toothed ' Tiger. . . . Amongst the Rodent Mammals . . . all the principal living groups were differentiated in Middle Tertiary times. . . . Lastly, the Monkeys existed during the Mio- cene period under a variety of forms. . . . The D fy op ithectis IS referable to the group of 'Anthro- poid Apes.' . . . Dryopithecns was also of large size, equaling Man in statnre, and apparently living amongst the trees and feeding upon fruits."^ It would be easy to heighten the impression of this vigor and luxuriance of animal life in Tertiary and Post-tertiary times by studying the huge bird- 1 Nicholson, Life -Hi story, pp. 311 et seq. 292 PARADISE FOUND. M . \ ^ tracks of the Connecticut sandstone, or the enor- mous skeletons of the Dinornis gigajiteus and the Dinornis clepJiantopus^ or the eggs of the ALpiorins maxiniHs, — eggs "measuring from thirteen to four- teen inches in diameter." ^ We might consider the Diprotodon, which ** in size must have many times exceeded the dimensions of the largest of its liviiiL,^ successors, since the skull measures no less than three feet in length." ^ Or we might rehabilitate the " colossal " McgatJieriiun Ctivicri, whose " thigh- bone is nearly thrice the thickness of the same bone in the largest of existing Elephants." ^ Or, again, visiting the Jurassic beds of our own Colorado, we might contemplate the Titanosauriis, one of the latest discovered of the tenants of the early world, of which Sir John Lubbock says that it " is perhaps the largest land animal yet known, being a hinuiird feet ill length, and at least thirty feet in height, 1 The fact that fossil remains of these gigantic extinct birds have been found only in the Southern hemisphere militates in no wise against the doctrine that the species originated in the highest North. For (i) birds are the best equipped of all creatures for migration to the remotest parts of the earth. (2.) The Connecticut Valley sand- stones, in the Northern hemisphere, preserve the tracks of ])iids "which must have been of colossal dimensions," the tracks beiii^ 22 inches in length and 12 in breadth, with a proportionate length of stride. " These measurements indicate a foot four times as larsjjc as that of the African Ostrich." (3.) These tracks were made in the Triassic period, while the remains found in New Zealand and adjacent regions belong to the much more recent Post-pliocene period, thus giving a long lapse of years for the spread or migration of the species from the latitude of the Connecticut Valley to that of the most Sonth- ern lands. Compare Geikie : " The higher fauna of Australia is more nearly akin to that which flourished in Europe far back in Meso- zoic time than to the living fauna of any other region of the globe," Geology y p. 6ig. 2 Nicholson, Life-History, p. 349. 3 Ibid., p. 350. THE EXUBERANCE OF LIFE. 293 or the enor- nteus and the the Aipiorins irteen to £0111- t consider the t many times ,t of its living no less than it rehabilitate whose "thigh- the same bone " 3 Or, again, I Colorado, we 5-, one of the le early world, it " is perhaps 2ing a hundred rfcet in height, : extinct birds liave lilitates in no wise the highest North. res for migration to ^cticut Valley J^aud- he tracks of birdis :he tracks being 22 lortionate length of ir times as large as were made in tlie ;aland and adjacent iocene period, thus lation of the species iOf the most South- •f Australia is more |far back in IMeso- ;ion of the globe." though it seems possible that even these vast di- mensions may have been surpassed by those of the Atlantosaurus',' ^ also a late discovery. But why multiply illustrations ? Natural history in our times can produce no species of fishes, or of amphibians, or of reptiles, or of birds, or — among mammals — of marsupials, or of edentates, or of ungulates, or of proboscidians, or of carnivores, or of apes, which in normal dimensions are not excelled by species of tiie corresponding orders and classes belonging to Tertiary and Quaternary ages. And this being so, it is surely possible and credible that in the same antediluvian ages some of the varieties of the spe- cies Bimana may have exceeded in stature its pres- ent average, and enjoyed a corresponding vigor of constitution. At any rate, it will be soon enough to deny it after human remains of suitable age shall have been found in the vicinity of the race's origin and earlier history. So far as past findings are con- cerned, even Biichner, who holds that "primitive man was inferior even in corporeal attributes to the men of the present day," and that " the widely spread belief in the former existence of a race of human giants is perfectly erroneous," still has to say, " It is true that some very ancient skeletons or parts of skeletons have been found, which must have be- longed to comparatively large and very innscnlar men, such, for example, as the skeleton of the famous Neanderthal man, and the human bones recently found by M. Louis Lartet in one of the caverns of Perigord, . . . which seem to indicate a rude but muscular race of men." ^ Again, speaking of the i I . I 1 Nature. London, 1881 : p. 406. -' Midi ill the Fast, Present, and Future. 5c, ,=;i. Eng. tr. by Dallas, pp. 294 PARADISE FOUND. iflH II ) ; i ! V-\ skeleton to which the Neanderthal skull belongs, ho says, " The ridges and crests especially which served as points for insertion of the muscles are very strongly developed, so that we may conclude that their possessor was a very strong and viuscnlay vianr ^ It may be added that Carl Vogt, one of the earliest and most influential of Darwin's German disciples, also conceived of *' the man of the oldest Stone Age " as ** of large stature, poiverful and long- headed!' ^ Here it may be well to remark that the primitive forms of animals, while often so excelling in size the later forms of their own kind, are by no means to be thought of as monstrosities. The proportion of a young child's head to his body is very different from that of an adult's. In comparison with the grown man, his limbs and hands and feet are re- markably plump and well rounded. Had a painter never seen and studied a human being except in the adult and senescent stage, the infant form would seem to him singularly abnormal. This illustration may help to a right judgment of certain early types of animals. For " if we take the earliest known and oldest examples of any given group of animals, it can sometimes be shown that these primitive forms, thongJi in themselves highly organized, pos- sessed certain characters such as are now only seen in the young of their existing representatives. In technical language, the early forms of life in some instances possess * embryonic ' characters, though this does not prevent them often attaining a size much more gigantic than their nearest living rela- 1 Man in the Past, Present, and Future, p. 53. 2 Ibid., pp. 60, 259. THE EXUBERANCE OF LIFE. 295 11 belongs, he which served :les are very ronclude that ind muscular »gt, one of the vin's German of the oldest rful and lon^ or. the primitive idling in size by no means he proportion very different ison with the d feet are re- ;iad a painter J except in the it form would is illustration in early types .rliest known p of animals, ese primitive "gauizcdy pos- pow only seen ntatives. In If life in some cters, though taining a size it living rcla- P-53- tives. Moreover, the ancient forms of life are often what is called ' comprcJicnsivc types ;' that is to say, they possess characters in combination such as we nowadays only find separately developed in different groups of animals. Now this permanent retention of embryonic characters and this 'comprehensive- ness ' of structural type are signs of what a zoolo- gist considers to be a comparatively 'low' grade of organization ; and the prevalence of these features in the earlier forms of animals is a very striking phenomenon, though they arc none the less perfectly organized so far as their own type is cojtcerned." ^ To put the mistake to be guarded against in another light, it may be said that whoever considers the de- partures of the most ancient forms of animal life from the allied living forms as abnormal and mon- strous in many cases simply takes the types of de- cadence and senility by which to test and condemn the plumper and fuller and fairer types of physical juvenility. In like manner, the " comprehensive " types can be called monstrous and strange only as these terms might be applied to the " London Times " by a man who in all his life had never seen any other specimen of journalism than " The North British Wool-Growers' Monthly Bulletin," or " The Daily Price-Current of the Southampton Associated Grocers." What the zoologist calls the "lowest" forms of organization are rather the highest^ if by "highest " we mean those forms which are most in- chisive, lebenskrdftig, and susceptible of evolutionary differentiation.^ The notion that the faunal world at 1 Nicholson, Life-History, pp. 60, 61. Compare pp. 367-374. 2 "The first appearance of leading types of life are rarely embry- onic. On the contrary, they often appear in highly perfect and spe- cialized forms ; often, however, of composite type, and expressing 296 PARADISE FOUND. tXL\ the time of the advent of man was a world of crudi- ties and monstrosities — a notion to which books and majrazincs of popularized science have given an almost universal currency — is therefore entirely false.^ In the light of profoundcr science, the fair- est Eden of the oldest legend is, so far as primeval zoloogy is concerned, more credible than when the study of Paleontology was first begun. It must not be forgotten that in all that has now been hinted respecting the fauna of the early world no account has been taken of more favorable and less favorable portions of the earth. Paleontologists are but just beginning to consider that between the biological conditions of the Arctic regions and those of every other portion of the globe there must h;ive been, in Pre-Glacial times, the profoundest and most far-reaching difference. The growths of a region whose day was ten months in length, and whose night was but two, could not fail to be vastly diffcr- characters afterwards so separated as to belong to higher groups. . , . The bald and contemptuous negation of these facts by Haeckcl and other biologists does not tend to give geologists much confidence in their dicta." — Principal J. W. Dawson, in his " Presidential Address before the American Association for the Advancement of Science.'' Science^ Cambridge, Mass., Aug. 17, 1883 : p. 195. 1 " Dr. Hooker observes, in his recent introductory essay on the Flora of Australia, that it is impossible to establish a parallel between the successive appearances of vegetable forms in time and their com- plexity of structure or specialization of organs as represented l>y the successively higher groups in the natural method of classification. He also adds that the earliest recognizable cryptograms are not only the highest now existing, but have more highly differentiated veuet,i- tive organs than any subsequently appearing, and that the dicotyledo- nous embryo and perfect exogenous wood, with the highest special- ized tissue known (the coniferous with glandular tissue), preceded the monocotyledonous embryo and endogenous wood in date of ap- pearance on the globe, — facts wholly opposed to the doctrine oi pro- gression." — Sir Charles Lyell, The Antiquity of Man, p. 404- TIIR EXUBERANCE OF I lEE 297 vorld of crudi. which books have given an efore entirely ience, the fair- ar as primeval han when the . that has now he early world favorable and Paleontolo<;ists Lt between the jions and those here must have ndest and most IS of a re<;i()n jth, and whose )e vastly differ- higher groups. . , , [cts by Haeckcl and much confidence in 'residential Adtliess :ement of Science.'' Iictory essay on the \\ a parallel between [ime and their com- represented by tlie xl of classification. Igrams are not only Ifferentiated vc-cta- that the dicntvlcdo- Ihe highest special- jr tissue), preceded bod in date of ap- the doctrine of pro- Man, p. 404- ent from those of the rej^ions where, on the averai^o, almost twelve hours of every twenty four are spent in darkness. " Nor can we overlook the fact that the ])lants and shells of the Arctic region are emi- nently variable." ^ If, therefore, in low latitudes the forms and powers of animal life were what we have seen, who can undertake to depict its superior exu- berance and variety of manifestation in that primitive polar focus from which all faunal types proceeded ! '^ The Arctic rocks tell of a more wonderfid lost Atlantis than Plato's. The fossil ivory beds of Si- beria excel everything of the kind in the world. From the days of Pliny, at least, they have con- stantly been undergoing exploitation, and still they are the chief headquarters of supply.^ The remains ' Charles Darwin, Animals and Planls under Dotnestication. New Yiiiiv, 1S68: ii. 309. - This " eminent " variableness of Arctic life has its hearing upon the scientific credibility of prehistoric Arctic giants. At the present day, and in our owr .at'tudes, men occasionally appear whose stature is four or five times the height of the smallest adult dwarfs. Accord- ingly, if we were to assume two and one half feet as the minimum adult stature in polar regions in primeval times, the still prevailing range of variation would give us in those times some men from seven and one half to twelve and one half feet in height. Possibly new fos- sil evidence on this point is soon to be afforded us. The following is going the rounds of the daily press : '* A Carson (Nev.) dispatch says, The footprints which were so much discussed in this country and Einope, and which were originally pronounced bv Dr. Darkness, of the Academy of Sciences, to be those of manunoths, are now stated by him, after a year's examination, to be only those of big-footed men'' See Proeeedings of the California Academy of Science, 1SS2 (Aug. 7 and 27, Sept. 4, Oct. 2). Nad.iillac, in Materiaux pour Pllis- toire primitive et naturelle de V flomme. Paris, 1882: pp. 313-321. Topinard, in Revtie d''Authropologie. Paris, 18S3 : pp. 309-320. Also Mr. Cope, in The American Naturalist, Philadelphia, 18S3. ^ Von Middendorff (Reise im Norden und Osten Siberiens, 1848) reckons the number of the tusks which now annually come into the market as at least a hundred pairs, on which Nordenskjold remarks : 298 PARADISE FOUND. \mt j ■!! ■I \ m. o 1j ' 1 il of the mammoth are so abundant that, as Gratacap says, " the northern islands of Siberia seem built up of its crozvded bones!' ^ Another scientific writer, speaking of the islands of New Siberia, northward of the mouth of the river Lena, uses this language : *' Large quantities of ivory are dug out of the ground every year. Indeed, some of the islands are believed to be nothing but an accitmulatioji of drift-timber and the bodies of ^nammoths and otJier antedilnvian ani- mals frozen together!' ^ So full of these remains is the soil of these high Arctic regions that the Ost- yaks and other ignorant tribes have an idea that the mammoth is an underground animal ploughing his way through the earth like a mole, and that he still lives in his subterranean passages. Nor would there seem to be anything so remarkably novel in the theory we have advocated in this book, according to which the submergence of the primeval home of mankind and the introduction of the great Ice Age are connected with the Deluge : for when, nearly two hundred years ago, the Russian ambassador, Evert Yssbrants Ides, made his bold, three -year overland journey to China, he in the high North found and reported this precise traditionary belief.'^ " From this we may infer that during the years that have elapsed since the Russian conquest of Siberia, useful tusks from more tb.an 20,000 mammoths have been collected." In a note the same writer expresses the opinion that Von Middendorff's estimate is quite too luw, and says that a single steamer on which he sailed up the Yeniscj in 1875 was on that single trip taking more than one hundred tusks to market. The Voya^i^c of the Vega, p. 305. ^ *' Prehistoric Man in Europe." The Am. Antiquarian and Oriental yournal. Chicago, 188 1 : p. 284. 2 Jolnison's Cyclopcedia, sub voce. ^ " The old Russians living in Siberia were of opinion that the mam- moth was an animal of the same kind as the elephant, and that before the Flood Siberia had been warmer than now, and elephants had llieii THE EXUBERANCE OF LIFE. 299 Summing up the present chapter, then, we have only to say that whoever accepts the conclusion to which the preceding Unes of argument have con- ducted us will find no longer a stumbling-block in the latest revelations of Geology touching the ex- traordinary life-energies of far-off ages, and in the hoary myths which tell of giants and Titans and demigods in Earth's early morning. On the con- trary, fossil form and ethnic myth and sacred page will all be found uniting in a common story. lived in numbers there ; that they had been drowned in the Flood, and afterwards, when the climate became colder, had frozen in the river mud." Nordenskjold, Voyage of the Vega, p. 305. \rian and Oriental i^ lli' CHAPTER VIII. REVIEW OF THE ARGUMENT. t ■ Ji PI I ^ ^ •J ■^ii QC J j. In Part Second, at the very beginning of our dis- cussion, attention was called to the two classes of tests which the hypothesis of an Arctic polar site for Eden must of necessity meet : first, the tests which would apply alike to all the ordinarily pro- posed sites in temperate and inter-tropical latitudes; and second, the tests which would be inseparal)le from the aspects and adjustments of Nature at the Pole. In the first class seven were enumerated, and at the close of Part Fourth we saw how surpris- ingly and convincingly all of the seven had been met. In the second class seven others were par- ticularized as " new features " introduced into the problem of the site of Eden by the very nature of our hypothesis. They were all of so peculiar and extraordinary a character, and they so modified the requirements to be made of all corroborative hu- man tradition, that nothing short of the truth of the intrinsically improbable hypothesis could save it 1 " Atlas gave to Heracles the k6(tij.ou kIovus which contained all the secrets of Nature." Rawlinson's ilerodotns, vol. i., p. 505 n. Com- pare below, Fart VI., ch, ii. Also Jonnes, VOcean, pp. 121, 107, d passim. REVIEW OF THE ARGUMENT. 301 from obvious and ridiculous failure at each succes- sive point. In the present Part we have now brought together the facts, or at least a portion of the facts, which go to demonstrate that the hypothesis of a Polar Paradise, and no other, can meet and satisfy each one of these new and more difficult require- ments. Speaking after the manner of the mathe- maticians, though of course with due remembrance of the nature of the reasoning employed, it may be said that we have first solved our problem, and then, by a new process and with changed elements, proved and verified our answer. Whoever would see how strikingly complete and cogent this verifying pro- cess is should turn back to the second chapter of Part Second and carefully collate the seven " new features " there enumerated with the facts of the ^ St seven chapters of the present Part. The result ' .ch a collation upon any candid mind can hardly :. . .loubtful. In the writer's firm-grounded conviction, then, Lost Eden is found. To no one of his readers can its true site be more surprising than it was at first to him. Every antecedent probability seemed in array against it. First of all, in such problems every new hypothesis is inherently unlikely in di- rect proportion to the number of hypotheses pre- viously propounded and found wanting. Where had more been advanced by the learned and ingen- ious than here } Again, from its nature the hy- pothesis greatly aggravated the conditions and re- quirements of the problem itself. And if, during centuries of discussion, no sublunary site had been found which could meet the simple conditions of Genesis, how unlikely that with new and far more 302 PARADISE FOUND. I 1 ( j o fc ^ ^ extraordinary conditions added a place could be found corresponding ! Again, in order to its verifi- cation, the hypothesis required that a wholly new in- terpretation of mankind's oldest cosmological ideas and traditions should be propounded and verified, — an interpretation unanimously forbidden by the con- sensus of modern scholarship in almost every de- partment of historical and archaeological research. How supremely unlikely that any such undertaking could be crowned with success ! Happily, human events do not fall out according to our short-sighted human likelihoods. Even the thoughtless man sees it, and exclaims, "It is always the impossible that happens ! " The more reverent soul, who discerns in all history a higher than hu- man agency, and in whose eyes Nature itself is supernatural, must least of all be daunted by tlie unpromising first appearances of any clue to truth. His conceptions of the actual are larger than those of mere believers in nature, and thereto are ad- justed his conceptions of the probable. Identifying himself with that personal Power which everywhere makes for truth no less than for righteousness, he is ever expecting the otherwise unexpectable, and for the same reason ever looking upon each new truth attained, not as a personal achievement, but simply as one more proof and precious pledge of pupilhood. In the progress of the studies here summed up many curious things have come to light, one of which may appropriately be mentioned in this place. Archaeologists are well aware that more than one hundred years ago, in his ** Lettres sur I'Atlantide de Platon," 1779, and "Lettres sur I'Origine des Sciences," 1777, the learned and ingenious Jean REVIEW OF THE ARGUMENT. 303 Sylvain Bailly advocated the view that the primi- tive cradle of civilization was in Siberia, under the 49th or 50th degree of latitude. In the latter of the works named there occurs a noteworthy passage in which the author, rhetorically fixing the birthplace of mankind at the very Pole, remarks upon the "sin- gular conformity " of such a starting-point, both with all the phenomena of civilization and with the indications of mythology. In the same breath, how- ever, as if startled by his own temerity, he reas- sures his readers by announcing that his suggestion is " only a philosophic fiction," and that it " lacks the support of history." ^ Is it too much to say that the support of history has now been furnished ? '^ Though our hypothesis needs no further confir- mation, it would be perfectly easy to develop a new and striking line of evidence from the light which it throws on the origin of the erroneous precon- ceptions which in the past have either perpetually suggested false theories, or else occasioned the con- viction that the problem was insoluble. Thus, after what we have learned as to the posture of wor- shipers in all ancient nations, it is easy to under- 1 " Au reste, si j'ai trace la marche de I'homme ne sous le pole, s'avan9ant vers I'equateur, inventant toutes les differentes mesures dc Tannee, par les circonstances physiques des differentes latitudes, ce n'est qu'une fiction philosopliique, singuliere par sa conformite avec les phenomenes, remarquable par I'explication des fables ; fic- tion qui surtout n'a rien d'absurde en elle-meme, et a laquelle il ne maiuiue que d'etre appuyee par I'histoire : " pp. 255, 256. - Since the annouiicement of his results the writer has received letters from three plain, unschooled liible-students, who appear to have anticipated, each in his own way, the conclusions of this book. One of them, Mr. Alexander Skelton, a machinist and blacksmith, of Paterson, N. J., obtained a hearing, it seems, in the iVew York Trib- une, in 1878, and his argument, though brief, is remarkably compre- hensive ? id cogent. 304 PARADISE FOUND. ■\ \ n o u. o stand that the primitive Garden •' in the Front- country " must have been in the North. But since in the Post-Glacial ages this Front-country vviis naturally associated with the East, and all invesii- gators, Jewish, Christian, and Mohammedan, were trying to find some Oriental region of Paradisaic cli- mate, with a central Tree and a quadrifurcate River by which the primitive Gan-Eden might be identi- fied, we have in this preliminary misconception rea- son enough for their failure age after age. Again, in reviewing the results of the theologians, we saw that not a few of the more modern had, like Luther, been repelled and disgusted by the appar- ently senseless and contradictory representations of the earlier fathers and church-teachers, in some of which Paradise was placed in heaven, and yet appar- ently on earth, and anon perhaps midway between heaven and earth ; as high, in fact, as the moon. In view of such representations we cannot be sur- prised that a keen-witted satirist like Samuel Butler, in enumerating the rare accomplishments of Hudi- bras, should have said, — " He knew the seat of Paradise, Could tell in what degree it lies ; And, as he was disposed, could prove it Below the moon, or else above it." Our Study of the prehistoric Paradise-mountain, standing upon the earth at the Arctic Pole and lift- ing its head " to the orbit of the moon/' brings in- stant light into all this confusion. The mountain /; at once in heaven and on earth. And it is interest- ing to note that late mediaeval theologians, despite their meagre opportunities for historical research, traced this conception to just that apostle who, ac- REVIEW OF THE ARGUMENT. 305 the Front- But since ;ountry was I all invesii- medan, were Paradisaic cli- furcate River ht be identi- )nception r ca- ge- e theologians, dern had, like by the appar- esentations of rs, in some of and yet appar- idway between as the moon. annot be sur- ,amuel Butler, ents of Hudi- )v? it lise-mountain, Pole and lift- m," brings in- ie mountain n it is intcrest- )gians, despite lical research, lostle who. ac- cording to ecclesiastical tradition, as special " Apos- tle of India," had best opportunity to learn of the East-Aryan Meru, and to report this peculiar and venerable tradition of Paradise.^ Moreover, as we have seen, there were in several Asiatic religions two Paradises, a celestial and a terrestrial, con- nected by a pillar, or bridge, up and down which holy souls could pass. When, therefore, an ancient writer is found alludin',;- in one place to Paradise as on earth and in an. aer to Paradise as in heaven, the confusion is not in his own mind, but merely in that of his reader. Here, too, a good word can be put in for poor Cosmas Indicopleustes, — the man who has had the honor of being more ignorantly and contemptuously abused by modern scientists than any other cos- mographer of early Christian ages. Doubtless it is easy to ridicule his rude representation of the uni- verse, but who will assure us that, thirteen or four- teen centuries hence, it may not be equally easy to ridicule the speculations of Herschel as to the form of the Cosmic Whole ? However this may be, the foregoing chapters have given a new significance to the thought of the monk " who sailed to India," showins: us that his *' Mountain " to the North of the known countries of his day was none other than Mount Meru, the legendary heaven-supporting cul- mination of the Northern hemisphere. His loca- tio of Eden, so far as the verdict of science is yet londered, is at least as well supported as Hackel's ^ " I have found it in some most ancient books tliat Thomas, tlie Apostle, was tiie autiior of the opinion . . . that Paradise was so high as to reach to the lunar circle." — Albertus Magnus, Summa TheologicCy Pars II., Tract, xiii., qu. 79. 20 > o. i 306 PARADISE FOUND. in lost "Lemuria," or Unger's in a mid-Atlantic "Atlantis." Most remarkable of all, just North of the Arctic Ocean boundary of Europe — not in the Wcsty as sometimes falsely represented ^ — he lo- cates '^ the land where men dwelt before the Flood.'"^ If our conclusions are correct, Cosmas was the ear- liest known geographer who gave to the Christian world a true account of the original seat of the post- Edenic antediluvian world. Thus those who have so long made him their pet illustration of the igno- rance and unscientific spirit of "Christian" teach- ing may yet see occasion to revise their judgment, and to transform a portion of their ridicule into praise. The same principles which explain the strange world of Cosmas explain also the strange conception of the Earth which we found in the letters of Colum- bus. According to this latter, it will be remem- bered, the historic hemisphere was true to the spherical figure, but the hemisphere of his far West explorations rose to a lofty eminence at the equator, in what he supposed to be Asia, but which after- wards proved to be the northern part of South America. This gave to the Earth the figure shown in the adjoining cut, — a figure which he compared to that of a nearly round pear.^ At first view this con- 1 E. g , by Donnelly, Atlantis, p. 96. 2 " Terra ultra Oceanum ubi ante Diluvium habitabant homines." Cosmas Indicopleustes. Dc Mundo, lib. iv. Montfaucon, Collcdio Nova, torn ii., Tabula i., opp. p. 18S. 8 " It is probable that this idea really dates from the seventh cen- tury. We may read in several cosmographical manuscripts of that epoch that the earth has the form of a cone or a top, its surface ris- ing from south to north. These ideas were considerably spread by the compilations of John of Beauvais in 1479, from whom, probably, Columbus derived his notion." Flammarion, Astronomical Myths, REVIEW OF THE ARGUMENT. 307 mid-Atlantic , just North ? — not in the ted ^ — he lo- re the Flood!' '^ s was the ear- , the Christian ;at of the post- lose who have n of the igno- iristian" teach- heir judgment, r ridicule into tin the strange mge conception otters of Colum- will be remem- .s true to the of his far West at the equator, ,ut which after- part of South le figure shown he compared to it view this con- labitabant homines," [ontfaucon, Collcclio 3m the seventh cen- manuscripts oi tlwt a top, its surface ris- Ivsiderably spread by lorn whom, probably, YAstronomical My^^'h caption seems altogether arbitrary, and even whim- sical ; but if we go back a century or two to Dante's Earth, we find a lobe still more (T The Earth of Columbus. eccentric, one on which the Para- dise - mount has slipped down full 30° below the equa- tor, as shown in the following figure. A fundamental datum for its construction is found in the description of the Mountain of Purgato- ,«^ ry, respecting whose ^^^ location it is said, ^'^^ " Zion stands with this Mountain in such wise on the earth that both have a single horizon and diverse hemispheres." ^ A commentator on this says, "When the Di- vina Commedia was written, Jerusalem was believed to be the exact p. 296. .See also G. Marinelli, La Gcografia e i Patri della Chiesa. Roma, 1882. 1 Come cio sia, se il vuoi poter pensare, Dentro raccolto immagina Sion Con questo monte in su la terra stare, SI che ambo e due hanno un solo orizzon, E diversi emispcri. (Purgatorio, Canto iv., 67-70.) The Earth of Dante. a. City of Jerusalem, b. Mountain of Pur- gatory, c. Inferno within the Earth. > 308 PARADISE FOUND. ' i i ill -♦ MJ fc ^ researches into the origin and sustaining conditions of life the phenomena of the highest North should be taken into account ? Too long have those wlio busy themselves with these investigations been turning their attention to the ice-cold abysses of tlie " deep sea," hoping in some " bathybius " clot of the sunless ocean-bottom to find the protoplasmic power which has transmuted inorganic matter into micro- cosms of organic life. In no such region of cold and darkness should this search be. made.^ Let life's beginnings and life's feeding forces be looked for where its supreme vigor and exuberance have been seen, — at the pristine centre whence the types and forms of life have spread victoriously through the world ; let them be studied at the Pole.^ On this subject as conservative an authority as ^ " As we descend from the shore into deep water, the temperature becomes lower and lower the deeper we go, until we come to a stra- tum or zone of water about 32°-36° Fahrenheit, where circunipolar or Arctic life alone abounds. . . . The water of the ocean all over the globe below a depth of one thousand fathoms is of an Arctic temper- ature." — Packard, Zoology^ p. 665. 2 Since the above was written, a distinguished specialist in deep- sea dredging has borne the following striking testimony : " With re- gard to the constitution of the deep-sea fauna, one of the most remarkable features is the general absence from it of Paleozoic forms, excepting so far as representatives of the Mollusca and Brach- iopoda are concerned ; and it is remarkable that amongst the deep- sea Mollusca no representatives of the Nautilidce and Afumouilida, so excessively abundant irt ancient periods, occur, and that Linpila, the most ancient Brachiopod, should occur in shallow water only." Professor H. N. Moseley, F. R. S., Biological Address before liritish Association in 1884. Nature, August 28, 1884, p. 428. The same high authority adds, " With regard to the origin of the deep-sea fauna there can be little doubt that it has been derived almost en- tirely from the littoral fauna," — agreeing herein with Professor Sven Loven in his "splendid monograph," Poiirtalesia, Stockholm, 1S83. The funeral sermon of the bathybius theory of the origin of life has already been preached, and the text of the sermon was Job xxviii, 14. BIOLOGY AND TERRESTRIAL PHYSICS. ng conditions North should ve those who crations been ibysses of the s" clot of the plasmic power ter into micro- on of cold and e.i Let life's be looked for nee have been ! the types and y through the ie;- in authority as 321 tter, the temperature il we come to a stra- , where circumpolar le ocean all over the 3f an Arctic temper- specialist in deep- [timony : " With re- la, one of the most jm it of Paleozoic floUusca and T-rach- amongst the deep- \(B and AnimonitidSy Ir, and that Liiigula, Vallow water only." jdress before liritish p. 428. The same ;in of the deep-sea 'derived almost en- nth Professor Sven I, Stockholm, 1S83. le origin of life has was Job xxviii. 14- Principal Dawson recently remarked ; " It is not impossible that in the plans of the Creator the coti- tiiiiwus siunmcr sun of the Arctic regions may have hcen made the means for the introduction, or at least for the rapid growth and multiplication, of new and more varied types of plants." ^ In this true centre what new and interesting as- pects the problems of life immediately take on ! ^ Here we have a regnancy of sunlight such as we never dreamed of in our lower zones. Here we have 1 " The Genesis and Migration of Plants," in The Princeton Review, 1S79, p. 292. - The following, from a recent newspaper, suggests some of the new lines of desiral^le investigation : — "The Norwegian plant-geographer, Schubeler, a short time ago called attention to some striking and surprising peculiarities mani- fested by vegetation in high latitudes, which he ascribed to the inten- sive light-effects of the long days. Most plants in these regions pro- diivjc much larger and heavier seeds than in lower latitudes. Grain is heavier in the North than in the more Southern latitudes ; the in- crease of weight being due to the assimilation of non-nitrogenous substances, while the protein products have no part in it. The leaves of most plants grow larger in the higher latitudes, and at the same time take on a deeper, darker color. This fact has been observed not only in most of the wild trees and shrubs, but also in fruit trees and even in kitchen-garden plants. It has further been observed that the flowers of most plants are larger and more deeply colored, and tliat many flowers which are white in the South become in the far North violet." So potent and irrepressible are the powers of life in highest Arctic latitudes that neither darkness nor the indescribable cold avail against them. The algic flora well illustrates this statement. Ac- cording to a writer in Natiirey Oct. 30, 1884, nearly all Arctic algae live several years, and, '\\\ order that they may be able to effect the work of propagation and nourishment, their organs are in operation during the dark as well as the light season. Whilst wintering at the northernmost part of Spitzbergcn in 1872-73, Professor Kjellman observed, in the middle of the winter — viz., at a time when the sun was lowest, and the darkness, therefore, most intense — that a considerable development and growth of the organs of nourishment took place, while, as regards the organs of propagation, he found that 21 322 PARADISE FOUND. 0C | a tension and a direction of terrestrial magnetism with wliose bi()lo^;ical significance we are utterly unacquainted. Here we have electric forces which pour their currents through every grass-blade, ana tip the very hills with lambent tiame.^ Shall not such absolutely exceptional biological conditions and energies be found to yield some exception;.! biological result ? Is not this a more hopeful field for the study of the origin of life than the dark and almost congealed recesses of the deep sea ? The old theologians were accustomed to call Adam and V.\t it was just at this season that they were most developed. Spores of all kinds were produced and became mature, and they developed into splendid plants. The Arctic algae, therefore, jiresent the re- markable sjiectacle of plants which develop their organs of nourish- ment, and particularly their orga)is of propagation, all the year round, even during the long Polar night, growing regularly at a temperature of between — 1° and — 2° C, and even attaining a great size at a temperature which never rises above freezing-point. As to " mother- region," the result at which Professor Kjellman arrived was that liie algae flora of the Arctic Ocean is not an immigrant flora, but that its origin lay in the Polar Sea itself. This theory is, he believes, proved by the fact that the Arctic algce flora is rich in endemic species. There are many species found both in the Northern Atlantic and the Pacific Oceans, a large percentage of which reaches very far iioith in the Arctic Sea, and which have attained a high degree of develop- ment there, being characteristic algaj of the Arctic Ocean ; and that these species have been originated there, and gradually spread to the other two oceans is, as he believes, more than probable. I low little our zonal diversities of climate affect the question of the possibility of a universal distribution of a north polar flora, or even fauna, is well illustrated in the following : " A remarkable fact associated with the ocean temperature is that forms of animal life belonging to the Arctic seas have been dredged up from the Antarctic Ocean at depths of two thousand fathoms, and may have passed from jiolc to pole through the tropics [in deep-sea currents] without having been subjected to a greater variation of temperature than some f re decrees or so." Gen. R. McCormick, Voyages of Discovery in the Arctic and Antarctic Seas. London, 1884: vol. i., p. 354. 1 The Arctic Manual, p, 739. mo LOGY AND TERRESTRTAL PHYSICS. 323 I magnetism ; arc utterly forces whicli ss-bkule, au'i ,1 Shall not il conditions c exceptioiKil hopeful field , the dark and sea ? The old Vdam and I'^c eloped. Spores of ,ul they developed •e, present the re- organs of noiuiMi- , all the year round, :ly at a temperature ig a great size at a It. As to " mother- irrived was that the nt flora, but that its he believes, proved n endemic species. \\\ Atlantic and the (chcs very far north \ degree of deveh)p- jie Ocean ; and that lually spread to the lobable. How little jn of the possil.'ility , or even fauna, is .hie fact associated jal life belonging to Antarctic Ocean at passed from pn'c to \ithout having ken some five deones or in the Arctic and the '^ Piotophists ;'' in their ancient polar home it is j)o.ssible that science may yet discover the divine secret of all '' protoplasuir Aiiain, our new interest in one of the terrestrial polar regions gives fresh significance to the con- trasts between the two.^ Within ten years our most eminent American geologist has said, " I find no explanation in the present state of science, where- fore most of the dry land of the globe should have been located about the North Pole, and of the water about the South. Physicists say that it indicates greater attraction and therefore a greater density in the solid material beneath the southern ocean. But why the mineral ingredients should have been so gathered about the South Pole as to give the crust there greater density is the unanswered query. It may be that magnetite is much more abundantly diffused through the Antarctic crust than the Arctic. This is only one of many possibilities, and it is at present without a satisfactory fact to stand upon beyond the general truth that iron was universally Drcsent. •" But the diversity of the two Poles is as great and as perplexing to the biologist as to the physical geographer. " The researches made shov/ that the two polar regions differ greatly. The seas of the 1 "The higher mean temperature of the Northern compared to the Southern hemisphere is clearly proved and universally acknowledged." Professor Ilennessy on " Terrestrial Climate " in Philosophical Mai:;a- zine and Jourucu of Science. London and Edinburgh, 1S59 : p. 189. On the Northern hemisphere's greater length of spring and summer %ttW-i\X.f:.-')ix\xVi.^ System of Universal Geography. Boston, 1834 : vol. i., p. 14. Also Mansfield Merriman, 7he Figure of the Earth. New York, iSSi : p. 76. The disparity of mean temperature is now be- lieved to be less ihan was formerly supposed. " Professor Dana, in .4merican Journal of Science, 1875, vol. xxi. 324 PARADISE FOUND. a: '♦ o o. Arctic teem with animal life. Land animals, such as the bear, wolf, reindeer, musk-ox, and Arctic fox, are scattered over the frozen surface of the land where they find the means of sustenance. The air is peopled with innumerable fiocks of birds; a hardy vegetation extends close up to the Arctic Circle, and beyond it, in mosses, lichens, scurvy-grass, sornl, small stunted shrubs, dwarfed trees, and in summer beautiful flowers. In the Antarctic, on the con- trary, vegetation ceases at a certain limit, trees ter- minating at about 56° S. latitude. Animal life abounds in the seas, but though birds exist in great numbers and in varieties unknown in the Arctic, no quadrupeds are found upon the land." ^ With this we may compare the already cited lan- guage of Sir Joseph Hooker: " Geographically speak- ing, there is no Antarctic flora except a few lichens and seaweeds." ^ Would it not seem as if the South Pole must have been covered by "the barren sea" at the period when floral and faunal life, starting at its Arctic centre, began its conquering marches over all the Earth } Or is there rather some marked difference in the biological value of the poles them- selves } ^ But polar biological research involves antecedent Polar Exploration and a wider and more system- 1 C. p. Daly in Johnsoit's Cyclopadia, Art. " Polar Research." 2 Nature, London, 1881, p. 447. 8 The latter explanation would seem to be favored by the experi- ments of Dr. Ferdinand Cohn, who found that a positive electrode would hinder the development of micrococcus " in bci weitem hoherm Grade als die negative.^'' Beitrdge ziir Biologie der Pflanzen. Breslau, 1879 •■ P- ^ 59- It is also known thai eggs may be hatched quicker at one pole of a magnet than at the other. mo LOGY AND TERRESTRIAL rZ/VS/CS. 325 1 sea" at the ilar Research." utic study of Terrestrial Physics.^ Heroin lies a fresh and novel impulse to reinvest on every side the still uncaptured citadel of the Arctic Pole. Long ago could Maury write, " As science has ad- vanced, men have looked with deeper and deeper luni^ings toward the mystic circles of the Polar regions. There icebergs are framed and glaciers humched ; there the tides have their cradle, the whales their nursery ; there the winds complete their circuits, and the currents of the sea their roimd; there the aurora is lighted up, and the trem- bling needle brought to rest ; there, too, in the mazes of that mystic circle, terrestrial forces of occult power and of vast influence upon the well-being of man are continually at play. Within the Arctic Circle is the pole of the winds and the poles of cold, the pole of the earth and of the magnet. It is a circle of mysteries ; and the desire to enter it, to explore its untrodden wastes and secret chambers, and to study its physical aspects has grown into a longing. Noble daring has made Arctic ice and snow-clad seas classic ground. It is no feverish ex- citement nor vain ambition that leads men there. It is a higher feeling, a holier motive : a desire to look into the works of creation, to comprehend the economy of our planet, and to grow wiser and better by the knowledge." If such a passion for discovery could be kindled in the presence of the older and more abstract problems, what ought to be the result when to these are added the possibility of solving at least some of the mysteries of Nature's Life, and the certainty of standing where Human Life began ! ^ See Appendix, Sect. VII.: "Latest Polar Research." Also An- drea, Der Kampfum den NordpoL 4 Aufl., Bielefeld, 1882. CHAPTER II. THE BEARING OF OUR RESULTS ON THE STUDY OF ANCIENT LITERATURE. Sc! o.. o. yj A ltd the Greeks, -mIio surfiassed all men in ingeuuify, appropriated to themselves the greater />ari of these things, exagger\ii)tg them, and adding to them various ornatuenis ivhicJi tliey luove i?ito tliis foundation in every style, in order to charm by tlie elegance of the myths. Hence Hesiod and the famed cyclic poets drew tlicir theogonies, tlieir gigantotnachies, their mutilations of the gods, and in havjlcing them about everywhere they have supplanted the true narrati^ie. And our cu-s, accxtstomed to tlieir fictions, familiar to ns for several centuries past, guard us a precious deposit the fables which they received by tradition, as I remarked ivii,-ii I began to speak ; and, rooted by time, this belief has become so difUcidt to dishulgc tliat to the greater number th<^ truth appears like a story told for amusevicut, •wiiile the corruption of the iradiiion is looked upon as the truth itself. — Philo uf Byblos. Summing up the most probable results of all his investigations, Darwin states as his opinion that man must be considered as " descended from a hairy quadruped, furnished with a tail and pointed ears, probably arboreal in his habits, and an inhab- itant of the Old World." ^ According to Hackel, this Homo prwiigcniiis was a blackish; wooll^'^-haired, prognathous, ape-like Idc- ing, with a long, narrow head. His body was en- tirely covered with hair, and he was unable to speak. In reading most fashionable writers upon ancient mythology and literature, one would think that they conceived of the 'vriters of the Vedic Hymns and the authors of the myths of classic literature as very early and but slightly developed descendants of this hairy Homo Danviiiius. Thus, according to i\Ir. 1 Descent of Man^ Pt. II., ch. 21. 1:1 STUDY OF ANCIENT T.ITERATURE. 327 E STUDY OF firiaied to themselves ding to them various r.e, in order to charm yclic poets drew tl:.-ir ■)ds, and in ha'd)kins; tive. And our ears, ries past, guard as a as I remarked iviien so difficult to disloJ^^c told for amusevurA, uth zte-^. — Philouf ults of all his opinion that nded from a and pointed and an inhab- imigcniiis was ^, ape-like l)c- Ibody was en- jable to speak. upon ancient link that they Hymns and Irature as very Wlants of tliis Irding to Mr. Keary, at the time that the myth of the Cyclops originated, " men ideally believed that the stormy sky was a being and the sun his eye." ^ Indeed, it might almost appear, from another passage in the same book, that at the period when this Cyclops- faith was reached men had arrived at quite an ad- vanced stage as compared with the earlier one, when as yet they knew too little to look up at the sky at all, and had an idea that the branches of the trees extended quite to heaven. "The power of gazing upward to heaven," he says, " came to us not all at once, but gradually, through lapse of time. Savages arc said scarcely ever to raise their eyes, and their heads are naturally inclined with a downward gaze, so that it must be an effort for them to look at the sky and the heavenly bodies. Primeval man lived upon roots and berries, or on the lesser animals and the vermin which he gathered from the soil, and so habit as well as nature kept his eyes fixed upon the ground. We need not therefore wonder if, in their ha!f-glances upward, our forefathers had not leisure to observe that the tree-top was not really close against the sky. They may well have deemed that tlie upper branches hid themselves in infinitely re- mote ethereal regions." '^ The work which such men make in interpreting ancient literature and thouirht is strange enouirh. The ascription to Agni of the same supreme wor- ship which the bard has just paid to Varuna or Mi- tra is explained as due to the extreme " shortness of the memory " of early mcn.^ Only a knowledge of 1 Outlines of Primitive B-elief. 1882 : p. 27. 2 Ibid., p. 58. 8 Ibid., p. 1 1 5. 328 PARADISE FOUND. cac! CXZi o a most limited portion of the earth's surface can he conceded to any of the ancient nations. The early Aryans sing of the Ocean and of ships of an hun- dred oars, but it must not for a moment be sup- posed that they had ever seen or heard of the rciil Ocean ; they had simply originated in tlieir im.iL;-. inations a mythical one.^ In such hands the ini- mortal Iliad becomes merely " a tale of land-batlie, the theatre of whose action is limited to the two shores of the ^Egoean, the known world of the Greek." ^ Though the Homeric poems betray in va- rious places an acquaintance with astronomy, and actually name various constellations, yet, when the question is raised as to how the poet conceived of the return of the sun during the night from the West to the East, even Mr. Bunbury silences us, telling us that in Homer's day nobody had ever thought of such a question ! "^ Illustrations of this worse than medireval igno- rance and distortion of ancient thought and languajre could be multiplied to almost any extent. But as some selection must be made, it may perhaps be best to confine ourselves to three or four points in a field conjparatively familiar to all readers likely to peruse these pages, — the field of Homeric cosmol- ogy. If we succeed according to our expectation we ^ Ch. Ploix, " L'Ocean des Anciens," Rtvne Archeologiqiie, 1877, vol. xxxiii.. pp. 47-54. 2 Keary, Primitive Belief, p. 296. 3 " Mow the sun was carried back to the point from which it was to start afresh on its course, it is probable that no one in his day ever troubled himself to inquire." (!) Hist. Ancient Geography^ vol. i., p. 34. This does not well accord with the statement of Bergaine : 'Le sejour et I'etat du soleil quand il a disparu sont des questions qui pie- occupent vivement les poetes vediques." La Religion Vediquc, tuiii. i., p. 6. STUnV OF ANCIENT LITERATURE. 329 Lirface can he s. The early 3S of an hun- ment be sup- rcl of the real n their imag- lands the ini- of land-batlle, -d to the two world of the s betray in va- stronomy, and yet, when the it conceived of licrht from the ry silences us, body had ever mediasval igno- t and language xtent. But a3 ay perhaps be four points in aders likely to meric cosmol- xpectation we [rcheologiqne, 1877, from which it w^i^ lone in his clay ever \cc\Qrap/i}\ vol. i., p. of Bergainc : ''I^e questions qui P«' Xigion VeJitjiii, torn. shall make it plain that those interpreters of Homer whose conceptions of Greek culture are derived from current Darvvinistic anthropology rather than from the poems themselves, demonstrate, by the number and character of their exegetical entangle- ments, the entire incorrectness of their fundamental assumption.^ I. The question JList touched upon, the Move- ment of the Sun, is as good as any with which to begin, and by which to show the embarrassments into which accepted interpreters have continually fallen in consequence of denying to the ancients a knowledge of the spherical figure of the Earth. Opening Keightley, we find the customary asser- tion that "according to the ideas of the Homeric and Hcsiodic ages the Earth was a round, flat disk, around which the river Ocean flowed." Then he says that " nien, seeing the sun rise in the P^>ast and set in the West each day, were naturally led to inquire how his return to the East was effected. ' He alludes to the fact that *' in the Odyssey, when Helios ends his diurnal career, he is said to go under the Earth ;" but he adds that " it is not easy to determine whether the pc '"t meant that he then passed through Tar- taros back to the East during the night." The "beautiful fiction of the solar cup or basin," he thus describes : " If, then, as there is reason to suppose, it was the popular belief that a lofty mountainous ring ran round the edge of the Earth, it was easy for the poets to feign that on reaching the western 1 In W. Helbig's new work, Z)iis Ilomcrischc Epos von den Dcuk- mdlcni erliiiitert, Lc.usic, 1SS4, we have some symptoms of a new and better tyi)e of Homeric archa^ology. The author holds thai in Ho- mer's day there were evidences of "lost arts," and in the treasures found at Mycenae he sees the products of a pre- Homeric civilization. I- 1 330 PARADISE FOUND. , i o stream of Ocean Helios himself, his chariot and his horses, were received into a magic cup or boat, made by Hephaistos, which, aided by the current, conveyed him during th(^ night round the northern part of the earth, where his light wai only enjoyed by the happy Hyperboreans, the lofty Rhiphseans concealing it from the rest of mankind. They must also have supposed that the cup continued its course during the day, compassing the earth every twenty- four hours." Of this fiction, however, Keightloy confesses, "neither Homer nor Hesiod evinces any knowledge." After quoting various later pods, therefore, he concludes as follows : " From a con- sideration of all these passages it may seem to fol- low that the ideas of the poets on this subject were very vague and fleeting. Perhaps the prevalent opinion was that the Sun rested himself and his weary steeds in the West, and then rctiLrned to tJic Eastr ^ By what passage, however, whether via the North or underneath the supposed "flat disk" of the Earth, Keightley makes no further effort to determine. The difficulty in the way of supposing that in Homer's thought the nocturnal sun passed under- neath the flat Earth-disk, through Tartaros, back to the East, is that the poet invariably represents this Underworld as forever unvisited by sunlight. In view of this, and of the ominous silence of Homer as 10 any winged cup sailing round the earth to the North, some interpreters warn us against expecting any consistency of thought in poetry so primitive.^ 1 I\fylhology, pp. 47-50. Here, as usual, Keightley closely follows Volcker. P"or the "mountainous ring" see Ukert's map. '^ " Of popular views and conceptions one must not demand con- STUDY OF ANCIENT LITERATURE. 331 riot and his ip or boat, :he current, he northern Dnly enjoyed J Rhiph3eans They must [ed its course ivery twenty- ir, Keightlcy I evinces any later poets, From a con- y seem to fol- subject were the prevn.lcnt mself and his pnrned to the whether via ;d " flat disk" ther effort to )Osing that in Ipassed under- htaros, back to Represents this Isunhght. In ice of Homer ie earth to the in St expecting so primitive.'^ [ley closely follows ].s map. not demand con- Schvvenck goes so far in this direction as tc suggest that the island Aiaie is a creation of the imagina- tion in the far West, called forth for the express purpose of giving the mind a kind of resting-place, where it can leave the sinking Helios without troub- ling itself with inconvenient speculations as to how he is to get back to the Orient at the appointed hour. He says : " The Homeric poetry could not allow the Suu and the daylight to rest during the ni-ht in the Homeric Hades, for in that case Hades would have been illuminated. It therefore supposes an island afar off at the end of the world, where Helios and Dav^n, after they have passed over across the heavens, repose at night, and whence, after this repose, they in the morning again ascend the sky. An exact explanation as to how they come west- wardly to this island and then in the morning rise in the East lies aloof from the poetry, for I'li Homer nothing of systems is to be found, and only each ob- ject taken by itself is correct and clear." ^ Assume once a spherical I'.arth, and all these dif- ficulties of the interpreters are at an end. East and West touch each other. Mr. Gladstone, before aban- doning fully the flat-earth theory, came as near the trutli as he possibly could and not hit it, when, speakhig of Hehos, he wrote : " The fact of his sporting vvith the oxen night and morning goes far to show that Home/ did not think of the Earth as a plane, but round, perhaps, as upon a cylinder, and sistcncv or completion. They go up to a certain point, a])]ireliend only a pai t, and this only as it appears at first blush ; they leave one side all conclusive reflection, and are unconcerned about contradic- tions since they are not conscious of any?'' — J. F. Lauer in Anhang to Amcis's Oih'sscy, x. 86. ^ Cited in Aincis, Octyssry, Anhang, xii. 4. 332 PARADISE FOUND. cac; LAJ believed that the West and East were in contact." i He mistook, however, in suggesting Thrinakia as the place of contact. It was rather on the meridian of Aiaie, for we are expressly told that 001 t' 'HoCs r]piy€velr)s oiKla Kal X^P"^ ^'^c^ i^C"^ avroKal 'HeXloio. " There are the abodes and dance-grounds of Au- rora, there the risings of the Sun." ^ Nor could anything be more natural than that the poet, conceiving of the world of living men as Homer did, and sending out his thoughts eastward and westward in search of the meeting-place of even- ing and morning, should fix upon the meridian oj^po- site his own, the very place and only place where his eastward -journeying thought and his westward journeying thought would of necessity meet. His eastern hemisphere would naturally extend round eastward until it met the edge of the hemisphere extending round westward. On that farthest off me- ridian,'*^ therefore, he made the old day give place to the new, eve to morn. That was the doubtful line on which Odysseus and his companions were no loiii;er clear : " where was East and where was West, where Helios went behind the Earth or where he rose again." * 2. The false assumption that Homer's Earth is flat has created all the noted controversies connected with his representations of the location of Hades. This question has divided Homeric interpreters into more than a dozen differing camps. Their mutually ^ Jnventus A fundi, p. 325. 2 Oiiyssiy, xii. 3, 4. 8 That the son of Odysseus by Kirke should have been named Teleg- onos, 'Uhe fiir-a7vay begotten^' thus becomes peculiarly significant. * Odyssey, x. 189-192. STUDY OF ANCIENT LITERATURE. 333 rounds of Au- contradictory solutions of the problem would be the laughing-stock of the opposers of classical studies, were these latter only sufficiently acquainted with the world's scholarship to be aware of their exist- ence. To review and solve the question in this place would detain the general reader too long, but in the Appendix, Section sixth, the assertions here made will be found abundantly verified. 3. The same flat-earth assumption is further re- sponsible for all the difficulties which interpreters have found in representing the Ocean, and in gen- eral the Water System of the Earth, in accordance with the Homeric data. These difficulties have been neither few nor small. Four of them we will here notice. And, first, that growing out of the statement that from deep-flow- ing Ocean " flow all rivers and every sea, and all fountains and deep wells." ^ Volcker pronounces this " hard to explain." He says, "An immediate in-streaming of the Ocean into the sea can scarcely be meant, partly because sea-water and ocean-water do not unite, partly because Homer knows of no such in-streamings in the Phasis and at the Pillars of Hercules, and the origination of rivers in this way woula not be thinkable." ^ Other writers, de- voted to the illustration of ancient thought, seem not to have stopped to inquire whether rivers flow- ing up-stream from the Ocean to the hills were thinkable or not, and have gravely set before the youthful student diagrams constructed on this plan as the true representation of Homeric thought I ^ ^ Iliad, xxi. 196. ^ Hivr.''rische Geographie, § 49. ' See tht older Classical Atlases. " According to Homer," says 334 PARADISE FOUND. O pc us % A second embarrassing question has been this : "If the Ocean -stream surrounded and constituted the outermost boundary of the Earth-disk, what sus- tained the Ocean-stream itself and constituted its further shore ? " As Volclvcr says, " Who on the further side held in the billows of the vast World- river, that they did not flow off into the empi, spaces of heaven ? Was it a narrow strip of the inner Earth, or was it formless chaos, or the descend- ing rim of the sky, or the inner power of the waters themselves ? " ^ Buchholz says, " By what the Ocean itself was in turn bounded remains unclear. The child-like imagination of the Homeric age contented itself with that confused halbvcrschwontincnc con- ception." ^ The most natural answer, especially from the point of view represented by Buchhulz, who, with Ukert and others, claims that the Ho- meric heaven was literally metallic, would seem to be Volcker's third supposition, namely, that the rim of the metallic sky constitutes the outer limit of tlie Ocean-stream.^ This would correspond, also, with the general notion that the circular disk of the earth " divided the hollow sphere of the universe into two equal parts."* It would also exactly correspond to Theodore Alois Buckley, in his translation of the Iliad^ "the Earth is a circular plane, and Oceanus is an immense stream encircling it, frotn ivhich the rivers yfwi^ inward,^'' — of course, therefore, np-liill. 1 Horn. Geog-., § 49. Compare Keightley : "As it was a stream it must have been conceived to have a further bank to confine its course." Mythology of Greece, p. 33. 2 Ho7nerische Rcalieii, I. I, p. 55. ^ In his earlier work, Die Mythologie des Japctischen Geschkchtes, Giessen, 1824, p. 60, Volcker distinctly represents this as the ancient Greek conception : " Wo der Uiiiimel sick walirhaft an den Okean schlicsst iind dem kiihnen Sc/iiffer das letzte Ziel geworden." * Keightley, My f hoi., p. 29. STUDY OF ANCIENT LITERATURE. 335 s been this : i constituted sk, what sus- instituted its Who on the i vast World- the empty ' strip of the ■ the descend- of the waters hat the Oce:in .nielear. The age contented vommcnc con- rer, especiidly by Buchhulz, that the Ho- ^ould seem to ■, that the rim er hmit of the md, also, Nvith ,k of the earth [verse into two correspond to \iad, " the Earth is ream encirclinc; it, lierefore, iip-liill. ^ I it was a stream it ink to conthie its \schen Geschkchta, Ithis as the ancient ^aft an den Okean mrdcnP Flach's curious and elaborate representation of the llosiodic world in his recent work on the Hesiodic cosmogony,^ Still further it would seem best to ac- cord with Homer's language describing the heavenly constellations as bathing in the Ocean. On the other hand, however, such a supposition would be incompatible with the Homeric representation that the farther shore presented a suitable landing-place, and especially a landing-place situated, like that of Odysseus, in the Underworld. Moreover, it would be incompatible with the current notion that the Homeric heaven was supported upon mountain pillars standing on the Earth inside the Ocean-stream, like Mount Atlas in western Liby-a.^ Again, therefore, the question returns, "Given a flat Earth surrounded by the Ocean-river, what constitutes the farther shore, and how can the mariner who lands upon it speak of himself as in the Underworld .'' " The learned Volckcr leaves the subject with the unsatis- fying observation, "The poet has not answered our questions." A third embarrassment dwelt upon by the same advocate of the flat-earth theory is that, as he un- derstands Homer, Hellas was the centre of the cir- cular Earth-disk, and not more than " ten or eleven days' sail " from the Ocean in any direction ; and yet the poet makes it eighteen days' sail by the shortest route from Ogygia to the land of the Phae- acians, and at least another in the same direction to 1 Ilans Flach, Das System der Hesiodischen Kosmogonie . Leipsic, 1874. (Diagrani prefixed.) " Maury, Histoire des Religions de la Grice Antique. Paris, 1857 : vol. i., p. 596. In like manner IBunburv, History of Ancient Geogra- phy, vol. i., p. 33, represents the solid Homeric vault as resting on the outermost edge of the circular earth just inside the Ocean-stream. 1 r 1 ■! 336 PARADISE FOUND. o i ^ ^ Hellas, and yet Ogygia is the navel or centre of the sea. "These," says he, "are insurmountable difli- cultics for him who would measure with the com- passes. Rather should we learn from this example what folk-faith and folk-tales are. Where there is no agreement we should not create one by main force. The Earth is circular and Hellas is its cen- tre; that was the popular faith. But the situation of the Ocean and the extent of the Earth are at the same time such fluctuating ideas, and all any way extended voyages seem to the poet to extend to such a terrific distance, that it may well hap[)cn to him to overpass all bounds out in that realm where were, so to speak, the most terrific of all dis- tances." ^ Thus the nodding Homer is again caught in contradiction, and to accommodate his exagger- ated and terrific distances even Gladstone at liist felt constrained to change the figure of the Earth- disk itself, and to present it as a vast parallclogi ;uii more extended from North to South than from East to West.2 The fourth difficulty involved in the current inter- pretation is that experienced in harmonizing the poet's representations of the Ocean, as commonly understood, with his representations of the move- ments of the sun, as commonly understood. The sun at evening certainly ceases to be visible to men. According to the Homeric representation he returns to the flowing of the Ocean.^ His bright light sinks in it.^ At his rising it is also from the Ocean 1 Horn. Geographie, § 50. 2 See his map. Comp. Juventus M^otdi, p. 493. 8 Iliads xviii. 240. * Iliad, viii. 485. STUDY OF ANCIENT LITERATURE. 337 centre of the )un table diili- ath the coni- this example 'here there is one by mam lias is its ecu- he situation (if rth are at the d all any way ; to extend lo y well happen in that realm ■rific of all dis- is again caught te his exaggcr- idstone at tirst e of the Earth- parallclogiam ithan from East |e current inter- trmonizing the ^, as commonly of the move- [lerstood. The visible to men. Ition he returns ts bright light [rom the Ocean \di, p. 493- that he begins to mount the sk}.' Yet his setting is also described as a going «*< iVo yaTar, under or l)chind the ICarth.'"^ How now, witli a flat circular disk for the l'2arth, and with a circumfluent Ocean in tiie same plane, and with an eternally dark and un- sunned Hades just beyond the Ocean-river to tiie westward, can these data be harmonized ? If we at- tempt to conceive of the Sun as literally sinking in the ocean and hiding his light beneath its waters, he has not gone ct« v-nlt yulav, but rather " in under " the Ocean. JMoreover, the old difliculty reappears as to how he shall get round into the East in time for his rising again. Furthermore, if he is the whole night concealed under the waves of the Ocean, descending inti 't in the far West at his setting and ascending out of it in the far East at his rising, how can we arrange for his rejoicing himself night and morning with his oxen on the island of Thrinakia ? ^ But we cannot abandon this whole supposition, and let the Sun set beyond and bcJiind the Ocean-stream, for that would be in the western Hades, where he never shines. Nor yet, again, can we say that he descends to the surface of the Ocean simply, and then, in his " cup," or otherwise, moves round to the Orient by way of the North, for then, the Ocean being in sub- stantially the same plane as the abode of men, they would not be overspread with darkness, but would enjoy, if not the spectacle of " the midnight sun," at least the full light of a sun moving round the • Iliad, vii. 422 ; Odyssey, xix. 433. '^ Odyssey, x. 191. 3 Odyssey, xii. 380. The only diagram based upon this conception which I reniembt to have seen is in the rare and curious work by Julumnes llerbinius, Dtssertationcs de admiraiidis mundi Cataractis. Am tcl. 1678 : p. 13. 22 %;;??* IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) / /. ^ 1.0 1.1 11.25 1^ 12.0 us IB I lA. 116 Photographic Sciences Corporalion 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. MSSO (716) 872-4S03 \ V [1>^ ^\ rv ^'*. \ 338 PARADISE FOUND. horizon. On this supposition, too, Hades, just west of the river, would also be equally illuminated. In- side the Ocean-stream he certainly does not hide himself in the ground, for that would be incompati- ble with all the passages associating his rising and setting with the Ocean. But if he cannot be con- ceived of as setting on the hither side of the stream, nor on the farther side, nor yet as resting on tlio Ocean, nor yet as hiding beneath it, what possible conception of the matter remains } All this trouble is the natural result of one false assumption, — the assumption that Homer's Earth is a flat disk. Assume that it is a sphere, and every one of these difficulties vanishes. Then, in caus- ing the Sun to descend to the Ocean in which lies Aiaie the poet makes the bed to which the king of dav retires the same as that from which in the morning he rises again. At the same time, from the poet's standpoint and from the standpoint of tlie lands inhabited by the poet's countrymen, each set- ting of the Sun was a going " behind the earth," to reappear on the opposite side. This view of the movement of Helios solves every perplexity ; and if Homer had the knowledge of the Earth and Heavens involved in the view, we may be sure he also knew as well as we do in what sense the Ocean is the source of all springs and rivers, and for what reason the equatorial Ocean never runs away for the lack of an ultra-terrestrial shore. 4. The same hermeneutical myopia which has thus minified and misconceived every feature of Ho- mer's cosmography has introduced and maintained the now universal dogma that in the Homeric poems " Olympos is always the Thessalian mountain " of STUDY OF ANCIENT LITERATURE. 339 lies, just west minatcd. In- loes not hide be incompati- lis rising and innot be con- of the stream, esting on the what possible It of one false )mer's Earth is icre, and every rhen, in caiis- i in which lies ich the kino- of which in the ; time, from the nd point of tlie men, each sct- the earth," to is view of the •plexity ; and if h and Heavens ie he also knew Ocean is the "or what reason lay for the lack Ipia which has feature of Ho- ind maintained [omeric poems mountain " oi that name.^ All our youth are taught that " the early poets believed that the gods actually lived upon the top of this mountain separating Macedonia and Thcssaly. Even the fable of the giants scaling heaven must be understood in a literal sense ; not that they placed Pelion and Ossa upon the top of Olympos to reach the still higher /wavt'ii, but that they piled Pelion on the top of Ossa and both on the loiucr slopes of Olympos to scale the summit of Olympos itself, the abode of the gods." - To settle the question negatively as well as positively, revered German erudition solemnly declares, "The gods of Homer ficvcr Wwq in heaven."^ Such dogmatism challenges a fresh investigation of the question. Taking up this subject, Keightley remarks that if we were to follow the teachings of Comparative Mythology we should have to locate the abode of Homer's gods in the heights of heaven. His lan- guage is : " Were we to follow analogy, and argue from the cosmology of other races of men, we would say that the upper surface of the superior hemi- sphere was the abode of the Grecian gods."* He goes on to allude to the conceptions of the Scandi- navians and some other peoples, and adds, " Hence we might be led to infer that Olympos, the abode of the Grecian gods, was synonymous with heaven, and that the Thessalian mountain and those others which bore the same name were called after the original heavenly hill." It is a pity that the learned author could not have ^ Amels and Hentze, Ilias, i. 44. '^ Smith's Classical Dictionary, Art. " Olympus." * Volcker, Homerische Geoi^raphie, pp. 9, 12. * Mythology. Fourth Edition. London, 1877 • P- 34- i 340 PARADISE FOUND. ,, i accepted this very sensible conclusion ; but he did not. Rejecting the admitted intimations of Com- parative Cosmology, he says, "A careful survey, however, of those passages in Homer and Hesiod in which Olympos occurs will lead us to believe that the AchLcans held the Thessalian Olympos, the highest mountain with which they were acquainted, to be the abode of their gods." The only passage specially referred to by Keight- ley, as establishing this view, is the Iliad, xiv. 2:'5 seq., where the language employed is not at all in- consistent with the idea that, in descending from the summit of Olympos, Hera descended from the northern sky. More elaborate is the argument of Volcker,^ but its logical cogency is by no means admissible. The true Homeric conception of the abode of the gods is far loftier, grander, and more poetic than that given us by such interpreters. According to the poet's real representation, that abode is "the wide heaven," — not the atmospheric heaven, or/iu- vov Iv aWepi koI vefjtiKrjcrLv, for tliis is a Special posses- sion of Zeus (Iliad, xv. 192) ; it is the upper sky, 1 Homerischc Geographie und Weltkunde, pp. 4-20. Copied bv Buchholz, Horn. Rcalien, I. § 12. Professor Blackie's reasoning i> en- tirely subjective: "In a spiritual religion, like Christianity, the wmd heaven will always be kept as vague as possible ; in an imaginative and sensuous religion, like the Greek, it must be localized. A /,e(i< with human shape and members must sit on a terrestrial seal ; ;uul the only seat proper for him is the highest mountain in the country to which he belongs. Now, as the original seat of the Greeks, when they rested from their long journey by the Caspian and Eu.xinc west- ward, was the plains of Macedonia and Thessaly, the necessary loeal- ity for the throne of the Supreme God and the council of the Immor- tals was Olympos, the extreme east end of the long Cambunian range separating Thessaly from Macedonia, to the north of the Pcneios and the defile of Tempe." Homer and the Iliad. Edinburgh, 1S66: vol. iv., p. 174. STUDY OF ANCIENT LITERATURE. 341 I ; but he did ions of Com- ircful survey, md Hesiod in o believe that Olympos, the ;re acquainted, to by Keighi- Iliad, xiv. 2:' 5 s not at all in- jscending from ;nded from tho le argument of i by no means he abode of the pre poetic than According to abode is "the ic heaven, o.Va- special posscs- the upper sky, 4-20. Copied l)v iie's reasoning i> en- :hristianity, the wdd in an imaginative e localized. A /tn'* terrestrial seal ; and ntain in the couiuiy of the Greeks, when an and Enxinc west- y, the necessary local- luncil of the Inimor- Ing Cambunian range |h of the Peneios and linburgh, 1S66 : vol the celestial dome in which sun, moon, and stars wheel silently around the Pole. To the early Greek, as to the early Perso-Aryan, it was easy to con- ceive of this celestial dome as a heavenly moun- tain, vast, majestic, of unearthly beauty, and peo- pled with glorious beings invisible to mortals. And this heavenly mountain he called Olympos. The Thessalian mount, the Bithynian, and all the dozen others of the same name ^ were sacred only so far as they symbolized and commemorated their heavenly original. In the Odyssey, xi. 315, it is plain that Homer speaks of the Thessalian Olympos along with other Thessalian mountains ;2 but in general he means by Olympos the heights of the northern heaven viewed as the proper abode of the gods.^ The proofs of the incorrectness of the current ' lleyschius professed to have knowledge of fourteen mountains bearing the name of Olympos. - To all who deny that heaven was to Homer the abode of the gilds this passage presents insurmountable difficulties. To place Ossa upon Olympos, then upon Ossa Pelion, in order, by means of tlic three, to climb up into an abode situated on the top of the under- most of the three, is the problem ! No wonder that Volcker thinks Homer has been overpraised for his knowledge of localities and of the arrangement of mountains : " Der Olymp muss auf jeden Fall zu unteMst kommen, und die Folgcrung aus dieser Stelle fiir die Ilomer- isdic Localkenntniss und Grundlage der Wirklichkeit in Anordnung (ler l>erge miissen wir dahin gestellt sein lassen." Horn. Geoi:;., p. 9. '1 itilv amusing is the haughty remark under which Hartung beats a retreat : " Warum aber sollte ein Gelehrter Uber solche Wiederspriiche sich Scrupel machen da die religiose Vorstcllung sich niemals daran gestdssen hat?" Die Religion itnd Myt'iologic der Gricc/ieii, Th. iii., 6. r>ut one German, .and he a Swiss, seems to have apjirehcnded the inevitable implication of this passage : " Jedoch war dem Griechen \v(dil bewusst, dass die Gbtter nicht eigentlich und wirklich auf dem Olymp wohnten, wic aus der Beschreibung des Kampfcs des Otus und Kphialtes gegen die olympischen Gotter hervorgeht." Rinck, Die Rt'ligion der Helleneu. Zurich, 1853 : vol. i., \>. 207. •' Compare Pictet, Les Origiues. Paris, 1877 : tom. iii., p. 225. 342 PARADISE FOUND. interpretation appear on almost every page of the Homeric poems. The designation of the gods by the formula ot ovpavbv evpiiv «xwo""' occurs twice in the Iliad and sixteen times in the Odyssey, but the ex- pressions "who possess the wide heaven," in Odys- sey, xix., line 40, and "who possess Olympos," line 43, are plainly identical in meaning.^ So in the Iliad, "the immortals who possess the Olympian man- sions " and " the gods who possess the wide heaven " are unquestionably interchangeable phrases.^ Hence also "the Olympians," "the Uranians," and "the Epouranians " are names of the same beings.^ In Hesiod's Theogony the expression cVtos 'OXv/attoi', " within Olympos," occurs no less than three times. ^ To translate it according to the current interpreta- tion of Homer is to locate the palace of Zeus in the heart of an earthly mountain and to transform the ^^ Lichtgestalteii " of his heavenly court into Trolls. In book twenty -four of the Iliad, verse ninety- 1 Comp. xii. 339 ; also the Homeric Hymn, In Apolliuem, ii. 320, 334. In the Iliad, \'m., lines 393 and 411, the selfsame portals are called now "gates of heaven," now "gates of Olympos." 2 Book i. 18 ; ii. 13, 30, 484 ; v. 383, 404, et passim. See Volckcr, Homer ische Geographie, p. 13 {§ 9). 8 Book i. 399, XX. 47, and often ; i. 570 ; v. 373, 898, etc. ; vi. 129, 131, 527. Compare i. 497 : — 'Hep/?? S* avf^T] /xeyap ovpavhv Oii\vfnr6v re. A similar identification occurs in Hesiod, Theogony, v. 689. See L. Preller, " Daher der Himmel und der Olymp auch ganz gleic!,l)c- dcutend gebraucht werden konnen." Griechische Mythologie. Lcip- sic, 1854 : vol. i., p. 48. * Lines 37, 51, 408. The interpreters of Hesiod have found this so great a crux that Gottling and Paley make it a ground for qiK-s- tioning the genuineness or antiquity of the passages. See also SchoQm^xva., Die hesiodische Thcogonie ausgchgt und beurtheilt. Her- lin, 1868: p. 303. Yet Pfau, in Pauly's Real- Encyclopaedic, Art. " Olympos," afifirms that we find in Hesiod "exactly the same con- ceptions of Olympos " as in Homer. STUDY OF ANCIENT LITERATURE. 343 page of the the gods by ; twice in the ■, but the cx- 311," in Odys- lympos," hnc 3 in the Iliad, ympian man- wide heaven " •ases.2 Hence IS," and •' the e beings.^ In Cl/TOS *OXv/jL7roi', n three times.^ int interprcta- 3f Zeus in the transform the t into Trolls. verse ninety- Apollinem, ii. 320, fsamc portals aie 10s." sim. See Volckcr, 373. 898. etc. ; vi. » me. that this whole igh in the vault " many-peaked tie imagination.^ under Thessa- of this term, thc'gb n, as in note on 1" ok eaven" was situated shad, xxiv. 3, 4. 7- 8. I., PP- 36, 37- l''^'" 'ies Judenthum, r>d. Kat "there can be no In Olympos, and not ]aims very naturally, He immediately l\ij.itoio is referred to in a concrete form shows that it was not only a visible but [also a] commanding object in the poet's landscape ; so much so that it embarrasses his f>/iysi,/i<^os no more necessitates a literal interpretation than does a poet's application of the term "snowy" to a living bosnni. or "fleecy" to the clouds. So KohintTxixos proves nothing at all to his purpose, since Euripides — never having read the Professor's iiistiuc- tive statement, " The epithet itQ\{>itrv\os, applicable only to niount,nm, is a sufficient barrier to prevent the identification with ovpav6s '' — ap- plies it again and again to many-strata-ed Ouranos. Even the Profes- sor's one only evidence not by his own concession merely " presump- tive," to wit, the " great simile " of the Iliad, book xvi. 364, tells against rather than for him, for the iw' OuKifxirov vftpos cannot pos- sibly come alOepos tK Slrjs into the atmospheric ovpavhv where clouds move, unless Olympos be where the divine ether is, high above the atmospheric heavens. Volcker's treatment of the passage is so ab- surd that Geddes does not even attempt to follow it. Horn. CrcO{'„ §»3- STUDY OF ANCIENT I.ITEKATi RE. 349 J called iVc/)fl« lul the entire cccnt \vritL'r>, I view as iL- ancl adniittc'l otyMivfJs in Inc rs, Faesi''^ ami this sense, ami lessor Gedtles* n the Odyssey lympos." '1 es- se all the mo 10 )de of the g(HU cpect to find it, :onsidered with crods and men, le Oilyssey, p. xvii. iicr," p. 510. Gcckles' elaborate lilleid " is " a vori- inconclusive. The interpretation than :<) a living bosom, or nothing at all to his Trofessor's iiistnic- »/<,' only to mo II lit,! ins, with ovpavis ' — -'P" Even the Vrofes- n merely " prcsump- book xvi. 364, tL'Us V v(as (H., i. 499 ; V. 754 ; viii. .3) ; and roArTTTvxo? (II., viii. 411 ; XX. 5). This last descrip- tion, " the Olympos 0/ many layers, or thickucssvs," is peculiarly expressive. Instead of signifying the "ridges" of a mountain or range of mountains, as Geddes and so many before him have affirmed, it ' The house of Ilephaistos in Olympos is i)lainly styled "starry." Uiuiy xviii. 370, comp. with 1 46, 14.S. Moreover, Aristotle, or who- ever wrote the '• Letter of Aristotle to Alexander on the System of the World," in one passage expressly idciUiiies Oiit-duos and OlynipoSy saying that for diverse etvmological reasons we < all the outermost cir- cumference of heaven bybf)th names. See Flammarioii, Astronomical Myths, or History of the Ilcavcus, p. 156. Even Volcker, ':\ first lay- ing down the thesis which has so misled all his successors ("dass Uranus und Olympus nie als synonym be! Homer gcbraucht wer- den "), frankly confesses that this is " gegen die bisher allgcmcin gehcgte Meinung ; " that is, " contrary to the opinion hitherto gen- erally held." Homerisc/te Geoj^., p. 4. With gods of Homeric size, a single one of whom required seven acres for his couch, the idea of placing the whole Olympian Court and Gotterlehen on the sharp, nar- row, clearly visible peak in Thessaly is ridiculous. - J'.uchholz [Horn. Realien, I?d. i. i, p. 3) declares the metaphorical intcri)retation '^ ztt ji^ekiinstelt,'''' for those early times, and roundly as- serts that, "according to the idea of the Homeric Greek, heaven is eine metallene Hohlku^eL'" He should have added that to the same infantile mind Aphrodite was a solid gold image {Odyssey, viii. 337)» and the voice of Achilles [Iliads xviii. 222) a brass projectile. 350 PARADISE FOUND. MJ pictures that world-old conception of a firmament, not singlc-storicd, but with heaven above heaven, to the "third," or the "seventh," or the "ninth." These heavens were conceived of by Homer him- self as in layers one above another, like the curved lamince (Trrvxai) of a shield.^ And what adds to tlie fitness of the comparison and to the fitness of the cosmic adornment of Achilles' shield is the fact that to the omphalos of a shield there corresponded the central and ever-abiding Omphalos of the Skies. 5. F^inally, our larger and more rational interpre- tation of Homeric ideas beautifully explains " the tall Pillars of Atlas," and solves the multiform per- plexities of the ruling authorities on this question. In approaching the study of this subject several questions occur to every thoughtful beginner, the answers to which he can nowhere find. For in- stance : How can Homer speak of the Pillars of Atlas, using the plural, when elsewhere in the early Greek mythology the representations always point to only one ? Again, if there is but one, and that in the West, near the Gardens of the Hesperides,^ what corresponding supports sustain the sky in the East, the North, and the South .? Or, if Atlas's Pillar 1 See Eit)mer's own rplirrvxas, 11., xi. 353, in just this sense. Com- pare the marvelous description in Plato's Republic, 616. Depuis had caught the right idea when he penned the words, 'TOlympe, compose de plitsieiirs couches sphcriques.'" Origine de Tous les Cults, torn, i., p. 273. So a recognition of the fact that the nine subterranean, or south polar, Mictlans, or abodes of the dead, of the Aztecs were simply the counterparts of their nine celestial, or north polar, Tlalocans. or heavens, instantaneously clears up the long-standing difficulties of the interpreters of that mythology. See Bancroft, Native Races, vol. iii., PP- 532-537. '^ Hesiod, Theogony, 517. Atlas pflegt immer mit den Hesperiden genannt zu warden. Preller, Gricchische Mythologie, vol. i., p. 34^' STUDY OF ANCIENT LITERATURE. 351 a firmament, ibove heaven, the "ninth." Homer him- ke the curved at adds to the fitness of the IS the fact that responded the the Skies. ;ional intcrpre- explains " the multiform pcr- this question, subject several beginner, the I find. For in- the Pillars of -re in the early is always point one, and that le Hesperides,'- the sky in the if Atlas's Pillar t this sense. C>nn- c, 616. Depuis had 'FOlympe, comP>.'^c les Cults, torn. i.,p. Dterranean, or south Aztecs were simply polar, Tlalocans. or ng difficulties of the 'ative Races, vol. iii.. Imit den Hespcriden \gie, vol. i., P- 34^- is only one of many similar ones supporting heaven around its whole periphery, how came it to be so much more famous than the rest ? Or, if Homer's plural indicates that all of them belonged to Atlas, how came the idea of one Pillar to be so universally prevalent .-' If the support of heaven was at many points, and at its outermost rim, how could llesiod venture to represent the whole vault as poised on Atlas's head and hands } ^ Again, if it is the special function of Atlas, or of his Pillar, to stand on the solid earth and hold up the sky, he would appear to have no special connection with the sea : why, then, should Homer introduce the strange statement that Atlas "knows all the depths of the sea"? This certainly seems very mysterious. Again, if the office of the Pillar or Pillars is to prop up the sky, they of course sustain different relations to earth and heaven. They bear up the one, and are themselves borne up by the other. Yet, singularly enough, Ho- mer's locus classicus places them in exactly the same relation to the two.^ Worse than this, Pausanias unqualifiedly and repeatedly asserts that, according to the myth. Atlas supports upon his shoulders "both earth and heaven."^ And with this corre- 1 Theo^ony, 747. Moreover, how could one limited being have charge of so many and so widely separated pillars ? " It can scarcely be doubted that the words ayj^X^ ixo^^fi^v, Odyssey, i. 54, do not mean that these columns surround the earth, for in this case they must be not only many in number, but it would be obvious to the men of a myth-iiKiking and myth-speaking age that a being stationed in one spot could not keep up, or hold, or guard, a number of pillars sur- ruuiuliiig either a square or a circular earth." Cox, Mythology of the Aryan Nations. London, 1870 : vol. i., p. 37 n. - " For that both heaven and earth are meant, not heaven alone, is proved by various poetic passages, and by other testimonies." — Preller, Griechische Mythohgie, vol. i., p. 34S. ^ Book v. II, 2; 18, I. One interpreter makes the profound sug- I!m I! i,i 352 PARADISE FOUND. \ OCi ! '"*■■'• ' more I am conviiiid i/> of the Supreme /■' ■• oiis 0/ the human r.i.c ured spiritual cotu^h LEliBL. crit Vkolc nnturali^te > lie I'hunuiuiti^, a driix h,iut : car il lui est im- nuniti, me fois qu'dle igations of re- tigations lying partly in the lich the discus- se have a most lucstions which Form, and the present time, It traditions of |ng commenced las having lost lugh sin. This Iprevailed from ]ong all nations [light extent as Conceive of the primeval divine fellowship polytheistically, and the monotlieistic peoples liionothcistically. To a niono- thcist it is significant thai .^'Cveral of the ancient nations, representing widely diftcring races, as for example the Egyptians, the Pemi?ins, and the Chi- nese, seem to have been more monolhei.slic in their earliest traceable conceptions oi religion than in their later and latest creed and practice. But wiih- uut dwelling upon this, it may be stated as a broad and impressive fact that, with the exception of a few speculative authors, nearly all of whom have lived since the middle of the last century, the solid tra- ditional belief of the vvliole human family in every age of the world has been that man began his exist- ence pure and sinless, and in conscious and intelli- gent divine communion.^ T/ii's /s the ptni-ctluiic no less than the Biblical doctrine of the Origin and First Form of Religion among men. It was remarked a moment ago that at the pres- ent time new light is greatly needed on this ques- tion. The need is special for the reason that for about a hundred years past certain speculative minds, oblivious of the early history of mankind, ig- noring the sacred books of all nations, despising the consentaneous convictions of all peoples, and more or less ridiculing the very idea on which religion itself is based, — namely, the idea of the existence and action of extra-human and super-human per- sonalities, — have undertaken to set aside the view which we have above described as the pan-ethnic doctrine of the Origin of Religion, and to substitute ^ Compare Lenormant, Beginnings of History, ch. ii. The Duke of Argyll's Unity of Nature. London, 1884: chapters xi., xii., and xilL 3^4 PARADISE FOUND. 1 2> 1 ct| Si ^1 • ! ERLpp o for it some other explanation, so framed as to make it appear that religion originated from man himself, apart from any di. ne manifestation, or teaching, or impulse whatsoever. The result has been a succes- sion of crude speculations, inadequate in their prem- ises and contradictory in their respective conclu- sions. Professing unusual philosophic candor, aided by the interest which always attends novel attem])ts to set aside the beliefs of ages ; adapting themselves to every class of readers, and especially to all the suc- cessively ruling fashions in non-religious and irrelig- ious current speculation, these writers have at List not only wrought a perfect confusion in this portion of the Philosophy of Religion, but have furthermore so degraded and bestialized their readers' concep- tion of primitive humanity, and so outraged all prob- ability in their descriptions of primitive savagery, that even from biological and sociological sides a strong reaction has already set in. It will be instructive briefly to review the history of these speculations, and to note the successive stages of ever-deepening error and the mutual con- tradiction of their much-admired results. The first of them of any note was David Hume, the English deist and champion of philosophic doubt In his " Natural History of Religion " (published in 1755), he lays down this as his first and fundamen- tal proposition : " Polytheism was the primary re- ligion of mankind." His first argument in support of this thesis is an appeal to the evidence of post-christian history. He puts it thus : — *' It is a matter of fact, incontestable, that about I/CXD years ago all mankind were polytheists. The ;d as to make man himself, ir teaching, or been a succcs- in their prcni- ective conclu- : candor, aided novel attemi)ts ing themselves y to all the suc- ous and irrelig-- rs have at list I in this portion Lve furthermore eaders' concep- .traged all prob- litive savagery, plogical sides a new the history the successive le mutual con- ults. David Hume, ilosophic doubt. " (published in and fundamen- ;he primary re- this thesis is an .an history. He 1 hie, that about lytheists. The EARLIEST FORM OF RELIGION. 365 doubtful and skeptical principles of a few philoso- phers, or the theism — and that not entirely too pure — of one or two nations, form no objection worth re- garding. Behold, then, the clear testimony of history. The farther we mount into antiquity the more do we find mankind plunged into polytheism. No marks, no symptoms, of any more perfect religion. The most ancient records of the human race still present us with that system as the popular and established creed. The North, the South, the East, the West, give their unanimous testimony to the same fact. What can be opposed to so full an evidence } " The force of this passage consists almost ex- clusively in its cool positiveness of dogmatic asser- tion. Plainly, the condition of the majority of man- kind 1700 years ago affords no just criterion by which to judge of the condition of the race thou- sands of years before that. Indeed, to any believer in historic evolution of any sort, it would seem an- tecedently certain that the condition of men several thousand years after the commencement of their ex- istence must be very different indeed from their primitive condition. But, furthermore, he grants that 1700 years ago the prevalence of polytheism was, after all, not universal ; there were " one or tw() nations " of theists, and even philosophers in other nations, who doubted the truth of polytheism. It was absurd, therefore, to talk of " the nnauiuious testimony " of North and South, East and West. The second point urged by Hume is the improb- ability of the supposition that " a barbarous, ne- cessitous animal, such as man is, on the first origin of society," a being " pressed by such numerous wants and passions," should have had either the 4 366 PARADISE FOUND. disposition, or the capacity, or the leisure, so to study "the order and frame of the universe " as im- mediately to be led " into the pure principles of theism." He grants that a careful and philosophic consideration of the unity and order of the natu- ral world is sufficient to conduct one to an assured beUef in the being of one Supreme and Almighty Creator, but he says, "I can never think that this consideration could have an influence on mankind when they formed their first rude notions of re- ligion." Assuming that the first men must nec- essarily have been "an ignorant multitude," he says, — " It seems certain that, according to the natural progress of human thought, the ignorant multitude must first entertain some groveling and familiar notion of superior powers before they stretch their conception to that perfect Being who bestowed order on the whole frame of nature." The force of this argument it is diflficult to see. It all rests upon two assumptions: first, the assump- tion that the first men were the lowest barbarians,— to use his own words, " barbarous, necessitous an- imals ; " and, secondly, the assumption that there was, apart from the philosophic study of nature, no other way in which they could have obtained a belief in the existence of the Creator. As no religionist of any age has ever admitted these assumptions, and as Hume adduces no particle of proof for either of them, this part of his argument is surely quite un- worthy of a professed philosopher. His next and last point is the impossibility of the loss of the monotheistic faith if it had once been reached by the earliest men. He says, — EARLIEST FORM OF RELIGION. 367 leisure, so to Lverse " as im- principles of id philosophic ■ of the natu- to an assured and Almighty :hink that this e on mankind notions of ic- nen must nec- multitude," he to the natural )rant multitude 0- and familiar ;y stretch their bestowed order ifficult to see. |st, the assump- t barbarians,— ecessitous an- ion that there y of nature, no tained a belief o religionist of umptions, and if for either of rely quite un- Issibility of the lad once been |s, — "If men were at first led into the belief of one superior Being by reasoning from the frame of na- ture, they could never possibly leave [have left] that belief in order to embrace polytheism ; but the same principles of reason which at first produced and dif- fused over mankind so magnificent an opinion must be [have been] able, with greater facility, to pre- serve it. The first invention and proof of any doc- trine is much more difficult than the supporting and retaining of it." Here our author appears to even poorer advan- tage than in either of his former arguments. In the first place, as before, he ignores the possibility of supposing a knowledge of God by means of a di- vine self-manifestation, thus covertly misrepresent- ing or evading the only point in debate. In the sec- ond place, the assertion that if the first men had attained to a pure theism they never could have left it and become polytheists should be compared with his own later assertions in Section viii. of the same treatise, where he describes what he himself calls the " Flux and Reflux of Polytheism and Theism." This section opens thus : — " It is remarkable that the principles of religion have a kind of flux and reflux in the human mind, and that men have a natural tendency to rise from idolatry to theism, and to sink again from theism into idolatry." The author then states his well-known theory of the origin of polytheism as the first form of religion, and his theory of the rise of monotheism out of polytheism. But when a people have thus reached a belief in a God possessed of " the attributes of unity and affinity, simplicity and spirituality," there ; 368 PARADISE FOUND. comes — so he declares — a natural relapse into polytheism. The explanation of this is given in these words : — " Such refined ideas [as those of pure monothe- ism], being somewhat disproporlioned to vulgar com- prehension, remain not long in their original purity, but require to be supported by the notion of inferior mediators or subordinate agents, which interpose between mankind and their supreme deity. These demi-gods, or middle beings, partaking more of hu- man nature, and being more familiar to us, become the chief objects of devotion. . . . But as these idolatrous religions fall every day into grosser and more vulgar corruptions, they at last destroy them- selves, and by the vile representations which they form of their duties make the tide turn again toward them." Thus monotheism and polytheism are, to Hume, two opposites, between which the human mind for- ever oscillates. This being so, it is plain that this oscillation is grounded in reason, or it is not. If it is grounded in reason, then primitive men may have reasoned their way into monotheism as their first religious faith, and still have relapsed into polythe- ism as the natural and rational reaction. On the other hand, if the oscillation is not grounded in rea- son, then, as by his own account all later religious states of mankind have been unreasonable, the first may have been altogether different from what Hume would have considered rational ; that is, may have been a state of pure monotheism. Such was Hume's attempted demonstration of the primitiveness of polytheism, and the whole of it. il relapse into lis is given in pure monothc- 1 to vulgar coni- original purity, otion of inferior /hich interpose 2 deity. These ng more of bu- r to us, become . But as these ito grosser and t destroy thcra- ons which they rn again toward n are, to Hume, uman mind for- olain that this it is not. If it men may have as their first d into polythe- ction. On the rounded in rca- later religious nable, the first om what Hume t is, may have monstration of .nd the whole n EARLIEST FORM OF RELIGION. 369 Five years later, in 1760, De Brosses, one of Vol- taire's correspondents, published his crude but note- worthy book on " The Worship of Fetiches ; or, Parallel of the Ancient Religion of Fgypt with the Present Religion of Nigritia." This was the writer who first gave currency to the word " fetichisni," and who first postulated it as the invariable ante- cedent of polytheism. De Brosses, however, was a professed believer in primeval divine revelation, and he made the Hebrews an exception to his general claim that all ancient nations began with fetichism, rose thence to polytheism, and tended thence to- ward monotheism. In the early part of the present century, however, Auguste Comte, ignoring any pri- meval revelation, elevated De Brosses' generaliza- tion into an absolute law of historic development. He gave the greater plausibility and influence to it by representing this law of theological progress as only part of a yet broader social law, according to which humanity, having traversed this "theological stage " in the manner indicated, passes next through a " metaphysical " one, and finally attains the " sci- entific " stage of atheistic positivism. In Germany, in 1795, Hume's opinion found an able representative in G. L. Bauer, of Altdorf, and ten years later we see Meiners, in his '* Universal History of Religion," repeating and enforcing the notion of the absolute primitiveness of fetichism. The rationalistic and pantheistic tendencies of Ger- man speculation about this time were, of course, favorable to any new theory which discredited the Biblical one, and thus it came to pass that before the middle of the present century the De Brosses theory, in its completer Comtean form, became al- 24 370 PARADISE FOUND. most universally adopted. Speaking of its preva- lence, Professor Max Muller says: — " All of us have been brought up on it. I myself certainly held it for a long time, and never doubted it till I became more and more startled by the fact that, while in the earliest accessible documents of religious thought we look in vain for any very clear traces of fetichism, they become more and more fre- quent everywhere in the latter stages of religious development, and are certainly more visible in the later corruptions of the Indian religion, beginning with the Atharvana, than in the earliest hymns of the Rig Veda." 1 For many years our works on primeval history have been saturated with this idea. Even profess- edly Christian writers upon the History of Religions, and upon Comparative Theology, have largely fallen in with the prevailing notion. As one has well said, "The very theory has become a kind of scientific fetich, though like most fetiches it seems to owe its existence to ignorance and superstition." For some time past, however, this long dominant dogma of naturalism has been losing credit with all careful students of the world's religions, and indeed •with the more thorough professional ethnologists. In his recent work, "The Hibbert Lectures on the Origin and Growth of Religion," ^ Max Muller, him- self for a long time, as we have seen, a believer in the theory, publicly challenges its correctness. In Lecture second, after rapidly sketching the rise and remarkable prevalence of the theory, he exposes, 1 Origin and Growth of Religions. London ana Isew York, 1879; p. 58. 2 Reviewed by C. P. Tiele, in Theol. Tijdschrift, for May, 1879. EARLIEST FORM OF RELIGION. 371 of its preva- it. I myself lever doubted d by the fact documents of uiy very clear and more fre- s of religious visible in the on, beginning iest hymns of meval history Even profess- y of Religions, 2 largely fallen J has well said, of scientific 2ms to owe its »> 1. ong dominant credit with all IS, and indeed ethnologists. ctures on the X Miiller, him- a believer in rectness. In J the rise and , he expos -s, Isew York, 1879 : 1 for May, 1879. with much acuteness and with his usual wealth of illustrative facts, the indiscriminateness with which the term fetichism has been currently used, and the worthlessness of evidence upon which Comte and others have relied. He sets forth, respectfully but strongly, the inadequacy of their psychological ex- planation of the origin of fetichism, and shows that even the West African fetich-worshipers hold at the same time other views properly polytheistic, or, in some cases, even monotheistic. Summing up his own conclusions, he says, — " The results at which we have arrived after ex- amining the numerous works on fetichism from the days of De Brosses to our own time may be summed up under four heads : — " First. The meaning of the word fetich has re- mained undefined from its first introduction, and has by most writers been so much extended that it may include almost every symbolical or imitative representation of religious objects. " Second. Among people who have a history we find that everything which falls under the category of fetich points to historical and psychological ante- cedents. We are therefore not justified in suppos- ing that it has been otherwise among people whose religious development happens to be unknown or inaccessible to us. "Third. There is no religion which has kept itself entirely free from fetichism. " Fourth. There is no religion which consists entirely of fetichism." ^ So able an exposi of the shortcomings of the fetichistic philosophy of the origin of religion, com- 1 Origin and Growth of Religions, p. 1 1 5. 372 PARADISE FOUND. %p, J ^M( '■! ■^} ■!■ ^^^ • GCi ! ^ ^i • , \ .; o> o. *ji ' cc i P 1 1 ing from the pen of a scholar so widely and deserv- edly revered, cannot fail to produce in the world of general readers and second-hand writers a profound and wholesome impression. Probably the work will fail of becoming " epoch-making " solely in conse- quence of something for which the author is not re- sponsible, namely, the fact that in discussing to-day this dogma of primitive fetichism one is really deal- ing with an issue which in advanced circles is al- ready dead. Even Mr. Andrew Lang, perhaps the most antagonistic of all Professor Miiller's review- ers, is not himself willing to make fetichism the " first * moment ' in the development of religion." ^ Ten or fifteen years earlier the polemic would have done many times the good it can now. During this period a decided change has taken place. There re- mained a decade or two ago a further step, and but one further step, for the advocates of the naturalistic view of the origin of religion to take. Hume had made polytheism the primitive faith ; Comte thought to go back of this, and to postulate a still more ru- dimentary form as antedating polytheism. It re- mained to go back of fetichism, and predicate of the first men absolute atheism. This various recent au- thors have done, prominent among whom, in Pjig- land, is Sir John Lubbock. In chapter iv. of his work, miscalled " The Origin of Civilization, and the Primitive Condition of Man,"^ he classifies " the first great stages of religious thought " as follows : — First. Atheism ; " understanding by this term not ^ Custom and Myth, London, 1884: pp. 212-242. 2 The first edition was published in 1870. Later echoes are heard in Mortillet, Le Prihistorique. See the Revue de VHistoire des Re- ligions. Paris, 1883 : p. 117. EARLIEST FORM OF RELIGION. 373 a denial of the existence of a deity, but an absence of any definite ideas on the subject." Second. Fctichism. In the state of primeval athe- ism men were " not without a beUef in invisible be- ings." They especially believed in human shadows, ghosts, and the people seen in dreams, etc., though these spirits were not conceived of as immortal, or as possessing any supernatural powers. They were feared only because they were supposed to have power and disposition to inflict disease, or otherwise to injure men yet in the flesh. Now, inasmuch as it was believed that by means of the fetich these evil spirits could be controlled and coerced to the will of the worshiper, fetichism, viewed in its relation to religious development, is pronounced by Lubbock "a decided step in advance." Viewed in itself, "it is mere witchcraft." Third. Totemisin, or Nature-worship. This our author nowhere clearly distinguishes from fetich- ism. In this stage of religious progress, " the sav- age does not abandon his belief in fetichism, from which, indeed, no race of men has yet entirely freed itself, but he superinduces on it a belief in beings of a higher and less material nature. In this stage everything maybe worshiped, — trees, stones, riv- ers, mountains, the heavenly bodies, plants, and animals." Fourth. Shamanism, " As totemism overlies fetichism, so does Shamanism overlie totemism." Here the gods are conceived of as far more " power- ful than men," as "of a different nature," as residing far away, and as "accessible only to the Shamans," who are " occasionally honored by the presence of the deities, or are .allowed to visit the heavenly 374 PARADISE FOUND. i u. 'O M^ f i^ 1 1 t regions." This in its turn is pronounced "a consid- erable advance " over the preceding stage of relig- ious thought. Fifth. Idolatryy or Anthropomorphism. Here "the gods take still more completely the nature of men, being, however, more powerful. They are still amenable to persuasion ; they are a part of Nature, and not creators. They are represented by images or idols." Sixth. To the sixth stage no name is given ; but it is described as one in which " the deity is re- garded as the author, not merely a part, of Nature. He becomes for the first time a really supernatural being." Seventh. In this last and highest slage, which he also leaves unchristened, morality becomes " for the first time associated with religion." ^ We will not stop to criticise in detail this ex- tremely confused and ill-named classification, or the assumptions on which it rosts. Its most charactrr- istic feature is its postulation of universal primitive atheism as antedating every form of religious devel- opment in our race. So far as he rested this dogma either upon the afifirmed absence of all religious be- liefs and usages among the lowest savages of to-day, or upon the principle that the religious conceptions of a people are always in exact proportion to its degree of civilization, his refutation quickly began. The next year after the publication of his work, in a learned treatise on " Primitive Culture," E. B. Tylor challenged several of Lubbock's authorities for the statement that non-religious tribes have been found, while in his new work on " The Human Species," * Chaps, iv.-vi. If I ed "a consid- itage of relig- >hism. Here the nature oi They are still art of Nature, ted by images ; is given ; but he deity is re- art, of Nature. ly supernatural i'.age, which he comes *• for the EARLIEST FOKM OF RELIGION. 375 1879, the learned and able Professor of Anthro- polo^^y in the Paris Museum of Natural History, Oiiatrefages, went yet further, not only maintaining with Tylor that no atheistic tribe of savages has yet been discovered, but also expressly denying the proposition that elevation of religious conceptions invariably corresponds to the elevation of a peo- ple in the scale of general civilization or knowl- edge of the arts. The fact that these objections to the hypothesis of primitive atheism came, not from theologians, but from scientific men, — from fellow- students in the fields of anthropology and ethnology, — gave them, with many, all the greater weight.^ The careful reader, however, cannot fail to see that the only difference between Lubbock and some of his critics is merely one of name, and not of thing ; that the alleged primitive state which he calls atheistic exactly answers to what Tylor and Darwin would describe as the earliest form of animistic religion, and to what Herbert Spencer would call the first rudimentary beginnings of ghost and ancestor wor- ship. Nor can we fail to see that the consistent Darwinian evolutionist must place the beginnings of human history so near the plane of the brute-life as to make it almost certain that its first stage was truly non-theistic, if not, indeed, altogether non-re- ligious. Precisely at this point notice should be taken of the elaborate work of Otto Caspari, of Heidelberg, entitled " Die Urgeschichte der Menschhcit, mit 1 Professor Roskoff has done Mr. Lubbock the honor to take up every tribe and people, in the extended list which the latter had claimed as non-religious, and to exhibit in every case evidence of their religious character. See his work, Das Religionswesen der rohesten i^aturvblker. Leipsic, 1880. I ! 376 PARADISE FOUND. { 4 t I Riicksicht auf die natiirlichc ICntwickelungdcs friihu ston Gcistcslcbcns" ("The Primitive History uf Maii- kiiiti, with Respect to the Natural ICvolutioii of tiic Earliest Si)iritiial Life)." This tvvo-volunied treati.sc was issued at I.eipsic in 1 872, and reached a second edition in 1877. A very lar^^c portion of it is de- voted to the ex[)osition of the author's view of tlio orii^in and natural evolution of religion in the early history of the race. This view is characterizLxl by an orip^inality and elaborated with an ingenuity which render the book as fascinating to the student as the most absorbing romance. The author is a pure and professetl evolutionist, but instead of at- tem[)ting to solve his problem with Lyell and liroca from the data of Paleontology, or with Darwin and Hackel from the data of Zoology, or with Huxley and Bastian from the data of Biology, or with lAIu!- ler and Noire from the data of Philology, or with Prichard and Peschel from the data of ICthnolo^v, or with Tylor and Lubbock from the data of Cul- ture-History, or with Waitz and Topinard from the data of General Anthropology, he approaches it and grapples with it as a problem for that higher and broader science to which all of the above are tribu- tary, — the science to which its German originators have given the name Volkcr-Psychologic (Ethnic or Anthropic Psychology). He cannot consider tlie| problem solved until, beginning with the psych(dog- ical facts of brute-life, we are able to repreiiciit to I ourselves the successive steps and stages by which the originally animal mind slowly evolved all the spiritual and religious conceptions, emotions, habits, j and ideals of the historic and actual human race. His own attempt to do this is not free from arbitrary EARLIEST FORM OF RELKJION. 377 [un^ dcs friib-:- iistory of Mi^ii- ;olutu)n of the )lumccl trcatUc ached a second ion of it is tic- )r's view of the on in the early s cbaractcri/.cd .h an inj:;cnuiiy r to the studonl hic author is a It instead o[ at- LycU and Bv^ca /itii Darwin and or wilh Huxley )oy, or with J^lul- hilology, or \vith |ta of EthnoU>;4y, the data of Cul- ppinard from the Lpproacbcs it and that higher and above are tvibu- rman originators wh\^ic (Ethnic or ;ot consider tliel ;h the psych( dog- to represent to I stages by whidi evolved all the emotions, habits, ^ual human race, ee from arbitrary assumptions or inconsistencies, but, as a whole, it is a marvel of subtile analysis and constructive ability. hi contrast with it the expositions of Hume and Lubbf)ck appear as clumsy and grotcscpie as the early the >ries*of geology, described in Goldsmith's " Book ol Nature," now look to the modern student. One of the oldest of the anti-supernaturalist ex- planations of the origin of religion is that which ascribes it to the ignorant and superstitious fears of earliest men. " rriimis in orbc dcos fecit timnr," wrote Petronius, and Lucretius' fuller exposition of the same notion is familiar. No such explanation satisfies Caspari, He cannot conceive how fear could ever become that compound of reverence and love which is of the essence of religion. Fear simply prompts the brute to shun, as far as may be, the object feared. Equally unsatisfactory is the notion that the heavenly bodies and the sublimer phenom- ena of nature inspired the awe and curious ques- tionings out of which religion could have grown. The primitive man, like the anthropoid brute, took no notice of the remote and lofty. Nothing had in- terest for him save that which was perceiv^ed to be vitally related to him in the struggle for existence. The range of his conceptions and of his sympathies was limited to the objects which were his allies or his enemies in this perpetual battle. Religion, there- fore, is not to be traced to any inworking of nature, or of natural objects upon the human mind. It had a deeper and yet more obvious genesis in natural hu- man relationships. The first and root form of all piety was filial piety. The first object of truly religious regard was tJie parent. This reverential and affec- it IM il 378 PARADISE FOUND. tionate regard of the consciously ignorant, weak, and dependent child for the indefinitely wise, strong, and helpful father or mother is essentially religious. At an extremely early date it must have become ex- tended from the parent to the all-defending and all- regulating tribal chieftain, and to the aged and ex- perienced counselors of the rude primeval commu- nities. The natural tendency of uncivilized men to gesture-language must have produced habitual forms of rendering homage, — the germ of which we may observe in the homage paid by the bees to their queen, — and thus parents, chieftains, and sages were the first objects of religious reverence and homai;c among men. As yet men had no conceptions of nature as a whole, no intellectual interest in stars, or trees, or animals, no mental provocation to worship anything else than '^ the ethically exalted,' as it ap- peared in the narrow circle of the family and tril^al life. There was no thought of an unseen world, no idea of souls, no proper conception even of death. The dead man was supposed to be simply asleep, or in a long swoon. Being self-evidently helpless for the present, like a sick member of the family, he called out natural pity and care. Food and drink were placed in readiness against his awakening. If he had to be left behind, he was put in a cave to protect him against wild beasts, and his weapons were left for his use. On the basis of this nafve conception of things the rise of animal worship first becomes conceivable. The beast which has devoured a man, living or dead, is now as much man as beast. The man has not ceased to be ; he has simply blended his life in that of the beast, and become a " man-beast." The fcrcc- EARLIEST FORM OF RELIGION. 379 orant, weak, wise, strong, dUy religious. re become ex- iding and all- aged and ex- Lieval commu- vilized men to habitual forms ,vhich we may bees to their md sages were :e and homai;e conceptions of rest in stars, or :ion to worship xltcd:' as it ap- Lmily and tribal nseen world, no even of death, mply asleep, or [tly helpless for the family, be bod and drink awakening. If At in a cave to d his weapons Ion of things the les conceivable. I, living or dead, le man has not his life in that 1st." The feroc- ity of the new compound is easily mistaken for an angry wish on the part of the late man to take ven- ircance on his relatives or associates for not havinor more effectually protected him from the devouring animal. But if the "man-beast" is human enough to remember and avenge such real or supposed neg- lects on the part of his late friends, he must be hu- man enough to recognize and appreciate any well- meant attempts to appease his anger and propitiate his favor. Hence a natural basis, not for universal animal worship, but for the worship of the more common carnivora, and these Caspari endeavors to show were the first that attained such distinction. Here, also, is found the origin of cannibalism. A man has killed his foe. If he leaves him merely dead he will some time come to life again as bad as ever. If haply before this some wild beast devour him, he will then become a ferocious and malevo- lent " man-beast," — a worse enemy than before. There is no way of making the victory final and se- cure, except by eating him up one's self. Then the life and valor of the slain become life and valor to the slayer. Even the eating of others than foes is in this way made intelligible. As the Fan Ne- groes are said to eat — " with a certain tenderness " — the bodies of their wives and children, so the primitive man, seeking the safest possible place for the body of his dead friend, may have thought it a far friendlier act to eat him up than to leave him to take his chances at the hand of worms underground, or beasts of prey above it. Between the two mo- tives, the desire to appropriate the vital forces of the foe and the wish to do the best possible thing for the unwakable friend, our author thinks that 38o PARADISE FOUND. anthropophagy became in the first age of the world almost universal. The very piety of the survivino- toward the dead contributed to the dissemination of the revolting custom. Our limits will not permit an equally full account of the remaining stages by which religion grew to be what it has been and is in the world. Suffice to say that possible millenniums from the beginning of human history " toward the end of the Stone Age," there occurred the greatest revolution in human thought and belief and life which the race has yet witnessed. This was brought about by the rise and adoption of the belief that trees and men and beasts — in fine, all natural objects — are possessed of invisible, impalpable, vital principles, souls. That which produced and supported this strange, new no- tion was a discovery which, estimated by the breadth and profoundness of its influence, must be placed at the head of all others, — the discovery, namely, of the art of kindling fire. This mysterious and novel power of evoking what seemed a bright and living being from the realm of the invisible, by means of the "fire-drill," half bewildered even the priestly caste, in whose hands the awful secret lay. Their attempts to use it led to Shamanism and a sincere magic. By means of the observed vital heat of living things and the coldness of the dead the newi element was quickly identified with the inner es- sence of life itself, and the new art the more com- mended to universal attention by means of its be neficent applications in the hands of the Flamens,! or Fire-priests, to the purposes of healing. The same identification of heat and life soon associatedj phallus and fire-drill, and introduced the strange andl EARLIEST FORM OF RELIGION. 381 ; of the world the surviving;- ^semination of y full account ion grew to be Suffice to say beginning of le Stone Age." ion in human le race has yet by the rise and men and beasts e possessed of s, souls. That .trange, new no- \ by the breadth .ust be placed at very, namely, of prions and novel [right and living ke, by means of en the priestly |cret lay. Their rii and a sincere [d vital heat ofi .edead the new! jh the inner es-| , the more com-] neans of its be- |of the Flamens, healing. The! soon associated! the strange andl apparently monstrous aberration of phallic worship. Under these new ideas it was only natural that sun and star and lightning flash should come to have a new significance for man, and make their impress on religion. Animal worship was profoundly mod- ified in ways ingeniously set forth. The simple oblations of the earlier period give place to sacri- fices to fire, and to the heavenly bodies. So strong is the desire to become transformed into white, flaming spirits, and to be joined to the supernal fellowship of such, that men bring themselves as offerings, and seek transfiguration in the holy altar flames. Hence human sacrifices ; hence also in- cremation of the dead. In time, the idea of the soul takes on greater and greater definiteness ; so also the idea of the immaterial supersensual gods. The long-continued stimulation of the imagination renders myth-constructions possible. Some of the great priesthoods of history invent hieroglyphic and alphabetic writing, and in time there naturally fol- low sacred books, co^mogonies, codes of religious laws, etc., etc. The magic wand of the first fire- bringer has at last created a spiritual and unseen counterpart to the world which is seen. In this enchanted world we live to-day ; the lowest of us showing our faith by superstitious fetichism, the highest of us by attempts at a purely spiritual wor- ship. That highest Christian conception, " God is light, and in Him is no darkness at all," is simply the culmination of a mode of thinking which started ages ago with the spark which some savage prehis- toric fiint-chipper struck out of the flinty stone. ^ ^ Very similar to Caspari's view is that set forth by Professor J. Frohschammer in his late work, Die Genesis der Menschheit. Miinchen, 1883 ; pp. 6S-3S1. 382 PARADISE FOUND. ) .! .! The brevity of this sketch of Caspari's theory ren- ders it impossible to do full justice to the skill and plausibility with which he has elaborated it. Still less have we space for that detailed review which would be needed were we to undertake a refutation of the scheme in part or whole. In striking opposition to the theory of Caspar! stands that of Jules Baissac, elaborated in his " Ori- gines de la Religion." ^ He, too, begins with primi- tive animality, and proposes to trace the rise and natural evolution of religion from that far-off start- ing-point of the human race. But, instead of mag- nifying the initial influence of a pure domestic liie in Caspari's truly German method, Baissac — in a manner characteristically French, shall we say.? — starts with a deification of mere maternity, con- ceived of as self-originating and self-sufficing. This form of religion prevailed during the remote period anterior to the time when it was discovered that males had any participation in the procreation of the species. The religious symbols of that far-off age were "les elevations et tumescences terrestres, natu- relles ou artificielles, et les cavites souterraines ; Ics tumescences comme image du sein maternel en etat de pregnation et les profondeurs et cavites comme ventre sacre de la divine mere. De la le culte des ballons ou montagnes a croupe arrondie ; de la le symbolisme des tumuli, des pyramides, des grottcs, des puits, des labyrinthes, des dolmens." In tiiis period all motherhood is divine, and all life and change in nature are mentally represented as a spontaneous, and exclusively female, conceiving and bringing forth. 1 Paris, 2 tomes, t877. Compare Baring-Gould, Religious Belief. New York, 1S70: Part I., pp 411-414. EARLIEST FORM OF RELIGION. 383 ; theory ren- he skill and :ed it. Still eview which a refutation y of Caspari in his " Oii- s with primi- the rise and , far-off start- stead of mai;- domestic hie Jaissac — ■ in a ai we say? — laternity, con- Lifhcing. This remote period [iscovered that reation of the at far-off a-e rrestres, natu- [terraines ; Ics .ternel en etat avit^s comme lla le culte des die ; de la le s, des grottcs, :ns." In this all life and esented as a [onceiving and I, Religious Bcl'-cj- In the second period, which is still anterior to the idea of marriage and to the establishment of the idea of personal property or individual rights, the function of the male principle has been discovered ; and now Nature, the divine mother, is conceived of as analogous to a woman of the period, — a mother fecundated only by male energy, but by male energy from any quarter. To use Baissac's own terms, she is a " prostitu'ie divine, ayant son symbole dans la tcrre ouverte a tons les germes." ^ In the third period the two principles are brought into a relation of equality, and now the divine be- comes hermaphrodite. In the fourth the male principle is given priority, the religious symbols of maternity give place to the phallic symbols, the institutions of marriage and property arise, the power of atmospheric and celes- tial divinities begins to supersede that of earth- spirits. The fifth stage is marked by the entire predominance of these celestial divinities and the defmite rejection of the ancient chthonian and sub- terranean powers. In the sixth comes the final separation of the Pleaven and the Earth, the idea of creation, and the idea of an almighty and transcend- ent Creator of all things. The manner in which the author elaborates this remarkable interpretation of the history and symbol- ism of religion, through two octavo volumes of 300 pages each, is as ingenious as it is disgusting. Behold the savory outcome of these successive philosophic and scientific rebellions against history ! And whom of all these wise men of the West shall we follow } The first form of religion, says one of 1 Origines, p. 131. ' - ■ I ill 384 PARADISE FOUND. them, was an animal hallucination of the early an- thropoids respecting sexual generation. No, says another, it was a genuine worship of invisible gods and goddesses, like the beautiful Olympian divini- ties of Greece, — a religion whose fruits in character and conduct compare most favorably with those of Christian monotheism.^ Absurd! exclaims a third. " Polytheism " is a very high type of religion ; men never could have reached that until after the inven- tion of the fire-drill, nobody knows hov*/' many ages from the beginning. Fools all ! rejoin the more thorough-going. Know ye not that primitive men were far lower than our lowest modern savages, — as incapable of any religious ideas as they were of us- ing the integral calculus .-* At the beginning of the exposition of these specu- lations it was intimated that their contradictory and incredible outcome had already provoked a degree of reaction even from biological and sociological writers. This reaction is too instructive to leave unnoticed.^ It comes from men who, religiously or theologically speaking, seem in full sympathy with the rejecters of the old Biblical and pan-ethnic faith ; but they find they cannot go along with these re- jecters without surrendering more than any biol- ogist or sociologist can afford to surrender if he would maintain a credible philosophy of the history of man and of human society. To a simple disciple of history the spectacle of their embarrassment and of their attempts at extrication is in an eminent degree entertaining. Indeed, the best refutation of whatever is wrong in all these new conceptions of * Hume's above-cited Essay, closing sections. '^ Compare Revue des Deux Mondes, April, iSSo, pp. 660-665. m j EARLIEST EORM OF RELIGION. 385 the early an- .n. No, says invisible gods mpian divini- s in character with those of laims a third. reUgion; men iter the inven- o\v many ages join the more primitive men 1 savages, — as ley were of us- of these specu- ntradictory and ^oked a degree nd sociological uctive to leave ., religiously or sympathy with ,n-ethnic faith ; with these re- than any biol- ,urrender if he ■ of the history simple disciple larrassment and in an eminent ;st refutation of conceptions of [sSo, pp. 660-665. primordial religion will be found, not in a blind and indiscriminate polemic against them en masse, but in showing how every departure from the traditional conception involves the careful thinker in perplex- ing if not insoluble problems, and how easily all the real facts on which these proposed departures are based can be arrayed in support of the traditional conception. To this task we turn. First, then, according to Genesis, the earliest rep- resentatives of the human race began their exist- ence in Paradise unclad, unhoused, and possessed of none of the outward and visible signs of what is called civilization. Had Mr. Lubbock been per- mitted at the time to visit the spot, he would have seen — so far as Moses suggests — no printing-press, no power-loom, perhaps not even a "fire-drill" or flint "arrow-head." He would have seen no god, no Miltonic guard of angels, no Eden gates, no tem- ple or altar. He would have noticed in the luxu- riant tropical landscape simply a wealth of grace- ful animal forms, rising in manifold gradations, and culminating in two fair human figures. He would doubtless have gone his way, and reported at the next meeting of the Anthropological Society the discovery of a new Otaheite, whose naked and art- less inhabitants were evidently at the bottom of the scale as respects "culture," and in the sub-fetichis- tic "atheistic stage" as respects religion. So do- ing, he would have committed no greater blunder than many of his favorite reporters have made in describing such people as the Andaman Islanders.^ 1 For the complete vindication of this statement see Sir Henry Sumner Maine, Early Law and Custom^ London, 1883, pp. 229-231 ; Quatrefages, The Human Species, New York, 1879, chap. xxxv. ; and 25 ;,i :H H !'',■ K1 i 386 PARADISE FOUND. According to the old conception, no less than ac- cording to the new, the arts were only gradually developed. Men were destitute of the art of metal- working and of all to which that was essential until the days of Tubal Cain. Musical instruments there were none until invented by Jubal. Everything in sacred Scripture indicates the kind of social and industrial progress for which, in connection with the beginnings of human society, one would natu- rally look. So far, then, the believer in Sacred History has no occasion whatever to disagree with the believer in Natural History. Hackel and Peschel and Caspari hold, with Moses, to the monogenesis of the race, and even place their imaginary " Lemuria" just under the northern portion of the Indian Ocean, hard by one of the traditional seats of Eden. Their account of man's migrations from that centre, and of his primeval destitution of the arts, conflict with no fact recorded in Holy Scripture. Neither party can tell precisely how long the period antecedent to the rise of the first great historic civilizations of Asia, Egypt, and Greece lasted, and neither can tell how long ago it terminated, so that even in their confessed ignorances both are in accord. But, secondly, the believer in Sacred History, He- brew or Ethnic, cannot accept the eagerly advocated notion that the intellectual condition of the earliest men was not higher than that of the lowest savages of to-day. Ignorant of many things those earliest generations must have been, but it is equally certain especially Roskoff, Das Religionswesen der rohesten Natiirvdlker, Leip- sic, 1880, and Reville, Les Religions des Peuples non-civilises, Paris, 1883, torn, i., ch. i. EARLIEST FORM OF RELIGION. 387 iess than ac- nly gradually art of metal- jssential until uments there Everything in of social and mection with e would natu- History has no he believer in el and Casprri is of the race, Lemuria" just Indian Ocean, f Eden. Their hat centre, and ts, conflict with Neither party I antecedent to civilizations of ;-ieither can tell even in their ird. ;d History, He- ;erly advocated of the earliest lowest savages those earliest equally certain \i mturvolker, Leip- non-civilises, Pans, that they must have been above the line which sep- arates stationary or retrograding peoples from pro- gressive ones. They were men capable of investigat- ing the powers and laws of nature, of originating arts absolutely new in the history of the world, and of making successive inventions which revolution- ized the social state. With this representation we should expect the Darwinian, on sober second thought, to agree. For it is a well-known fact that our lowest savages are dying out, while the men who peopled the world in accordance with the law of the survival of the fittest, at a period in the earth's history when, in important respects, according to Darwin, the environment was less favorable to the human struggle for existence than now, must have been superior to these de- generating and vanishing tribes. And as all evo- lutionists, in enumerating the qualities which win in the struggle for existence, lay great stress upon superior intellectual endowments, it is only a nat- ural inference that the native intelligence of the earliest men was at least superior to that of the low- est modern savage. Turning to the writers in ques- tion we find our antecedent expectations confirmed. Thus Mr. Herbert Spencer, in one of his matur- est works, expresses himself as follows : " There are sundry reasons for suspecting that existing men of the lowest types, forming social groups of the simplest kinds, do not exemplify men as they origi- nally were. Probably most of them, if not all of them, had ancestors in higher states, and among their beliefs remain some which were evolved dur- ing those higher states. . . . There is inadequate warrant for the notion that the lowest savagery has 388 PARADISE FOUND. always been as low as it is now. . . . That supplant- ing of race by race, and thrusting into corners such inferior races as are not exterminated, which is now going on so actively, and which has been going on from the earliest recorded times, must have been ever going on. And the implication is that remnants of inferior races, taking refuge in inclement, barren, and otherwise unfit regions, have retrograded." ^ In like manner Darwin himself conceives of the first men as capable of rising in thought above the knowledge furnished by the senses, as able to repre- sent to themselves the tuiseen and spiritual. And he expressly calls their mental faculties " high," say- ing, " The same high mental faculties which first led men to believe in unseen spiritual agencies, tlien in fetichism, polytheism, and ultimately in monothe- ism, would infallibly lead him, so long as his reason- ing powers remained poorly developed, to various strange superstitions and customs."^ Thus Darwin justly considers the character of the very aberra- tions of the human intellect in its infantile stage a striking proof of the loftiness of its powers. Lubbock ascribes to the earliest men a like ability to conceive of the supersensual and to govern them- selves largely by ideals. Though sometimes de- scribing the primitive generations as in a state of " utter barbarism," or as having been "no more ad- vanced than the lowest savages of to-day," this seems to occur only by inadvertence ; for in the later editions of his already quoted work, " The Origin of Civilization," page 483, he expressly admits and asserts that he does not regard cannibals as repre- ^ Principles of Sociology, pp. 106-IC9. 2 Descent of Man, vol. i., p. 66. EARLIEST FORM OF RELIGION, 389 :hat supplant- ) corners such which is now )een going on List have been that remnants ,emcnt, barren, ograded." ^ nceives of the ight above the as able to rcprc- itual And he ;s "high," say- ties which first .1 agencies, tlien ely in monothe- g as his reason- ped, to various Thus Darwin Ihe very aberra- iifantile stage a powers. len a like ability to govern them- sometimes de- s in a state of ' no more ad- ,f to-day," this 1; for in the later k, " The Origin ssly admits and ibals as repre- -109. sentativcs of the first men.^ On the same page he says, " It may be as well to state emphatically that all brutal customs are not, in my opinion, primeval. Human sacrifices, for instance, were, I think, cer- tainly not so." Caspar! no less emphatically affirms that the so- cial state of the North American Indians and of the Australians is not primitive, but a result of degen- eration. He says, " We know a succession of such tribes, of which, in fact, oxAy ansgcartctc vcrkommcuc Banden imd staatlicJie Splitter remain in existence, who, wild and savage, wander about in the primitive forests, miserably to perish." ^ Tylor takes the same general ground, maintaining that the best representatives of primitive men are not the lowest but "the higher" of the uncivilized races. Thus he says, "In a study of the nature- myths of the world it is hardly practicable to start from the conceptions of the very lowest human tribes, and to work upward from thence to fictions of higher growth ; partly because our information is meagre as to the beliefs of these shy and seldom quite intelligible folk, and partly because the legends they possess have not reached the artistic and sys- tematic shape which they attain to among races next higher in the scale. It therefore answers better 1 Let us lioj^e that it is by a like inadvertence, merely, that Profes- sor Sayce speaks of " the savage tribes of tlie modern world, and ihe still 7nore savage tribes among whom the languages of the earth took their start." Introduction to the Science of Language, vol. ii., p. 31. Compare p. 269, where, sjieaking of the mythopocic man, whom he considers a considerable advance on the primitive savage, the profes- sor says, " He had not yet learned to distinguish between the lifeless and the living ; " " he had not yet realized that aught existed which his senses could not perceive." • Vol. i., p. 113. M 390 PARADISE i-OUND. 1 1 II I' to take as a foundation the mythology of the North American Indians, the South Sea Islanders, and other hi^h savage tribes ivho best represent in mod- ern times the early mythological period of human history'' ^ In chapter ii. of the same work he presents the evidence that many of the very lowest tribes of tln' modern world have become what they are by degen- eration. But, thirdly, if the best representatives of th(i first men must be sought, not among the lowest, but rather among the higlier, of the uncivilized peoples, then surely we are justified in rejecting the notion of all those writers who, since the time of De Brosses and Comte, have maintained that primitive men personified and vitalized and fetichizcd all natu- ral objects about them. On this point the author of the " Outlines of Cosmic Philosophy" is less clear-sighted than his master, Herbert Spencer. Boldly and ably as he criticises Comte in some other particulars, in this Mr. Fiske surrenders to him wholly. He says, "We may safely assert, with Comte, that the earliest atti- tude assumed by the mind in interpreting nature was a fetichistic attitude." ^ Spencer, however, rec- ognizing the fact that the lower mammals, birds, and even insects are able to distinguish animate from inanimate objects, and that to deny this capacity to the first men would be to make them less and lower than animals, commits himself unreservedly to the view in harmony with that of the Biblical record. Quoting the stock examples of savages who, on 1 Primitive- Culture, vol. i., p. 321. 2 Vol. i., p. 178, et passim. EARLIEST FORM OF RELIGION. 391 »f the North hinders, and sent in mod- id of linnian presents the tribes of th*; are by deger.- Litives of the he lowest, but iUzed peoples, ng the notion ; time of Do that primitive ;hized all natu- '• Outlines nf ;hted than his lul ably as he culars, in this He says, ''We le earliest atti- Dreting nature , however, rec- nals, birds, and animate from his capacity to ess and lower ervedly to the iblical record. lages who, on first seeing a watch or a compass, imagined that it was alive, he shows the naturalness of the mis- take, and very properly says : " Wc must exclude these mistaivcs made in classing things which ad- vanced arts have made to simuK'Uc living things, since such things mislead the primitive man in ways unlike those in which he can be misled by the natu- ral objects about him. Limiting ourselves to his conceptions of these natural objects, wc cannot but conclude that his classification of tiiem into animate and inanimate is substantially correct. Concluding this, we are obliged to diverge at the outset from certain interpretations currently given of his super- stitions. The assumption, tacit or avowed, that the primitive man tends to ascribe life to things which are not living is clearly an untenable assumption. Consciousness of the difference between the two, growing ever more definite as intelligence evolves, must be in him more definite than in all lower crea- tures. To suppose that without cause he begins to confound them is to suppose the process of evolu- tion inverted." ^ This writer, therefore, whom Darwin in one pas- sage calls "our great philosopher," explicitly rejects the dogma of the primitiveness and universality of animism and fetichism among the earliest men. According to him, animistic and fetichistic beliefs were not '* primary beliefs ; " they were errors into which " the primitive man was betrayed during his early attempts to understand the surrounding world." "The primitive man no more tends to confound animate with inanimate than inferior creatures do " (p. 146). 1 Principles of Sociology, pp. 143, 144. !>i:>j 392 PARADISE FOUND. II Caspari, too, as we have seen, denies to fetichism a primitive character.^ Ascribing its rise to the new ideas which the discovery of the art of fire-kin- dling produced, he makes the worship of " the mor- ally exalted " {des sittlich ErJiabcncn), represented by the personal father, the tribal chieftain, and the deceased ancestor, far older, possibly thousands of years older, than any worship of fetiches. With Lubbock there is no moral element in relic;ion until it reaches its last and highest stage. With Caspari, on the contrary, religion is essentially moral in its first emergence, and has from the first moment of its existence an actual and relatively worthy per- sonal object. This is a prodigious scientific advance from the positions of Hume, Comte, Lubbock, and all their followers, and by postulating a high moral nature and moral life at the very beginnings of hu- man history it renders the Biblical conception of those beginnings not only conceivable, but even an- tecedently probable. Fourthly. The Bible and the sacred traditions of nearly all peoples present monogamy as the first form of marriage, ascribing all deviations from il to the ungoverned selfish passions of men. This view, Lubbock and the writers whom he has followed, McLennan and Morgan, emphatically reject. These theorists claim that among the first men the late ^ Compare the like utterance of Frohshammer : " Mit Fetischismus hat das Gottesbewusstscin und religiose Cultus nicht begonncn." Dk Genesis der Menschheit. Miinchen, 1883: p. yr. Also, the recent declaration of a learned Professor of Roman Law : " Die religiose Anschauung aller Volker ist, dcnke ich, ausgegangen von dem Glau- ben an Einen gottlichcn Willen, wclcher iiber Allen und zu Oheist waltet." J. E. Kuntze, Prolegomena zur Geschichte Rams. Lcipsii., 1882 : p. 23. EARLIEST FORM OF RELIC 10 i\. 393 , to fetichism i rise to the irt of fire-kin- of " the mor- , represented [tain, and the thousands of tiches. With religion until With Caspar! , iy moral in its rst moment of y worthy per- entific advance Lubbock, and J a high moral ^innings of hii- conception of e, but even an- ed traditions of iiy as the fust ions from 'U to n. This view, has followed, reject. These men the late "MitFetischisnuis uht begonnen." Dk Also, the recent vw : " Die reli;4iose ligen von clem Glaii- lllen unci zu Obcist \ite Roms. Lcipsiw Oneida Community system of " complex marriage," or, as Lubbock calls it, " communal marriage," uni- versally obtained. The appropriateness of the term marriage is very far from clear. The first communi- ties were mere herds, in which all the women were "wives" to all the men. In McLennan's opinion " the next stage was that form of polyandry in which brothers had their wives in common ; afterward came that of the /evirate, i. c., the system under which, when an elder brother died, his second brother mar- ried the widow, and so on with the others in suc- cession. Thence he considered that some tribes branched off into endogamy, others into exogamy ; that is to say, some forbade marriage out of, others within, the tribe. If either of these two systems was older than the other, he held that exogamy must have been the more ancient. Exogamy was based on infanticide, and led to the practice of marriage by capture. Lubbock, on the contrary, believes that the communal marriage, which he assumes to have been the primitive form, "was gradually super- seded by individual marriage founded on capture," and that this led, first, to exogamy, and then to female infanticide, thus reversing Mr. McLennan's order of sequence. " Endogamy and regulated poly- andry, though frequent," he says, " I regard as ex- ceptional and as not entering into the normal prog- ress of development." ^ Still different is the theory of Bachofen, set forth in his work entitled " Das Mutterrccl.t." Assuming sexual promiscuity as the primordial otate, he considers that under this system the womeu, instead of being rendered more and 1 Origin of Civilization, pp. 94, 95. Compare D. McLennan, The Patriarchal Theory. London, 1884 : p. 355. 'a I 111 394 PARADISE FOUND. more debauched and corrupted by the practice, as we might suppose, became on the contrary, in pro- cess of time, so refined, that after a season they felt shocked and scandalized by the beastly state of things, revolted against it, and established a system of marriage with female supremacy, the husband be- ing subject to the wife, property and descent being required to follow the female line, and women enjoy- ing the principal share of political power. Gradually, however, the more spiritual ideas asso- ciated with fatherhood prevailed over the more ma- terial ideas associated with motherhood. The father came to be considered the real author of life to the offspring, the mother a mere nurse ; property and descent were traced in the male line, sun-worship superseded moon-worship, men absorbed all political power, — in a word, as primitive " Hetairismus" was followed by the "Mother-Law" system, so this now gave way to the modern social state. The chief evolutionist authorities disagreeing so widely on this point, it is surely proper to look fur- ther. So doing, we find a number of at least equally respectable, scientific and speculative representa- tives of the evolutional school, who expressly ques- tion, if they do not openly reject, the dogma of uni- versal sexual promiscuity as the primeval social state. Thus Herbert Spencer argues through many pages of his " Principles of Sociology " against McLennan, claiming that monogamy must be conceived of as going back to the beginning. However unsettled social and sexual relations then were, '* promiscuity," he affirms, "was checked by the establishment of in- dividual connections prompted by men's likings, and maintained against other men by force " (p. Cid'^. EARLIEST FORM OF RELIGION. 395 practice, as trary, in pro- son they felt jtly state of [led a system ; husband be- lescent bein- women enjoy- rer. Lial ideas asso- the more ma- d. The father ■ of Ufe to the property and e, sun-worship Dcd all political tairismus" was jm, so this now disagreeing so )er to look fur- it least equally [ve represcnta- jxpressly qucs- dogma of uni- |val social state. rh many pa;j;cs ist McLennan, inceived of as fever unsettled I" promiscuity,' )lishment of in- [n's likings, and )rce" (p. 665). Again he says, " The impulses which lead primitive men to monopolize other objects of value must lead them to monopolize women " (p. 664). And again, •' Monogamy dates back as far as any other marital relation " (p. 698). Darwin takes substantially the same view, positively discrediting the alleged sexual promiscuity of the earliest communities.^ In like manner another of the latest of English writers on this subject, James A. Farrer, in his book entitled " Primitive Manners and Customs," ^ em- phatically rejects the notion that a brutal and forci- ble bride-capturing was ever universal, and denies that the customs relied upon by McLennan and others to prove its prevalence are to be viewed as a survival of such a custom. As to the absolutely first fo:ir« of marriage he does not express an opin- ion, b'l' ■ e theory of primitive monogamy would better . .e with his general representation than any other. The same may be said of Caspari, who, though he does not expressly postulate the priority of monogamy, yet ascribes to filial piety a role in the first origination of religion which seems to ne- cessitate such a postulate.^ So Mr. John Fiske's suggestion that the transition from the anthropoid animals to truly human beings was probably effected by the prolongation of infancy and of parental care incident to the slower evolution of a highly complex organism, and by the family life thus necessitated and brought about, is more harmonious with the doctrine of primitive monogamy than with any other. It would not be surprising, therefore, if this class of 1 Descent of Many vol. ii., pp. 362-367. 2 London, 1879. 8 See vol. i., pp. 322, 358, 367. i! |i 396 PARADISE FOUND. considerations, which we meet again in Noire s the- ory of the origin of language, should gradually lead to such a reconstruction of Darvvinistic sociology as will postulate monogamy as the one and only form of sexual relation by virtue of which man could have arisen out of the lower and preceding animal orders. Mr. Spencer calls Mr. Fiske's suggestion " an im- portant " one, and he explains it in a note appended to a significant declaration respecting the biological and sociological value of monogamy (p. 630). Else- where, after stating that " irregular relations of the sexes are at variance with the welfare of the society, of the young and of the adults," and after ascribing the gradual dying out of the Andamanese to their promiscuity of sexual relation,^ he says, " We may infer that the progeny of such unions (as had a de- gree of exclusiveness and durability) were more likely to be reared and more likely to be vigorous " (p. 669). Again, a page or two later, he uses this language : " As under ordinary conditions the rear- ing of more numerous and stronger offspring must have been favored by more regular sexual relations, there must on the average have been a tendency for those societies most characterized by promiscuity to disappear before those less characterized by it " (p, 671). But Spencer himself must grant that in the earliest ages, upon the whole, the race multiplied and spread from generation to generation, so that we must at least conclude from his own declaration, that the approximately monogamous societies and 1 Mr. E. H. Man's recent paper on the Andaman Islanders [The Journal of the Anthropological Institute, vol, xii., i. 69, and ii. 13) de- nies the alleged sexual promiscuity, and illustrates the worthlcssness of much of the evidence on which popular ethnographers rely. EARLIEST FORM OF RELIGION. 197 I Noire s the- Tradually lead c sociology as and only form lan could have animal orders. :stion "an im- note appended the biological p. 630). Else- elation s of the of the society, after ascribing nanese to their ,ays, '*We may ,s (as had a de- ity) were more to be vigorous " er, he uses this itions the rear- offspring must sexual relations, a tendency for promiscuity to rized by it " (p. ■ant that in the race multiplied lation, so that we ,wn declaration, |s societies and iman Islanders [Th V i. 69, and ii. 13) ^e- %s the worthlessness jgraphers rely. unions were more numerous than the approximately promiscuous ones. Well, therefore, may Mr. Lang, our latest advocate of McLennan's theory, concede the possibility that " man originally lived in the pa- triarchal or monogamous family," and seek to con- tent his fellow sociologists with the assurance that " if there occnt'red a fall from the primitive family, and if that fall was extremely general, affecting even the Aryan race, Mr. McLennan's adherents will be amply satisfied." ^ Fifthly. The Bible represents the earliest men as capable of entertaining the conception of a supreme Divine Being, the Maker of the heavens and earth, the Creator and rightful Lord of men. It represents them as capable of realizing the m^oral obligation of obedience to the Creator, and as possessed of free- dom to obey or to disobey. It gives us to understand that, as a matter of fact, a few then as now were faithful to their light and to their convictions of duty, while the greater part lived in conscious vio- lation of the promptings of their own consciences. As a natural consequence immoralities multiplied : these demoralized and brutalized those who practiced them. Then demoralized and brutalized parents were followed by children less well instructed and less well endowed than they themseh^es had been, and so, despite exceptional men and exceptional fam- ilies who were more faithful to conscience, the gen- eral demoralization went on. The song of Lamech, Gen. iv. 23, 24, is the song of a true savage, though of one who has known the law of right and duty. One can hardly read it without imagining it first sung in a kind of domestic war-dance in the hut of 1 Custom and Myth. London, 1884 : pp. 246-248. I! 5r t ii' .1: 398 PARADISE FOUND. !i its polygamous author. He glories in his homicides, and evidently belongs to those who with savage lust and brutality " took them wives of all which they chose." He was a representative of his Cainite kin- dred. By the mass of these and those who inter- married with them the Father and Lord of all crea- tures was ignored and gradually misconceived, and at last superseded by creations of man's own disor- dered mind and heart, until the pure primitive relij;- ion of the righteous patriarchs became a false wor- ship as irrational and immoral as the mass of those who gave themselves to its loathsome and cruel practices. With some populations this abnormal and immoral evolution proceeded to thoroughly un- natural and self-destructive results, such as religious prostitution, sodomy, human sacrifices, cannibalism, etc. On the other hand, then as now, fidelity to truth and goodness led its possessor to larger knowl- edge and to higher spiritual experiences. Then as ever the principle held good, "To him that hath shall be given." Hence alongside and within and above the historic evolution of a large portion of the race from evil to evil there was another evolution of a smaller but more vital portion from good to good. If Satan's kingdom steadily unfolded, so did also the kingdom of God. And while the one was in the direction of spiritual and physical degeneration and death, the other was in the direction of life and ulti- mate spiritual ascendency. Both of these partial or special evolutions were within and part of the uni- versal evolution of the race under its preestablishcd nature and conditions, one of which fundamental conditions is its immanency in the Divine. Such is the picture presented us by all the monotheistic re- EARLIEST FORM OF RELIGION. 399 is homicides, 1 savage lust 1 which they s Cainite kin- ie who inter- rd of all crea- ;onceived, and iVs own disor- )rimitive relip;- le a false wor- mass of those )me and cruel this abnormal thoroughly un- ich as religious ;s, cannibalism, K)W, fidelity to o larger knowl- [ices. Then as him that hath .nd within and portion of the er evolution of good to good. so did also the |ne was in the generation and [of life and ulti- hese partial or .art of the uni- preestablished [h fundamental .vine. Such is monotheistic re- ligions of the world, and it is substantially confirmed by most of the ancient traditions of the human race. Now in all this there is nothing inconsistent with any well-established facts or principles of science. Some authorities which Lubbock himself quotes prove not only that uncivilized tribes are capable of entertaining the theistic conception of the world, but also that not a few of them when first found actually possessed rem^. i^ably high and pure con- ceptions of the Supreme Spirit and of man's rela- tion to him. Thus he cites Livingstone as saying that " the uncontaminated African believes that the Great Spirit lives above the stars." In trying to prove the absence of prayer among certain savages, he admits witnesses who show that the Esquimos, the North American Indians, and the Caribs be- lieved in the existence of a Supreme Spirit, the " Master of Life." He even quotes the following objection to prayer made by Tomochichi, the chief of the Yamacravvs, to General Oglethorpe, to wit : "That the asking of any particular blessing looked to him like directing God ; and if so, that it must be a very wicked thing. That for his part he thought everything that happened in the world was as it should be ; that God of himself would do for every one what was consistent with the good of the whole ; and that our duty to him was to be content with whatev happened in general, and thankful for all the gooa that happened in particular." What civil- ized religionist, what purest monotheist, ever appre- hended or expressed this theological problem more clearly than did this Indian chief } Lubbock quotes another author as saying that the Caribs considered the Great Spirit as endowed with so great good- ^1 ■ .|. 1 4oo PARADISE FOUND. ness that he does not take revencre even on his ene- mies. 1 So Mr. Tylor allows not only that most barbarians are able to conceive of a Creator, but also that they actually believe in one. He says : — " Races of North and South America, of Africa, of Polynesia, recognizing a number of great deities, are usually and reasonably considered polytheists, yet their acknowledgment of a Supreme Creator would entitle them at the same time to the name of monotheists," if belief in a Supreme Deity, held to be the Creator of the world and chief of the spiritual hierarchy, were the sufficient criterion of monothe- ism. " High above the doctrine of souls, of divine manes, of local nature spirits, of the great deities of class and element, there are to be discerned in sav- age theology shadowings, quaint or majestic, of the conception of a Supreme Deity." '^ He illustrates the prev^alence of this conception by facts related of barbarous peoples in almost every quarter of the globe. Speaking of the re- markable clearness of this idea and belief among the New Zealanders, the Hawaiians, the Tongans, Samoans, and other representatives of the Polyne- sian race, he says : — " Students of the science of religion who hold polytheism to be but the misdevelopment of a primal idea of divine unity, which in spite of cor- ruption continues to pervade it, might well choose this South Sea Island divinity as their aptest illus- tration from the savage world." ^ ^ Origin of Civilization, pp. 374, 375. 2 Primitive Culture, vol. ii., p. 332. ^ Compare Quatrefages, pp. 486-495 EARLIEST FORM OF RELIGION. 401 en on his enc- lost barbarians also that they rica, of Africa, f great deities, red polytheists, ipreme Creator to the name ot e Deity, held to i of the spiritual ion of monothc- souls, of divine I great deities of iiscerned in sav- majestic, of the 1 this conception oples in almost iking of the rc- d belief among s, the Tono-ans, s of the Polyne- lligion who hold [velopment of a in spite of cor- Ight well choose (heir aptest illus- 375- 532- -495 He quotes Mocrenhout as saying : — "Taaroa is their supreme, or rather only, God; for all the others, as in other known polytheisms, seem scarcely more than sensible figures and im- ages of the infinite attributes united in his divine person." He adds the following sublime native description of this Supreme God : — " He was ; Taaroawas his name ; he abode in the void. No earth, no sky, no men. Taaroa calls, but naught answers ; and alone existing he became the universe " (p. 345). Though an outspoken opponent of the theory that polytheism arose from moral and spiritual degenera- tion, his own facts are so strong that for the expla- nation of some of them he is constrained to resort to it. Speaking of the "conceptions of the Supreme Deity in the savage and barbaric world," he says, " The degeneration theory may claim such beliefs as mutilated and perverted remnants of higher re- ligions, in some instances no doubt with justice." That a religion originally good and pure may de- generate and become corrupt is conceded even by Lubbock. At the close of his sketch of "the low- est intellectual stages through which religion has passed," he uses tliis significant language : — " I have stopped short sooner, perhaps, than I should otherwise have done, because the worship of personified principles, such as Fear, Love, Hope, etc., could not have been treated apart from that of the Phallus, or Lingani, with which it was so inti- mately associated in Greece, India, Mexico, and else- where ; and which, though at first modest and pure, — as all religions are in their origin, — led to such 26 402 PARADISE FOUND. abominable practices that it is one of the most pain- ful chapters in human history." ^ Reading this, the disciple of history simply asks, If men could so corrupt the originally modest and pure worship of Aphrodite, why not also the origi- nally pure worship of El ? Sixthly. The disclosure of the Arctic Eden solves all further difficulties in the Hebrew conception of i the religious development of mankind. This doctrine as to the cradle of the race con- cedes to the devotee of prehistoric archaeology all his claims as to the lowly beginnings of every historic civilization developed in our postdiluvian seats of humanity. It welcomes every revelation which fossil bone, or chipped flint, or lacustrine pile, or sepul- chral mound h^s ever made, finding in it precious illustration of those " times of ignorance " throui;h which our expatriated race has made its passage (Acts xvii. 30; Rom. i. 18-32). It is equally ready for every conclusion of the scientific anthropologist. By his own doctrine of the power of environment, and by his own picture of Mammalian life in Ter- tiary and Quaternary times, it constrains him to admit that if the Eden of Genesis was at the Pole, the Biblical picture of Antediluvian Man, with his extraordinary vigor and stature and longevity, with his extraordinary defiance of the authority of God, and with his extraordinary persistence in the in- dulgence of self-centred passions and appetites and ambitions, is credible in the highest degree. And that nothing may be lacking to its perfect confirma- tion, the comparative mythologist discovers that in this new Eden he is given the master-key to his 1 Origin of Civilization, )^. -^ip. EARLIEST EORM OE RELIGION. 403 ,e most pam- simply asks, modest and .so the origi- c Eden solves conception of 1 the race con- ixology all his every historic .ivian seats of on which fossil pile, or sepul- in it precious ■ance " through jde its passa-e , equally ready anthropologist. |f environment, [an life in Tcr- _strains him to las at the Pole, Man, with his longevity, with Ithority of God, Ice in the in- d appetites and degree. And rfect con fir ma- scovers that in ster-key to his own science, and that every great system of ancient mythology and of mythological geography must now be freshly and intelligently interpreted in the light of it. The old, old stories of a Golden Age, of the Hesperidian Gardens, of the Tree of Golden Fruit, of the Hyperborean Macrobii, of the insurrection of the Titans, of the destruction of mankind by a I-'lood, are history once more. Their authenticity as history is attested by new and unchangeable evi- dences, — by witnesses as unbribable as the axis of the earth and the pole of the heavens. No more can the investigator of the history and philosophy of religion rule out the ancient myths of humanity as senseless, or seek to interpret them as results of an inevitable " disease of language." No more can they be palmed off upon us as capricious variations cf that myth of dawn, or of the sun, or of the storm, which we are told that the fancy of " primitive " men is ever weaving. They are simply blurred chapters from the neglected and abused and almost lost Bible of the Gentiles, confirming and establish- ing the opening chapters of our own. Summing up, then, we see : 1. That in rejecting the historical conception of the primeval religious belief of mankind Hume took up a position which none of his own successors consider as at all tena- ble. 2. The further these successors have carried their revolt against history, the more have they become involved in contradiction with each other. 3. The more consistently and radically the dogma of primitive savagery has been carried out, the more I inevitably has it landed its advocates in the doctrine 1 of primitive bestiality. 404 PARADISE FOUND. ( I 4. In their eagerness to destroy the possibility 01 credibility of primeval monotheism, tiiese more con- sistent and radical tlieorists have inadvertently gone so far as to render a self-consistent evolutional biol- ogy or sociology impossible. 5. In consequence hereof the more clear-sighted of the representatives of Darwinism are just now deftly re-approaching the long-scouted historic con- ception, by representing the first men as superior to the modern savage in intellectual endowment, by calling their powers high, by considering their judg- ments of natural objects substantially correct, by admitting their knowledge of the true and normal form of the family, by conceding to them a truly hu- man appreciation of ethical excellences and obliga- tions, by allowing to them a capacity to conceive of an almighty Supreme Sj^irit, the Author and rigiit- ful Governor of the world, and by recognizing that nearly all religions present clear traces of corrup- tion. So far as principles are concerned these rep- resentations surrender their whole case. With these data Adamic Revelation becomes quite as pos.sible and quite as credible as Abrahamic, or Mosaic, or Christian Revelation. 6. The Anlijgc for religion is no product of age- long advances in civilization and in the arts. The unclad Adam of the garden was no more incapaci- tated for the knowledge of his Father than was that naked second Adam, for whose advent Mary pro- vided the swaddling-clothes. If the former sicni,S| too undeveloped to be an organ of divine revelation, | the latter, the highest of all these organs, the abso- lute Revelator, began quite as low. If nomad Arabs | of to-day can see in storm and stars sublime mani- EARLIEST FORM OF RELIGION, 405 I possibility 01 .icsc more con- ivertcntly gone volutional biol- •e clear-sighted II arc just now ;d historic con- n as superior to endowment, by :ring their jud.i^- lally correct, by rue and normal them a truly lui- nces and obli;;a- [y to conceive of uthor and rii;ht- recognizing that races of corrup- ;erned these vcp- :ase. With these uite as possil)le ic, or Mosaic, or product of ai;c- n the arts. The more incapaci- \QX than was that ilvent Mary pro-] tie former seems | Jvine revelation, [organs, the abso-l If nomad Arabs | ,rs sublime mani- festations of one almighty personal Power, why could not the nomadic Abel as well ? If the (iOS[)el mes- senger of to-day can cause the rudest Fijian to know God and to experience a sense of divine forgiveness and favor, why may not God's earliest preachers of righteousness have produced a like effect on sincere souls before the discovery of the art of metal-work- ing? Once let the anthropological and sociolog- ical postulates demanded even by Herbert Spencer be granted, and the ancient hi.'toric corccn;ion of Primitive Monotheism becomes bo'.h [OoStble '.iv.d eminently reasonable. As an escape fioin lb . con- flicting and mutually destructive theoiies of tho nat- uralistic school in its different departments, it pre- sents, on merely speculative gr'n.nds, ;/. posilive attractiveness. Its full array of evidences, however, is simply co-extensive and ideiuicr'-l with llic evi- dences for the reality of Historic Revelaticii as a whole. Everything which goes to snow that God has intelligibly revealed himself to men at ail bears more or less directly upon the credibilliy of a Reve- lation " in the beginning^ 7. Lastly, the Arctic Eden completes the recon- ciliation of Biblical and secular learning in their re- lations to the problem of the primitive relig'c n of men. As we have seen, both science and theology now find in this primeval Bildiingsncra a;; the Poie the one prolific centre whence all the floral and fatmal and human life-forms c-i : he whole earth have proceeded. In an " envi^oLUient" of such crea- tively potent, world -Ovcrfiowinf]^ nature - forces as were there, any ';ulmination of life's manifestations short of a ** Golden Race " of men, kingly in stature, Kishis in intelligence, measuring their Dcva^\^k.Q 1 1 ll I; . ft 406 PARADISE FOUND. lives by centuries, would have been an incongruity. That a loving Creator — creating because loving — should have put himself into instant personal com- munion with these highest of his creatures, moral natures fashioned in his own ima2:e and after his likeness, children of his love, is to a theist, even an ethnic theist, the only credible representation. That such a lusty race should have been open to temptation on the line of apparently innocent aspira- tion after still higher perfections, that they should have desired to "be as gods," that they should have coveted experimental and personal knowledge of evil as well as of good, — these are suppositions which no serious anthropologist will pronounce in- admissible. That the actual revolt of such an order of moral agents from the true law and basis of its life should have carried into its subsequent historic developments consequences of profoundest import is as much a necessary implication of the law of hered- ity and of the established constitution of nature as it is an instinctive inference from the preconceived character of a perfect Moral Governor. Given such antediluvian men, one must pronounce the history of antediluvian religion, as reported in the oldest memories and in the most sacred scriptures of hu- manity, a self-attesting chronicle. 1 incongruity, ause lovini;- — personal com- eatures, moral and after his a theist, even representation, been open to imocent aspira- at they should ey should have knowledge of re suppositions pronounce in- ,f such an order ind basis of its sequent historic undest import is he law of hercd- on of nature as e preconceived jr. Given such nee the history :1 in the oldest jcriptures of hu- CHAPTER IV. THE BEARING OF OUR RESULTS ON THE PHILOSOPHY OF HISTORY AND THE THEORY OF THE DEVELOP- MENT OF CIVILIZATION. It would be a valuable contribution to the Study of Civilisation to /uive the ac- tion of Decline and Fall investigated on a -wider afui more ^xact basis of cvidetice than has yet been attempted. — E. B. Tvluk. V or /ut certainemcut Ic premier metal que P on connut. . . . Les trois ages dcs po'etes, Vage d^or, Vage d'airain, et Page de fer sotit une realite, et uon une fie- tiony — A. DE RoCHAs. Besides their philosophies of religion, the apostles of universal primeval savagery have also their Phi- losophy of Human History and of Social Progress. B'irst of all, they would have us beheve that man has existed upon the Earth hundreds of thousands of years,^ and that for at least the first hundred thou- sand years, possibly for twice or thrice this period, 1 Revue Scientifiquc, Paris, September 22, 1883. - With an impressive attempt at accuracy Professor Mortillet says, " at least 230,000 to 240,000 years." Le Prehistoriqiie, p. 627. Haeckel says, " in any case more than 20,000 years," " prob- sblv more than 100,000 years," " perhaps many hundred thousand years." N'atiirlicJu' Schopftingsgeschichte, p. 595. Mr. John Fiske, building upon CroU, thinks that " the human race has covered both the eastern and the western hemispheres for thousands of centuries," and that the period during which man has possessed sufficient intelli- gence to leave a traditional record of himself is *' only an infinitesi- mal fraction " of the time. In one passage he fixes on the period of "eight hundred thousand years," and at one time Lyell and others favored the same duration. Cosmii Philosophy, ii. 320, 295. Com- pare on the other side Southall, The Recent Origin, of Man, Phila., 1875, ^"d The Epoch of the Mammoth and the Apparition of Man upon the Earth, Phila., 1S7S. h¥. I ) 408 PARADISE FOUND. he lived like a wild beast in thickets and dens and caverns of the earth. ^ His one occupation was the struggle for existence. The very cave in whicli his wretched young were sheltered from the storm was continually exposed to invasion by the cave- hyena and the cave-bear, fiercer and more powerful than the modern type. His multitudinous enemies were all provided with offensive and defensive armor, — with tusk and fang, with claw and beak, with lances steeped in never-failing deadliest poi- sons. To every foe they could oppose an almost impenetrable hide, a mail of horny scales, a solid shell. He, by strangest anomaly, was destitute of all. He was a naked and defenseless babe in tlic , Indian jungle of Earth's fierce and venomous car- nivora. He had not a weapon, not an implement with which to shape one. Even had he had imple- ments ever so good, he would not have known enough to fashion himself the rudest club from tlie branch of a tree. He had not yet " learned to look up " to where the tree branches grew. " Habit as ^, 1 " In the dim mist of bygone ages our ancestors lived the life of wild beasts in forests and caves." filisee Reclus, Ocean, Atmos- phere^ and Life, vol. ii., p. 190. " We must assign to him the posi- tion of a savage, but of a savage as far below the buffalo-hunting Pawnee as the latter is removed from the cultivated representative of the Caucasian race." Ran, Early Man in Europe. N. Y., 1S76: p. 162. " On such a view " as that " of the modern naturalist, savai;c life itself is afar advanced condition.''^ Tylor, Primitive Cnltitrr, vol. i., p. 37. " All our recent investigations in Europe into the state of the arts in the earlier Stone Age lead clearly to the opinion that at a period many thousands of years anterior to the historical, man was in a state of great barbarism and ignorance, exceeding' that of ilu- w(v/ 1 savage tribes of modern titnes.''' Lyell, Principles of Geology, vol. ii., p. 485. For a contrary view see the Duke of Argyll's chapter "On the Degradation of Man" in his Unity of Nature. London, iS'4; PP- 374-447- its and dens and cupation was the ^ cave in which from the storm on by the cavc- d more powerful Lidinous enemies ; and defensive I claw and beak, ig deadliest poi- ppose an ahnost y^ scales, a solid was destitute of less babe in the d venomous car- )t an implement ad he had imple- lot have known jst club from the " learned to look rew. " Habit as icestors lived the life Reclus, Ocean, Atmos- isign to him the posi- w the buffalo-hunting 'ated represcntati\ e of rope. N. Y., iS76:p. Icrn naturalist, saviii^c Priinitive Ctdliirc, vol, irope into the state of 3 the opinion that at a le historical, man was •eeding that of the viost j les of Geolos^y, vol. ii., Argyll's chapter " On turc. London, iS;'4; ! well as nature Vp,^^ i ■ '*°9 As we sa."- : if , S^h' "''"" "^^ ^^°^^^'^" '"at-the branches'of the fees ??■■■ !^' "'""-'^d heaven hiding thems We t^' .'^ ''"'"^ '° etliereal regions." indeed -, 'f "'"^ly remote these advocates, this Ci„t:"ri't^ '" '""'' «f not distinguish a trei w e, he' . "i"'^,?^" " ^°"'" at all certain that its outspread!, "^ "'^^ "«t -ere not the legs an Trm^ 7 ™ 7^'"""'""'='^^^ happened to grow in that n! , f fellow-man who a "^-"erallyinder'a tS:ST '" ^^^= Germany, Dr. Wilhelm uLZTdt r""''''"' " "^ his exact statement- .. „"""hardt. Let us note "ay be to us moderns, there"tn,T ""^""'^-'--ble it people were u,,aU, to \nX ^ ""^^ ^ "'"'^ *hen ti»n i.,^.ccu a Plant aZaluZr'"'"""^ *^'"- " IS somewhat to be fearf.i i . . sort have been a little precTn^H. • ^"'"" "^ 'his tcrminedly the tradittonl! de^ V" '"'^'^"'"^ =° ^e- fediluvian longevity. Forj tt "«^^°'-d'"ary an- of mankind were in truth ,,,1 •^^■^'"'^ generations Gehorenwerderw^Pr.?^"' ''°"' ^fenschen bis zur Pfl . /-'"cn, vvachsthum und T^^ ^v • -rnanze, habt-n v^escniechts so uberwiiltiffend inf a- ^^'"^Jheitsperiode cirrT ''""'^"" -••V.edrungen sefn" T'' ""^^^"^^^ ^^^ach! ter.schiede ubersahen, vvelche fene qn • f ' '''''' '^'^ ^^^Uber die Un- ;-• So unbegreiflich es uns S^'^^^sstufen voneinander trl . Wa rhe,t eine Zeit gegeben, i dt t't- ''T" "^^' ^^^ - '^ 'f d zwischon einer Pflanze und ei.Tem m "^" '^^^^^'^'chen Unter- '39. Berlin, X876. '^ ^'^''''"-■^^" ^oUzendorfT. ^ro. I i: 4IO PARADISE FOUND. !'*''«P* surrounded, and as to the possibility of their learning sufficiently early how to wring a subsistence from the unfriendly soil, must give place to the still more perplexing and more fundamental problem as to the possibility and credibility of primitive procreation itself. To say nothing of the question as to the whence of the ver} first of these feeble and down- looking intelligences, it is plain that if ever they did have successors to take up and carry forward and upward thei*- type of li^::, in some way and at seme time within the natural life of the first Individ- ualsy — incredible as it may be " to us moderns," — it must (happily for us) have dawned upon some man's mind, or on whatever then ocdpied the place of his mind, that between Daphne (or whoever was practically the first woman) and a tree sorne dis- tinction was discernible. And as the friends who give us such witless ancestors are prodigal to a fault in their allowance of ages of time whenever any ordinary geological or zoological result is to be reached without troubling a Higher Power, it seems to a calm on-looker a very penurious and illogical, not to say cruel, procedure to require these embry- otic representatives of incipient humanity to create, or rather to evolve and bring to practicable perfec- tion, the high arts and sciences of intelligent per- ception, of human as distinguished from dendrolog- ical physiology, of gynecology and obstetrics, — all within the few swift years of a modern human life- time. With "two hundred and thirty thousand to two hundred and forty thousand years " at his com- mand, or even " many hundred thousand," we really hope Dr. Mannhardt will see his way to reconsider this point, and to deal with the proiistoi of the hu- PHILOSOPHY OF HISTORY. 411 heir learning istence from the still more lem as to the 3 procreation Lon as to the lie and down- if ever they carry forward le way and at e first individ- us moderns," ed upon some .-.pied the place )r whoever was tree some dis- tie friends who pdigal to a fault whenever any esult is to be ower, it seems |s and illogical, •e these embry- lanity to create, icticable perfcc- [intelligent per- •om dendrolog- ibstetrics, — all ;rn human life- ty thousand to s " at his com- land," we really to reconsider toi of the hu- man world in a more liberal and truly evolutionistic spirit.^ Happily, the apostles of what De Maistre calls the banale hypothesis of primeval savagery have done their worst, and doing this have shattered their own party into an indefinite number of mutually an- tagonistic factions, each protesting against all who happen to be more thorough-going and radical than themselves. Thus Spencer is in array against Mc- Lennan, Caspari protests against Mannhardt, Vogt endeavors to outdo Darwin, and so on to the end of the chapter. The modern Babel is worse than the ancient. To one surveying at the present time the different departments of science which relate to Man, it would seem as though in each the break- down of the theory of primitive human brutishness and imbecility were complete, though not yet pub- licly proclaimed and acknowledged. A review of the situation, with authentic citations of the dissen- 1 There is some evidence that the geologists are becoming increas- ingly skeptical as to the time-pieces relied upon by the ruling school of paleontological anthropologists. For example : " The present rates of the retrocession of Niagara, or of the deposit of Nile mud, or of stalagmite in caverns, or of the accumulations of the rocks them- selves, or of the movement of glaciers, have been vainly used as natural chronometers, on the assumption that they have been going on at the same rate through all the past, and have been warranted never to stop, or to want winding up, or to go faster or slower than at the moment the observer was looking at them. Such attempts are so obviously futile that it is not a little strange to find them seriously made by men like Wallace and Mortillet." W. Boyd Dawkins, " Early Man in Amer- ica." North American Review, Oct., 1883, p. 338. See also " The Niagara Gorge as a Chronometer," by G. Frederick Wright, in the WMiotheca Sacra, and in the Atn. Journal of Science for 1884. Still more significant is the alarmingly revolutionary " Opening Address " delivered last summer in Montreal before the Geological Section of the British Association by President W. T. Blanford, F. R. S., and printed in Nature, Sept. 4, 1884, pp. 440 ff. . 5 if ■!' ?lllf' 412 PARADISE FOUND. tient and often contradictory utterances of represen- tative leaders, would be most timely, but the task must be left to other and more competent hands. Here, foregoing all exposures of such a kind, we will simply suggest to the reader a few obviously important memoranda : — 1. Considered in the light of antecedent proba- bilities, there is no discoverable reason, or apol- ogy for a reason, why the first Homines should have been but half-witted, any more than those perfect Nautili which, ages earlier, with astounding skill navigated the old Silurian seas.^ 2. Given Human beings, normally endowed at the beginning, and we see experience everywhere show- ing how all the savagery of past and present history could easily and naturally have originated simply from disregard of natural and moral law. 3. Given at the beginning nothing but Animal powers, and we find nothing in the whole range of experience, from the first dawn of history until now, paralleling or in any wise rendering intelligible the hypothetical biological legerdemain of Nature by which these zoologic powers were once, and once only, transmuted into Human.^ 1 Since these pages were placed in the printer's hands the follow- ing has appeared in the scientific journals : " A discovery by Dr, Lindstrom in the Silurian rocks of Gotland is worthy of special notice. In beds which are said to be the equivalent of our Niagara group ^ he has discovered a remarkably well-preserved scorpion. Dr. Tho- rell, one of the foremost students of Arachnida in the world, ami Dr, Lindstrom are preparing a paper upon it, and have given it the ii;iii:e| of Paleophoneus nuncius. No scorpions, nor indeed any Arachnida, have before been found fossil in beds lower than the carboniferous I deposits, in which some twenty-five species have been found in this country and Europe ; yet this Silurian example is more perfect thm any specimen of a fossil scorpion from any formation^ 2 " That man, equally with the monad and the Conferva, owes hisl PHILOSOPHY OF HISTORY. 413 2S of represen- , but the task ipetent hands. ,ch a kind, we L few obviously tecedent probii- eason, or apol- ufiS should have ,n those perfect istounding skill ^ endowed at the verywhere show- d present history originated simply il law. King but Animal e whole range of history until now, ;g intelligible the lln of Nature by once, and oiicc Lr's hands the follo^v• I « A discovery by Hr. | Lorthy of special notice. L of our Niagara group led scorpion. Dr. The da in the world, ami Pr. . have given it the name indeed any Arachnida, irthan the carboniferous [ave been found in tte pie is more perfect M rnicitionP , the Conferva, owes b 4. If Paleontology presents to us certain types of life which indicate in their successions a certain progress, it must not be forgotten that the same science presents us other types, whose successions with equal clearness reveal a progressive degeneracy and an ultimate disappearance. The movement may be forward, but it may also be backward. "As to the class Reptilia," says Sir Charles Lyell, "some of the orders which prevailed when the Secondary rocks were formed are confessedly much higher in their organization than any of the same class now living. If the less perfect Ophidians, or snakes, which now abound on earth had taken the lead in those ancient days among the land reptiles, and the Deinosaurians had been contemporary with Man, there can be no doubt that the progressionist would have seized upon this fact with unfeigned satisfac- tion as confirmatory of his views. Now that the order of succession is precisely reversed, and that origin to a protoplasmic germ, in which are contained all the possi- bilities of his after development, is no piece of scientific romance, but demonstrable truth. . . . All forms of protoplasm, however alike in appearance and composition science may and docs declare them to be, are not identical in their potentialities. They do not, in other words, all possess similar powers of becoming similar organisms. The speck which remains an Amoeba has no power of evolving from its substance a higher form of life. The protoplasmic spore of a sea- weed is a seaweed still, despite its similarity to other or higher forms of ])lant-germs. The germ of the sponge, again, remains possessed of the powers which can convert it into a sponge alone. And the differences between such protoplasmic specks and the germ which is destined to evolve the human frame can only be declared as of im- mense extent, and as equaling in their nature the wide structural and functional distinctions which we draw betwixt the sponge and the man. Of such differences in the inherent nature of protoplasm un- der different conditions we are as yet in complete ignorance." — An- drew Wilson, Ph. D., F. L. S., Chapters on Evolution. London, 1883 : PP- 74. 75- i 5 ! 414 PARADISE FOUND, the age of the Iguanodon was long anterior to that of the Eocene palanophis and the living boa, while the crocodile is in our own times the highest repre- sentative of its class, a retrograde movement in this important division of the vertebrata must be admit- ted." ^ With this agrees the emphatic declaration of Andrew Wilson : " A study of the facts of animal development is well calculated to show that life is not all progress, and that it includes retrogression as well as advance. Physiological history can read- ily be proved to tend in many cases towards back- sliding instead of reaching forwards and upwards to higher levels. This tendency^ beginning now to be better recognized in biology than in late years, can readily be shown to exercise no unimportant influ- ence on the fortunes of animals and plants." ^ In view of these facts of retrogression, the latest writers on the history of life on our planet, even when pro- fessing, with the last-quoted author, to accept of Darwin's philosophy as true, are at the same time very generally saying, " It cannot be the whole truth." 3 ^ T,he Antiquity of Man, Philadelphia ed., p. 402. 2 Andrew Wilson, Ph. D., F. L. S., Chapters on Evolution, p. 343 (italics ours). See pp. 342-365. The progress of paleontological research is constantly bringing new illustrations to light. Revue Sriot- Ufique. Paris, 1884: p. 282. Even in our late age of the world " highly specialized forms of life are in fact numerically a minority of living beings." E. D. Cope, "On Archassthetism," in W\q American Naturalist. Phila., 1882 : vol. xvi., p. 468. Compare same writer on " Catagenesis," in vol. xviii. (iS84), pp. 97c»-984. 8 What could be more striking and impressive than the following fresh testimony from this field : " The flora of the whole Paleozoic period ... is very distinct from that of succeeding times. Still, the leading families of Rhizocarpece, ^quisetacece, Lycopodiacecs, Filicece, and Conifer(S, established in Paleozoic times, still remain, and the changes which have occurred consist mainly in the dt gradation of tJif PHILOSOPHY OF HISTORY. 415 terior to that ing boa, while highest repre- vement in this lUst be admit- declaration of lets of animal DW that life is } retrogression itory can read- tovvards back- ind upwards to ling now to he late years, can uportant influ- d plants." 2 In le latest writers even when pro- r, to accept of the same time be the whole 32. m Evolution, p. 343 of paleontological light. Revue Sricn- age of the world rically a minority of 1," in the American »mpare same writer J4. than the following (le whole Paleozoic tig times. Still, the \icopodiace(B, Filii-'cce, |ill remain, and the dtgradation of tht 5. Again, by the same testimony of the rocks, life need not, of necessity, either advance or retreat ; it may stand as first originated from age to age. Says Professor Nicholson, " There are various groups, some of them highly organized, which make their appearance at an extremely ancient date, but which continue throughout geological time almost un- changed, and certainly wiprogressive. Many of these ' Persistent Types ' are known, and they indicate that under given conditions, at present unknown to us, it is possible for a life-form to subsist for an almost indefinite period without any important modification of its structure." ^ 6. All arguments for the alleged self-evolution of the Human Race out of preceding animal races, based upon an alleged universal and uniformly pro- gressive self-evolution of life-forms in the animal kingdom, are, in view of the above facts, arguments originating in ignorance or in fraud. 7. According to the teachers of the current ag- nostic anthropology and atheistic history, modern Man is the supreme product, the crowning glory, of the cosmic life-process, at least so far as our planet is concerned. Yet, by their own concessions, through all the unmeasured oeons during which this being has been maturing and perfecting, the Earth has steadily been losing its life-giving warmth, its once delightful and almost equable climate has slowly thee first families, and in the introduction of new types of Gymno- sperms and Phaenogams. These changes, delayed and scarcely per- ceptible in the Permian and Early IMesozoic, seem to have been greatly accelerated in the Later Mesozoic." Principal Dawson, " On the More Ancient Land Floras of the Old and New Worlds." Paper read be- fore the British Association in Montreal, Aug. 1884. Nature, p. 527. ^ Life- History of the Earth, p. 371, 2. :i I \ III III :i U: 4i6 PARADISE FOi^A'D. given place to Sahara heat and Arctic cold, its once luxuriant flora has yielded to types of marked infe- riority, and its degenerating fauna ceased to come up to the measure of the stature of preceding formsJ This is saying that one and the same secular Deteri- oration of Environment has devitalized and degraded all forms of life save one, but that, unaided and alone, it has elevated that one to the physical, intellectual, and spiritual kingship of the world.^ 8. In proportion as the discussions and conclu- sions of this treatise have vindicated and illustrated the trustworthiness of the most ancient Traditions with reference to the location of the first abode of the race, in precisely the same degree have they au- thenticated and verified those same Traditions as trustworthy sources of information with respect to Man's primitive state, his intellectual powers, and his knowledge of the Divine. Finally, the varying Power of Man over Nature, dwindling whensoever by vice he descends beast- ward, increasing whensoever by virtue he ascends 1 "The Pliocene period is the declining age of the European flora, the time when the climatic conditions are definitively altered, when the vegetation gradually becomes poor and ceases to gain anything. The progress of the phenomenon is slow, but it moves along an in- clined plane, on which it never stops. Those ornamental plants, timsc precious trees, those noble and elegant shrubs, which are now ( arc fully trained by artificial culture in European conservatories were until then inhabitants of Europe, but they left it forever. One by one the ostracised plants take their departure, lingering here and there on the road to exile. It is this exodus that we should have to des( ribe, if we could follow step by step the march of retrogression, and indi- cate species by species the progress and the result of this abandon- ment of our soil." — G. de Saporta, Le Monde des Plantes avaitt V Ap- parition de r Homme. Noticed in Am. Journal of Science, 1879, p. 270. 2 See above, page 100, note. riiJLOsopiiy OF history. 417 cold, its once marked infe- ased to come ceding forms. ^ iccular Deteri- i and degraded ded and alone, al, intellectual, IS and conclu- and illustrated lent Traditions ; first abode of e have they au- 3 Traditions as with respect to lal powers, and ,n over Nature, idescends beast- tue he ascends f the European fli'ra, Jiitively altered, when 5es to gain anything. : moves along an in- lamental plants, those [which are now cue conservatories were Iforever. One by one ling here and there on aid have to describe, frogression, and inch- 5ult of this abandon- \s Phintcs avaut rAp- il of Science, 1879. P- Godward, is to a truly scientific and philosophic eye full of significance. The slightest study of the man- ifestations of this power in history inwardly convicts us of unfaithfulness, as a race, to the true law of our being. We cannot help feeling that we ought to be lords of Nature. Our actual relation to the cosmic forces is not, and in historic time never has been, ilie ideal and true relation. It was no narrow- minded "bibliolater" who penned the following ex- pression of this feeling ; it was Ralph Waldo Emer- son : " As we degenerate, the contrast between us and our house is more evident. We are as much strangers in Nature as we are aliens from God. We do not understand the notes of birds. The fox and the deer run away from us ; the bear and the tiger rend us. . . . Man is a god in ruins. When men are innocent, life shall be longer, and shall pass into the immortal as gently as we awake from dreams. Man is the dwarf of himself. Once he was perme- ated and dissolved by spirit. At present he applies to Nature but half his force. . . . Meantime, in the thick darkness, there are not wanting gleams of a better light, — occasional examples of the action of man upon Nature with his entire force. Such exam- ples are the traditions of miracles in the antiquity of all nations, the history of Jesus Christ, the achievements of a principle in political revolutions, the miracles of enthusiasm, the wisdom of children. . . . TJie problem of restoring to the world original and eternal beauty is solved by the redemption of the soul!' The above is an utterance as true and deep as it is beautiful and poetic. And here in this ancient and Biblical conception of Man's relation to Nature 27 mt^^ 418 PARADISE FOUND. I is given the sun-clcar solution of the whole contro- versy between the advocates of universal racial and technological degeneration, on the one hand, and the advocates of universal racial and technological pro- gression, on the other, lioth parties are right and both are wrong. The one has vindicated and em- phasized one vital class of facts; the other, another class equally vital. Christian thought interprets and harmonizes them both. It shows us through all hu- man history racial and social and technological deca- dence wherever men have rejected or ignored God. It shows us, on the other hand, racial and social and technological progress wherever men have acknowl- edged and lovingly served that Divine One in whom we live and move and have our being. Here, then, is the law of true human progress. As Emerson in his more Christian moods would put it. The res- toration of the lost harmony between Man and his House must begin with the Redemption of Ids Soul. As to the primeval condition of our race, a truly scientific mind will wish to base its conception not on the air-hung speculations of mere theorists, but on an immovable foundation of fact, attested and con- firmed by the widest, oldest, and most incontestable of all concurrences of divine and human testimony. According hereto, as in its beginning light was light, and water water, and the Spirit spirit, so in his be- ginning Man was Man. It says that the first men could not have been men without a human con- sciousness, and that they could not have had a hu- man consciousness without rationality and freedom. It says that they could not have possessed con- scious rationality and freedom without the percep- tion of ethical qualities and the personal taste of PHILOSOPHY OP HISTORY. 419 vholc contro- ^al racial and nand, and the n()lo«;;ical pro- irc right and atcd and em- 3ther, another interprets and h rough all hu- nological deca- ignorcd God. and social and have acknowl- 3 One in whom y. Here, then, As Emerson out it, The res- in Man and his ion of his Soul. ur race, a truly conception not theorists, but on tested and con- iit incontestable nnan testimony, light was light, ■it, so in his be- lat the first men a human con- have had a bu- :y and freedom, possessed con- ,ut the percep- irsonal taste of moral experiences. It boldly asserts that, accord- ing to every principle of just analogy, the notion that it took the earliest men one hundred thousand years to get an idea of the conditions of normal in- tellectual, and ethical, and social living is as incredi- ble as that it took the first-born mammal one hun- dred thousand years to find its mother's milk. It calls attention to the fact that all the oldest historic peoples of every continent unite in the testimony that the first men had knowledge of superhuman personalities, good and evil. It dwells upon the equally universal tradition that primeval human life, while progressive in everything which accumulating human experience would of necessity improve, was yet from the first the life of decidedly super-bestial, almost god-like intelligences, as daring ultimately in evil as potent originally for good. It holds on the same authority that after centuries and possibly mil- lenniums of such history as great natures undisci- plined by virtue are ever reproducing, the social organism was incurably corrupted and the moral world-order itself defied. As Plato's Egyptian priests told Solon, " the divine portion in human nature faded out ; " the purely human " gained the upper hand," and, spoiled by the very excellence of their fortune, " men became unseemly. To him who had an eye to see they appeared base, and had lost the fairest of their precious gifts. They still appeared glorious and blessed, at the very time when they were filled with unrighteous avarice and violence. Then the God of gods, who rules with law, and is able to see into such things, perceiving that an hon- orable race was in a most wretched state, and want- ing to inflict punishment upon them that they might 1 ■ i 'i ' <» .i 420 PARADISE FOUND. i be chastened and improved," made fresh announce- ments of divine penalty and promise, to the end that haply He might recall them to that earlier and better life, when they had " despised everything but virtue, neither were intoxicated by luxury ; " when, being "possessed of true and great spirits, they prac- ticed gentleness and wisdom in their intercourse with one another ; " when they " were obedient to the laws and well affectioned toward the gods." ^ These gracious endeavors of Divine compassion proving fruitless, the integrity of the world's ra- tional purpose and significance could be conserved only by penalty, and by a new moral and physi- cal conditioning of the race. No change of moral administration could suffice, since every wise appli- ance of merely moral influence and instruction had been exhausted. A new physical environment and conditioning was essential to the new moral methods which, in this critical juncture, Humanity was need- ing. The inbringing of such a new physical envi- ronment would of itself carry to human consciences, individual and social, the profoundest and most ef- fectual of moral meanings. Both the physical and the moral change came in that world-convulsion which Plato calls "the Great Deluge of all." In it perished what Hesiod and O^nd and so many others called the " Golden Race " of men, — the first, the fairest, the strongest, the longest-lived of all that ever bore the human form divine. Under its waters were engulfed precicius accumulations of science, the primordial creations of art, the incunabula of all literature. So sore was this loss of man's costliest possessions that either myth or truthful history has 1 Crifias, 120. PHILOSOPHY OF HISTORY. 421 esh announce- e, to the end tiat earlier and everything but ixury;" wl^en, irits, they prac- eir intercourse ere obedient to rd the gods." ^ Lne compassion the world's ra- d be conserved )ral and physi- ;hange of moral ivery wise appli- instruction had mvironment and w moral methods nanity was need- ;w physical cnvi- -nan consciences, .St and most ef- he physical and world-convulsion :e of all." In it so many others , — the first, the !lived of all th^t Under its waters ions of science, incunabula of all .,f man's costliest Ithful history has filled the early Shemitic world with the pathetic story that the God of gods, while arranging for the righteous judgment upon the ungodly, Himself still so compassionated the successors and heirs of its unhappy victims as to command the patriarclial minister of His will to make an indestructible mon- umental record of all that the progenitors of a new Humanity would need to know.^ The new physical conditions under which the race was placed were the conditions brought in by the Diluvian cataclysm. They involved (i) expa- triation, the great Glacial Age compelling an entire abandonment of the mother-region of the human family ; (2) dispersion, the frozen and sterilized con- dition of even what is now the North Temperate zone rendering the struggle for the means of subsist- ence a most arduous and difiicult one ; (3) deterio- ration of physical constitution corresponding to the biological conditions of the new and deteriorated en- vironment ; and (4), as a natural consequence of the whole, an abbreviation of the normal longevity pre- viously enjoyed. Being at the same time reduced to the lowest social unit in the way of organization, — the Family, — and being, in consequence of the poverty of Nature's provision, compelled to spread in proportion as it multiplied, the new Humanity of " the world which now is " was signally guarded against the repetition of those insolent and God- defying forms of sin in consequence of which a nemesis of cosmical proportions had overtaken the antediluvian world.^ ^ Josephus, Antiquitifs, i. 2, 3. Lenormant, Bei^iniiins^s of His- tory, p. 445. Polar " Sippara" and the " Siriad land" arc one. - The events described in Gen. xi. 1-9 may have occurred "/« the I'ront-country " (v. 2). See above, page 221, note i. 1 1 422 PARADISE FOUND. Such is the conception of primeval human history which the oldest traditions of the oldest nations set over against this late-born dream of " primitive savagery." It is the conception of the whole Chris- tian world — of the whole Jewish world — of the Mohammedan world — of the ancient Greek and Roman world — of the world of the eldest Asiatic and Egyptian antiquity. It is the irrefutable Selbst- zeugiiiss of the Human Race respecting facts of which it has the knowledge of a living and most in- terested participating witness. ^ According to the results of this treatise the primitive seat of the world's first civilization was outside the boundaries of all lands known to record- ed history. This being so, Mr. Tylor's confident challenge has for the present quite lost its force. ** Where," he exclaims, — "where now is the district of the Earth that can be pointed to as the primeval home of Man which does not show by rude stone implements buried in its soil the savage condition of its former inhabitants .'' " ^ The " cave-men " of Europe can as little illustrate man's antediluvian condition as Robinson Crusoe's cave could illustrate Westminster Cathedral. Postdiluvian civilization, or barbarism, whichever one may choose to call it, 1 " The men of old time . . . must surely have known the truth about their own ancestors. . . . How can we doubt the word ... as they declare that they are speaking of what took place tn the family V Plato, Timansy 40. It is satisfactory to note that that undervalua- tion of oral tradition which is inseparable from the theory that man is merely an improved beast, and which shows its natural fruit in such free-handed reconstructors of history as Professors Kuenen and Wellhausen, has proceeded so far that even rejectors of the tradi- tional estimate of the Pentateuch and of die Old Testament are be- ginning to react restively against it. See Appendix, Sect. VII. - Primitive Culture, vol. i., p. 60. iJittmMi ORIGIN OF CIVILIZATION. 423 ,n history t nations primitive ole Chris- — of the Jreek and St Asiatic ible Selbst- or facts of id most in- eatise the zation was \ to record- s confident it its force, the district [le primeval rude stone e condition Ive-men " of ntediluvian .Id illustrate civilization, to call it, nown the truth U word . . • as \n the family V jiat underviilua- licory that man tai fruit in .-uch Kuenen and k of the tradi- Istament are bc- sect. VII. may be studied in "Stone Age" implements and products wherever we may find them, but never should it be forgotten that, back of all dawnings of new knowledge and new arts here revealed, lay the fuller knowledge and the more perfect arts of a favored antediluvian world. ^ Let no one say that the profession of such an opinion betrays the prejudice of a Christian educa- tion ; that it is ignoring the fruits of a century's study ; that it is simply repristinating the doctrine 1 In his late work, entitled India : W//a( can it teach us ? (Lon- don, 1883) Professor Max Muller well challenges the first prin- ciples of our dominant school of " Culture-students," as follows : " What do we know of savage tribes beyond the last chapter of their history ? Do we ever get an insight into their antecedents ? Can we understand what, after all, is everywhere the most important and the most instructive lesson to learn, how they have come to be what they are ? There is, indeed, their language, and in it we see traces of growth that point to distant ages, quite as much as the Greek of Homer, or the Sanskrit of the Vedas. . . . Unless we admit a special creat'on for these savages they must be as old as the Hindus, the Greeks, and Romans; as old as we ourselves. We may assume, of course, if we like, that their life has been stationary, and that they are to-day what the Hindus were no longer than three thousand years ago. But that is a mere guess, and is contradicted Ijy the facts of their language. They may have passed through ever so many vicissitudes, a:. '. what we consider as primitive may be, for all we know, a relapse into savagery, or a corruption of something that was more rational and intelligible in former stages. Think only of the rules that determine marriage among the lowest of savage tribes. Their complicatioii passes all understanding. All seems a chaos of prejudice, superstition, pride, vanity, and stupidity. And ycc we catch a glimpse here and there that there was some reason in most of that unreason ; we see how sense dwindled away into nonsense, custom into ceremony, ceremony into force. Why, then, should this surface of savage life represent to us the lowest stratum of human life, the very beginnings of "livilization, simply because we cannot dig beyond that surface?" A .lundred years hence the story that the wise men of the nineteenth century sought to reconstruct the begin- nings of human history by the study of the lowest contemporary savages will be one of the choicest of popular illustrations of the foliy of "ante-scientific times." 424 PARADISE FOUND. of a forgotten Goguet, and seeking to resurrect the long dead Banier. If any reader is tempted to such utterances, it is possible that an imaginary conversa- tion may help him to juster conclusions. Let us fancy ourselves at Cnossus, upon the shores of Crete, hundreds of years before the Chris- tian era. A traveler has just landed, — a Greek from Athens, intent upon visiting the celebrated temple and cave of Zeus. As he is walking to the temple he falls in with two companions, the one an intelligent Cretan, the other a tr^iveler from Lace- doemon. After due salutations they naturally dis- course of the laws and institutions of the country, of their origin, and of the origin of all states and laws and civilizations. And this we may imagine is a part of their conversation : — TJie Athenian : Do you believe that there is any truth in ancient traditions .'' TJie Cretan : What traditions ? At/i. The traditions about the many destructions of mankind which have been occasioned by deluges and diseases, and in many other ways, and of the preservation of a remnant. Cr. Every one is disposed to believe them. At/i. Let us imagine one of them : I will take the famous one which was caused by a Deluge. Cr. What is to be remarked thereon ? At/i. I should say that those who then escaped would only be hill shepherds, — small sparks of the human race preserved on the tops of mountains. Such survivors would necessarily be unacquainted with the arts of those who live in cities, and with the various devices which are suggested to them by interest or ambition, and all the wrongs which tlicy contrive against one another. ORIGIN OF CIVILIZATION. 425 esurrect the ptcd to such iry conversa- is, upon the )re the Chris- (l^_a Greek he celebrated ralking to the IS, the one an [er from Lace- naturally dis- )f the country, all states and may imagine is hat there is any ny destruction:^ loned by deluges •ays, and of the [eve them. ,m: I will take a Deluge. ion ? j,o then escaped [all sparks of the Is of mountains. )e unacquainted , cities, and ^vith sted to them by longs which tlicy Cr. Very true. Ath, Let us suppose, then, that the cities in the plains and on the sea-coast were utterly destroyed at that time. Would not all implements perish and every other excellent invention of political or any other sort of wisdom utterly fail at that time ? Cr. Why, yes ; and if things had always con- tinued as they are at present ordered, how could any discovery have ever been made even in the least particular } For it is evident that the arts were un- known during thousands and thousands of years. And no more than a thousand or two thousand years have elapsed sii.ce the discoveries of Dae- dalus, Orpheus and Palamedes, — since Marsyas and Olympus invented music, and Amphion the lyre, — not to speak of numberless other inventions which are but of yesterday. Ath. Have you forgotten the name of a fiiend who is really of yesterday t Cr. I suppose that you mean Epimenides. Ath, The same, my friend ; for his ingenuity does indeed far overleap the heads of all your great men ; what Hesiod had preached of old, he carried out in practice, as you declare. Cr. Yes, a( wording to our tradition. Ath. After ihe great destruction, mry we not suppose that the state ci man was something of this sort. In the beginning of things there was a fearful illimitable desert and a vast expanse of land ; a herd or two of oxen would be the only survivors of the animal woikl ; and there might be a few go.its, hardly enough to support the life of those iwho tended them. Cr. True. 426 PARADISE FOUND. Ath. And of cities or governments or legislation, about which we are now talking, do you suppose that they could have any recollection at all ? Cr. They could not. Ath. And out of this state of things has there not sprung all that we now are and have : cities and governments, and arts and laws, and a great deal of vice and a great deal of virtue ? Cr. What do you mean ? Ath. Why, my good friend, how can we possibly suppose that tnose who knew nothing of all the good and evil of cities could have attained their full development, whether of virtue or of vice ? Cr. I understand your meaning, and you are quite right. Ath. But, as time advanced and the race multi- plied, the world came to be what the world is. Cr. Very true. Ath. Doubtless the change was not made all in a moment, but little by little, during a very long period of time. Cr. That is to be supposed. Ath. At first they would have a natural fear ring- ing in their ears which would prevent their descend- ing from the heights into the plain. Cr. Of course. Ath. The fewness of the survivors would make them desirous of intercourse with one another ; but then the means of traveling either b>- land or by sea would have been almost entirely lost with the loss of the arts, and there would be great difficulty in getting at one another ; for iron and brass and all metals would have become confused, and would have dis appeared ; nor would there be any possibility of ex- ORIGIiV OF CIVILIZATION. 427 r legislation, you suppose tall? has there not e : cities and L great deal of n we possibly Lng of all the ained their full vice ? d you are quite the race multi- world is. ot made all in g a very long cr. itural fear rin it their descend [^s would make le another ; but \- land or by sea with the loss of iculty in getting and all metals Ivould have dis Lssibility of ex- tracting them ; and they would have no means of felling timber. Even if you suppose that some im- plements might have been preserved in the moun- tains, they would quickly have worn out and disap- peared, and there would be no more of them until the art of metallurgy had again revived. Cr. There could not have been. Ath. In how many generations would this be at- tained } Cr. Clearly not for many generations. Ath. During this period, and for some time after- wards, all the arts which require iron and brass and the like would disappear. Cr. Certainly. Ath. Faction and war would also have died out in those days and for many reasons. Cr. How would that be .<* Ath. In the first place, the desolation of these primitive men would create in them a feeling of af- fection and friendship towards one another ; and, in the second place, they would have no occasion to fight for their subsistence, for they would have pasture in abundance, except just at first, and in some particular cases ; on this pasture-land they would mostly support life in a primitive age, having plenty of milk and flesh, and procuring other food by the chase, not to be despised either in quantity or quality. They would also have abundance of clothing, and bedding, and dwellings, and utensils either capable of standing 0,1 the fire or not ; for the plastic and weaving arts do not require any use of iron : God has given these two arts to man in order to provide him with necessaries, that, when reduced to their last extremity, the human race may 428 PARADISE FOUND. % |i —i i g ^ still grow and increase. Hence in those days man- kind were not very poor ; nor was poverty a cause of difference among them ; and rich they could not be, if they had no gold or silver, and such at that time was their condition. And the community which has neither poverty nor riches will always have the noblest principles, there is no insolence or injustice; nor, again, are there any contentions or envyings among them. And therefore they were good, and also because they were what is called simple-minded ; and when they were told about good and evil, they in their simplicity believed what they heard to be very truth and practiced it. No one had the wit to suspect another of a falsehood, as men do now ; but what they heard about gods and men tliey believed to be true and lived accord- ingly ; and therefore they were in all respects such as we have described them. Cr. That quite accords with my views, and with those of my friend here. Ath. Would not many generations living on in a simple manner, although ruder, perhaps, and more ignorant of the arts generally, and in particular of those of land or naval warfare, and likewise of other arts, termed in. cities legal practices and party con- flicts, and including all conceivable ways of hurting one another in word and deed ; although inferior to those who lived before the Deluge, or to the men of our day in these respects, would they not, I say, be simpler and more manly, and also more temperate, and in general more just.^ The reason has been already explained. Cr. Very true. Ath. I should wish you to understand that v.hat! ORIGIN OF CIVIUZATIOISr. 429 )se days man- /erty a cause hey could not t such at that le community js will always i no insolence ^ly contentions i[orc they were what is called ere told about y believed what •acticed it. ^^0 • of a falsehood, :;ard about gods nd lived accord- all respects such views, and with ^s living on in a ■haps, and more , in particular of Ukewise of other ';s and party con- ; ways of hurting [hough inferior to or to the men oi [ley not, I say, be more temperate, reason has been brs stand that v;hat has preceded and what is about to follow has been, and will be, said with the intention of explaining what need the men of that time had of laws, and who was their lawgiver. Cr. And thus far what you have said has been very well said. Ath- They could hardly have wanted lawgivers as yet ; nothing of that sort was likely to have existed in their days, for they had no letters at this early stage ; they lived by habit and the customs of their forefathers, as they are called. Cr. Probably. AtJi. But there was already existing a form of ::!;overnment which, if I am not mistaken, is gener- ally termed a lordship, and this still remains in many places, both among Hellenes and barbarians, and is the government which is declared by Homer to have prevailed among the Cyclopes : — "They have neither councils nor judgments, but they dwell in hollow rocks on the tops of high mountains, and every one is the judge of his wife and children, and they do not trouble themselves about one another." Cr. That must be a charming poet of yours ; I have read some other verses of his, which are very clever ; but I do not know much of him, for foreign pnets are little read among the Cretans. The Laccdcemonian. But they are in Lacedtcmon, and he appears to be the prince of them all ; the manner of life, however, which he describes is not Spartan, but rather Ionian, and he seems quite to confirm what you are saying, tracing up the ancient state of mankind by the help of tradition to bar- barism. 430 PARADISE FOUND. ■n i I Ath. Yes ; and we may accept his witness to the fact that there was a time when primitive societies had this form. C}'. Very true. AtJi. And did not such states spring out of single habitations and families who were scattered and thinned in the devastations ; and the eldest of them was theii ruler, because with them government orig- inated in the authority of a father and a mother, whom, like a flock of birds, they followed, forminj^ one troop under the patriarchal rule and sovereignty of their parents, which of all sovereignties is the most just .'' Cr. Very true. • AtJi. After this they came together in greater numbers, and increased the size of their cities, and betook themselves to husbandry, first of all at the foot of the mountains, and made inclosures of loose walls and works of defense, in order to keep off wild beasts ; thus creating a single large and common habitation. Cr. Yes ; at least we may suppose it. Ath. There is another thing which would prob- ably happen. Cr. What.? AtJi. When these larger habitations grew up out of the lesser original ones, each of the lesser ones would survive in the larger ; every family would be under the rule of the eldest, and, owing to their sep- aration from one another, would have peculiar cus- toms in things divine and human, which they would have received from their several parents who had educated them, and these customs would incline them to order, when the parents had the element of ORIGIN OF CIVILIZATION. 431 tness to the ivc societies out of single cattered and idest of them ernment orip;- nd a mother, )wed, forming id sovereignty ignties is the ler in greater heir cities, and t of all at the psures of loose o keep off wild and common lit. Ih would proh- Is grew up out [he lesser ones imily would be ig to their sep- [e peculiar cus- ]ich they would rents who had would incline the element of order in them ; and to courage, when they had the clement of courage in them. And tliey woukl natu- rally stamp upon their children, and upon their chil- tlren's children, their own institutions ; and, as we are saying, they would find their way into the larger society, having already their own peculiar laws. Cr. Certainly. Ath. And every man surely likes his own laws best, and the laws of others not so well. Cr. True. Ath. Then how we seem to have stumbkd upon the beginnings of legislation ! Cr. Exactly. Ath. The next step will be that these persons who meet l >gether must choose some arbiters, who will inspect the laws of all of them, and will publicly pre- sent such of them as they approve to the chiefs who lead the tribes, and are in a manner their kings, and will give them the choice of them. These will thenv selves be called legislators, and will appoint the mag- istrates, framing some sort of aristocracy, or perhaps monarchy, out of the dynasties or lordships, and in this altered state of the government they will live. Cr. Yes, they would be appointed in the order which you mention. . . . But we will not pursue the conversation farther. Is the reader indignant that he has been made to listen so long to Abbe Banier, clumsily disguised in the robes of a pretender! Athenian philosopher and discoursing, all out of character, on matters which betray "the prejudices of a Christian education".'' It may well be. To a reader of Lubbock and Tylor and Vogt, the sentiments of the Athenian traveler do seem singularly in accord with Holy Scripture. II ^^-^Vl^o^ N' ,1 IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) 1.0 I.I 11.25 tliljl §2S ■^ Uii 12.2 2.0 lill u 1^ Photographic Sciences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STtEIT WEBSTER, N.Y. MSSO (7t6)«72-4S03 432 PARADISE FOUND. But let not the innocent suffer for the guilty. It happens that our imaginary conversation is not of our imagining. It was written more than two thou- sand years before the birth of Abbe Banier, and by as good a pagan as the famed Athenian Plato. On the whole, we are of the opinion that the great consentaneous Traditions of the Human Race will yet outlive a considerable number of Bachofens and Blichners and Buckles, and that if ever the bur- ial-place of Moses shall be discovered, it will not be found to be in any of the ignominious graveyards periodically prepared for him by on-coming Profes- sors of Hebrew eager for a stunning inaugural. De- spite the ingenious " higher " criticism of to-day's ephemeral "authorities," the Biblical scholarship of the future is more likely to carry the age of the composition of the Eden story backward than for- ward. The documents embedded in the opening chapters of Genesis may yet prove to be, what rev- erent and orthodox scholars have already affirmed — fragments of the Sacred Scriptures of the Ante- diluvian Patriarchal Church.^ Whether so or no, one ancient word shall evermore be verified : " The grass withereth, the flower fadeth ; but the word of our God shall stand forever." Our treatise opened with a pathetic picture, — it must close with another. Long-lost Eden is found ; but its gates are barred against us. Now, as at the beginning of our exile, a sword turns every way to keep the Way of the Tree of Life. ^ Moffat: Comparative History of Religions. New York, 1^-71: vol. i., pp. 99 seq. SCIILUSSWORT. 433 he guilty. It tion is not ol ;ban two thou- ^anier, and by m Plato, nion that the 2 Human Race ,r of Bacbofcns if ever the bur- \^ it will not be lous graveyards -coming Profcs- inaugural. De- :ism of to-day' s al scholarship of the age of the kward than for- in the opening to be, what rcv- alreadv afhrmed j-es of 'the Anle- cher so or no, one [fied : " The grass |the word of our Sadder yet, it is Eden no longer. Even could some new Columbus penetrate to the secret centre of this Wonderland of the Ages, he could but hur- riedly kneel amid a frozen desolation and, dumb with a nameless awe, let fall a few hot tears above the buried and desolated hearthstone of Humanity's earliest and loveliest home. Happily for us, O Menschengeschlecht, a trusty hand has added to the third of Genesis the closing chapters of the Patmos Apocalypse. The thought of the old forever evanished Eden is henceforth bearable, for from afar we have caught the vision of a Sinless Paradise, the frostless Gardens, the Tree, and the River of the Heavenly City of God. ya^ ivcnn des Nordwinds rauhes Tosen Der Erde Garten ztigeschticit, Dann bliihen erst des Himmcls Rosen In tmvenvelkter Herrlichkcit. ya, sind wir Gdste /tier zti Laiidcn Auf dieser kalten Wintcrfliir, So ist noch eitte Rtih vorhanden Dent Seufzen aller Kreatur. Karl Gerok. 28 letic picture, — It \t Eden is found ; Now, as at the irns every way to I MJ. New York, i?7' s> i *^l S' t ,■ ■ [ ■ ^ APPENDIX. SECTION I. — THE EARTH OF COLUMBUS NOT A TRUE SPHERE. {Illustrating pp. 3--J ; 306,307.) The following authentic account of the views enter- tained by Columbus respecting the figure of the Earth will be welcome to many readers : — " I have always read that the world comprising the land and the water was spherical, and the recorded expe- riences of Ptolemy and all others have proved this by the eclipses of the moon and other observations made from East to West, as well as the elevation of the Pole from North to South. 3ut as I have alreadv described, I have now seen so much irregularity, that I have come to an- other conclusion respecting the Earth, namely, that it is not round as they describe, but of the form of a pear, which is very round except where the stalk grows, at which part it is most prominent ; or like a round ball upon part of which is a prominence like a woman's nipple, this protrusion being the highest and nearest the sky, sit- uated under the equinoctial line, and at the eastern ex- tremity of this sea. ... In confirmation of my opinion, I revert to the arguments which I have above detailed respecting the line, which passes from North to South a hundred leagues westward of the Azores ; for in sailing thence westward, the ships went on rising smoothly to- wards the sky, and then the weather was felt to be milder, on account of which mildness the needle shifted one point 436 APPENDIX. of the compass ; and the further we went, the more the needle moved to the Northwest, this elevation producing the variation of the circle which the North-star describes with its satellites ; and the nearer I approached the equi- noctial line the more they rose and the greater was the difference in these stars and in their circles. Ptolemy and the other philosophers who have written upon the globe thought that it was spherical, believing that this [western] hemisphere was round as well as that in which they themselves dwelt, the centre of which was in the island of Arin, which is under the equinoctial line be- tween the Arabian Gulf and the Gulf of Persia ; and the circle passes over Cape St. Vincent in Portugal westward, and eastward by Cangara and the Seras ; — in which hemisphere I 'make no difficulty as to its being a perfect sphere as they describe \ but this western half of the world I maintain is like half of a very round pear, hav- ing a raised jDrojection for the stalk, as I have already described, or like a woman's nipple on a round ball. Ptolemy and the others who have written on the globe had no information respecting this part of the world, which was then unexplored ; they only established their own hemisphere, which, as I have already said, is half of a perfect sphere. And now that your Highnesses have commissioned me to make this voyage of discovery, the truths which I have stated are evidently proved, because in this voyage, when I was off the island of Hargin ^ and its vicinity, which is twenty degrees to the North of tiie equinoctial line, I found the people black and the land very much burnt ; and when after that I went to the Cape Verde Islands I found the people there very much darker still, and the more southward we went, the more they ap- proach the extreme of blackness \ so that when I reached the parallel of Sierra Leone, where, as night came on, the North star rose five degrees, the people there were exces- 1 Arguin, west coast of Africa. HO IV THE EARTH WAS PEOPLED. 437 the more the ion producing star describes Lched the equi- reater was the cles. Ptolemy itten upon the eving that this ts that in which lich was in the noctial line be- Persia ; and the rtugal westward, -as ; - in which , being a perfect ^ern half of the round pear, hav- Ls I have already on a round ball. ten on the globe art of the world, established their ly said, is half of ] Highnesses have of discovery, the ly proved, because dof Hargin^and the North of the lack and the land went to the Cape very much darker Ithe more they ap- ,at when I reached light came on, the there were exces- sively black, and as I sailed westward the heat became ex- treme. But after I had passed the meridian or line which I liave already described, I found the climate became gradually more temperate ; so that when I reached the island of Trinidad, where the North star rose five degrees as night came on, there, and in the land of Gracia, I found the temperature exceedingly mild ; the fields and the foliage likewise were remarkably fresh and green, and as beautiful as the gardens of Valencia in April. The people there are very graceful in form, less dark than those whom I had before seen in the Indies, and wear their hair long and smooth \ they are also more shrewd, intelligent, and courageous. The sun was then in the sign of Virgo over our heads and theirs ; therefore all this must proceed from the extreme blandness of the temper- ature, which arises, as I have said, from this country be- ing the most elevated in the world and the nearest to the sky. On these grounds, therefore, 1 affirm that the globe is not spherical, but that there is the difference in its form which I have described ; the which is to be found in this hemisphere at the point where the Indies meet the ocean, the extremity of the hemisphere being below the equinoctial line. And a great confirmation of this is, that when our Lord made the sun, the first light appeared in the first point of the East, where the most elevated point of the globe is." — Hakltiyt Society Publications. Select Letters of Columbus. Tr. by R. H. Major. London, 2d ed., pp. 134-138. SECTION II. — HOW THE EARTH WAS PEOPLED. BY M. LE MARQUIS G. DE SAPORTA. How has the human race been able to spread itself over the whole surface of the globe ? Is it the result of different and independent origins in the several con- lica. 438 APPENDIX. cci ^^* -Ji o. • o> oJl ' Pc mj ; s. i \ it O tinents, or have all men sprung from a common cradle, a " mother-region " ? On this point students are divided, Agassiz holding that men were created, and Carl Vogt that they were developed, at different centres, and Qua- trefages and the theologians maintaining the unity of their origin. The fact is left that man, the same in all the essential characteristics of the species, has advanced into all the habitable parts of the globe, and that not re- cently and when provided with all the resources that experience and inventive genius could put at his disposal, but when still young and ignorant. It was then that, weak and almost naked, having only just got fire and a few rude arms with which to defend itself and procure food, the human race conquered the world and spread it- self from within the Arctic Circle to Terra del P'uego, from the Samoyed country to Van Diemen's Land, from the North Cape to the Cape of Good Hope. It is this primitive exodus, as certain as it is inconceivable, ac- cepted by science as well as by dogma, that we have to explain, or at least to make probable ; and that in an age when it is only after the most wonderful discoveries, by the aid of the most powerful machinery for navigation, through the boldest and most adventurous enterprises, that civilized man has been able to flatter himself that he has at last gone as far as infant man went in an age that is so far removed from us as to baffle all calculations. We must insist on this point, for it brings into light an obstacle which those who have tried to trace out the con- nection between widely separated races and to determine the course that had been followed by tribes now separated by oceans and vast expanses have hitherto found insur- mountable ; for, if man is one — to which we are ready to agree — we must assign a single point of departure for his migrations. In these migrations, man has gone wherever he could, and, at every spot he has occupied and settled, has acquired characteristics peculiar to tlic HOIV THE EARTH IVAS PEOPLED. 439 :ion cradle, a are divided, id Carl Vogt res, and Qua- the unity of e same in all has advanced nd that not re- resources that at his disposal, was then that, got fire and a :U and procure I and spread it- erra del Fuego, ;n's Land, from lope. It is this conceivable, ac- that we have to d that in an age I discoveries, by ^ for navigation, -ous enterprises, r himself that he ^t in an age that calculations, ings into light an race out the con- and to determine les now separated [erto found insur- ,ch we are ready pint of departure [s, man has gone he has occupied peculiar to the place, and which difTerentiated him from the men settling in other places. Hence the varieties of human races. Some of these spots seem to have been peculiarly favor- able to his advancement, and became centres of civiliza- tion. The number of such centres is, however, very limited, and their distribution is significant. The coniinental masses are distributed in three prin- cipal groups, one feature in the configuration of which must strike every one who carefully examines a map of the world. It will be noticed that they are so expanded toward the North as to touch in that direction or be sep- arated only by narrow passages, and that they also sur- round within the Arctic Circle a central polar sea with a bordering island-belt. Going down toward the South we find that the three continents. North America, Europe, and Northern Asia, which had approached each other so closely, give place to three appendages, South America, Africa, and Australia, which in their turn gradually taper off to mere points in an illimitable sea, long before they reach the Antarctic Circle. Within this circle the con- figuration of the land is precisely the reverse of that in the North ; it is that of a solid cap of land around the pole, in the midst of the great ocean. If we again observe these masses, we shall find that civilization was born in each of them under : »i>.ilar geo- graphical conditions, viz., in the neighborhood of , . smaller interior sea, near or rather North of the tropic of Cancer, between 20° and 35° north latitude. The most eastern of the centres is in China, near the Japan Sea. The most western, and apparently the most recent, was along the inner shores of the Gulf of Mexico. The last civili- zation was in the course of radiation and transformation when the Europeans came to America, and was wholly independent and autonomous ; but, weak and relatively new, it was not able to resist the sudden onset of a stronger race. 440 APPENDIX. Toward the centre of the space whose extremes we have marked out must be placed two other centres of civilization, more ancient than either of the two already named, and in the same zone of latitude — Egypt, in the valley of the Nile, and near the Arabian Gulf, and Meso- potamia, near the head of the Persian Gulf. Thus, each continental mass had its particular centre of civilization, except Asia, which had two — one in the extreme east, the other near the line which joins it to Europe. This peculiar grouping of the chief centres of civilization in such a relation of neighborhood constitutes the most con- siderable paleoethnic fact that we are able to record. The Nile and the Syrian sea on the west, upper Armenia and the Caspian on the north, the Hindoo-Koosh and the Indus on the east, and the Arabian Sea on the south, bound the region where Cushites, Semites, and Aryans, the first farmers, workers, and founders of cities, the sec- ond pastoral people, and the third mountaineers, after- ward emigrants and conquerors, met, elbowed each other, and mingled, conquerors and conquered by turns, invent- ing arts and the use of metals, learning arms and how to organize themselves hierarchically, reaching their ideal through religion, and having in writing the most power- ful instrument at the disposition of human intelligence. With them we have the beginning of history, and a con- tinuous chain of social organizations, down to our own days. The growth of civilization in these centres leaves, however, still unaccounted for the diffusion of mankind all over the earth, which took place at a period far an- terior to it. The spread of man throughout Europe and Asia does not offer very great difficulties, for, in consequence of the long distance for which the two continents are joined, Europe is in reality only a dependency of Asia ; and oc- cupation of Europe from Asia is conformable to religious traditions. The difficulties are, however, formidable when we come to Americn ,vh- , ' ' '''*' 0"« end ,0 the other b^- r'^e ' w'r' "'•"' "-""-■" f™". best observers. Not o„K , , " °'" "'"'^ '>^'^ •"'"•ck ,l,e ">■•'" .naugurate on the so l' ° If' ''''' "'« An.erican ""cl relatively adva ce^ , ' ^^'' "'°^''' ^'n ori.", ^"■•e'ly in U.e^Vortt , ^ s, :t S:'r'' "" "^ "- '" '» "'e most remote age ' j ! u!,- ""^^'^ "^ '"» Presence b-n found in the vaSey of lie 'T """™"-'""' """= New Jersey, and near G«an-,i 1 ''?/''=• =" '^'^enton, characterised that they cannot h° " ^l^'-"''"' '° ■^'^■^•^'y °f .wh,ch at the base^oTeO .';"""''"■ ""> ■^""•^"■°» he,r coexistence with eleplnnts ^ T'"'^ """^'"« ■•""' 'he existence of a race co "" ""'' "'^"^'odons indicate gravels of the Somme ' ^'■^"^°"' '"'h that of ,| ! doubtless the sameTannersT^, "^ ""^ '"""■'try and ,<;°" cl this primitive Tmer ta,' " . "^ ^"'•'" '"'"'■ Whence ■ved in Europe at the sa 'e dl'h'""' '° "" °- "'« suppose a direct commun"catrn„ k f™ '°'"'^' "'"e" we "cnts ? The difficultv sucl. ^^•'''"'" ">« *"» conti- 'he Atlantic and the cmi v'wP T" "^^'^ '» ""--"g he antiquity of the ocean 'el ..'°""*"S^ S've of beheving either .hatTe two ° / P"""^'"'^ °f our jomed, or that one of hem "as r'"""' ''""' '°™^^'y tnown Columbus x.^vCZTl^ "^^ ^^ '""'« "" ^^^^years before the later one °''"' ' ''"""^^'' '"°"- -"'in;u;ttre\?'anTaKr;;l '''^''"'^■^'"' ^'-^3 'g'" of the America,^ man F ,,"'""« "'' °f *e or- solved by invokin.. an w^ Evidently it cannot be re- wanderers. or a Thlpwrecke*? "'°""'^"°" °' ^ ^''^ <= >vh.eh we have to deal wTorim?'"^ ' ""' " '^ ""« '" as in Europe by successTvew ^'* Populations flowing "uuous presence of man whosr'' ^"'', ^"^^""^ '^e con^ extension have followed TnAmf"'! ^''^'"P'"^"' ''"d on the old continent. The k " "''• "'^ ==""^ course as ^™- Asia by way of ^e ^]^^^' -, '"""^ration Aleutian Islands to Alaska 442 APPENDIX. o i ^ s ^ might 1)0 acceptable, did not the certainty of the presence of an indigenous American popuhition in the Quaternary age reduce it to the prcportions of a secondary fact. The same is tlie case with tiie relations — contradictory, it is true, and therefore suspicious — which some have attempted to establish between the monuments, statues, and graphic signs of Central Anjerica and those of ICgypt and buddhistic Asia. These analogies, aside from liieir insufficiency, must fall before two paramount con- siderations: first, the certainty of the contemporaneous- ness of the American man with the great animals of the Quaternary age ; and, second, the relative uniformity of the copper-colored race, so like itself through the whole- extent of the continent, except in that part which is oc- cupied by the Esquimaux. The difficulty arises from the fact that the monogenists, having in view a single birth- place and a single point of departure for the whole hu- man race, and placing neither in the New World, have supposed America to have been colonized by European or Asiatic immigrants following the direction of the par allels of latitude. Emigration in this direction at once meets an obstacle in the oceans, which grow wider the farther South we go. The obstacle disappears if we give up the idea of lateral emigrations, and suppose the move- ment to have taken place in the direction of the merid- ians from North to South. No obstacle of any kind offers itself to such migrations; and the relative uniformity of the Americans, from one end of the continent to the other, would never have excited astonishment, if we had not been preoccupied with the idea of their introduction at a later date. We may remark, on this topic, that the extreme south- ern points of the three continents are occu|)ied by races which came originally, without doubt, from somewhere else, and which are ranked, in Terra del Fuego, at the Cape of Good Hope, and in Tasmania, among the lowest no IV THE EARTH was peopled. 443 the presence ^e QuiUcrnury :con(Uiry f^ict. coniradiclory, ch some have ncnis, statues, iuul those ol ;ies, aside from araiuoLint con- Uempo*'^"^^"^* animals of the 2 uniformity of ough the whole irt which is oc- arises from the V a single birth- 3r the whole hu- ew World, have ed by European ption of the par irection at once crrow wider the Dpears if we give ppose the move- on of the merid- )f any hind offers ive uniformity of ;ontinent to tlie liment, if we had heir introduction le extreme south- pcupied by races from somewhere A Fuego, at the [mong the lowest of the species. These races, advancing in front of the others, have preserved the visible stamp of the relative inferiority of the slock from whicii they were prematurely detached. We have to believe, in effect, that these three branches — Iniegians, IJushnien, and Tasmanians — so little elevated in their jjhysical, intellectual, and moral traits, have gone and planted themselves so far away only because the unoccupied space opened out before them. Scouts for the restef mankind, ihey have reached, step by step, the extreme limits of the habitable land. Tiiey must have occupied for the moment, at least, the parts of the intermediate space, but they could not resist the push of the stronger races, and they could not have survived to our time, except under the condition of re- striction to a small area in the most remote tract of their original domain. There is nothing surprising in the fact that MM. Quatrefages and Hamy, having described the most ancient European race of which we have the skulls, that of Canstadt, should have found its analogies only among these same natives of the extreme South — the Bushmen and the Australians. It will be seen that we are inclined to remove to the ciroumpolar regions of the North the probable cradle of primitive humanity. From there only could it have radi- ated as from a centre, to spread into several continents at once, and to give rise to successive emigrations (oward the South. This theory agrees best with the presumed march of the human races. It remains to be shown that it is equally in accord with the most authentic and most recent geological data, and that, besides man, it is appli- cable to the plants and animals which accompanied him, and which have continued to be most closely associated with him in the temperate regions which afterward became the seat of his civilizing power. The general laws of gebgony favor this hypothesis in a remarkable manner. To make it seem probable, we have 444 APPENDIX. i ; QCi ^MmjQO -^ iilfc only to establish two essential points that will not be seriously contested by any geologist. One is, that the polar regions, which were covered with large trees, en- joyed a climate more temperate than that of Central Europe, and were habitable and fertile to the eightieth degree, underwent a slow and progressive cooling down till the middle of the Tertiary period. Thence refrigera- tion made rapid progress till the ice gained exclusive possession of the country south of them. Under such circumstances, man as well as the animals and plants would have to remove or perish — to c migrate step by step, or find himself reduced to a daily more precarious state of existence. The second point is the relative stability of the exist- ing continental masses, and of their distribution around a sea occupying the Arctic Pole ; while the other Pole was occupied with a cap of land surrounded by an immense ocean. The importance of the Arctic Pole in respect to the production of animals and plants, and to their migra- tions, and the nullity of the other hemisphere in relation to this feature result from such a grouping. The essen- tial point is, th?t there is nothing capricious in such an arrangement of lands and seas, and that there have been, if not always, at least from a very ancient period, emerged lands occupying a considerable part of the northern hem- isphere, advancing very far toward the Pole, and describ- ing around the Arctic Sea a belt of more or less contigu- ous countries and islands. This is, in effect, what geol- ogy teaches. The changes, immersions, and emersions have never been anything but partial and successive, while the skeletons of the continents go back to the most remote ages. There have always been a Europe, an Asia, an America, and Arctic lands. We know certainly that there have always been around the Arctic Pole ex- tensive territories, if not continents, long the home of the same plants as the rest of the globe, and that, beginning IIOIV THE EARTH WAS PEOPLED. 445 t will not be e is, that the rge trees, en- at of Central the eightieth cooling down snce refrigera- ined exclusive Under such als and plants ,igrate step by lore precarious ity of the exist- bution around a I other Pole was by an immense ole in respect to ,d to their migra- iphere in relation ling. The essen- nous in such an [there have been, period, emerged [le northern hem- [ole, and descrih- or less contigu- iffect, what geol- i, and emersions 'and successive, [back to the most .n a Europe, an 'e know certainly Arctic Pole ex- the home of the that, beginning with an epoch that corresponds with the end of the Jurassic, the climate, at first as warm there as elsewhere, has tended gradually to become colder. The depression of temperature was at first manifested very slowly, and was far from having attained its present degree in the Tertiary; for the trees that then grew in Greenland — the sequoias, magnolias, and plane-trees — now attain their full development in Southern Europe, and are not suited with the climate of Central Europe. We are, then, as- sured of the ancient existence, near the Arctic Pole, of a zone of lands covered with a rich vegetation. The perma- nent existence of a polar sea is none the less attested by fossils from all parts of the region. The neighborhood of the Pole was long habitable, and inhabited by man in a time near that in which the vestiges of his industry be- gin to show themselves alike in Europe and America. In passing thus from the Arctic lands to those bordering on the polar circle, and through the latter into Asia, Europe, and America, man would only have taken the road which a host of plants and animal followed, either before him or at the same time, and under the stress of the same circumstances. It is, in fact, by the aid of migrations from the neigh- borhood of the Pole that we can generally explain the phenomenon of scattered or disjoined species, a phenom- enon identical with the one which man of the Old World and man of the New World present when they are com- pared. Combining present notions with the* indications furnished by the fossils, we discover numerous examples of disjunction — in which allied forms, often hardly dis- tinguishable, have been distributed at the same time in scattered regions, at extremely remote points in the boreal hemisphere, without any apparent connection along the parallels, to explain the common unit. Europe attests by undeniable fossils that it had formerly a host of vegetable types and forms that are now American, 446 APPENDIX. which it could have received only from the extreme North. It had, for example, magnolias, tulip-trees, sassafras, maples, and poplars, comparable in all respects to those which grow in the United States. The two plane-trees, that of the West and that of Asia Minor, to which we may add an extinct fossil European plane-tree, illustrate the same phenomenon of dispersion, Europe in the Tertiary period witnessed the growth of a ginko similar to the one in the north of China. It had sequoias and a bald cypress corresponding with the trees of thoi^e names that are now growing in California and Louisiana. The beech seems to have been growing in the Arctic circum- polar zone before it was introduced and extended through- out the northern hemisphere. The same is doubtless the case with the hemlock, of which distinguishable traces have been found in Grinnell-land, above the etghty-sec- ond degree of latitude, of a date much earlier than that of its introduction into Europe. The well-established presence in both continents of many animals peculiar to the northern hemisphere must be attributed to emigra- tions, if not from the Pole, at least from countries con- tiguous to the polar circle. This is obvious in the case of the reindeer, bison, and stag; but it ought to be equally true in respect to animals of more ancient times, and although we have no other direct proofs of it than the abundance of the remains of mammoths in upper Si- beria, the same law doubtless includes the elephants and mastodons. We mean here the species of these two genera which were propagated from the North to the South, and were, in America and Europe, the companions of primitive man. The connection of the continental masses with their belt of hardly discontinuous lands around the polar circle gives the key to all these phe- nomena. The cause on which they depend would be con- stantly producing radiations and consequently disjunc- tions of species and races, whatever kingdom we may consider. HOW THE EARTH WAS PEOPLED. 447 ctreme North, es, sassafras, pects to those vo plane-trees, to which we .'tree, iUustrate Europe in the , ginko similar sequoias and a of those names .ouisiana. The I Arctic circum- tended through- is doubtless the guishable traces e the etghty-scc- earlier than that well-established ,imals peculiar to jDUted to emigra- countries con- ious in the case it ought to be jre ancient times, [proofs of it than Dths in upper bl- Ihe elephants and es of these two ;he North to the ; the companions the continental lontinuous lands ,0 all these phe- ind would be con- iquently disjunc- ingdom we may Before leaving the questions that touch on the pre- sumed origin of man, we cannot refrain from speaking of the relations which it has been sought to establish be- tween him and the pithecan apes. Primitive man, ac- cording to some authors of the transformist school, was an anthropomorphic ape, perfected physically as to his walk and erect attitude, intellectually by the development of his cranial capacity, till the moment when reasoning, or the faculty of abstraction and the power of using artic- ulate language, took in him the place of instinct. Nu- merous and undeniable anatomical or physiological anal- ogies of the human body and those of the more highly organized monkeys, which have no tails nor callosities on their paws, and whose faces and ways have something singularly human, favor this system, at least in appear- ance. The pithecans have, however, other contiguities than purely human ones. Their ways are rather analo- gous than directly assimilable to those of man ; with other adaptations, they seem to have followed a wholly different course of evolution. They are essentially climb- ers, while man is exclusively a walker, and has always been predisposed to the erect position. The highest monkeys, the anthropomorphous apes, walk badly and with difficulty. When they leave the trees in which they live, their position is a stooping one, and they bend down their toes so as not to touch the ground with the soles of their feet. Wf hav^e, then, reason not to admit the simian origin of man without decisive proofs. Moreover, the pithecans seem to have been evolved in an inverse direc- tion from man. Rejoicing in the heat, they perish rapidly when brought into the temperate zones, and this is espe- cially the case with the anthropoid apes. Thus, while man, coming from the North, advances toward the South only when the depression of temperature favors his prog- ress in that direction, the monkeys, to which a strong heat is a vital element, were developed in an age when i I j 448 APPENDIX. ( ! I \ Europe had a sub-tropical climate, and disappeared from that continent as soon as the climate became temperate, so that their departure concides with the arrival of man. They fled South to find the heat they needed, precisely when the diminution of the heat opened to man the region from which it excluded his predecessors. The necessity of placing the cradle of the pithecans in a hot country enables us to separate the monkeys of the East- ern and Western continents into two distinct groups, marked by differences in dentition important enough to oblige us to assume an extreme antiquity for their sep- aration. Both are descended from the lemurians, now represented only in Madagascar, but of which early Ter- tiary fossils are found in Europe. The most recent lemurians in Europe are found at the end of the Eocene. It is later, in the Miocene, and that not the lowest, that we meet pithecans similar to those of the equatorial zone of the Eastern continent. At this epoch, which was nearly that of Oeningen and the Mollassic Sea, which divided Europe from East to West, a subtropical climate still prevailed in the centre of the continent, and the palm-trees extended up into Bohemia, along the northern banks of the great interior sea. By favor of this tem- perature the monkeys occupied Europe to near the forty- fifth degree, but without going above it, to disappear for- ever as soon as it became cool enough for men and elephants. The Mesopithecus Pentelici, of which M. Gaudry has dis- covered twenty-five individuals at Pikermi, was small, walked on its four paws, and lived on twigs and leaves. The Dryopithecus of St. Gaudens had the characteristics of the highest anthropomorphs, with the bestial face of the gorilla ; but it is to this animal that M. Gaudry is in- dined to attribute the flints, intentionally chipped, ac- cording to the Abbe Bourgeois, of the Beauce limestone, at Thenay in the St. Gaudens gcognostic horizon. The NOW THE EARTH WAS PEOPLED. 449 ippeared from ne temp^'^^^^' Lrrival of man. icled, precisely d to man the :cessors. 'I'l^^ hecans in a hot ;ys of the East- listinct groups, rtant enough to ty for their sep- lemurians, now vhich early Ter- he most recent i of the Eocene, the lowest, that I equatorial zone )Och, which was assic Sea, which btropical climate ntinent, and the ong the northern ivor of this tem- to near the forty- to disappear for- gh for men aud [. Gaudry has dis- [ermi, was small, Itwigs and leaves. \e characteristics [e bestial face of M. Gaudry is in- lally chipped, ac- 3eauce limestone, kc horizon. The PUopithecus of Sansan (Gers) resembles a gibbon. To find the present analogues of the PUopithecus and Dryo- pithecus of Miocene Europe, it is necessary to go across the tropic of Cancer to about 12° North latitude, or more than thirty degrees South of the locality of these fossils. If, as is probable, the same interval existed between the perimeter frequented by the European anthropomorphs and the natal region in which man was originally con- fined, we shall find the latter in the latitude of Greenland, at 70° or 75°. This is indeed an hypothetical calcula- tion, but it is based on a double argument hard to refute. We can reach almost the same conclusion by a little different reasoning. The abundance of large-flaked in- struments in the contiguous valleys of the Somme and the Seine marks the existence at that point of external con- ditions evidently favorable to the diffusion of man, whose race was then multiplying for the first time. The flora of that epoch, as observed near Fontainebleau, indicates the presence of conditions similar to those now existing in the south of France, near the forty-second degree of latitude. Now, to reach, starting from the forty-second degree, the nearly tropical regions where palm, camphor, and southern laurel trees are associated together, we have to go twelve or fifteen degrees South, to the thirtieth or twenty-eighth degree of latitude, where we see the same climatological conditions existing as prevailed in Miocene Europe when it was hardly warm enough for the anthro- pomorphic apes. Between these conditions and those which seem to have been first favorable to the growth of the human race there existed a space of twelve or fifteen degrees of latitude. But when palm-trees were growing near Prague, and camphor-trees grew as far North as Dantzic, man, if he existed then, might have lived with- out inconvenience beyond or around the Arctic Circle, within equal reach of North America and Europe, which he was destined to people. — Translated for the Popular Science Monthly from the Revue des Deux Mondes, 29 450 APPENDIX. SECTION III.- •THE RECEPTION ACCORDED TO "THE TRUE KEY." 1 f As indicated in the text, the view of Ancient Cosmol- ogy presented in chapter first of Part fourth is entirely at variance with that of all our standard authorities. Pro- fessor Packard, of Yale College, remarks, " If it is true, all our books and maps are wrong, and we must admit that all scholars have been mistaken in their understand- ing of the ancient records." In like manner, one of the foreign periodicals editorially observes, " If it is correct, a most striking proof is given of the possibility of many successive generations of archaeologists, scientists, and scholars failing to catch the entire drift and spirit of an- cient legends and literature in their cosmic teachings and relations." Under these circumstances the ordinary reader seems entitled to some further information before being asked to give it his adherence. The new view, then, was first published in the columns of "The Independent," New York, August 25, 1881. In March of the following year a second and enlarged edi- tion appeared in " The Boston University Year Book," vol. ix. Soon after a third edition was issued as a pam- phlet by Messrs. Ginn and Heath, of Boston. In each case it was entitled " The True Key to Ancient Cosmol- ogy and Mythical Geography," and was illustrated by the diagram which stands as frontispiece to this work. Copies of the paper in each of its successive editioris were promptly forwarded — usually with a brief personal note — to the most competent scholars in the universities of Athens, Rome, Berlin, Leipsic, Heidelberg, Bom, Leyden, London, Oxford, Cambridge, Edinburgh, Bel- fast, and Dublin. As might be expected an interesting and varied correspondence ensued. Of many of the let- ters the writer does not feel that he has the right to RECEPTION OF TRUE KEY. 451 ED TO "THE cient Cosmol- i is entirely at horities. Pro* " If it is true, ve must admit eir understand- ner, one of the If it is correct, sibility of many scientists, and ind spirit of an- osmic teachings ices the ordinary formation before >d in the columns ust25,x88i. I^ ind enlarged edi- sity Year Book, issued as a pam- Boston. In each ■Ancient Cosmol- iUustrated by the this work, successive editions 1 a brief personal in the universities 'eidelberg, Bonn, Edinburgh, Bel- Ited an interesting f many of the let- has the right to make any public use ; but in printing the following ex- tracts he believes that he violates no proprieties. A. H. Sayce, of the University of Oxford, one of the most distinguished of living professors of Comparative Philology, after reading a preliminary sketch, wrote to the author as follows : — Provisionally, I may say that your view seems to me emi- nently reasonable and likely to clear up several difficulties. Certainly it throws light on the voyage of Odysseus, more particularly on the visit to Hades. I look forward to the appearance of your book, which will be of great value to students of the past. In more recent communications Professor Sayce has used still stronger expressions of personal acquiescence The following are all from letters written before the publication of '* Homer's Abode of the Dead." Right Hon. William E. Gladstone, author of " Ho- meric Studies," "Juventus Mundi," "Homeric Synchro- nism," etc. : — I have received with much interest and pleasure the com- munications you have been good enough to address to me on the Homeric Cosmology. Very long ago I became convinced that Homer proceeded, not on the idea commonly assigned to him, of the earth as a plane, but on the conception of a spher- ical or convex surface. IVIv views have Ions: been set forth : fundamentally, I am at one with you, and when (if ever) my time of leisure shall arrive, I shall try to learn whether, in the points where you differ from or go beyond me, you have not been the more thorough and accurate of the two. Robert K. Douglas, of the British Museum, and Pro- fessor of Chinese in King's College, London : — I read your Key with great Interest ; and, without having made any special study of the subject, I must say that to my mind it explains most satisfactorily the Homeric Cosmology. Richard Dacre Archer-Hind, Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge, England : — % 452 APPEND 'X. m I \ ( i I must say that your explanation of ancient cosmology seems to me very simple and natural. It certainly throws a flood of light upon several points which were before very ob- scure. I am glad to hear that it is approved by so distin- guished an Orientalist as Dr. Rost, Librarian of the India Of- fice, London. C. P. Tide, D. D., Professor of the History of Relig- ions in the University of Leyden, Holland : — After perusing your paper a second time, I cannot but ex- press my opinion that your hypothesis is very plausible and ingenious. The conception of the world as a sphere is not so young as is generally thought. ... I think you are right in identifying the wide Olympus with the highest heaven, . . . Your description agrees very well with the ancient cosmogra- phy of the Babylonians. With you I am satisfied that there is no real difference between mythical Olympus and heaven, and that all earthly Olymps (as there are several of them) are only localizations of the same heavenly abode of the gods. Howard Crosby, D. D., LL. D., ex-Chancellor of the University of New York : — Your Key to Ancient Cosmology is to me most satisfactory. I believe you have made a valuable discovery. W. D. Whitney, LL. D., Professor of Sanskrit and Com- parative Philology, Yale College : — I have looked with some care through your exposition of your view respecting the ancient conceptions of the cosmos, and find it very ingenious and suggestive, and worthy of care- ful comparison with the expressions of ancient authors on the subject. Dr. Charles R. Lanman, Professor of Sanskrit, Har- vard University : — The Key I have read once more, and think it is very simple, ingenious and adequate for the explanation of a great variety of heretofore perplexing allusions. W. S. Tyler, D. D., LL. D., Professor of the Greek Language and Literature, Amherst College : — 1 RECEPTION OF TRUE KEY. 453 ent cosmology tainly throws a before very ob- cl by so distin- of the India Of- istory of Relig- L: — I cannot but ex- ery plausible and I sphere is not so you are right m hest heaven. . • • ancient cosmogra- atisfied that there mpus and heaven, iveral of them) are de of the gods. Chancellor of the ,e most satisfactory, ry. anskrit and Com- , your exposition of Ions of the cosmos, land worthy of care- cient authors on the of Sanskrit, Har- Ink it is very simple, L of a great variety Isor of the Greek liege: — Permit me to thank you for the paper. Perhaps no one key will unlock all the chambers of the labyrinth of ancient cos- mology and mythical geography. But I believe yours comes the nearest to it of any that has yet been found. William A. Packard, Professor of the Latin Language and Literature, College of New Jersey, Princeton : — Dr. Warren's pamphlet gives the result of ingenious and able research, which claims very careful consideration. It does seem to act very widely as a solvent in interpreting an- cient cosmogonies. Its elucidation of Homeric expressions is very striking. Stephen D. Peet, Editor of " American Antiquarian and Oriental Journal : " — I believe that you have struck a very rich field in your pam- phlet on the ancient cosmology. I have long surmised that there was something back of the astrology of the ancients which had exerted a great influence on the religious concep- tions, and even on the literary and speculative thoughts of the ancients, but have to thank you for putting together the facts so as to discover the key. J. Henry Thayer, D. D., late Professor of Greek and N. T. Interpretation, Andover Theological Seminary, now Professor of the same in Harvard University Divin- ity School : — Allow me to express my great interest in your Key to An- cient Cosmology. It gives one a sense of relief amounting to satisfaction at its very first perusal. I shall take great in- terest in teaching it. James Freeman Clarke, D. D., author of "Ten Great Religions," etc. : — It seems to me to throw much light on many passages in the classic writers. ... I cannot help thinking that your view will be a key to unlock many obscure passages. The seven following extracts fairly illustrate the mass of the communications received since the publication of "Homer's Abode of the Dead," which paper was issued in 454 APPENDIX. advance of the present volume simply as a further illus- tration of the correctness and utility of "The True Key." Each is from the pen of a European scholar of first rank, and the last of them from one of the most widely known of German Egyptologists. Not having as yet permission to use the names of the writers, they are here withheld. I thank you very much for sendin^Lf me the " Boston Univer- sity Year IJook," containing your interesting article on the Underworld of Homer. Homeric interpretation long and (I think) absurdly placed the way to the Underworld in the West ; but I am glad at least to acknowledge that from the West — that is, from you and your country — much light has been thrown upon the Un- derworld of Homer. In 1868 I went a long way, in a work then published, to- wards the doctrine that the entrance to the Underworld was beneath the solid earth-mass, as, in 1858, I had endeavored to destroy the prevailing notion about the road by the West. I regard with amazement the mass of false interpretations of Homer which a quarter of a century ago I found prevail- ing, and of which I think we are gradually getting rid. One very great source of aid has been the opening up of Egyptian and Assyrian knowledge, and from this quarter I believe that more aid will yet be drawn. With you I think that the supposed inconsistencies of Homer about the Underworld are really ascribable wholly, or in the main, to his interpreters. Many thanks for your letter and for the interesting paper in the " Boston University Year Book " which has followed it. The illustration of your theory which is furnished by the Voy- age of the Egyptian Sindbad is very striking, and must be most gratifying to you. I can find no objection to your view except those suggested by the original meaning of the words Aincnti and Erebos (Assyrian eribu = ''erebJi) ; and I am therefore inclined to subscribe to all that Professor Tiele has written you in regard to it. That in Homer the earth is sup- posed to be a sphere, with Olympos above and Tartaros below, clears up every difficulty. RECEPTION OF TRUE KEY. 455 L further illus- le True Key." ,r of first ri\v\k, widely known yet permission ere witlilield. ' Boston Univer- g article on the ) absurdly placed )ut 1 am glad at that is, from you own upon the Un- ison published, to- i Underworld was I had endeavored wd by the West, ilse interpretations ro I found prevail- getting rid. the opening up of ■om this quarter I inconsistencies of icribable wholly, or Interesting paper in Ih has followed it. Inished by the V(^y- Iking, and must be action to your view [aning of the words erehJi)\ and I am .>rofessor Tiele has br the earth is sup- Ud Tartaros below, I read your paper with great interest and pleasure. Now again you have put your favorite thesis so clearly and forcibly that I incline more and more to your opinion. I only wait, before surrendering, for some leisure to go accurately over the principal facts and citations. I have read your paper with great interest. Your ex- planation makes diings clear, at any rate, thougli I must read the Odyssey again before venturing to affirm that you see things as Homer saw them. Accept my best thanks for your "Year Book" for 1883, with its excellent and interesting dissertation upon " Homer's Abode of the Dead." Not being a Homerologist, I am hardly entitled to express an opinion, but your argument seems to me conclusive. Your paper has an especial interest for me, inasmuch as it shows that there was less difference between the cosmography of Homer and the cosmographies of his successors than we had been brought to suppose. {The modest writer of t/ieforC' >j;oing is one of the most eminent Hellenists of Cambridge., Eng.) I have to thank you for your new contribution to our knowledge with reference to the conceptions of the ancients as to the shape of the earth. Your paper on the " Navel of the Earth " is full of interesting and important information. My only doubt is whether the time has come for such wide generalizations as you propose. However, our science wants centrifugal as well as centripetal forces, and a discoverer must not be afraid of places marked " Dangerous." HOCHGEEHRTER HeRR COLLEGA : Freundlichen Dank fiir Ihre giitigen Zeilen und den sie begleitenden interessanten Aufsatz. Ihre Hypothese ist hochst iiberraschend, und wiirde, sollte sich ihre Richtigkeit auf ganz feste Fusse stellen lassen, in der That mit einem Male Ord- nung in eine besonders krauss verwirrte Frage bringen. . . . Sobald es Ihnen nachzuweisen gelingt, dass in der Volksvor- stellung der Griechen aus friiherer Zeit die Erde kugelformig 456 AVPENDIX. war, wcrden Sie die Schlacht gcwonnen haben, und Nicmand wird es furder vvagen diirfen die Stimmc gegen Hire Ansicht zu erliebcn. Es will mir nicht unnio;;lich scheincn, Spuren solcher Anschauung zu finden, zumal da die Kgypter ganz gewiss schon friili Kenntniss von der Kugelgcstalt dcr llide besassen. . . . Trotz diescr Bcdcnkcn hat mich Ihr Aufsatz lebhaft interessirt. Leider wcrde icli aus Gesundheitsriick- sichten den Orientalisten-Congress zu Leydcn nicht besuchcn diirfen ; es sollte mich aber freucn, wenn die von Ihncn so geistreich angcregte intcressante Frage wiihrend dcsselbcn zur Discussion kiime. More and more decided arc the latest verdicts of Amer- ican scholars. The following are a half dozen specimens from a considerable collection. The Rev. A. P. Peabody, D. D., LL. D., Professor Emeritus in Harvard University: — I have read not only with pleasure, but also with profit, your essay on Homer's " Abode of the Dead." Your theory ac- cords with my impression, and makes that impression — before vague and with less than sufKicient reason — definite and well grounded. C. C. Everett, D. D., Dean of the Theological Faculty of Harvard University, and Professor of Comparative Theology : — So far as Homer is concerned, your view is certainly fitted to remove grave difficulties. J. R. Boise, D. D., LL. D., Professor in the Baptist Union Theological Seminary, Chicago : — The able and learned article on Homer's "Abode of the Dead " has interested me deeply, and I believe your view is the correct one. Edwin Post, Ph. D., Professor of Latin, Indiana As- hury University, Greencastle, Ind. : — I have recently re-read your monograph on Ancient Cos- ^/':c/-:pr/0A, of tiwe a-f.v. L. D., Professor George Zabriskie Grriv S T n r^ "nnot-ce,! and unsuspected r™ ° '['"" '""""■■= hi'l'erfo receive the aitenlion -in i ''^"■"'"S "lat tins treatise mav -■•-.S I remain, e,™ ™' ■^"'''^-J- "'-'> '' - eminently de' J*<=v. A. B. Hyde D n r> r ghcny College, Mead "ie p/.'!!'^'^°' °^ ^--^-^^ in Alle- I seem to have fr.nnri • ' H<"-r„a., been .,„''; wS,:\«";t '" '•• " ""ehty -aze." some one to teach us hmv ?"oi"' '"'' ="" °'«"ver, but for '» ^^ee. The more I reS u,^ ™' " '''' '° "''"« «s hoj osy, .he more I am str ,ck vur,",^::"" ?'""^^ "^ '>- cosmoZ '\Lt "r ™^ """ "■•= "o-wemte:::^;:"'' '"^"■"■-•^ ■• ">« ■I «e followinir cIopq «^«. but, coming f,o°„,°\,"°^^-«ly belong in this place, "s name indicates a PoUsh^T ,'''""'""'■ ^he writ- "^e of tlie German Un^utT"""^' '"'' ^'^ P^^Har Position that he was not to th'" """''"■^ "'e sup- ;^^oritative announcemen of h! TT"^'' '^°-' "- au- North Pole of ,he "curseless """^ ?='°'-afon at the calculated to relieve in,! 1,/""^'" ^""*^« '^ "^l" a"y of our converts meditn ""^'•''"cboly into which 'hance to fall -.1 ' "'^''"^""S "Pon the lost Eden, may 458 APPENDIX. spriich in den eleganten Salons der geistigen Aristokratie Bos- ton's,, des amerikanischen Athens' dreht, seitdem Professor Dr. Warren der dortigen 'Jniversitat, in einer langen wissen- schaftlichen Abhandlung bewiesen, dass nur allein am Nord- pol das Paradies gelegen haben kann. Den Einwand wie ein Mensch am Nordpol bei solcher Kiilte Adam heitzen konnte, widerlegt der fromme und gelehrte Mann dadurch, dass es je- denfalls friiher dort warmer gewesen sei. Dr. Warren ist sehr dafiir, eine Expedition auszuschicken, um seine auf ' wissen- schaftliche Voranssetzungen ' gestiitzte Schlussfolgerungen zu beweisen." Diese Mittheilung ist mir aus folgendem Grunde eine freu- dige-interessante weil, wie Sie es glauben, dass am Anfange der Menschheit das fluclilose Paradies am Nordpol stattgefun- den, ich es glaube, dass ein solch fluchloses und noch herrlich- eres Paradies eben auch daselbst am Nordpol in nicht ferner Zukunft stattfinden wird. Ich bitte Sie nun ergebenst, Ihre diese Wissenschaft be- treffenden Grunde mir ehestens gefiilligst mittheilen zu woUen, um zu ersehen, ob diese Ihre Griinde diese wichtigen Vergan- genheits-Zustande betreffend, mit den meinigen, die eine noch wichtigere Zukunft betreffen, auf eben demselben Standpunkt der heiligen Schrift und der Geographie beruhen. Ich bin kein Studirter der Weltwissenschaft, also auch nicht der Ge- ographie, und ebenso wenig ein menschlich Studirter der The- ologie, jedoch aber ein " gottlich-studirter " Theologe. Kraft dieser meiner gottlichen Ausbildung oder unmittelbar von Gott mir gegebenen Offenbarung — die auch Blicke in die Tiefen der Gottheit mitsichfiihrt, ist auch dieses bis vor ein- igen Jahren verborgen gewesene Geheimniss der nahen Zu- kunft mir entsiegelt in Uebereinstimmung der heiligen Schrift und der Geographie. Auf diese religiose und natiirliche Wahrheit sicher mich stiitzend und berufend, bin ich mit Ihrer Anschauung ganz iibereinstimmend, dass am Nordpol das in Folge des SUnden- falles zerstcirte Paradies stattgefunden hat. Ich hoffe dass wir beiderseits auf dem Grunde dieser un- serer Uebereinstimmung in nahere Bekanntschaft mit einan- der nach Gottes Wohlgefallen kommen werden. In diescin Vertrauen zu Ihnen erwarte ich eine baldige Erfiillung meiner eben an Sie gerichteten Bitte, — mit Hochachtung, Ergebenst, HINDU COSMOLOGY. 459 stokratie Bos- em Professor angen wissen- iein am Nord- nwand wie ein .eitzen konnte, xh, dass es je- ATarren ist sehr le auf ' wissen- ifolgerungen zu runde eine freu- iss am Anfange rdpol stattgefun- id nocb herrlich- ol in nicbt ferner ^issenschaft be- :theilen zu wolkn, wichtigen Vergan- cren, die eine noch ^elben Standpunkt 3eruhen. Icb bin Inch nicht der Ge- Studirter der Tbc- Theologe. Kraft • unmittelbar von licb Blicke in die lieses bis vor ein- ss der nahen Zu- ler heiligen Schiiit rheit sicber micb lAnscbauung ganz i olge des Sunden- ^runde dieser un- ftscbaft mit einan- ]rden. In d^esem Erfullung meiner cbtung, SECTION IV. — THE EARTH AND WORLD OF THE HINDUS. {Illustratitig pp. I2Q-IJJ ; 148-134; 1S3, etc.) That the mythojogical cosmos of the modern Hindus was originally constructed upon the basis of a geocentric system of the planetary heavens I cannot doubt. Its " concentric oceans " aro simply the interplanetary spaces mythologically pictured and described. Its " concentric continents " are those invisible solid, concentric, " crys- talline spheres " which revolved about the common axis of the Pythagoreo-Ptolemaic universe,, and were presided over by the different visible planets. In both systems the Earth is not only the centre of the planetary revo- lution, but also the centre of each planetary sphere itself. How entirely incorrect the flat-world interpretation or- dinarily given us is ^ could hardly be more forcibly shown than it is in the following extract : " Priya Vrata, by the wheel of whose car the Earth [or better, the World] was divided into seven continents, had thirteen male chil- dren. Six of these embraced an ascetic life ; the rest ruled the seven divisions of the Earth [World.] To Ag- nidhra was assigned the Jambu-dwipa [the Earth] \ to Medhatithi, Plaksha \ to Vapushmat, Salmali ; to Jyotish- niat, Kusa j to Dyutimat, Krauncha \ to Bhavya, Saka ; and to Savala, Pushkara. With the exception of the sovereign of Jambu each of the six other kings is said to have had seven sons, among whom he divided his king- dom into seven equal parts. These seven divisions in each of the six continents are separated by seven chains of mountains and seven rivers lying breadthwise, and placed with such inclinations 7vith respect to one another that if a straight line be drawn through any chain of mountains or ^ See picture in Dr. Scudder's Tales for Little Readers about the Hcalhen. New York, 1849 • P- 4S' 460 APPENDIX. i rivers and its corresponding mountains or rivers on the other contiftents, and produced toward the central is/and, it would meet the centre of the Earth J' ^ All Puranic descriptions of the Earth are by no means consistent with each other, but the following from the Vishnu Purana can readily be understood if read in the light of the ilUistradve cuts already given : — ■ Parasara. — You shall hear from me. Maitreya, a brief account of the earth. A full detail I could not give you in a century. The seven great insular continents are Jambu, Plaksha, Salmali, Kusa, Krauncha, Saka, and Pushkara ; and they are surrounded, severally, by seven great seas, — the sea of saltwater (Lavana), of sugar-cane juice (Ikshu), of wane (Sura), of clarified butter (Sarpis), of curds (Dadhi), of milk (Dugdha), and of fresh water (Jala). Jambu-dwi'pa is in the centre of all these. And in the centre of this (continent) is the golden mountain Meru. The height of Meru is eighty-four thousand Yojanas ; and its depth below (the surface of the earth) is sixteen (thousand). Its diameter at the summit is thirty-two (thousand Yojana:;), and at its base sixteen thousand ; so that this mountain is like the seed-cup of the lotos of the earth. The boundary mountains (of the earth) are Himav.it, Hemakdta, and Nishadha, which lie south (of Meru) ; and Nila, Sweta, and ^ringin ; which are situated to the north (of it). The two central ranges (those next to Meru, or Nishadha and Ni'la) extend for a hundred thou- sand (Yojanas, running east and west). Each of the oth- ers diminishes ten thousand (Yojanas, as it lies more remote from the centre). ^ They are two thousand (Yo- 1 Babu Shome, " Physical Errors of Hinduism." Selections from the Calcutta Review, No. xv., April, 1882. 2 In our diagram of the Hindu Varshas, p. 152, the length of the outer partition-ranges diminishes at about the rate here reqiiiicd. In the only other I have ever seen, — one shown me by Professor I; HINDU COSMOLOGY. 461 o,rs on the other land, it would e by no means >wing from the [ if read in the laitreya, a brief Id not give you Jambu, Plaksha, ikara ; and they seas, — the sea (Ikshu), of wine urds (Dadhi), of ). ese. And in the mountain Mevu. .ndYojanas ; and ;arth) is sixteen rait is thirty-two ixteen thousand ; up of the lotos of th) are Himavat, south (of Mcru) ; re situated to the (those next to ,r a hundred thou- Each of the oth- as it lies more ro thousand (Yo- SeUctions from S W mi.' 52, the length of the > rate here rcquivcd. .wn me by Professor janas) in height, and as many in breadth. The Varshas (or countries between these ranges) are : Bharata (India), south of the Himavat mountains ; next, Kimpurusha, between Himavat and Hemakiita ; north of the latter, and south of Nishadha, is Harivarsha : north of Meru is Ramyaka, extending from the Nila or blue mountains to the ^weta (or white) mountains ; Hiranmaya lies between the Sweta and Sringin ranges ; and Uttarakuru is beyond the latter, following the same direction as Bharata. Each of these is nine thousand (Yojanas) in extent. llavrita is of similar dimensions, but in the centre of it is the golden mountain Meru ; and the country extends nine thousand (Yojanas) in each direction from the four sides of the mountain. There are four mountains in this Varsha, formed as buttresses to Meru, each ten thou- sand Yojanas in elevation. That on the east is called Mandara ; that on the south, Gandhamadana ; that on the west, Vipula ; and that on the north, Suparswa. On each of these stands severally a Kadamba-tree, a Jambu- tree, a Pippala, and a Vata ; each spreading over eleven hundred (Yojanas, and towering aloft like) banners on the mountains. From the Jambu-tree the insular con- tinent Jambu-dwipa derives its appellation. The apples Max Miiller in a modern Sanskrit tractate, whose author's name I regret to have lost, — all the ranges were represented as parallel with the Nila and Nishadha. Moreover, as the whole surface of Jambu-dwi'pa was represented as a circular flat disk, the second of the two successive outer ranges was much more than the required one tenth shorter than its predecessor. Besides this, Jambu-dwi'pa is re- peatedly described in this same Purana as a globe, and should be so treated in all graphic representations. Postscript. Since the above was written a long search for Capt. Wil- ford's diagrams in vol. viii. of the Asiatic Researches (London, 1S08) has been crowned with success. His perpetual vacillation between what he considers the primitive and proper flat earth of '' the Pau- ranics " and the spherical earth of the astronomers is the chief source of his manifold embarrassments. A second and subordinate source of endless trouble is his effort to interpret mythical geography in the terms of geography actual. 1 1 462 APPENDIX. of that tree are as large as elephants. When they are rotten they fall upon the crest of the mountain 3 and from their expressed juice is formed the Jambu river, the waters of which are drunk by the inhabitants ; and, in consequence of drinking of that stream, they pass their days in content and health, being subject neither to per- spiration, to foul odors, to decrepitude, nor organic decay. The soil on the banks of the river, absorbing the Jambu juice, and being dried by gentle breezes, becomes the gold termed Jambunada (of which) the ornaments of the Siddhas (are fabricated). The country of Bhadraswa lies on the east of Meru, and Ketumala, on the west ; and between these two is the region Ilavrita. On the east (of the same) is the forest Chaitraratha ; the Gan- dhamadana (wood) is on the south ; (the forest of) Vai- bhiaja is on the west -, and (the grove of India, or) Man- dana is on tlie north. There are also four great lakes, the waters of which are partaken of by the gods, called Aruiloda, Mahabhadra, Asitoda, and Manasa. The principal mountain ridges which project from the base of Meru, like filaments from the root of the lotos, are, on the east, Sitanta, Mukunda, Kurarf, Malyavat, and Vaikanka ; on the south, Trikiita, Sisira, Patanga, Ruchaka, and Nishadha; on the west Sikhivasas, Vai- diirya, Kapila, Gandhamadana, and Jarudhi \ and on the north ^ankhakiita, ^ishabha, Hamsa, Naga, and Kalan- jara. These and others extend from between the inter- vals in the body, or from the heart, of Meru. On the summit of Meru is the vast city of Brahma, ex- tending fourteen thousand leagues, and renowned in heaven ; and around it, in the cardinal points and the intermediate quarters, are situated the stately cities of Indra and the other regents of the spheres. The capital of Brahma is inclosed by the river Ganges, which, issu- ing from the foot of Vishnu, and washing the lunar orb, falls, here, from the skies, and after encircling the city When they are mountain ; and Jambu river, the bitants ; and, in they pass their t neither to per- ir organic decay, rbing the Jambu 2S, becomes the rnaments of the J of Bhadraswa a, on the west ; avrita. On the ratha ; the Gan- 3 forest of) Vai- India, or) Man- four great lakes, the gods, called lasa. iroject from the 30t of the lotos, urarf, Malyavat, Sisira, Patanga, Sikhivasas, Vai- dhi ; and on the aga, and Kalan- itween the inter- sru. r of Brahma, ex« d renowned in points and the stately cities of js. The capital ;es, which, issu- \ the lunar orb, :ircling the city fflNDU COSMOLOGY. divides into four mighty rivers fln • • ^ t;ons. These river^ a^tl e Ir^.f '" '^^^^^^^ ^-^- Chakshu, and the Bhadra 'n '/''" Alakananda, the tops of ,X,, inferior mountains o „' .f ''' '^"^"^^ "P-^ ^he flows over their crests and n. u^ ^^'^ '^^^ «f Meru Bhadraswa, to the ocean Th?, 'f'"'"-^^^ '''' ^^""^ry o^ to (the country ofrS arati . ''r"'"'' ^^^^ ^^'th nvcrs on the way LuZTU ' "^^"'^"^^ "^^o seven -to the sea, afte'; tr e " ^ ^'^ ^^^^^shu fal,: and passing through the cou„trv n 't '"''''''' '"°""tains Bhadra washes the countrv of H ^^,,^^^"'"^'-- And the "V^'r ''' ^-^ocJ^ "^'"^"^' ^^^ ^^"^■ and Ni^haS TonTe^rorth'^'T" ''' "^°""^'-'- ^^''a lies between them, like thlT ' '"^^'^ '''"^ ^ast). It The countries of ^r ^ '^^'P ^^ a lotos. ^ Uttarakuru lie, like t'et/tl/^W '' f ''^'^^^-' -^ tenor to the boundary rlaLT\'r' '" "°^^^^ kuta are two mountain ranges run n' ''' '""^ ^"^"■ and connecting the two chah ^ of Nfl ""'j "^' ^°"^^^' Gandhamadana and Kaildsa ev!. / ^ ^""^ Nishadha. Vojanas in breadth, fmm se '^^^"^ '"'' ^"^ ^^^t, eighty yatra are the limita ive^rum V '""' """'^^^'^^ ^^ Pari! ;"g^ like those on the Zt uT °" ''' ^^^^' stretch- l^adha ranges. And th? ""'"" ''^" ^''^a and Nis- -d;.a are the norte^ Lrr^f^^ ^^'^^^^ ^^ J^- and west, between the two eas ^r^^V?''"^^^"^' ^ast oyou the mountains descr bed b "^^ '"^"^'^^ boundary „.ountains, s tuated t ^' •^''''' '^^^^^ ^^ the four sides of Meru P^^'" on each of the 464 APPENDIX. pleasant cities, embellished with the palaces of Lakshmi, Vishiiu, Agni, Siirya, and other deities, and peopled by celestial spirits ; whilst the Yakshas, Rakshasas, Daityas^ and Danavas pursue their pastimes in the vales. These, in short, are the regions of Paradise, or Swarga, the seats of the righteous, and where the wicked do not arrive even after a hundred births. In (the country of) Bhadra^wa, Vishiiu resides as Hayasi'ras (the horse- headed) ; in Ketumala, as Varaha (the boar) ; in Bha- rata, as the tortoise (Kiirma) \ in Keru, as the fish (Matsya) ; in his universal form, everywhere : for Hari pervades all phices. He is the supporter of all things ; he is all things. In the eight realms of Kimpurusha and the rest (or all exclusive of Bharata), there is no sorrow, nor weariness, nor anxiety, nor hunger, nor ap- prehension ; their inhabitants are exempt from all in- firmity and pain, and live (in uninterrupted enjoyment) for ten or twelve thousand years. Indra never sends rain upon them ; for the earth abounds with water. In those places there is no distinction of Kfita, Tret^, or any succession of ages. In each of these Varshas there are, respectively, seven principal ranges of mountains, from which, O best of Brahmans, hundreds of rivers take their rise. {From II. H. Wilson^ s Translation of the Vish- nu Pura?ia.) ^ For further accounts of Puranic geography see Wil- ford's " Sacred Isles in the West," ch. iii. ; " Geographical Extracts from the Puranas," in " Asiatic Researches," vol. viii. 1 The parentheses and vowel marks in the foregoing are Wilson's. 3going are Wilson's. SECTION V.-GRrrr ^ l>'ese Vorstellung hat iL f ^^" '"genden Korpe^ '-he Ausbildung-erf.L ,"""'„'" 1""^ ''"'' ^ "'sprungiich als eigen 1 Che sJ'^7''' '^^ ^'«^ S^ambha gedacht und ist 30 hn G , ,d nur!' '"''^""^^ ^^'ler Es findet sich aber schon Hn , ' ,^' ^ ' ^^"v 4i, 10) sung, dass derselbe • ," '12^!" '" '^^^^-"se'eVuff.: .' %tbus . ,i, Scna^flaf'e rr^^'. f'.^"^- ^I- der Skambha als ,nit Saft ..effflrri*^ '"=' '^''^'^''^n' 74' ^ ; 86, 46), und es is 1,1 '^t''" ''*'^"' ^S'- 'X.. S^onnen, das das doppelte m1 ^ '^ ^" «■■"""«!; rechten) und Fia,s,Ven E r ^ "^"' ^^= Fasten (Auf- Anschauung tmt nC f r^t u^l", f "'■^'"'■»^- ^^'-e "leder auf. Hier ist der sL r '^^ "" Atharvaveda Grundpfeiler und Tra 'h,M ^''' '"'«^''s' als der kI "-' ■•" den alle eT tt^:;-,,!" "''^''gebaudes gesc t -nd, und der das ge "mite 'f '^^t''^" ^'"»-'-sen Korpern und Elementen m ^ ^''''^ "'' all ihren "'an-ene und Has ^he "" =7^^" ^-^'-f 'hre Unterlage, vom Prarfapat d3 ' r ■■"'« ^''^ dieser 35)- Auch die G^^Z^Ztrc^^^'"''- ^^•' '' '' ^ «-. Weltsaule getragen (X 7 x A / ,"■ "'''^ ^°" dieses Auffassung reiht sich aucht M ^^ architektonische e'nes ^«„„„, ^„„ ^ '™ ™ Ath. Veda die Vorstellun. Aesten die Goiter setrsLd^r"^'^ ^^^'^ '^'' ^-en^ der emen Schatz bergen soil, slrh;^ ; " '' "' "' ^^X ""d belbst m animalischer Form 'i > 466 APPENDIX, wircl der Skambha dargestellt, so dass seine einzclnen Korpertheile unterschieden werden (X., 18, 19, 33, 34). Ja schliesslich geht der Mythus so weit, dass er diesen Weltpfeiler oder Weltbaum nicht bloss beseelt denkt, son- dern geradezu mit der VVeltseele (Purusha) mit dem obers- ten Brahman, mit dem Praga pati (dem Weltschopfer) identificirt (X., 7, 15, 17, 8, 2), und die hierin entlialtenc Personification tritt nocli entschiedener zu Tag, wenn der Skcimbha sogar mit Indra zusammenfallt (X., 7, 29, 30). Mit Recht ist der elementare Skambha mit dem Atlas der Griechen und den Siiulen des Herakles verglichen wor- den. Wie aber M. Muller angesichts des Skambha und der oben vorgefuhrten Zeugnisse die Behauptung aufstel- len kann : " Es ist kein Beleg dafur vorhanden, dass ir- gend etwas der Auffassung der Yggdrasil ahnliches je den vedischen Dichtern in den Sinn kam " (Essays, Deutsch, II., 184 [Chips, vol. ii., 204]), ist mir unverstandlich. Vergleiche auch die Behandlung des Skambhamythus bci de Gubernatis Mithologia Vedica, pp. 273-299. Aus der spateren Entwicklung der indischen Mytholo- gie nenne ich noch besonders die Darstellung des Welt- baumes oder himmlischen Baumes in dem paradiesischen, bei der Quirlung des Oceans entstandenen, Pari^dta (Ko- rallenbaum, Erythrina Indica), der durch Krishna auf Wunsch seiner Gattin Satjabhama Indra entrissen wurde. Die Beschreibung des Baumes, sowie semer Entfiihrung erscheint im Purina (Vishnu, Bhagavata) noch einfach (vgl. Vish. P. bei H. H. Wilson, pp. 585-588), sehr aus- fuhrlich dagegen und mit einzelnen Abweichungen iin Harivamga. Er hat nach diesem die Eigenschaft, "de satisfaire tous les desirs. Vous n'aurez qu'k penser, et aussitot par la vertu de celle fleur, qui saura s'entendre et se multiplier, vous aurez des guirlandes, des couronncs, des festons, des parterres entirs. Cette fleur reme'die a la faim, k la soif, h, la maladie, k la vieillesse, etc. Bien plus, source de bonheur et de gloire elle est encore un gage de HOMER'S ABODE OF THE DEAD. 467 ine einzclnen i, i9» 33» 34)- iass er diesen sit denkt, son- T\it dem obers- Weltschopfer) idn enthaltene Ta*'', wenn der X., 7» 29. 3°)- t dem Atlas der verglichen wor- 3 Skambha und luptung aufstel- iianden, dass ir- ahnliches je den assays, Deutsch, unverstandlich. Lmbhamythus bci 3-299. iiscben Mytbolo- :ellung des Welt- 1 paradiesischen, ^n, Pari^ata (Ko- rcb Krishna auf entrissen wurdc. einer Entfiibrung fa) nocb einfach 1-588), sebr aus- .bweicbungen ini Eigenscbaft, "f^^- z qu'k penser, et lura s'entendre ct is, des couronnes, fleur remedie a la |e,etc. Bienplus, incore un gage de vertu ; intelligente et raisonnable, elle perd son eclat avec I'impie, et le conserve avec la personne attachee il son de- voir." — Siehe, ' Harivansa,' trad, par Langlois, 11., 3, 12. (J. Grill, ""Die Erzvdtcr der Menschhcit^' vol. i, p. 358, 9.) SECTION VI. — HOMER'S ABODE OF THE DEAD.i {Illustrating Chapters i. and vii. in Part Four ; Chapter ii. in Part Six, and other passages, ) So Jterrscht gleich i'tber den Ort wo die Unterwelt zu denken set ein merkwiir- diger Zwiespalt. — Preller. Bei Homer ist eiue dof>f>elte A nsicht von der Lage des Todtenreiches zu erken- nen, eininal unter der Erde, und dann iviederuin an/ der Oberjliiclie des Bodetis in dem eivigen Dunkel jeiiseits des nvestlichen Ocean. Die A nsichten von den beidcn Hades Jliessen bestdndig durcheinander. So iveit aber die mit jedetn ver- bnndenen V'orstellungcn zu sondern uitd einzeln aufzu/assen vidglich ist, miissen wir sie darzulegen im Folgenden versuchen. — Volcker. Where does Homer locate the realm of Hades ? In the whole broad field of Homeric scholarship it would be difficult to find a more fascinating question. Few have been more written upon. The literature of the subject is itself almost a library. No mythologist, no commentator upon the poet, no class-room interpreter even, can evade the question ; and yet, in their answers, the Homeric authorities of all modern times, whatever their nationality, present only a pitiable spectacle of help- less bewilderment. Classifying these various interpreters according to the answers they respectively give to the question propounded, they stand as follows : — First, a class who content themselves with the general assertion that the earth of Homer was a " flat disk," and that his Hades, like that of the ancients generally, was undoubtedly conceived of as a dark recess or cavern in the bosom of this earth-disk. Anything in the Odyssey ^ Printed in advance in The Boston University Year Book, vol. x. 468 APPENDIX. 8 or elsewhere inconsistent with this view is simply a play of poetic fancy. Second, a class — if class it be — who say with the genial Wilhelm Jordan, " Das Hadesreich der Odyssee ist die von der Sonne abgekehrte Riickseite der Erd- scheibe, die avTi^fBov., Gegenerde, eincs weit spiiteren Zeit- alters. Von der C^L6wf)osey, relating the descent into and ascent out of it.^ i\\ certain passages it is in fact expressly spoken of as "under the earth ;" ^ in others, as "under tiie re- cesses of the earth." * Hence Aides liimself is styled Z6U5 Ka.raydi'nui'i, " tiie Subterranean Zeus.'' ° In the Battle of the Gods there is a vivid picture of this underworld and of its tremblinji; kinj; : — riqites. Taris, 1876 : p 13. The Shcmitic origin of this term is sig- nificant. It prepares us to find an agreement hetwcen the Homeric and the Assyrio-Iiabylonian ideas of the reahn of the dead. Mr. Gladstone says, " Long before ... I had been struck by the pre- duminance of a foreign character and associations in llie Homeric Underworld of the eleventh Odyssey." Homeric Synchronism. Lon- don, 1876: p. 213. On the remarkably expressive cuneiform ideo- graph for erifut, see the explanation given by Robert Brown, Jun., in the Proceciiins^s of the Society of Biblical Archccology^ ^Lry 4, 1S80. 1 This term is also believed to be of Oriental origin, exactly corre- sponding to the Bit Edi of the Akkadians. See the translations of The Descent of /star. " Talbot regards, and I think justly, the usual etymology of Hades — quasi Aides, ' in'oisihle ' — as an afterthought." Robert Brown, Jun., The Myth of Kirkiy p. 1 1 1 n. ^ Iliad, vi. 284; vii. 330; xiv. 457; xxii. 425. Odyssey , x. 174, 560 ; xi. 65, 164, 475, 624 ; xxiii. 252 ; xxiv. 10, etc. " Von einem be- sondern Eingang zu diesem unterirdischen Hades," remarks V bicker [Homerische Geographie, p. 141), " mcldet der Dichtcr nichts ; viel- mchr gehen die Seelen, durch nichts gehindert, bcgrabcn und unbe- graben iiberall unter die Erde." Granting this, there is no ground for his other assertion, " 1 )ieser Hades ist nicht unter, sondern in der Erde." The immaterial shade can as easily pass through the whole globe to an opposite surface as through a thick crust to a central cavern. But see Mr. Gladstone's Homeric Synchronism, p. 222 : " There is not in all Homer a single passage which imports the idea, or indicates the possibility, of our passing through the solid earth." ^ Iliad, xxiii. 100 ; xviii. 333. * Odyssey, xxiv. 204. Comp. Iliad, xxii. 482. ^ Iliad, ix. 457. Comp. iii. 278; xix. 259 ; xx. 61. Comp. Herod- otus, ii. 122. 4/2 APPENDIX. '\ \ Thus the blessed gods inciting, both sides engaged, and among them made severe contention to brealcout. But dread- fully from above thundered the Father of gods and men, while beneath Poseidon shook the boundless earth and the lofty summits of the mountains. The roots and all the summits of many-rilled Ida were shaken, and the city of the Trojans and the ships of the Greeks. Aides himself, king of the nether world, trembled beneath, and leaped up from his throne terrified, and shouted aloud, lest earth-shaking Poseidon should cleave asunder the earth over him, and disclose to mortals and immortals his mansions, terrible, squalid, which even the gods loathe. 1 But while the abode of Aides is thus clearly represented as under the earth, it is nevertheless represented as just across the Ocean-river, and capable of being reached by ship. In the eleventh and twelfth books of the Odyssey, the voyage of Odysseus to this region is described in the same apparently literal nautical terms as is the voyage to the Land of the Lotus-Eaters. And of his interview with the dead, Hayman says, " The whole scene is conceived by the poet as enacted on a geographical extension of the earth beyond the Ocean-stream." ^ There is no hint of any descent into the interior of the earth, no passage through or into subterranean caverns. The journey is as natural in all its aspects as any voyage from one coast of the Atlantic to its opposite.^ Thus opens the eleventh book : — 1 Iliad, XX. 6i ff. That there may be no question as to the impar- tiality of the translations given in this paper, the well-known and widely circulated version by Theodore Alois Buckley, of Christ Church, Oxford, is followed. A version giving more accurately the force of the verbs expressing upward and downward motion would in many passages be more favorable to the cosmological view here presented. 2 Henry Hayman, D. D., The Odyssey of Homer. London, iS66: vol. ii,, Appendix G 3, p. xvii. ' " Von einem Hinabsteigen findet sich keine Spur. "Wer beweisen kann, Odysseus sei im Innern der Erde gewesen, der versuche es ! " — Volcker, Homerische Geographie, p. 1 50. IIM ^lonier. London, iS66: "°''''''' -^^^^^ o. ruB v^^^. I^ut when wp wf.,.« ^ , ^^3 first of all cC: S -L'^r r '^^ ^^^'> -^ the sea we put hem on board, and we ourt?;. T' ''''^'"^ '^'^ «heep we sJ^ecIding the warm tear A n J ? f '-^'^ '"^'^^''k^^' grievinl awful goddess, possess 'n.l ^^"'"■^^^"•^^I Knk^ (Circe) -^^"n' ^;^;;;Iue-pro^ ^H- ::^;:;-::/J]-;;^r,sen^ heSd o^ cellent companion. And we sat dm ^ ^^'^ "''^'^^' an ex- ?^e instruments in the slu-p and tit "^ """^ "^^ ^^ each of I And the sails of it pts^';tr^^^^^^ out the whoJe day anri ,l,„ ^ ""^ ■""=» were strctchp,! overshadowed. A^nd t ached t," '"' •'"'' ="' "'^ ™- ' deep-flowing Ocean.i v .e.e , 1 '. ''"'"''' ^™"""''" °f >he K'mmerians covered w h !■ f '' """''^ ""d city of the f"-"ing .sun behold the rtl^-'r:-" -P°r, nor ioes , o^vard the stany heaven no ',""; ""^''''-^^ ^^''""'e goes from heav.n to earth, but penl' " " Y '""'= ^ack a^in 'es.s mortals. Having co^e t ,e° '"^" '" 'P''^'"' °>er hap we took out the sheen a^,^ " ''"■"" "P <»"• sliip and stream of the Ocea, Amurl T """^''^^^ "-' '"Sain o d"e mentioned. ' ™'" *<^ <=^">e to the place ,vhich Kirk6 ^^^^^^'^l^^ »^ "eM the consul- terms ; — """^ Previously prescribed i„ these " O noble son of \ nprf«o -main any longer in my h^uTe r4°:':;""»' O^^--^- "o not jou must perform another voyal ?^d ^■°"'' "'"' i*« first Aides and awful PersenhnnJ !^ ' ''°™^ •" "'e house of _^-sias, a blind pr^p^t ^tse" T^ f ^°"' "^ ^heban when dead, PersephonJ hJ X! ^ " "■■"■ ^o him, even '-.e.<.met:;^rinTte,i;V'"---°---' No one <-> ncble son of L aprfAc , ^' ,«•« desire of a guide or "; "I't™;"!;"" °^^--^. '^tnot havmg erected the mast and "^ f '" '' '^"'■« *<> thee ; but ;°wn, and let the bla^of the N?^'' ""H "'^ "'"'^ ^"i' .' i "»" Shalt have passed throulh °1 ' Oce ''"', "^ «"' -"'-" ''-Mhefarther,C;:™r;;>.---e 474 APPENDIX. is the easy-dug * shore and the groves of Persephone, and tall poplars, and fruit-destroying willows, there draw up thy ship in the deep-eddying Ocean, and do thou thyself go to the spa- cious house of Aides. Here indeed both Pyriphlegethon and Cocytus, which is a stream from the water of Styx, flow into Acheron ; and there is a rock, and the meeting of two loud- sounding rivers. There then, O hero, approaching near as I command thee, dig a trench the width of a cubit each way; and pour around it libations to all the dead, first with mixed honey, then with sweet wine, and again the third time with water, and sprinkle white meal over it. And entreat much the powerless heads of the dead, promising that when thou comest to Ithaca thou wilt offer up in thy palace a barren heifer, which- soever is the best, and wilt fill the pyre with excellent things, and that thou wilt sacrifice to Tiresias alone a black sheep, all black, which excels among thy sheep. But when thou shalt have entreated the illustrious nations of the dead with prayers, then sacrifice a male sheep and a black female, turning to- ward Erebos ; and do thou thyself be turned away at a dis- tance, going toward the streams of the river ; but there many souls of those gone dead will come. Then immediately exhort thy companions and command them, having skinned the sheep which lie there slain with the unpitying brass, to burn them and to invoke the gods, both mighty Aides and dread Per- sephone. And do thou, having drawn thy sharp sword from thy thigh, sit down, nor suffer the powerless heads of the dead to go near the blood before thou inquirest of Tiresias. Then the prophet will immediately come to thee, O leader of the people, who will tell to thee the voyage and the meas- ures of the way and thy return, how thou mayest go over the fishy sea." "^ In the following passage Odysseus narrates how, hav- ing arrived " at the place which Kirke mentioned," he fulfilled her commission : — ^ Buckley well expresses dissatisfaction with this rendering. Volckcr translates the term " ein niedi-iges Gcstnde." It is per- haps the ](nv-down shore as contrasted with the upper or opposite one. '^ Odyssey^ x. 488-540. ^o.,.^^'s ^^o^^ o, ^^^^^. ^^^^ layest go over the ^ Then Perimede, and V , 7 """ """"' ^75 but I, drawing „," h„ ^urylochos made .sacred off.,- 'I'' wid,h of a c"],'' {: ;;-;; f™™ ,n, .hig„ du,? S ;-; "> --.11 the dead, first S ^ :^4™™'' " we pc;ured S wme aga,„ a third time with waTe ,„ d?'^'' "''" ^"■"' -^'^eet dead '^"'' ' '""<^'' '^«ougln the un , '"'■'"'''"' " '""= "'eal dead promtsing that when I came t^uf "'"""'•" '■=■•"'» »' the n my palace a barren heifer u^- , "'^'''' ' """W offer no I wouid sacntice separ^ * ;';^;;: --- - "- best, and hat tlem ti;r ^■•""•°"S O"^ sheer But wh"' V'^''^ •^" '^'■•"^k Wack blood tlow^d . aldl ■■ "'■"'^ '■'"° ""= trench ald'r" -.semWed forth from ttZ^ ^"^^ 1,"'f "-■^'-d 5;a" t e' "•"ch-enduring old men a, dT '■°"'"' S''''=*a»d Joulhs 3 gneved mind, and many Mat"^""" "•'S'-'^ l>avi,,g a ^l.^^ bmss-tipp d .pears, pol ^T^rr "'-,"-«-! wS^ great numbers wo.-^ , ^ ^•"'^■L'esmeared Ti-mc , ) !,«« w.-th adi"r So^'f f°"'"'= '--'. oTd fferei: Tl-en at length exhortit mv'com ""'' '"^"^ ^^'-^ "Po" m Aides : " _ * ""' he was truly i„ " the house of And first (he soul of ^vords: "Opt, V ' "' ^'^clress ne- IiTm o , ''J^'^"^"a west? T, ^^^^"or, how didst thnn ^ ' ^^""^^ ^^^'^A^ed :i-.;-o-.astcomesoo„e;o*nrth:nTt.:h"rbfe 476 APPENDIX. Thus I spoke, but he groaning answered me in discourse : " O Zeus-born son of Laertes, much-contriving Odysseus, the evil destiny of the deity and the abundant wine hurt me. Ly- ing down in the palace of Kirke, I did not think to go down backward, having come to the long ladder ; but I fell down- ward from the roof, and my neck was broken from the verte- brae, and my soul descended to Hades." In line 69, Elpenor speaks of Odysseus '* going hence from the house of Aides ;^' and in line 164, as elsewhere (x. 502; xi. 59, 158; xii. 21; xxiii. 324), the expres- sions leave no chance to doubt that Odysseus' voyage was a genuine descensus ad inferos} Here, then, are the two grand tests of every proposed solution of the problem of the location of the Homeric Hades : — I. Its Hades must be under?ieath the earth ; and II. // must be on the surface of the earthy beyond the Ocean. This strange and perplexing difference, not to say con- tradiction, in the Homeric representations, did not escape the notice of the older commentators and writers on mythology. Especially has it called out the ingenuity of German scholars. F. A. Wolf recognized it, but did not profess to be able to give an explanation. J. H. Voss invented the method of solving the problem by placing Hades itself within the bosom of the earth-disk, but its "entrance" on the westernmost point of Europe on the inner shore of the ocean. Volcker rejected this solution, but, in the absence of a better, cautiously suggested — as we have seen — the possibility of Homer's having held to two kingdoms of the dead, one within the earth, and one ^ See Preller, Myt/ioloffie, vol. !., pp. 504, 505, where he says that the region visited was "die ganze und wirkliche Unterwelt, nicht etwa bloss ein Eingang in die Unterwelt." See also Volcker, Ho- merische Geographic, § 76. ; !" the Clark trans-oceanic West ' v„ , ' ''^^ ;nci,ned to the support of the V. ^""' ^"^ '^""'^h ' '" '854 Preller could T^I 'akTf" r™"^"'"''^^ ^ ^^ P.esent chiefly prevalent." - s!,'^ ° p ^l "'^ °"^ "^'t "rged, nothing in the descrintion: f T' '" ^"'' """^--s corresponds with the idea of ' ° "' "'"'"' "^'''^^ to a subterranean world e^Ldinr"''' °^ "^"trance" be situated under Greece and a -J" ''■"'""''' ""' '» atest interpreters have bee^t "''""'" ''"'- ">^ to take their choice amoro- ,h! T, '' ""•<= "'^ ^''''lier conjectures classihedatZbei? " '' f''' ^""'^^dictory latest of these guesses ih'f^'T^"' '"" P^"^^" '^'- comes within a hair's-breadt h !f f, -^ ^" ' ^"'l' "'°fgh it moot ridiculed of all!" ^"'°^ "'" "■""', it has been the the earth, and one position is responsible for th.f •, "'^taken presup- tempted demonstrations of e%teT "'■ ="' ""'-"^ a' Hades. Once conceive of t:no^Tr "' "" P°«'' > This if .11 , Homeric Cosmos as rep- reg,o„s of Hades... (,, ffisl^y^^'J^^P^ "' 'his visit X '^'P'.'C, 1873 •• pp. 486-490. ' '* '^"••'"'i'. und A'inhhcff. 478 APPENDIX. o o •J i ? ^ resented in the accompanying cut of the "World of Homer," and the problem of the site of Hades is solved at a glance. It is the southern or under hemisphere of the upright spherical earth. In this conception, whatso- ever is '• trans-oceanic " is also and of necessity " subter- ranean." Now for the first time can it be understood how Leda and her noble-minded sons can be " on a geo- graphical extension of the earth " on the farther shore of the Ocean, and at the same time vkpdtv yrj^ (Od., xi. 29S). In this Cosmos, Hades cannot be beyond the Ocean without being also underneath the earth. On the traditional theory of a flat earth, the passage is and ever must be the palpable inconsistency which Volcker represents it. Even the theory of two or of twenty Homers does not reasonably explain it. Precisely so with the passages relating to Elpenor. His soul at death goes Kara x^*^v6<;, yet it is found with the other ghosts in the shadowy land just across the Ocean-river. So again with the passages relating to the shades of the slain Suit- ors. These reach the Underworld (xxiv. 106, 203); but it is by a route along the SKrface of the ground to the Ocean-stream, in full sight of the gates of the sun and of the stars of the Milky Way (xxiv. 9-12).^ Illustrious scholars have accused the poet of Widcrsprilche grober und drger than usual in this account ; ^ but the whole trouble has been, not in the poet, but in the poet's inter- preters. With the spherical earth, all is consistent and precisely as it should be. In this reconstructed Homeric Cosmos, every crosser of the Ocean -stream, whether it be Hermes, or Odysseus, or Herakles, reaches the groves of Persephone and the house of Aides. Wherever Kirke's isle is located, the "blast of the North wind" will drive the voyager thence towards the realms of the dead. In like manner it can now be understood how the stolen 1 Porphyrius, De antra JVymphanim., 28, explains that stumbling- block of commentators, " the people of dreams." 2 Volcker, Homerische Geographic, p. 152. the "World of Hades is solved r hemisphere of :eption, whatso- cessity " subter- be understood 1 be '* on a geo- farther shore of Ev yf/s (Od., xi. be beyond the earth. On the 3assage is and ■ which Volcker ) or of twenty :. Precisely so is soul at death other ghosts in iver. So asrain E the slain Suit- xiv. io6, 203); }e ground to the the sun and of 2)} Illustrious ^rsprikhc grohcr but the whole the poet's inter- consistent and ructed Homeric n, whether it be ss the groves of herever Kirke's ind " will drive I the dead. In how the stolen ns that stumbling- ■^"de of Subicrranein 7„ 479 swift steeds to the Unclemorl', " Ascending behind "- heboid t,.e .t4r:.tni^i::-'r''-^'^!' ^artb, tile sunlight, ^LYMPOS. TARTAROS. The World of Homer. 48o APPENDIX. and the fishy sea.^ Though the god has power to pene- trate the solid sphere," it is down no yawning chasm that his chariot disappears. As far as we can trace him and his victim, they are still at the surface, simply moving from the upper to the lower hemisphere.^ In perfect accordance with the requirement formulated by Volcker, Odysseus and his companions descend (xi, 57, 476), while the ghosts ascend (xi. 38), to reach the meeting- place on the lower edge of the Ocean-stream. Beautifully exact and strikingly natural is now the poet's declaration that Tartaros is "as far below Hades as earth from heaven," — a declaration as fatal to many of the fifteen or more traditional explanations of Homer's Hades as it is to Flach's elaborate and ingenious diagram of the Hades of Hesiod.* With this inverted hemisphere for the king- dom of the dead, Voss need not longer trouble himself about the mention of " clouds" therein.^ In fine, with the correct Homeric conception of the earth and of Hades, the manifold alleged contradictions of the poet instantaneously vanish. Better than that, the dual im- 1 Homeric Hymn to. Demeter, 30-35. Foerster places the origin of this hymn early in the seventh century before Christ : Der Raub und Ruckkehr der Persephoni. Stuttgart, 1874 : pp. 33-39- See Sterrett, Qua in Re Hymni Homerici quinque Majores inter se different Anti- qiiitate vel Homeritate, Boston, 1881. 2 Lines 16-18. Precisely so in the Indian epic, the Ramayana : one and the same point in Hades is reached, whether we accompany Ansuman digging through the heart of the earth, or follow the god- dess Ganga along the surface of the earth and across the Ocean- bed. Book I., canto xl. Compare Odyssey, xi. 57,58. ^ The much-debated Nysian field whence the goddess was stolen was in the land of the gods at the North Pole. Menzel, Die vor- ckristliche Unsterblichkeitslehre, Bd. i., 64-67 ; ii., 25, 87, 93, 100, 122, 148, 345. * Das System der Hesiodischen Kosmogonie, Leipsic, 1874. 5 Odyssey, xi. 591. Volcker, while locating this Hades above ground far to the West, is also embarrassed with these clouds, since his Homeric heaven does not extend over the trans-oceanic region, or even over the Ocean : p. 151. power to pene- ling chasm that trace him and simply moving e.* In perfect ted by Volcker, (xi. 57, 476), :h the meeting- am. Beautifully et's declaration as earth from of the fifteen or 3 Hades as it is m of the Hades re for the king- trouble himself ^ In fine, with J earth and of 3ns of the poet it, the dual im- places the origin of ist : Der Raub tind 13-39. See Sterrett, ter se different Anti- :he Ramayana : one her we accompany , or follow the god- across the Ocean- 7,58- goddess was stolen Menzel, £>ie vor- ii., 25, 87, 93, 100, ipsic, 1874. this Hades above 1 these clouds, since ns-oceanic region, or ""'""''' ^'"'^^ OP ms n;.,,n. ag^es of Hades whJrh K — ^^^^--^M ^^^ ;;- Vision oi";;:tri:e:;s^"'*-'-''^'u.ed I'emselves into one perfec,;' , ' '', '"''''^'"^ ^<=»'ve '"" of ^'-„i„g vividnLs an.j'blru";:'' ""^"^""''^ P'^ One ground of misgiving nnri ., , <><=C"r to cautious mind " '?. >"" ' ^^^ P°^^''b'y still ^-^ked, "attl,e early Homerieo ?"'"^'" '' "'^ b" f«rcise of the scientific Tm-''"' ""'^'^'''""ed in tl,e '-"-if '>»t pendantt^de ™X?T' k^"'" P'«"- able even by ghosts? CouW kI ,°' "'^ ""«'• ^"^ habit- f-y ' have gained such b.ol d '° T^ '"^''"'^ 'Newton's how infernal rivers andtfe ti°" 'f ^"""''''^'^^^ ^s to see «nder-hemisphere > Thit A. f "^ '" "°"'^' =""g to an ophers of his age were ,M "' """^ "'^ Greek phJlo" -gs;' but is it^cred bLtt; T r""" '™'" "->-"- -fvvas equal to such a ask? Th "'' "' "" "--"o of Hades requires that we should th-r^r'^'' ^""^"^P""" everything is upside down exa " ° ' ''"''' ""'"e odal to our own r. , ^^^^"7 contrary and mf.-r^ eouid -hiev;;uch'a;"r:di;iri't " '''^^"'^'-'^ - ^ A pertinent and perils / ffi "'' "'""Sht ? " questions might be ^11? "^"^ ="'^"'" ^ these »d instructive funerf custofn^'"""^ '° ^ "'°^' -' ous of Burmah. This tribe ^cen "^^ "'°''^^" K^-'ens gifted or more hiw,lv civil a l""^^ ""^ "=0'-e highlv 'be heroic age, yerti^eyCrnrerr. '"^ ^-^-^^ "^ eep..onof an antipodal Hades A Z^. ""' "°"'"'^ eon- "y gives us the following arcn ''°™P'='^""""hor. burial arrives, and the bofv k \ ™"=" ">« '^^y of bamboo splints are taken td '"""', '° *^ S^^^e, four West, saying, -That is i,e 1:^.'^ "'^°™ '""-ds the «'e East, saying, " That is the w's ' ""',''" '^ "'™'™ ^o «rds towards the top ot terror '•'""''' "'^ "'^o>"> "P- "f the tree; ' and a ClTl^l^TJ' ""'"'' ''^ ""='0°' ' See Dr. H. w Sd,3f J^ ™ downwards, savin.. 31 ' ^""Psic, I86S, quarto. 482 APPENDIX. ' That is the top of the tree.' The sources of the stream are pointed to, saying, 'That is the mouth of the stream ; ' and the mouth of tlie stream is pointed to, saying, * That is the head of the stream.* This is done because in Hades everything is upside down in relatioji to the things of this worlds ^ Striking, however, as would be this answer to the ques- tioner, a better can be given. The better one points out to him the foolishness of the assumption that either the Greeks or the Karens originated for themselves their con- ceptions of Hades. Both simply inherited from their fathers the old pre-Hellenic Asiatic idea of an antipodal Underworld. Ages ago the notion which underlies the Karen's rites was so prominent in the mind of the East Aryans that the sudden and inevitable reversal of the points of the compass, consequent upon entering the Un- derworld, became a poetic circumlocution to express the idea of dying : thus, " Before thou art carried away dead to the Ender by the royal command of Yama, . . . before the four quarters of the sky whirl rounds . . . practice the most perfect contemplation." ^ Ages ago the notion which underlies the southward voyage of Odysseus led prehistoric Akkadians, in naming the cardinal points of the compass, to designate the South as " the funereal point;" and in locating the kingdom of the dead, to place 1 Mason in yournal of the Asiatic Society, Bengal, XXXV., Pt. ii., p. 28. Spencer, Descriptive Sociology, No. 5, p. 23. At least one tribe of our American Indians at the time of their discovery had a myth of creation in which the earth was conceived of as a ball. H. II. Bancroft, Native Races of the Pacific States, vol. iii , p. 536. That the same idea underlay the Hades-conception of the New Zealanders is plain from various indications. See present work, note on pp. 125, 126. '^ Mahdhhdrata, xii. 12,080. Muir, Metrical Translations from Sanskrit Writers, London, 1879, p. 220. " To the gods this sphere of asterisms revolves toward the right ; to the enemies of the gods, toward the left." S^rya Siddhdnta, xii., ch. 55. Comp. Aristotle, De Calo, lib. ii., c. 2. 2s of the stream I of the stream ; ' o, saying, * That because in Hades the things of this iwer to the ques- r one points out I that either the selves their con- ited from their of an antipodal h underlies the lind of the East reversal of the Altering the Un- I to express the ried away dead ima, . . . before . . practice the igo the notion •f Odysseus led rdinal points of ; " the funereal e dead, to place al, XXXV., Pt. ii., At least one tribe :overy had a myth as a ball. h/h. , p. 536. That the New Zealanders is ;, note on pp. 125, ''OMEK'S ABOOE OF ri,E I^nAD. it opfosile i),e stan of t/„ south „ , " "'"" '^^^ he lifetime of Babylon a Zi t'"'- ^'^ '''"'""S'' all ;f«.me of ancient IndiaVt e tZ^' T ^''''''^'' ^'' '"e the summit of ,he earth at LT , „""= ^"'^^ "« at part -the mount of the ru e of H ,^°''' "^ ~"»'er. Posite, beneath the earth ? > , '" ''^'"' - exactly oo fane, h,ht Prot-eed ■ ro1;\;^rN°"r°''^-° "-- death from ,he Sot,th.< nkel""' ''■■"•''""» ="'d had thetr heaven-touchin, ^^oZ^^T^.Z^^,^'^^^ torn. h. I n T-.. .. "'^^st. OriPtnes d^ p rj^- . • *4;, but I, p. 134. seg J ^f^es ae I //istotre, Paris rSS, * "Nach Z ^i ^^iradies? Leipsic .c^r "^''^^0 of such iNach der pythagoraischP,T ^ '" ,' ^^^^P- I2i. halter der Welt hin/ 1 ^^'" ""^ ^^'^ Cotter as SrV 7 "'"" ^'"• ^^sen ^.erst.r:::de'n^^^^^^^^^^ ^^er d,e Zl^::^ ^^ 484 APPENDIX. and an antipodal counterpart in Amenti, or the abode of the dead.^ As in ancient India's, so in ancient Egypt's, thought, this world of the dead was exactly the reverse or counterpart of the world of the living.'^ " The tall hill of Hades," like Ku-meru, is therefore a "pendent" one,' — the southern or under terminus of the egg of the earth.* 1 For the first, see Brugsch, Gcographische luschriften alldgyp- tischer Denhndler, Leipsic, 185S, lid. ii., p. 57 ; for the second, The Book of the Dead, fassim. '^ See Tiele, History 0/ the Egyptian Religion (English edition, 18S2), p. 68, " the reversed world : " and the still more forcible expression in his Histoire Comparee (Taris, 1882), p. 47, "/^ monde opposi au monde actttcl.'^ Compare Book of the Dead (Birch's version), where it is styled *' the inverted precinct ; " and Thompson's Egyptian Doc- trine of the Future State, wherein Hades is described as " the inverted hemisphere of darkness," and where it is said to be " evident that the leading features of the Greek Hades were borrowed from Egypt." Bibliotheca Sacra, 186S, pp. 84, 86. Still more recently Reginald S. Poole has remarked, " Now that we recognize the Vedic source uf a part of the Greek pantheon, and its generally Aryan character, we may fairly look elsewhere for that which is not Vedic. If embalming were derived from Egypt, why not the ideas which the Greek saw surrounding the custom, — the pictures of the Underworld, with its judgment, its felicity, and its misery } The stories which Homer makes Odysseus tell, when he would disguise his identity, show the familiarity with Egypt of the Greeks of the poet's time." 77/*? Con- temporary Review, London, 1881, July, p. 61. It would be better to say that Homer's Hades, while agreeing with the Egyptian and Baby- Ionian and Vedic, was not necessarily "borrowed" from either of these peoples, but more likely agreed with the Egyptian, Babylonian, and Vedic, simply because in each case there was a common inherit- ance, — a survival of still more ancient ideas of prehistoric ances- tors. 2 Records of the Past, vol. x., p. 88. * Tiele, History of the Egyptian Religion, p. 67 : " The heaven (at night) rests upon the earth, like a goose brooding over her egg." Chabas, Lieblein, and Lefevre have each maintained that the ancient Egyptians were acquainted with the spherical figure of the earth ; while Maspero, despite his language in Les Contes Populaires dc rjSgypte Ancienne (Paris, 1882, pp. Ixi.-lxiii.), in a private letter of still more recent date admits the possibility that the Egyptians held to such a view as long ago as eighteen centuries before the Christian era. In this connection it may be useful to state that Professor / , IIOATER'S ABODE OF THE DEAD. 485 the abode o! ient Kgypt's, Lhe reverse or lie tall hill of ient" one,'— ^ of the earth.* •diriftet'' altdgyp- X the second, The lish edition, 1882), orciijle expression e vionde offosi au h's version), where on's Egyptian' Doc- ,edas"thei«W'-';;'' ,e " evident that the awed from Egypt^ ecently Reginald b. ,e Vedic source ut a (Vryan character, we edic. Ifembalmmg 'vhich the Greek saw bnderworld, with its Lies which Homer lis identity, show the t'stime." The Con- ' t would be better to ^ Ecvptian and Baoy- .ed " from either of ilgyptian, Babylonian, as a common inherit- ' of prehistoric ances- r . « The heaven (at Jding over her egg." f^ned that the ancicu ■ figure of the earth , , Contes Poptihures d. in a private lette- [at the Egyptians he d Is before the Chr^stia'i ' state that Professor The assertion sometimes made, that the EQ;yptian Amenti was just over the hill to the west of Ahydos,^ is only worthy of such cosmologists as Popsey Middleton, or the still more illustrious author of the "Zetetic Astronomy." About a thousand years before Abraham went down into Egypt, — at least, that is the date assigned by Egyp- tologists, — a scribe engrossed upon a papyrus a fair copy of a tale of shipwreck. It is now one of the treasures of St. Petersburg. At the Congress of Orientalists, held in Berlin in the year 1881, its existence was first made known to the modern world through the translation then submitted by M. Golenischeff. The tale proves to be a kind of anticipation of the voyage of Odysseus to the realm of Aides. As in the Odyssey, it is the shii>com- mander himself who narrates his adventures. There is no imaginative and poetic vagueness about the details. The ship was one hundred and fifty cubits long, forty broad. The crew consisted of one hundred and fifty men. Upon the Ocean he is wrecked, his crew lost ; he himself, however, is driven upon an island in the neighborhood of the nether world of the dead. Indeed, the place itself was called " The Isle of the Double ; " and it was, as Maspero believes, peopled by Shades invisible to the voyager only because he was as yet in the body. I'lie king of the island was a huge serpent, thirty cubits long, and possessed of a wonderful beard.'^ Tiele informs the present writer that he has abandoned his conjec- ture touching Cher-miier, expressed in his Vergelijkcnde Gcschicdenis van de Egyptische en Mesopotamischc Godesdiensten, Amsterdam, 1872, p. 94; French edition, 1882, p. 51 ; English edition, 1882, p. 72. 1 As, for example, by Marius Fontane, Histoire Universclle^ Les Egyptes, Paris, 1882, p. 154. The following is particularly timely : " While at Abydos I explored the mountain cliffs to the westward in the hope of finding early tombs in them. In this, however, I was dis- appointed, as I came across only a few tombs of the Roman period." Professor A. H. Sayce in letter from Egypt in The Academy, London, Feb. 2, 1884, p. 84. 2 Les Contes Populaires de V£gypie Ancienne, pp. 145-147. On the 486 APPENDIX. ,.; I 1 In what direction lay this mysterious land ? Not in the West, where all our Egyptologists persist in locating Amenti, but in the South. Directly up the Nile^ and out into the Ocean at its head-waters, lay the voya- ger's track. As in the case of Odysseus, so many centu- ries later, it was the blast of the North wind which bore him thither.^ In conclusion, if both the ancient Egyptians ^ and Chal- daeans^ believed that like as the stars of the northern hemisphere arc set over the realm of the living, so the stars of the j ■" em hemisphere are set over the realm of the dead; if in ancient Hindu thought " the gods in heaven are beheld by the inhabitants of hell as they move with their heads inverted; " ^ if in Roman thought — conflicting views of Egyptologists as to the interpretation of terms designating the points of the compass, see Zeitschrift fur dgyptische Sprache, 1865, 1877, ^tc. 1 The universality of the ancient belief that disembodied souls must cross a body of water to reach their proper abode has attracted the attention of Mannhardt, and led him to remark, " Da auch die kel- tische, hellenische, iranische und indische Religion diese Vorstellung kennt, so ist es von vorn herein wahrscheinlich, dass dieselbe uber die Zeit der Trennung hinausgeht." Germanische Mythen, Berlin, 1858, p. 364. This is a far more reasonable explanation than the fanciful attempt of Keary in the work already cited, and in his paper before the Royal Society of Literature entitled Earthly Paradise of European Myths. 2 Creuzer-Guigniaut, Religions de P Antiquiti, tom. ii., p. 836. Comp. the language of the recently discovered epitaph of Queen Isis em Kheb, mother-in law of Shishak, King of Assyria {circa 1000 B.C.) : " She is seated all beautiful in her place enthroned, among the gods of the South she is crowned with flowers." The Funeral Tent of an Egyptian Queen, by Villiers Stuart, London, 1882, p. 34. Notwith- standing this, Mr. Stuart, a few pages later, — so powerful is the in- fluence of tradition, — alludes to Amenti as located in the West (p. 49, also p. 27). But the inscription continues : " She is seated in her beauty in the arms of Khonsou her father, fulfilling his desires. He is in Amenti, the place of departed spirits." Comp. p. 33. 3 Diodorus Siculus, ii. 31, 4. Lenormant, The Beginnings of His- tory, New York, 1882, pp. 568, 569. * Garrett, Classical Dictionary of India, Art. ** Naraka." See also Obry, Le Berceau de VEsplce humaine, p. 184 n. LATEST POLAR RESEARCH. 487 ;ists persist in ly up the Nile, ^ lay the voya- o many centu- nd which bore ans'^andChal- ,f the northern e living, so the the realm of the rods in heaven ''they move with rht — rpretation of terms hrift fur dgyptische .mbodied souls must le has attracted the " Da auch die kel- 011 diese Vorstellung I, dass dieselbe uber \che Mythen, BerUn, ■xplanatiou than the ited,audm his paper Earthly Paradise of L. ii., P- 836. Comp. \\ of Queen Isis em tia(«V<^« 1000 B.C.) •• Ined, among the gods f Ftineral Tent of an Lo. 34- Notwith- V powerful is the in- Led in the West (p. I« She is seated in her ling his desires. He Imp. P- 33; \e Beginnings of ms iNaraka." See also " Mundus, ut ad Scythiam Rhipaeasque arduus arces Consurgit premitur Libyae devexus in austros : Hie vertex semper sublimis, at ilium Sub pedibtis Styx atra videt, Mancsque profundi ; " ^ if in Greek cosmology the tall Pillar of Atlas is, as Eu- ripides makes it, simply the upright axis of earth and heaven,^ — then the earth of the ancients is incontestably A SPHERE, and Hades its under-surface. The " flat disk " notion is itself a myth, and a myth without foundation. In ancient thought, in a sense unrecognized even by the writer of the words, was it true, — " The world of Life, The world of Death, are but opposing sides Of one great Orb." ^ SECTION VII. — LATEST POLAR RESEARCH. The recent happy issue of the last of the three re- lief-expeditions sent out by the United States government for the rescue of Lieutenant Greely and his starving band of heroes has given unusual popular interest to the great international undertaking in which he and his men were so perilously engaged. Still very few, compara- tively speaking, understand the scope and promise of this first really adequate and hopeful scheme for the investi- gation of Terrestrial Physics near the Pole. Mr. O. B. Cole, in 1883, described its inception and purpose as fol- lows : — The representatives of ten nations besides our own are en- gaged in it ; the fields of observation are in both the Arctic ''■ Vergil, Gtorgics, i. 240, ss. 2 Peirithous, 597, 3-5, ed. Nauck. Comp. Aristotle, De Anim. Motione, c. 3. Samuel Beal, Four Lectures on Buddhist Literature in China. Londf n, 1882: p. 147. Liiken on Atlas in Traditionen des MenschengescHechtes. Miinster, second edition, 1869. Also The True Key to Ancient Cosmology, pp. 13-21. 3 Morris, The Epic of Hades (fourteenth edition). London, 1882: p. 230. 488 APPENDIX. and Antarctic, as well as the intermediate regions of the globe ; there have been established eighteen Polar stations, and upwards of forty auxiliary stations ; the observations have been made during the year which will end with the present month — that is, between September i, 1882, and September i, 1883 ; they have been made and recorded daily, and bear upon the same identical points of inquiry. This scheme of obser- vation originated with Lieutenant Charles Weyprecht, an Aus- trian explorer of fame, who, however, did not live to see it carried into execution. He first broached it at a meeting of German naturalists and physicists held at Gratz on Septem- ber 18, 1875. The plan was formally approved at a meeting of the International Meteorological Congress held in Rome in the spring of 1879, ^'^^ 'ts details were perfected at other meetings of the same body held in Hamburg, October i, 1879, and at Berne, August 7, 1880. Finally, on August i, 1881, ten delegates, of whom General Hazen, chief of the United States Signal Service, was one, met at St. Petersburg and organized an official Polar Commission. All the members of this com- mission had authority 10 act for their respective governments. The Polar stations were assigned among the nations as fol- lows : The United States, at Lady Franklin Bay, Grinnell Land, and Point Barrow, Alaska ; Great Britain and Canada, at Fort McRae and Fort Resolution, on the Great Slave Lake, in British America ; Denmark, at Godthaab and Upernavik, on the west coast of Greenland ; Germany, at Hogarth Inlet, Cumberland Sound ; Austria, at Young Foreland, Jan Mayen Island, north of Iceland ; Finland, at Soudan Kyla, in Lap- land : Holland, at Dickerson Haven, mouth of the Yenisee River, in Russia ; Norway, at Bossekop, northwestern coast of Norway ; Sweden, at Mosel Bay, Spitzbergen ; and Russia, at Moller Bay, Nova Zembla, and Lighthouse Point, at the mouth of the Lena River. The Antarctic stations are those of Germany, on the South Georgia Islands ; France, at Cape Horn ; Italy, at Punta Arenas, in Patagonia ; and the Argen- tine Republic, at Cordoba. The Polar stations are all within thirty degrees of the North or the South Pole, and the auxil- iary stations are spread over the rest of the habitable globe. In his original presentation of the scheme Lieutenant Wey- precht remarked that the unsatisfactory scientific results of the various Arctic and Antarctic expeditions are owing mainly to two causes : first, that the primary object of these expedi- LATEST POLAR RESEARCH. 489 ;ions of the liar stations, vations have the present September i, nd bear upon jme of obser- ■echt, an Aus- live to see it a meeting of tzon Septem- at a meeting held in Rome fected at other ctober i, 1879, ust I, 1881, ten ; United States and organized ;rs of this com- e governments, e nations as fol- Bay, Grinnell .in and Canada, •eat Slave Lake, [and Upernavik, Hogarth Inlet, [and, Jan Mayen . Kyla, in Lap- of the Yenisee ihwestern coast n -, and Russia, e Point, at the Aions are those [France, at Cape and the Argen- s are all within ,, and the auxil- [labitable globe, lieutenant Wey- tific results of •e owing mainly ,f these expedi- tions has been geographical discovery, while scientific investi- gation was secondary ; and, secondly, that these individual voyages have been of an isolated character, and hence the ob- servations made are necessarily deficient as compared with what would be gained by a properly scientific investigation, which should obtain, for combination and comparison, memo- randa of magnetic and meteorological observations simultane- ously made in all parts of the world under a uniform system. Such an investigation, he said, would be feasible only by the united action of the great nations of the world. By the plan adopted, the following schedule of work was agreed upon for each of the several stations : Meteorological observations : temperature of the air, temperature of the sea, barometric pressure, humidity, direction and force of wind, kind, amount, and motion of the clouds, rainfall, and woather and optical phenomena. Magnetic observations : absolute de- clination, absolute inclination, absolute horizontal intensity, variations of declination and inclination, and variations of hor- izontal :'' tensity. All these observations were considered ob- ligaiorv J were to be made at each station hourly each day, excep^i .; .-; the 1st and 15th of each month, when the read- ings were to be made every five minutes. The following obser- vations were considered desirable, and doubtless have gener- ally been made : Variations of temperature, with height, solar radiation, evaporation, galvanic earth currents, parallax of the aurora, spectroscopic observations on the aurora, ocean cur- rents, tidal observations, structure of ice, density of sea-water, atmospheric electricity, and the force of gravity. The several expeditions were started in season to arrive at their respec- tive stations by the date assigned for beginning, September i, 1882. . . . The station of the party of Lieutenant Greely at Lady Franklin Bay is the most northerly one of the whole, and is but about eight degrees south of the Pole. It is very diflScult of access on account of the masses of ice that collect in Baf- fin's Bay. It was arrived at in a vessel by Lieutenant Greely, though the start was made a year in advance of most of the other expeditions, under an apprehension that the vessel might be stopped by ice, and a long journey have to be made over- land. The consequence is that the observations of this party began in the fall of 188 1. It was the intention, however, to remain two years, and various stores were laid in and arrange- 490 APPENDIX. ments were made accordingly. Early in the summer of 1882 a steamer was sent by the government with supplies for the party, but was unable to reach them because of the ice. The supplies were left at points designated beforehand by Lieuten- ant Greely, whence he could convey them to headquarters by sledges. Another party was started this summer, and if they cannot reach him by navigation will employ sledges and push north till they meet him. He has instructions to retreat this season by sledge in the contingency of the non-arrival of a vessel, and to come down the coast of Grinnell Land. Either by vessel or on these coast-line sledge journeys the two par- ties will undoubtedly meet, and probably something definite will be heard from them by the end of September.^ . . . Point Barrow Is on the northern or Arctic Ocean shore of Alaska, in latitude 72° north. The party stationed here is in charge of Lieutenant P. H. Ray. A relief vessel visited the place in the summer of 1882, and found all well. The obser- vers reported that the preceding winter had been long and severe, but not exceeding in these respects what had been ex- pected. Hourly meteorological observations had been kept up uninterruptedly from October 17, 1881, and magnetic observa- tions from December i. From that date to August i, 1882, over 90,000 readings of the magnetic instruments were taken, and a corresponding amount of meteorological work had been done.^ Last summer, just before the world had learned of the rescue of Lieutenant Greely, the commanders of all the different stations, Greely alone excepted, held a con- ference in Vienna, and congratulated each other and the scientific world upon the success achieved. The recov- ery of the extremely valuable observations of the then missing officer has now crowned and completed the 1 Soon after the above was written came the disastrous news of the destruction and failure of the second relief expedition. 2 Summary of a paper read before the Boston Scientific Society (from the Boston Daily Advertiser). See also A. Bellot, "Observa- toires Scientifiques Circumpolaires," in Bulletin de la SccietS de Geo- graphic, Paris, I Trimestre, 1883, and the current scientific period- icals. The last-citpd article has a valuable map of the international system of stations. For an imaginary discovery of the North Pole, see Thos. W. Knox, Voyage of the Vivian. New York, 1884. ^-^r^Sr J>otMJl I^ESEAl^CH. grandest and m^cf u ^ 491 Christian nlrLv'r;: -'^"'^^P^- - Which the P»^ed. Most remarl- ■n these several e.pediUons mor?M .'" '" "'^ f^" 'hat of various nationaMes, were kent " ''^^ """''^^d „,en, wuhm the Arctic Circle tTf '^ ""^ "'=»•' a full vea^ -C yet. but for a :5e"Srf """■^•^-^ -'--1 «;e parties, not one "life ^o^^ '"provisioning one o^ What could be fuller of promfse with ' '''"' ^^""^"d- of polar exploration !• "* '^'P«<=f 'o the future 'ogic "uel': Sad'l^'j-f^S'^P'''^ -d Paleonto- Part of the scientific Z. ■ oonsideration on the ll 'atest (as w^lf rtre^rr)"^ • ''^^^ P'^-^ Whoever has read the fasciL^ ^ ^"^"' ««Peditions Fossilis Arctica." a d Cou ""kf^'r f ""''''' "^'o^ «antes avant I'Apparition de I-H '^°"' ' " *^°"d« des opposite p. X.8), and fllron nL!^""'^ ^^^^ '"^ ohart >nteresting researches and s^u^e " 0"^^°"'^ e«eedingly well avoid the conviction that ,hV" .f'''^''S'"' cann" -- hoth to natura. "ZZ Z^^^^^-^^ Thtir cavern, J 'r , . ' '""'" "'<•'•> Ph'lip James Bailhv. 402 APPENDIX. I I SECTION VIII. — THE TRUSTWORTHINESS OF EARLY TRADITION. " Is memory capable of preserving through successive generations the facts of history, or whatever else peoples are continuously interested in knowing ? At first one is apt to say ' No,' remembering how seldom two people can agree in their recollection of even the briefest saying or commonest occurrence. But look into the matter. Note how the power of memory differs in different people, and how it may be cultivated, and especially how it strength- ens when systematically depended on, while, when little is left to it, it weakens. It is a small fact, but not with- out significance, that among the first things which chil- dren are set to fix in their memories, apart from any idea of sacredness, are long series of historical names, dates, and events, — English kings, American colonists and presidents, — far exceeding in difficulty those Israelitish histories which Kuenen thinks cannot be trusted because only preserved by memory. This shows that it is less a question of the power of memory than of how far memory is looked on as sacred, and guarded so as to hand on its contents unimpaired. As for evidence of the power of memory, what better can we desire than the well-known fact of the transmission of the Iliad, with its 15,677 lin^^s, for generations, perhaps for centuries, before it was even written ? Yet even that is a mere trifle compared with the transmission of the Vedas. The Rig Veda, with its 1017 hymns, is about four times the length of the Iliad. That is only a part of the ancient Vedic literature, and the whole was composed, and fixed, and handed down by memory, — only, as Max Miiller says, by * memory kept under the strictest discipline.' There is still a class of priests in India who have to know by heart the whole of the Rig Veda. And there is this curious corroboration of the fidelity with which this memorizing has been car- TRUSTWORTHINESS OF EARLY TRADITION. 493 OF EARLY h successive else peoples U first one is fo people can est saying or natter. Note It people, and )w it strength- le, when little but not with- gs which chil- from any idea I names, dates, colonists and lose Israelitish frusted because :hat it is less a jow far memory to hand on its ^i the power of [the well-known Its 15,677 li'^^^' ore it was even compared with Veda, with its . of the Iliad, literature, and .nded down by * memory kept still a class of •t the whole of corroboration has been car- ried on and handed down : that they have kept on trans- mitting in the ancient literal form laws prohibiting prac- tices that have nevertheless become established. Suttee is now found to be condemned by the Vedas themselves. This was first pointed out by their European students, but has since been admitted by the native Sanskrit schol- ars. Nothing could show more clearly the faithfulness of the traditional memory and transmission. It has, too, this further bearing on the (' e of the so-called Mosaic legislation : it shows that the fact of customs existing in a country for ages unchallenged does not prove that laws condemning such customs must necessarily be of later origin. But there is more that is instructive in the trans- mission of this Vedic literature. There has been writing in India for twenty-five hundred years now, yet the cus- todians of the Vedic traditions have never trusted to it. They trust, for the perfect perpetuation and transmission of the sacred books, to disciplined memory. They have manuscripts, they have even a printed text, but, says Max Miiller, * they do not learn their sacred lore from them. They learn it, as their ancestors learnt it thousands of years ago, from the lips of a teacher, so that the Vedic succession should never be broken.' For eight years in their youth they are entirely occupied in learning this. * They learn a few lines every day, repeat them for hours, so that the whole house resounds with the noise ; and they thus strengthen their memory to that degree that, when their apprenticeship is finished, you can open them like a book, and find any passage you like, any word, any accent.' / 1 Max Miiller shows, from rules given in the Vedas uicmselves, that this oral teaching of them was carried on, exactly as now, at least as early as 500 b. c* "Very much the same was it with those Rabbinical schools amid which the Talmud gradually grew up. All of that vast literature, exceeding many times in bulk 1 [See F. Max Muller, Origin and Growth of Religion. New York edition, pp. 146-161.I \%: 494 APPENDIX. . ? > • il ij: ,1 i : : '. t ''' Homer and the Vedas and the Bible all together, was, at any rate until its later periods, the growth of oral tradi- tion. It was prose tradition, too, which is the hardest to remember, and yet it was carried down century after cen- tury in the memory ; and long after it had been all com- mitted to writing, the old memorizing continued in the schools. Indeed, it has not entirely ceased even now, for my friend Dr. Gottheil, of New York, tells me that he has had in his study a man who thus knows the entire Talmud by heart, and can take it up at any word that is given him, and go on repeating it syllable by syllable, with absolute correctness. " In the presence of such facts, surely we must be pre- pared to revise our ideas of what memory is capable of, — ideas derived from the very limited -uses for which we usually depend on it now. Such facts show that memory, consolidated into tradition, is perfectly com- petent at least to act as an accurate instrument for transmitting along many generations whatever men are very anxious to have remembered. It is simply a ques- tion of being anxious and of taking special care." After other interesting and impressive illustrations, drawn from the history of peoples in the most diverse states of culture, the writer closes as follows : " If there is anything in these facts which I have collected they mean at least this : that we may take up again the discarded traditions of the old heroic ages, and of the world's morn- ing time, with far more confidence than has been usual of late years. Homer will be read with a new interest, and Herodotus, and — best of all — the world-old histories of the Bible. I know they will not give us detailed narra- tives by which this or that point can be proved, or names or dates to be learned off as school-boy tasks. But they will give us glimpses of the ancient days ; pictures here and there of such men and women as loved and fought in those old buried cities of Hissarlik, or meditated by the Ganges, or wandered from Chaldea with Abraham, or 3gether, was, at h of oral tradi- j the hardest to ntury after cen- i been all com- tntinued in the tsed even now, tells me that he lows the entire my word that is ale by syllable, we must be pre- •y is capable of, •uses for which acts show that perfectly com- instrument for atever men are I simply a ques- ,1 care." /e illustrations, le most diverse vs : " If there is cted they mean 1 the discarded le world's morn- is been usual of ew interest, and [-old histories of detailed narra- roved, or names asks. But they 1 ; pictures here id and fought in leditated by the h Abraham, or APPENDIX. followed Moses out of fh« ■ • those wild soIi.:i°t "sinaf '^ ^TP'^^ °' ^gypt i„.o n>arks of great deeds and .hoX I'd °' "^ '^"''- laws ; a dawn to the history not ! k *'"'''"P' ""d of dazzling sun-myths, but of re.l f'^" "'«°"«' ""^ (Brooke HerfoJin'm Aaal^°^^^ ^""^ ^"' ■"«"•" 1883.) ^ ' ^"""'^ -^'"My for August, s «*;'.,, INDEX OF AUTHORS RKP.RKEZ, TO OR QUOTED. Adams, \V. h. D.. 2^8 •Adenez, 19. ' ^'♦"• ■Adh^mar, A. T. ,e Much,,}.. J .:•''' 75. AIcsus, 238. Allen. Grant, 85. Altenbi,rg,469.^- Ambrose, Saint. 4 Ameis, 33,, 33„'_? Ampelius, 3,r'^77- Anaxagoras, iq,. ,q, .w- Anaximenes', S Z'. ^• Andersen, Hans.'xii. Andrea, 325. Aratus, 281. Archer-Hmd, R. D ... Argulf, Bishop. 227'^^ Argyll. Duke of, 3I; .„» Aristophanes, 35, ^' '♦°^- ^-otle. 30. 5^^122. .35. 349. Arnold, Edwin, 271 Arnold, Matthew, 455. BacJn%";'^^'394,432. Baiss'a'c/jules f8'x.l^82'^*' 3°3- Bancroft, H. H ,/; „3S8, 482 '"^'"9,247, Banier, Abb^, 424 .„ Barclay J. T.722^8/^'" garing-GouId, 9, ,2 ,0, Bar ow, H. cl.los!' ^ '• Bast.an.A., iji^Jg Baud,ssin, wUes.^' Bauer, Q. L., 369. Baumgarten, 205 Beal, Samuel, ,33, „. .g^ „ 272,487. •'•''^37.104,211,2 BeaS:rLl^°^- Bergaine,„s,257,,s8,3,8 3?^ «, 260, Bergel,207. Berfioux, 39, ,86. Berocus, 282. Bevan, W. L.. 20A grch, S. 484.' '°^- « ackie, J. Stuart, 340. B andford, W. T.. 1,, B eek. A. H., 208: '"• Bleek, W. H. J., 200 Boas, F., 56. ■'"~- Boeckh, Aug., 213. g^.'«?. J- R-, 456 gO'V"', 344- Boscawen, 229. Bouche-Leclercq, A., a,. Bourgeois, Abb^,' 448*. '^• Bowman, Henry tts Ki?' "^'"•yT29.^^ urauns, 245. Brewer, E. C, 27a Broca,376. ^2. RrT"' Francis, 26. Brown, Robt., fun , -,'66,47,. ' ■'""•• 3x, 221, 256, as7, Brugsch-Bey, ,24 ,,„ P =«o8-2io. 2^4, 26r266''^""'5'J77-.79, Bryant, Jacob, M.^'sc' ^57, 484. Buchholz, ,,,' „^ '^S, 353. Buchner, F K ^A'*',34o, 349- Buckle, Heni^lV; 4,2 ''^^' '9^' '»3'- Buckley, T a , ^^ Budde, Kari, aV' ^^^' ^^^' *■"■ Dunburv F w 477.^''^'*'"7.328,33S.349M70. Bunsen, Baron von. ,2e Bunsen, Ernst • " Ml' Burgess, E., ,3,. "' ^^2- Burton, R^i; ','/,- Butler, A F ,A Geikie, James, 74. Gerland, G. K. C, 469. Gerok, Karl, 433. Gibb, John, 163. Gill, 158, 2i8. Gladstone, 331, 332, 336, 451, 470, 471. Gobineau, Count, 42. Goguet, 424. Goldsmith, Oliver, 377. Gottheil, 494. Gottling, 324. Grassmann, 211, 241, 244, 258, 357. Gratacap, 298. Gray, Asa, 88, 90, 287, 288. Gray, Geo. Z., 457. Griifis, W. E,, 141, 145, 165, 245. Griffiths, 149, 242. Grill, Julius, 28-30, 43, 161, 250, 256- 258, 268, 269, 465-467. Grimm, Jakob, 207, 217, 273. Gubernatis, Angelo de, 273, 466. Guigniaut, 135, 209, 214, 486. Giinther, S., 310. Hackel, E., 35, 296, 305, 326, 376, 407. , Haliburton, R. G., 240. Hall, Capt., 83. Hamy, 443. Hardy, Spence, 131. ij, 199. ao9i 344. 357' I. II., 235. ., 4>7.4i8. 87. I 20, 205. !5S. 270, 348, 487. r, 38, 333. ^5^• !^, 270. 271. 85. l6g, 264. ' 390, 3951396,407. 80. 2M.306. 349»36i. ^ Jr.. 277. 1, 485- »3. » 381, 39a. «. 358. 4,90. |4S. 346, 348. I, 60, 89, 91, 293. I- ;., 469. 5a. 336, 45i> 470. 47«' 42. ". 377- !4r, 244, 258, 357. I 287, 288. 7- ». I4S» 165, 245. 30, 43, 161, 250, 256- >S-467- 7. 217, 273- 10 de, 273, 466. 19, 214, 486. 16, 305, 326, 376, 407. ., 240. II' Harknew, ao, Henderson,' ^^; S'^"'". 339, 477. ■Mesiod. 2ee ..- /A»^^ O/- ^t.7»o/..s-. uSot'i".397. 499 SI.']' ^•. 82. xlofer, 38. -.429, 468-4S7.' '^^' '^'' 3.9. 328-36?: Hooker, Sir /osenh ss ' Huet liishop^, 2,P''' *8-9i. 296, 324. Humbo dt. 60 ,,Q Hume,DavS:3l''f76. feT/i^k^^^ ''''^^'^'^'^''• Hyde,A.B"•'37i• Hyginus, 3,;',^g57. Ihn'^''' ^52. 256. '"ne, 348. isaiah, 225. Isidore, Saint, 4. Juvenal, 281 "•''■ «6i. ifif I Lanman, C. R., ... J-T-tet, llouis, 293."* Latini, Urunet o. ,00 Lauer, T. r ,,, ^^' Lawrence, r'., ^'' »'• Le Contt, 95. ^emaire, 236 {.enisfroni, 68 Lcnormant, Franfo?. -„ '2o, 127, ,,, / u ''i '65--7r''.8^t',V;';i' 237. 240, /;>. ..." ,'<■• ^'<-». 231, i-.\ Letronne, ,92. L.chtenberg, 26. Lilt a' '". 484. Livingsto'neftja^,V:!'"9'''"'- LK'ck^,l'l;7-,, i^£?^lr» Lutwin, 250. ' ^•5' 304. 2FI^;3j;;;';r329,33o.334.339. If :„ ' Heinrich, 211. Kjellman, 321. ^'ee, Frdddrik „ s 246. Klopstock, 84 Knox, Thos. W., .«, ivoeppen. C p ^^' i'Pen, c. F,, 13,, ,75^ „^ Maedler, 195. Mapnusen, Finn, ^ , Maine, Sir H. S ,8^ Major, R H „ ' •'^S- Mallet, ?;7f-,9"»37. Man, E. ri'.. ,V', Manetho, 28V, Alanilius, •^ , ," Mannhr.rd VV > Mason, 48a. ^ feet'G^X'^^. '78.223,484,485. ^270, 272, 276. ' ^50, 259, 263, 265* Matthews U^ , ^* Maundevile y?''='7S. Maury.L j'^^?'2^3,227,26o. Maury, Matthew F.'',t^ '♦83. ■j. . 500 INDEX OF AUTHORS. McClintock and Strong, 23, 25, 204, 350. McCormick, R., 322: McLennan, D., 393. McLennan, J. K., 393-3971 4"' Minard, Joachim, 168. Menzel, W., 135, 145, 146, 158, 167, 187, 202, 207, 223, 264, 270, 276, 480, 483. Merrill, Selah, 226. Merriinan, Mansfield, 323. Merry, 352.353; Metchnilcuii, Leon, 141. Michelant, 228, 232. MiddendorfE, von, 297, 298. Middleton, Popsey, 485. Mill, J. S.. 46, 50, 316. Miller, O. D., 30, 145, 163, 171, 210,339, 230. Milton, John, 196, 197. Moerenhout, 401, Moffat, J. C, 432. Montfaucon, 306. Moreno, F. P., 91. Morris, Lewis, 487. Mortillet, 84, 372, 407, 411. Morton, S. G., 33. Moseley, H. N.,320. Moses, 82, 287, 432. Mousket, Ph., 232. Movers, 212. Muir, W., 149, 153, 355, 482, 483. Miiller, Friedrich, 100. Muller, F. Max, 247, 37<>-37': Vfi% 4*3. ,455. 461.4921 493- Muller, K. O., 214, 352. Murchison, Sir R., 21, Murray, John, 232. Nadaillac, 85, 185, 297. Naville, 179. Newcomb, Simon, 117. Newman, J. P., 21. Newton, Sir Isaac, 81, 82. Nicholson, Alleyne, 285, aS6, 288-391, 295- Niebuhr, 214. Nitzsch, G. W., 477. Noeldeke, Theodor, 40. Noird, 376, 395. Nonnos, 237, 271. Nordenskjbld, 63, 71, 73, 397-399, 491. Nott and Gliddon, 33. Novo y Colson, Pedro de, 186. Obry, 12, 28, 30, 38, 230, 269, 486. Ongen, 234. Orton, James, 94. Ovid, 280, 282. Packard, A. S., 95, 320. Packard, L. R., 352, 450. Packard, W. A., 453. Palaifatos, 200. Paley F. A., 118,324,342,356- Pastellus, 48. Paterson, J. D., 185. Pauly, 342. Pausanms, 30, 174, 334. Payer, Lieut., 62. Peabody, A. P., 456. Peet, S. D., 453. Penka, Karl, 162. Penn, Granville, 28. Perrot, G., 229. Perry, E. D., 257. Peschel, O., 34, 35, 276, 376. Petronius, 377. Pfau, 342. Pherecydes, 187, 266, 267, 371, 355. Philo, 23. Philo of Byblos, 187, 326. Pictet, A., 341. Pierret, 219. Pietrement, 161, 380. Pirn, Capt. Bedford, 64. Pinches, T. G., 169, 222. Pindar, 22, 145, 185, 234, 238, 300. Piper, Ferdinand, 232, 273. Piato, 145, 158, 160, 181, 184, 195, 313, 225, 238, 256, 279, 281, 282, 297, 350, 419, 422, 424-432. Pliny, 28, 136, 297. Ploix, Ch.,328. Plutarch, 20, 182, 209. Poole, Matthew, 205. Poole, R. S., 484. Porphyrins, 478. Post, Edwin, 456. Pougens, C, 97. Powell, 158. Preller, L., 182, 256, 271, 34a. 3SO-3Sa» 355. 467. 476. 477- Pressel, E., 25. Pressense, Eduard de, 313, 363. Pritchard, 376. Proctor, Richard A., 193. Pythagoras, 193. Quatrefages, 34. 36. 97, 98, 37S, 385. Rafinesque, 161. Rambosson, 60. Rau, C, 408. Rawlinson, Geo., 155, 300. Reclus, E., 408. Reed, Sir Edward J., 140, 315. Resell, 213. Rem, J. J., 246. Renan, £., 38, 183. Renouf, P. Le Page, 210, 265, 266. R^ville, A., 263, 27s, 358, 386. Reynaud, 228, 232. Rhode, 160. Riddell, 352, 353. Rinck, W. F., 270, 341, 468. Ritter, Carl, 133, 154, 244. Rive, M. de la, 68. Robiou, F^lix, 470. Rochas, A. de, 407. Ronchand, Louis de, 267, Roskoff, 386. Rosny, Lion de, 140, 315. SjBwulf, Bishop, 227. Saint Vincent, Bory de, 186. 4S6. a8. ISi 276, 376. 266, 267, 271, 355. 187, 326, iSo. >rd, 64. 69, 222. 851 234» 238, 300. , 232, 273. 160, 181, 184, 19s, 213, 79> 281, 282, 297, 350, 12. 209. 205. «S6, 271, 343. 3SO-3S2* i de, 313, 363. A., 193. 6. 97. 98, 37S» 385. »SS. 300. I J., 140, 215. 3- ge, 210, 265,266. 75, 358. 386. », 341. 468. 154. 244- }. de, 267, 140,215. ■27. ry de, 186. aanchoniathon, 187 ^aporta, Marquis Ha .^ Sa?^ce,^'ri?'i-t'4?/.^^'««'--3, o 389. 45i. 485.^ '"'•'"' ^4°' '57, 264, Schafer, H. \V., 48, Sc hJiemann, H ,6n Schoolcraft, H. R.'/Zis Schrader, O, ,61: ' '♦^• f<^^bele;,'3a."°""93. Schulthess, ,45. Scudder?4i9"'^'°"> '°^' "^4- |e"a«, 38, 26s, 27,. ijhome, 460. Siouffi,,7,,2 Skelton, AleYan/i'" Smith. Geor?e?,t6'?6i-, Socrates, 23I. ' "^' '69, 240, 257. |j^"«haJl, 4^;. sSr A"''"«'^'"' '''' ''°' '''' ^^^ SpiIler.'philipf5''5^''98,2S4.268. Stanley, VV. K, si. Stedman, Edmund C ,„ I'^en. A. S., 68. ''^•'^'J. Stehel.n, 209. gtephanus, 183. ff^fett, 480. ^tiJlmann, W. r ,r« Stockwell, G A ■',^^'- i«K' S^' J- '61. Siiidas, 200. ^ "^' 7- Sunus, Bernard. 227 Synimachus, 26 '" symmes, 84. r^DEX OF AVmoKS. SOI ^opinard, 297, 3,5 Trouessart, m'/A „ T, 407/ 408, 4^2.^°' '^' 3^9, 374, 400, 4or, Tynus, Maximus, X36. Kkert, 1,7. ^"ger, 39, ,86, 305, VanVleck,J. M aa Vernon,% '^^'vv '• =8,, ^g^. V^'cke^i^'.^^^'^-. 438 340-342, 344, 346.^f,^^'/7t, 333, 336, ^^r:^i\^t^k^lol' '''' 355. 467; •■'•"•'"7,349,476,48a Talbot, Fox, 47t Tennyson, 47/^ Jf^'es, ,93. Se^dot.'Jn,^/^"'"^' '»53. |heopomp„s, i,s,. Wallace. A p Werr^^'^-'- '''''^'^^•^^"'" WJi J- ^36, 256, 353. 354. ^est, E. W ,7. Wetzer and WeltP ''^' '^' '9^' *«, 25a. Whitney. W n '' WiIfor?',8 ,^:'4S^- ,^f'> 46 f' "'' '''' '"' '«4. 229. 236. Wilkinson sr/'r, ■*?.'• ^58. Wincheil, Alex ,t ' '^9, 464. Windischmann;',^/8' 'L^^' 'J' ^' 99- 258 268, 269.' ^^' '^' '96, 2S2, 253, Winslovv, C P »« .^l".C..'237. •'^°"95. ^'tte, 308 Wolf, F. A ..rf. fejt-T,-^-'^"- Wnght, W. A ,32 '• Vule, Col. H.,'2^1: I Jaborowski, q7-"3. 3'7-32S- Lingam, 401. Link, the missing, uo. Literature, ancient, study of, 326-361. Livingstone, David, in search of Eden, 22. Loadstone rock or castle, the magnetic Pole, 14, IS, 16, 276. Also Tylor's Primitive Culture. Lost arts in Homer's day, 329. Luther on location of Eden^ 25, 304. Lycopods, size of antediluvian, 285. Macrobii, 403. Magnetism, terrestrial, 52, 68, 253, ji ;. Mahabhdrata, the, cited, 186, 319, 482. Man-beast, Caspari's, 37S, 379. Mankind, Origin of, 33-43, iio-n2, 437- 449. Man's power over Nature, 314, 416-418. Mediaeval cosmography, 305-309. Mediaeval ideas of Paradise, 13, 308. Memory, power of, 492-494. Meroe, 236. Meropes, 183. Mem, mount of the gods, 42, 129, 148, ISO, IS4, 229, 259i 275. .461, 462. Mesopotamia, Eden not m, 27-31. Mexican Paradise, 260 ; earth-navel, 247. Milky Way, the, 156, 269, 479. Miqqedem. See Kedem. Mixteque cosmogony, 201, 3s8. Moon's orbit and Paradise, 8, 24, 258, 259, 304. Morgue la F^e, 15-19. Mother-region of plants, 87-92; of ani- mals, 93-96; of men, 97-iot, 437-449. Mountain of the World, 122-137. Movement of the sun, 329-332. Mystery and charm of the Arctic regions, 325- Myth, Eden story a, 25, 26. Mythology, comparativcj 48, et passim. Myths of the Greeks, origin, 326. Naga, 260. " Nail " of the old astronomers, 175. Navel of heaven, 202-218. Navel of the Earth, 51, 146, 147, 153, IS4, IS7. 168, 170, 180, 187, 225-249, ^ 335. 3SOt 354- Nebular Hypothesis, the, 59. Night and day, one year, 50, 197-201. Night skies of Eden, 68. Nipple of the Earth, 42, 307, 43S» 436. North, Avalon in the, 12 ; highest part of the world, 122, 151, 153, i68, 204; nearest the sky, 187, 214, 247; the sacred quarter, 202,218; "where God dolh work," 205, 217. Northern Light. See Aurora Borealis. Nysa, 145, 172, 202, 480. ^ Ocean in the Veda, 328. Odyssey, true idea of the, 122. Oger visits Paradise, 13-19- Ogygia, 236, 335, 336, 359. Olympos, 212, 338-350- Omphalos of the Earth. See Navel of the Earth. Origin of mankind. See Mankind. Palm, the holy, 270. Pamir, the plateau of, 36. Paradise, celestial, 9, 24; terrestrial, 3- 22 ; the two connected by the world- pillar, 145, 146; a mountain, 4, 8, 24, etc. ; how connected with the moon, 8, 24, 258, 304; inaccessible, 2, 4, 7, 22, 432 ; its restoration promised, 458 ; wall of, 7 <',i78. Patriarchal . ^ stem, 393, 424-431 ; Church, 432 • Pelion upon Ossa, 339, 341. Peplos of Harmonia, 266. Persea, the sacred, 266. Phallic worship, 381, 401. Philolaos, cosmos of, 212. Philology, supposed ev.. nee of, 37. Phoenician mountain of the gods, 212. Physics, terrestrial, 57-82, 3J3-32S- Polar research, latest, 487-491. Pole, immovable, 195. Pole, the magnetic, 14, 16. Pole star, 125, 146, 171, 192,216, 217. Pole stars, two, 130. Polocentric maps, 154, 159; zones, 95, 106. Polyptych Olympos, 349, 330. Polytheism, the primary religion accord- ing toHume, 364-368. Posture in prayer, 129, 202-218, 303. Prester John's kingdom, 8. Primitive monotheism, 362-406. Puranic geography, 148-154,240. Pyramids of Egypt, 209, 215. Qereb of the Earth, Ps. Ixxiv. 12. See Navel of the Earth. Quadrifurcate River, the, 51, 250-260. Quarter, the sacred, 51, 202-224. Rainbow, 155, 156, 158, 269. Ramayana, ideas of the, 149, 480. Raphael, the Angel, 20. Reed, the cosmic, 275, 355. Refrigeration of the Earth, 59. Religionless tribes unknown, 375, 385. Revelation, primitive, 404, 405. Rig Veda, 210, 211, 241, 242, 243. Rishisj the seven, 153, igo, 209, 211. River in the air, 52, 250-261. River of Death, 31. River of Life, 31, 152, 153. Rivers of Paradise, 3, 8, 24, 27, 39, 51, 52, 127, 128, 130, 133, 134. 136, i44» 152, 171, 170, 186, 250-261. Rivers of the Underworld, 31, 255. Roof-pillar, Earth's axis as, 140, 265. Root of the World, 165. Rope of the World, 31. Ru, the Polynesian Atlas, 158. \ ^' dise, 13-19. ' > 336, 359- 18-350. s Earth. See Navel of tid. See Mankind. 270. lu of, 36. ial, 9, 24; terrestrial, 3- :onnected by the world- ; a mountain, 4, 8, 24, inected with the moon, 4; inaccessible, 2, 4, 7, storation promised, 458 ; •n. 393t 424-431 ; Church, ia..339. 34I. ama, 266. ;d, 266. 38«. 401- IS of, 212. )sed ev.. nee of, 37. itain of the gods, 2ia. lal, 57-82, 313-325. atest, 487-491. ..J95- tic, 14, 16. 6, 171, 192,216, 217. 130. 'S) 154. '59; zones, 95, pos, 349, 350. _ primary religion accord- 364-368. r, 129, 202-218, 303. ingdom, 8. heism, 362-406. hy, 148-154,240. 'pt, 209, 215. arth, Ps. Ixxiv. 12. See Earth. iver, the, 51, 250-260. ed, 51, 202-224. ;6, 158, 269. \ of the, 149, 480. gel, 20. ■■1 275) 355' ;he Earth, 59. ;s unknown, 375, 385. itive, 404, 405. II, 241, 242, 243. , 153, igo, 209, 211. 52, 250-261. 51- . 152. 153- se, 3, 8, 24, 27, 39, 51, '3°, 133. >34» 136, I44» 86, 250-261. derworld, 31, 255. I's axis as, 140, 265. d, 165. Id, 31. \xi Atlas, 158. Satan, ho^ locaS^fhe n''^^3S673S7. Savagery not primitive ,8^°"'^' ='°7- Sequoia, the, of ArrV^^ ^?''r392, 423- sSnofein-'otir^^^^-''- Sion.the!girof"'8';»^7-449. ^.309. °'' '38. 144, 145, 232, 308, ls,';2';p°'--'77.42i. |5^St^^ -3-467. l^lSS? "°' ^^^' - Southward sprea li*' ^7- Sun-myths, 403, .g^ Strtvi1-.«.i;__ t *-M '^fi>ex OF sveyecTs. S05 iotemism, 37]. 'E.t "'»»■■«. 358, „,p,„. ^ ree of Life i , 257, 262-278 .'^? (S'- 'i^^' MS, 154, 24, Twih-ghrrhrerzL'?L°%^3°-««-. (compare S. i\levn'^^' ?' 'variable Cyclopedia, vSlTv^rJr^s'J,,-^"'^"-'^'^ ^,^^. Supreme God of the Finns. ,,3. ,'^S'fe^?^'^^^-''. SeeA^...,,/ U"'ty of the human race. 33. Vnr;'„r ""^^i Paradise in ,. VolkerpsychoJogie,376, ""'•suKa, 180. — "' ^3- ''stS&^r^p'ir 30, 225-248. TSSr';^,r2"-.«8. Taf r,:ii ' 73. 208. iat-piJlar, 173, jg., ?f'^&onos, 332. ^ ^^e^t''-"---'7-i38;ofHo- 5f'3S.^'^"^P-^«'^f-n.an.ountain- SSVLfSi^nt^^i^,' '97-.OX. Vosemite trees 287 "^78. 466. Youth renewed. 97;8. lis?' '38. 230, 259. Zoology, paieontXgical. 48, 93-^